Planet Technology Ip Dslam Idl 2400 Users Manual EM IDLv1

IDL-2401 to the manual 8631192e-a466-4cc6-bcec-484f23328d9b

2015-02-06

: Planet-Technology Planet-Technology-Ip-Dslam-Idl-2400-Users-Manual-519024 planet-technology-ip-dslam-idl-2400-users-manual-519024 planet-technology pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 707

DownloadPlanet-Technology Planet-Technology-Ip-Dslam-Idl-2400-Users-Manual- EM-IDLv1 Planet-technology-ip-dslam-idl-2400-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
IP DSLAM
IDL-2400 / IDL-2401
IDL-4800 / IDL-4801

User’s Manual

Copyright
Copyright (C) 2007 PLANET Technology Corp. All rights reserved.
The products and programs described in this User’s Manual are licensed products of PLANET
Technology, This User’s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright, and this
User’s Manual and all accompanying hardware, software, and documentation are copyrighted.
No part of this User’s Manual may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to
any electronic medium or machine-readable form by any means by electronic or mechanical.
Including photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose
other than the purchaser's personal use, and without the prior express written permission of
PLANET Technology.
Disclaimer
PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and
applications, and makes no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect
to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose.
PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User’s Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims
liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred.
Information in this User’s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that
may be contained in this User’s Manual. PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current
the information in this User’s Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to this User’s
Manual and/or to the products described in this User’s Manual, at any time without notice.
If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would
appreciate your comments and suggestions.
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE mark Warning
The is a class A device, In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Trademarks
The PLANET logo is a trademark of PLANET Technology. This documentation may refer to
numerous hardware and software products by their trade names. In most, if not all cases, these
designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective companies.
WEEE Warning
To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of
the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end
users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the
crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal
waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.
Revision
User’s Manual for PLANET IP DSLAM
Model: IDL-2400/2401/4800/4801
Rev: 1.0
Part No.: EM-IDLv1

2

IDL series User Guide

Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................................................................................................ 24
1.1 Package Contents................................................................................................. 24
1.2 Features................................................................................................................ 25
1.3 Application............................................................................................................. 25
1.4 Outlook.................................................................................................................. 26
1.4.1 Front Panel ............................................................................................... 27
1.4.2 Rear Panel................................................................................................ 28
1.5 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................ 29
1.5.1 Hardware Specifications ........................................................................... 29
1.5.2 Software Specifications............................................................................. 30
2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 32
2.1 Safety Instruction .................................................................................................. 32
2.2 Hardware Installation ............................................................................................ 33
2.2.1 System Requirements .............................................................................. 33
2.2.2 Rear Panel Connection ............................................................................ 33
2.2.3 Front Panel Connection ............................................................................ 34
2.3 IDL Manager Installation ....................................................................................... 35
2.3.1 System Requirements .............................................................................. 35
2.3.2 Installing IDL Manager .............................................................................. 35
2.3.3 Starting IDL Manager................................................................................ 37
2.4 IDL Manager Functions ......................................................................................... 38
2.4.1 Session..................................................................................................... 38
2.4.1.1 Logout ...........................................................................................................38
2.4.1.2 Exit ................................................................................................................38

2.4.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 39
2.4.2.1 Environment Options.....................................................................................39
2.4.2.2 Territory Manager ..........................................................................................42
2.4.2.3 Agent Manager..............................................................................................44
2.4.2.4 Telnet.............................................................................................................46
2.4.2.5 PING .............................................................................................................47
2.4.2.6 User Manager ...............................................................................................48

2.4.3 Windows ................................................................................................... 51
2.4.3.1 Cascade........................................................................................................51
2.4.3.2 Next Window .................................................................................................51
2.4.3.3 Previous Window ..........................................................................................51
2.4.3.4 Arrange Icons ................................................................................................52

2.4.4 Help .......................................................................................................... 52
2.4.4.1 About.............................................................................................................52

3. IDL Manager Management ........................................................................................ 53
3.1 Agent Desktop....................................................................................................... 53
3.1.1 Agent Desktop Window ............................................................................ 53

IP DSLAM

3

3.1.2 Mounted Agent Desktop ........................................................................... 54
3.2 Active Function Management Windows ................................................................ 55
3.2.1 Function List Window ............................................................................... 55
3.2.2 Front Panel Status Window ...................................................................... 56
3.3 Default Setting ...................................................................................................... 56
3.4 System Information ............................................................................................... 57
3.5 Current Event ........................................................................................................ 58
3.5.1 Outstanding Event .................................................................................... 58
3.5.2 Closed Event ............................................................................................ 59
3.5.3 Archived.................................................................................................... 60
3.6 System .................................................................................................................. 61
3.6.1 Commit and Reboot.................................................................................. 61
3.7 Configuration......................................................................................................... 62
3.7.1 VLAN ........................................................................................................ 62
3.7.2 Ethernet .................................................................................................... 63
3.8 DSL ....................................................................................................................... 65
3.8.1 Profile ....................................................................................................... 65
3.8.1.1 Line Profile ....................................................................................................65
3.8.1.2 Alarm Profile..................................................................................................66
3.8.1.3 All Line Profile ...............................................................................................67

3.8.2 Port Config................................................................................................ 67
3.9 DSL PM................................................................................................................. 70
3.9.1 Physical Layer Info ................................................................................... 70
3.9.2 Channel Layer Info ................................................................................... 71
4. Application Note ........................................................................................................ 72
4.1 Basic Configuration ............................................................................................... 72
4.1.1 Create a new user .................................................................................... 72
4.1.2 FD.cfg Configuration................................................................................. 72
4.1.2.1 Contents of FD.cfg ........................................................................................73
4.1.2.2 Download procedure ..................................................................................... 74

4.1.3 How to create myconfig.cfg ...................................................................... 78
4.1.3.1 TFTP Server Configuration ...........................................................................78
4.1.3.2 myconfig.cfg Configuration............................................................................ 79
4.1.3.3 Format of myconfig.cfg.................................................................................. 80

4.1.4 Line Rate Configuration ............................................................................ 81
4.1.4.1 Configuration.................................................................................................82

4.1.5 Set System Time ...................................................................................... 87
4.1.5.1 Configuration.................................................................................................87

4.1.6 VLAN Configuration.................................................................................. 91
4.1.6.1 Configuration.................................................................................................91

4.1.7 Modify the Downstream/Upstream Rate ................................................... 98

4

IDL series User Guide

4.1.7.1 Configuration.................................................................................................98

4.1.8 Enable SNMP Function .......................................................................... 105
4.1.8.1 Configuration...............................................................................................105

5. System Administration with CLI ............................................................................. 106
5.1 About CLI Administration..................................................................................... 106
5.1.1 Notation Conventions ............................................................................. 106
5.1.2 Command Structure................................................................................ 106
5.1.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms ........................................................... 107
5.1.4 CLI Command Brief Description ............................................................. 108
5.1.5 Categories of the CLI commands ........................................................... 109
5.2 802.1p commands................................................................................................114
5.2.1 Bridge port accessprio Commands..........................................................114
5.2.1.1 Get bridge port accessprio .......................................................................... 114

5.2.2 Bridge port prioinfo Commands ...............................................................115
5.2.2.1 Get bridge port prioinfo ............................................................................... 115
5.2.2.2 Modify bridge port prioinfo........................................................................... 115

5.2.3 Bridge port trfclassmap Commands ........................................................117
5.2.3.1 Get bridge port trfclassmap......................................................................... 117
5.2.3.2 Modify bridge port trfclassmap .................................................................... 117

5.2.4 Bridge port priomap Commands..............................................................119
5.2.4.1 Get bridge port priomap .............................................................................. 119
5.2.4.2 Modify bridge port priomap ......................................................................... 119

5.3 ABOND Commands ............................................................................................ 121
5.3.1 ABOND group intf Commands................................................................ 121
5.3.1.1 Get abond group intf ................................................................................... 121
5.3.1.2 Create abond group intf .............................................................................. 121
5.3.1.3 Delete abond group intf...............................................................................121
5.3.1.4 Modify abond group intf...............................................................................122

5.3.2 ABOND group stats Commands ............................................................. 126
5.3.2.1 Get abond group stats.................................................................................126
5.3.2.2 Reset abond group stats .............................................................................126

5.3.3 ABOND link entry Commands ................................................................ 128
5.3.3.1 Get abond link entry ....................................................................................128
5.3.3.2 Create abond link entry ...............................................................................128
5.3.3.3 Delete abond link entry ...............................................................................128
5.3.3.4 Modify abond link entry ............................................................................... 128

5.3.4 ABOND link stats Commands................................................................. 131
5.3.4.1 Get abond link stats ....................................................................................131
5.3.4.2 Reset abond link stats.................................................................................131

5.4 Aggregation commands ...................................................................................... 132
5.4.1 Active Standby aggr info Commands...................................................... 132

IP DSLAM

5

5.4.1.1 Get actstdby aggr info .................................................................................132
5.4.1.2 Modify actstdby aggr info ............................................................................132

5.4.2 Aggr info Commands .............................................................................. 134
5.4.2.1 Get aggr intf ................................................................................................134
5.4.2.2 Create aggr intf ...........................................................................................134
5.4.2.3 Delete aggr intf............................................................................................134
5.4.2.4 Modify aggr intf............................................................................................134

5.4.3 LACP Aggr Commands........................................................................... 138
5.4.3.1 Get lacp aggr ..............................................................................................138
5.4.3.2 Create lacp aggr ......................................................................................... 138
5.4.3.3 Delete lacp aggr..........................................................................................139
5.4.3.4 Delete lacp aggr..........................................................................................139

5.4.4 LACP AGGRPort Info Commands .......................................................... 142
5.4.4.1 Get aggrport info .........................................................................................142
5.4.4.2 Modify lacp aggrport info............................................................................. 142

5.4.5 LACP AGGRPort List Commands .......................................................... 146
5.4.5.1 Get lacp aggrport list ...................................................................................146

5.4.6 LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands ........................................................ 147
5.4.6.1 Get lacp aggrport stats................................................................................147
5.4.6.2 Reset lacp aggrport stats ............................................................................147

5.4.7 Redundancy aggr info Commands ......................................................... 148
5.4.7.1 Get rdncy aggr info .....................................................................................148
5.4.7.2 Create rdncy aggr info ................................................................................149
5.4.7.3 Delete rdncy aggr info ................................................................................. 149
5.4.7.4 Modify rdncy aggr info................................................................................. 149

5.4.8 Redundancy aggrport list Commands .................................................... 151
5.4.8.1 Get aggrport list ..........................................................................................151

5.4.9 Redundancy aggr stats Commands........................................................ 152
5.4.9.1 Get rdncy aggr stats....................................................................................152
5.4.9.2 Reset rdncy aggr stats ................................................................................ 152

5.5 ATM commands .................................................................................................. 154
5.5.1 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands............................................................... 154
5.5.1.1 Get atm aal5 stats .......................................................................................154

5.5.2 ATM OAM CC Commands...................................................................... 155
5.5.2.1 Get oam cc vc .............................................................................................155
5.5.2.2 Modify oam cc vc ........................................................................................ 155

5.5.3 ATM OAM Loopback Commands ........................................................... 157
5.5.3.1 Get oam lpbk vc .......................................................................................... 157
5.5.3.2 Modify oam lpbk vc ..................................................................................... 157

5.5.4 ATM Port Commands.............................................................................. 158
5.5.4.1 Get atm port ................................................................................................ 158

6

IDL series User Guide

5.5.4.2 Create atm port ........................................................................................... 158
5.5.4.3 Delete atm port ...........................................................................................159
5.5.4.4 Modify atm port ........................................................................................... 159

5.5.5 ATM VC Commands ............................................................................... 163
5.5.5.1 Create atm vc intf ........................................................................................ 163
5.5.5.2 Delete atm vc intf ........................................................................................163
5.5.5.3 Get atm vc intf ............................................................................................. 163
5.5.5.4 Modify atm vc intf ........................................................................................ 164

5.5.6 ATM VC Statistics Commands ................................................................ 171
5.5.6.1 Get atm vc stats ..........................................................................................171

5.6 Bridging Commands............................................................................................ 173
5.6.1 Bridge forwarding Commands ................................................................ 173
5.6.1.1 Get bridge forwarding .................................................................................173
5.6.1.2 Delete bridge forwarding .............................................................................173

5.6.2 Bridge Mode Commands ........................................................................ 175
5.6.2.1 Get bridge mode .........................................................................................175

5.6.3 Bridge Port Cap Commands................................................................... 176
5.6.3.1 Get bridge port cap .....................................................................................176

5.6.4 Bridge port forwarding Commands ......................................................... 177
5.6.4.1 Get bridge port forwarding .......................................................................... 177
5.6.4.2 Delete bridge port forwarding...................................................................... 177

5.6.5 Bridge Port Map Commands .................................................................. 179
5.6.5.1 Get bridge port map ....................................................................................179
5.6.5.2 Create bridge port map ...............................................................................179
5.6.5.3 Delete bridge port map ...............................................................................179

5.6.6 Bridge Port Starts Table Commands....................................................... 181
5.6.6.1 Get bridge port stats.................................................................................... 181
5.6.6.2 Reset bridge port stats ................................................................................181

5.6.7 Bridge Port Table Commands................................................................. 182
5.6.7.1 Create bridge port intf ................................................................................. 182
5.6.7.2 Delete bridge port intf.................................................................................. 182
5.6.7.3 Get bridge port intf ......................................................................................183
5.6.7.4 Modify bridge port intf..................................................................................183

5.6.8 Bridge static mcast Commands .............................................................. 189
5.6.8.1 Get bridge static mcast ...............................................................................189
5.6.8.2 Create bridge static mcast ..........................................................................189
5.6.8.3 Delete bridge static mcast...........................................................................189
5.6.8.4 Modify bridge static mcast...........................................................................189

5.6.9 Bridge static ucast Commands ............................................................... 192
5.6.9.1 Get bridge static ucast ................................................................................192
5.6.9.2 Create bridge static ucast ...........................................................................192

IP DSLAM

7

5.6.9.3 Delete bridge static ucast............................................................................192
5.6.9.4 Modify bridge static ucast............................................................................ 193

5.6.10 Bridge tbg traps Commands ................................................................. 195
5.6.10.1 Get bridge tbg traps .................................................................................. 195
5.6.10.2 Modify bridge tbg traps..............................................................................195

5.6.11 GARP Port Info Commands .................................................................. 197
5.6.11.1 Get garp port info ......................................................................................197
5.6.11.2 Modify garp port info.................................................................................. 197

5.6.12 STP Group Commands ........................................................................ 198
5.6.12.1 Get stp info................................................................................................198
5.6.12.2 Modify stp info ...........................................................................................198
5.6.12.3 Reset stp stats ..........................................................................................199

5.6.13 STP Port Commands............................................................................ 202
5.6.13.1 Get stp port ...............................................................................................202
5.6.13.2 Modify stp port ..........................................................................................202
5.6.13.3 Reset stp port stats ...................................................................................202

5.6.14 Transparent Bridging Table Commands................................................ 205
5.6.14.1 Modify bridge tbg info................................................................................205
5.6.14.2 Get Bridge tbg info ....................................................................................205

5.7 Bridge Multicast Commands ............................................................................... 210
5.7.1 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands...................................................... 210
5.7.1.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding ....................................................................... 210
5.7.1.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdall..........................................................................210

5.7.2 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands...................................................... 212
5.7.2.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding ....................................................................... 212

5.7.3 Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands........................................................ 214
5.7.3.1 Get bridge mcast fwdunreg ......................................................................... 214
5.7.3.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdunreg ....................................................................214

5.7.4 Bridge Static Multicast Commands ......................................................... 216
5.7.4.1 Create bridge static mcast ..........................................................................216
5.7.4.2 Delete bridge static mcast...........................................................................216
5.7.4.3 Get bridge static mcast ...............................................................................216
5.7.4.4 Modify bridge static mcast...........................................................................217

5.8 DHCP Commands............................................................................................... 220
5.8.1 DHCP Client Commands ........................................................................ 220
5.8.1.1 Get dhcp client info .....................................................................................220
5.8.1.2 Get dhcp client stats....................................................................................221

5.9 DSL Commands.................................................................................................. 223
5.9.1 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands .............................................................. 223
5.9.1.1 Get adsl alarm profile .................................................................................. 223
5.9.1.2 Modify adsl alarm profile .............................................................................223

8

IDL series User Guide

5.9.2 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands ........................................................... 229
5.9.2.1 Get adsl alarm profilext ............................................................................... 229
5.9.2.2 Modify adsl alarm profilext .......................................................................... 229

5.9.3 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands........................................................... 236
5.9.3.1 Get adsl atuc channel .................................................................................236

5.9.4 ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands ......................................................... 238
5.9.4.1 Get adsl atuc chanperf ................................................................................238

5.9.5 ADSL ATUC Chanlntvl Commands ......................................................... 241
5.9.5.1 Get adsl atuc chanintvl................................................................................ 241

5.9.6 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands ............................................................ 242
5.9.6.1 Get adsl atuc interval .................................................................................. 242

5.9.7 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands ................................................................. 244
5.9.7.1 Get adsl atuc perf........................................................................................ 244

5.9.8 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands........................................................... 247
5.9.8.1 Get adsl atuc physical .................................................................................247

5.9.9 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands................................................................. 254
5.9.9.1 Get adsl atuc traps ...................................................................................... 254

5.9.10 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands ........................................................ 255
5.9.10.1 Get adsl atuc trapsext ............................................................................... 255

5.9.11 ADSL ATUR Chanlntrvl Commands ...................................................... 256
5.9.11.1 Get adsl atuc chanintrvl.............................................................................256

5.9.12 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands......................................................... 257
5.9.12.1 Get adsl atur channel ................................................................................257

5.9.13 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands ....................................................... 260
5.9.13.1 Get adsl atur chanperf ..............................................................................260

5.9.14 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands .......................................................... 263
5.9.14.1 Get adsl atur interval .................................................................................263

5.9.15 Adsl atur intervalext Commands ........................................................... 264
5.9.15.1 Get adsl atur intervalext ............................................................................264

5.9.16 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands ............................................................... 265
5.9.16.1 Get adsl atur perf ...................................................................................... 265

5.9.17 Adsl atur perfext Commands ................................................................ 266
5.9.17.1 Get adsl atur perfext .................................................................................266

5.9.18 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands......................................................... 268
5.9.18.1 Get adsl atur physical................................................................................268

5.9.19 ADSL ATUR Traps Commands ............................................................. 272
5.9.19.1 Get adsl atur traps.....................................................................................272

5.9.20 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands ........................................................ 273
5.9.20.1 Get adsl atur trapsext................................................................................273

5.9.21 ADSL Cap Commands.......................................................................... 275
5.9.21.1 Get adsl cap..............................................................................................275

IP DSLAM

9

5.9.22 ADSL Line Intf Commands.................................................................... 276
5.9.22.1 Get adsl line intf ........................................................................................276
5.9.22.2 Modify adsl line intf.................................................................................... 276

5.9.23 ADSL Line Profile Commands .............................................................. 280
5.9.23.1 Get adsl line profile ...................................................................................280
5.9.23.2 Modify adsl line profile...............................................................................280

5.9.24 Dsl chip Commands ............................................................................. 303
5.9.24.1 Get adsl chip .............................................................................................303
5.9.24.2 Create dsl chip ..........................................................................................303
5.9.24.3 Delete dsl chip ..........................................................................................304

5.9.25 Dsl dsp chip Commands....................................................................... 306
5.9.25.1 Get dsl dsp chip ........................................................................................306
5.9.25.2 Reset dsl dsp chip.....................................................................................306

5.9.26 Dsl dsp port Commands ....................................................................... 307
5.9.26.1 Get dsl dsp port.........................................................................................307
5.9.26.2 Reset dsl dsp port .....................................................................................307

5.9.27 Dsl system Commands......................................................................... 308
5.9.27.1 Get dsl system ..........................................................................................308
5.9.27.2 Create dsl system ..................................................................................... 308
5.9.27.3 Delete dsl system......................................................................................309

5.10 EHDLC Commands............................................................................................311
5.10.1 Ehdlc intf Commands.............................................................................311
5.10.1.1 Get ehdlc intf ............................................................................................. 311
5.10.1.2 Create ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311
5.10.1.3 Delete ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311
5.10.1.4 Modify ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311

5.11 Ethemet Commands.......................................................................................... 313
5.11.1 Dot3 stats Commands .......................................................................... 313
5.11.1.1 Get dot3 stats ............................................................................................313

5.11.2 Ethernet Commands ............................................................................. 318
5.11.2.1 Create ethernet intf.................................................................................... 318
5.11.2.2 Delete ethernet intf .................................................................................... 318
5.11.2.3 Get ethernet intf.........................................................................................318
5.11.2.4 Modify ethernet intf.................................................................................... 318

5.12 EOA Commands ............................................................................................... 328
5.12.1 EOA Commands................................................................................... 328
5.12.1.1 Create eoa intf...........................................................................................328
5.12.1.2 Delete oea intf ........................................................................................... 328
5.12.1.3 Get eoa intf................................................................................................328
5.12.1.4 Modify eoa intf...........................................................................................328

5.13 Filtering Commands .......................................................................................... 332

10

IDL series User Guide

5.13.1 ACL Global Macentry Commands......................................................... 332
5.13.1.1 Get acl global macentry ............................................................................332
5.13.1.2 Create acl global macentry .......................................................................332
5.13.1.3 Delete acl global macentry........................................................................332
5.13.1.4 Modify acl global macentry........................................................................ 332

5.13.2 Clfr list genentry commands ................................................................. 334
5.13.2.1 Get clfr list genentry ..................................................................................334
5.13.2.2 Create clfr list genentry ............................................................................. 334
5.13.2.3 Delete clcfr list genentry............................................................................ 334

5.13.3 ACL Port Macentry Commands ............................................................ 336
5.13.3.1 Get acl port macentry................................................................................336
5.13.3.2 Create acl port macentry........................................................................... 336
5.13.3.3 Delete acl port macentry ........................................................................... 336

5.13.4 Clfr namedlist genentry Commands ..................................................... 337
5.13.4.1 Get namedlist genentry ............................................................................. 337
5.13.4.2 Create clfr namedlist genentry ..................................................................337
5.13.4.3 Delete clfr namedlist genentry ..................................................................338

5.13.5 Clfr namedlist info Commands.............................................................. 339
5.13.5.1 Get clfr namedlist info ...............................................................................339
5.13.5.2 Create clfr namedlist info ..........................................................................339
5.13.5.3 Delete clfr namedlist info...........................................................................339
5.13.5.4 Delete clfr namedlist info...........................................................................339

5.13.6 Clfr namedlist map Commands ............................................................ 341
5.13.6.1 Get clfr namedlist map ..............................................................................341
5.13.6.2 Create clfr namedlist map ......................................................................... 341
5.13.6.3 Delete clfr namedlist map ......................................................................... 341

5.13.7 Clfr profile branch Commands .............................................................. 342
5.13.7.1 Get clfr profile branch................................................................................342
5.13.7.2 Create clfr profile branch...........................................................................342
5.13.7.3 Delete clfr profile branch ...........................................................................343

5.13.8 Clfr profile info Commands ................................................................... 344
5.13.8.1 Get clfr profile info .....................................................................................344
5.13.8.2 Create clfr profile info ................................................................................345
5.13.8.3 Delete clfr profile info ................................................................................345
5.13.8.4 Modify clfr profile info ................................................................................345

5.13.9 Clfr profile node Commands ................................................................. 347
5.13.9.1 Get clfr profile node................................................................................... 347
5.13.9.2 Create clfr profile node..............................................................................347
5.13.9.3 Delete clfr profile node ..............................................................................347
5.13.9.4 Modify clfr profile node ..............................................................................347

5.13.10 Clfr tree branch Commands................................................................ 355

IP DSLAM

11

5.13.10.1 Get clfr tree branch ................................................................................. 355
5.13.10.2 Create clfr tree branch ............................................................................ 355
5.13.10.3 Delete clfr tree branch.............................................................................355

5.13.11 Clfr tree info Commands ..................................................................... 358
5.13.11.1 Get clfr tree info.......................................................................................358
5.13.11.2 Create clfr tree info.................................................................................. 358
5.13.11.3 Delete clfr tree info .................................................................................. 358
5.13.11.4 Modify clfr tree info .................................................................................. 358

5.13.12 Clfr tree map Commands.................................................................... 360
5.13.12.1 Get clfr tree map .....................................................................................360
5.13.12.2 Create clfr tree map ................................................................................360
5.13.12.3 Delete clfr tree map.................................................................................360

5.13.13 Clfr tree node Commands................................................................... 361
5.13.13.1 Get clfr tree node ....................................................................................361
5.13.13.2 Modify clfr tree node................................................................................362

5.13.14 Clfr tree profile Commands................................................................. 367
5.13.14.1 Get clfr tree profile................................................................................... 367
5.13.14.2 Create clfr tree profile..............................................................................367
5.13.14.3 Delete clfr tree profile ..............................................................................367
5.13.14.4 Modify clfr tree profile..............................................................................368

5.13.15 Filter expr entry Commands ............................................................... 369
5.13.15.1 Get filter expr entry .................................................................................369
5.13.15.2 Create filter expr entry ............................................................................369
5.13.15.3 Delete filter expr entry ............................................................................. 370

5.13.16 Filter list genentry Commands ............................................................ 371
5.13.16.1 Get filter list genentry ..............................................................................371
5.13.16.2 Create filter list genentry .........................................................................371
5.13.16.3 Delete filter list genentry.......................................................................... 371

5.13.17 Filter namedlist genentry Commands ................................................. 373
5.13.17.1 Get filter namedlist genentry ................................................................... 373
5.13.17.2 Create filter namedlist genentry .............................................................. 373
5.13.17.3 Delete filter namedlist genentry............................................................... 373

5.13.18 Filter namedlist info Commands ......................................................... 375
5.13.18.1 Get filter namedlist info ........................................................................... 375
5.13.18.2 Create filter namedlist info ......................................................................375
5.13.18.3 Delete filter namedlist info.......................................................................375
5.13.18.4 Modify filter namedlist info....................................................................... 375

5.13.19 Filter namedlist map Commands ........................................................ 377
5.13.19.1 Get filter namedlist map .......................................................................... 377
5.13.19.2 Create filter namedlist map ..................................................................... 377
5.13.19.3 Delete filter namedlist map...................................................................... 377

12

IDL series User Guide

5.13.20 Filter rule actionmap Commands........................................................ 379
5.13.20.1 Get Filter rule actionmap......................................................................... 379
5.13.20.2 Create filter rule actionmap ..................................................................... 379
5.13.20.3 Delete filter rule actionmap ..................................................................... 379
5.13.20.4 Modify filter rule actionmap ..................................................................... 379

5.13.21 Filter rule entry Commands ................................................................ 383
5.13.21.1 Get Filter rule entry ................................................................................. 383
5.13.21.2 Create filter rule entry..............................................................................383
5.13.21.3 Delete filter rule entry .............................................................................. 383
5.13.21.4 Modify filter rule entry..............................................................................383

5.13.22 Filter rule map Commands ................................................................. 389
5.13.22.1 Get Filter rule map ..................................................................................389
5.13.22.2 Create filter rule map ..............................................................................390
5.13.22.3 Delete filter rule map ............................................................................... 390
5.13.22.4 Modify filter rule map...............................................................................390

5.13.23 Filter rule stats Commands ................................................................. 392
5.13.23.1 Get Filter rule stats..................................................................................392

5.13.24 Filter seq entry Commands................................................................. 393
5.13.24.1 Get Filter seq entry ................................................................................. 393
5.13.24.2 Create filter seq entry..............................................................................393
5.13.24.3 Delete filter seq entry .............................................................................. 393
5.13.24.4 Modify filter seq entry ..............................................................................393

5.13.25 Filter seq info Commands................................................................... 395
5.13.25.1 Get Filter seq info.................................................................................... 395
5.13.25.2 Create filter seq info ................................................................................395
5.13.25.3 Delete filter seq info ................................................................................ 395
5.13.25.4 Modify filter seq info ................................................................................395

5.13.26 Filter subrule arp Commands ............................................................. 397
5.13.26.1 Get Filter subrule arp ..............................................................................397
5.13.26.2 Create filter subrule arp ..........................................................................397
5.13.26.3 Delete filter subrule arp ........................................................................... 398
5.13.26.4 Modify filter subrule arp...........................................................................398

5.13.27 Filter subrule clfrtree Commands........................................................ 404
5.13.27.1 Get Filter subrule clfrtree.........................................................................404
5.13.27.2 Create filter subrule clfrtree.....................................................................404
5.13.27.3 Delete filter subrule clfrtree ..................................................................... 405
5.13.27.4 Modify filter subrule clfrtree .....................................................................405

5.13.28 Filter subrule ether Commands .......................................................... 407
5.13.28.1 Get Filter subrule ether ...........................................................................407
5.13.28.2 Create filter subrule ether........................................................................407
5.13.28.3 Delete filter subrule ether ........................................................................ 408

IP DSLAM

13

5.13.28.4 Modify filter subrule ether........................................................................408

5.13.29 Filter subrule generic Commands....................................................... 418
5.13.29.1 Get Filter subrule generic........................................................................418
5.13.29.2 Create filter subrule generic .................................................................... 418
5.13.29.3 Delete filter subrule generic .................................................................... 418
5.13.29.4 Modify filter subrule generic .................................................................... 418

5.13.30 Filter subrule ICMP Commands.......................................................... 422
5.13.30.1 Get Filter subrule icmp ............................................................................ 422
5.13.30.2 Create filter subrule icmp ........................................................................ 422
5.13.30.3 Delete filter subrule icmp......................................................................... 422
5.13.30.4 Modify filter subrule icmp ........................................................................ 423

5.13.31 Filter subrule IGMP Commands.......................................................... 425
5.13.31.1 Get Filter subrule igmp............................................................................ 425
5.13.31.2 Create filter subrule igmp ........................................................................ 425
5.13.31.3 Delete filter subrule igmp ........................................................................ 426
5.13.31.4 Modify filter subrule igmp ........................................................................ 426

5.13.32 Filter subrule IP Commands ............................................................... 429
5.13.32.1 Get Filter subrule ip.................................................................................429
5.13.32.2 Create filter subrule ip .............................................................................430
5.13.32.3 Delete filter subrule ip ............................................................................. 430
5.13.32.4 Modify filter subrule ip .............................................................................430

5.13.33 Filter subrule PPP Commands ........................................................... 436
5.13.33.1 Get Filter subrule ppp..............................................................................436
5.13.33.2 Create filter subrule ppp..........................................................................436
5.13.33.3 Delete filter subrule ppp .......................................................................... 436
5.13.33.4 Modify filter subrule ppp ..........................................................................437

5.13.34 Filter subrule TCP Commands............................................................ 439
5.13.34.1 Get Filter subrule tcp...............................................................................439
5.13.34.2 Create filter subrule tcp ...........................................................................439
5.13.34.3 Delete filter subrule tcp ........................................................................... 440
5.13.34.4 Modify filter subrule tcp ...........................................................................440

5.13.35 Filter subrule UDP Commands ........................................................... 443
5.13.35.1 Get Filter subrule udp..............................................................................443
5.13.35.2 Create filter subrule udp..........................................................................443
5.13.35.3 Delete filter subrule udp .......................................................................... 443
5.13.35.4 Modify filter subrule udp ..........................................................................444

5.14 IGMP Commands.............................................................................................. 447
5.14.1 Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands ............................................................ 447
5.14.1.1 Get igmpsnoop cfg info ............................................................................. 447
5.14.1.2 Modify igmpsnoop cfg info ........................................................................ 447

5.14.2 Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands.................................................... 451

14

IDL series User Guide

5.14.2.1 Get igmpsnoop mvlan config..................................................................... 451
5.14.2.2 Create igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................ 452
5.14.2.3 Delete igmpsnoop mvlan config ................................................................ 452
5.14.2.4 Modify igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452

5.14.3 Igmpsnoop port info Commands........................................................... 455
5.14.3.1 Get igmpsnoop port info............................................................................ 455
5.14.3.2 Modify igmpsnoop port info ....................................................................... 455

5.14.4 Igmpsnoop port stats Commands ......................................................... 459
5.14.4.1 Get igmpsnoop port stats .......................................................................... 459
5.14.4.2 Reset igmpsnoop port stats ...................................................................... 459

5.14.5 Igmpsnoop querier info Commands...................................................... 461
5.14.5.1 Get igmpsnoop querier info....................................................................... 461
5.14.5.2 Create igmpsnoop querier info.................................................................. 461
5.14.5.3 Delete igmpsnoop querier info .................................................................. 462

5.15 Interface Commands......................................................................................... 464
5.15.1 Interface Commands ............................................................................ 464
5.15.1.1 Get interface stats .....................................................................................464
5.15.1.2 Reset interface stats .................................................................................467
5.15.1.3 Get interface config ...................................................................................467
5.15.1.4 Modify interface config ..............................................................................467

5.16 IP Commands ................................................................................................... 469
5.16.1 IP Net to Media Table Commands ........................................................ 469
5.16.1.1 Get arp ......................................................................................................469
5.16.1.2 Create arp .................................................................................................469
5.16.1.3 Delete arp .................................................................................................469

5.16.2 IP Route Commands ............................................................................ 471
5.16.2.1 Get ip route ...............................................................................................471
5.16.2.2 Create up route .........................................................................................472
5.16.2.3 Delete ip route........................................................................................... 472

5.16.3 Ipoa intf Commands.............................................................................. 475
5.16.3.1 Get ipoa intf...............................................................................................475
5.16.3.2 Create ipoa intf.......................................................................................... 475
5.16.3.3 Delete ipoa intf .......................................................................................... 476
5.16.3.4 Modify ipoa intf ..........................................................................................476

5.16.4 Ipoe intf Commands.............................................................................. 478
5.16.4.1 Get ipoe intf...............................................................................................478
5.16.4.2 Create ipoe intf.......................................................................................... 478
5.16.4.3 Delete ipoe intf .......................................................................................... 478
5.16.4.4 Modify ipoe intf ..........................................................................................478

5.16.5 Rid static Commands............................................................................ 481
5.16.5.1 Create rid static .........................................................................................481

IP DSLAM

15

5.16.5.2 Delete rid static .........................................................................................481

5.17 MacProfile Commands...................................................................................... 484
5.17.1 Macprofile globle Commands ............................................................... 484
5.17.1.1 Get macprofile global ................................................................................ 484
5.17.1.2 Create macprofile global ........................................................................... 484
5.17.1.3 Delete macprofile global ...........................................................................484

5.17.2 Resvdmac profile info Commands........................................................ 485
5.17.2.1 Get resvdmac profile info .......................................................................... 485
5.17.2.2 Create resvdmac profile info ..................................................................... 485
5.17.2.3 Delete resvdmac profile info...................................................................... 485

5.17.3 Resvdmac profile param Commands.................................................... 486
5.17.3.1 Get resvdmac profile param...................................................................... 486
5.17.3.2 Create resvdmac profile param................................................................. 487
5.17.3.3 Delete resvdmac profile param ................................................................. 487

5.18 Management Traffic Commands ....................................................................... 489
5.18.1 Ctlpkt group info Commands ................................................................ 489
5.18.1.1 Get ctlpkt group info ..................................................................................489
5.18.1.2 Create ctlpkt group info .............................................................................489
5.18.1.3 Delete ctlpkt group info .............................................................................489

5.18.2 Ctlpkt instance info Commands ............................................................ 490
5.18.2.1 Get ctlpkt instance info.............................................................................. 490
5.18.2.2 Create ctlpkt instance info......................................................................... 490
5.18.2.3 Delete ctlpkt instance info ......................................................................... 491
5.18.2.4 Modify ctlpkt instance info .........................................................................491

5.18.3 Ctlpkt profile info Commands................................................................ 492
5.18.3.1 Get ctlpkt profile info ................................................................................. 492
5.18.3.2 Create ctlpkt profile info ............................................................................492
5.18.3.3 Delete ctlpkt profile info............................................................................. 493
5.18.3.4 Modify ctlpkt profile info.............................................................................493

5.19 PPPoE Tunneling Commands........................................................................... 495
5.19.1 PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands.................................................... 495
5.19.1.1 Get pppoe global acprofile ........................................................................495
5.19.1.2 Create pppoe global acprofile ................................................................... 495
5.19.1.3 Delete pppoe global acprofile ................................................................... 495

5.19.2 PPPoE Global Config Commands ........................................................ 496
5.19.2.1 Get pppoe global config ............................................................................496
5.19.2.2 Create pppoe global config ....................................................................... 496

5.19.3 PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands............................................. 499
5.19.3.1 Get pppoe global serviceprofile................................................................. 499
5.19.3.2 Create pppoe global serviceprofile............................................................ 499
5.19.3.3 Delete pppoe global serviceprofile ............................................................ 499

16

IDL series User Guide

5.19.4 PPPoE Global Stats Commands .......................................................... 500
5.19.4.1 Get pppoe global stats ..............................................................................500

5.19.5 Pppoe intf Commands .......................................................................... 501
5.19.5.1 Get pppoe intf............................................................................................501
5.19.5.2 Create pppoe intf....................................................................................... 502
5.19.5.3 Delete pppoe intf .......................................................................................502
5.19.5.4 Modify pppoe intf.......................................................................................502

5.19.6 PPPoE Session Stats Commands ........................................................ 506
5.19.6.1 Get pppoe session stats............................................................................506

5.19.7 PPPPR Interface Commands ............................................................... 508
5.19.7.1 Get pppr intf ..............................................................................................508
5.19.7.2 Create pppr intf .........................................................................................508
5.19.7.3 Delete pppr intf.......................................................................................... 508
5.19.7.4 Modify pppr intf..........................................................................................508

5.20 IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands ..................................................................... 512
5.20.1 Dra global stats Commands ................................................................. 512
5.20.1.1 Get dra global stats ...................................................................................512
5.20.1.2 Reset dra global stats ...............................................................................512

5.20.2 Dra instance entry Commands ............................................................. 513
5.20.2.1 Get dra instance entry...............................................................................513
5.20.2.2 Create dra instance entry..........................................................................513
5.20.2.3 Delete dra instance entry ..........................................................................514
5.20.2.4 Modify dra instance entry .......................................................................... 514

5.20.3 Dra stats entry Commands ................................................................... 519
5.20.3.1 Get dra stats entry.....................................................................................519
5.20.3.2 Reset dra stats entry .................................................................................519

5.20.4 Dra global config Commands ............................................................... 520
5.20.4.1 Get dra global config .................................................................................520
5.20.4.2 Modify dra global config ............................................................................ 520

5.20.5 la profile entry Commands.................................................................... 521
5.20.5.1 Get ia profile entry..................................................................................... 521
5.20.5.2 Create ia profile entry................................................................................ 521
5.20.5.3 Delete ia profile entry ................................................................................522
5.20.5.4 Modify ia profile entry ................................................................................ 522

5.20.6 Pia instance entry Commands.............................................................. 525
5.20.6.1 Get pia instance entry ...............................................................................525
5.20.6.2 Create pia instance entry ..........................................................................525
5.20.6.3 Delete pia instance entry........................................................................... 526
5.20.6.4 Modify pia instance entry .......................................................................... 526

5.20.7 Pia stats entry Commands.................................................................... 531
5.20.7.1 Get pia stats entry .....................................................................................531

IP DSLAM

17

5.20.7.2 Reset pia stats entry .................................................................................531

5.20.8 Pia global config Commands ................................................................ 532
5.20.8.1 Get pia global config ................................................................................. 532
5.20.8.2 Modify pia global config.............................................................................533

5.21 QoS Commands................................................................................................ 534
5.21.1 IRL Map Commands............................................................................. 534
5.21.1.1 Get irl map ................................................................................................534
5.21.1.2 Create irl map ...........................................................................................534
5.21.1.3 Delete irl map ............................................................................................534

5.21.2 IRL Profile Commands.......................................................................... 535
5.21.2.1 Get irl profile..............................................................................................535
5.21.2.2 Create irl profile.........................................................................................535
5.21.2.3 Delete irl profile .........................................................................................536
5.21.2.4 Modify irl profile .........................................................................................536

5.21.3 IRL Stats Commands ............................................................................ 539
5.21.3.1 Get irl stats ................................................................................................539

5.21.4 Bridge rlin stance map Commands....................................................... 540
5.21.4.1 Get bridge rlinstance map .........................................................................540
5.21.4.2 Create bridge rlinstance map .................................................................... 540
5.21.4.3 Delete bridge rlinstance map .................................................................... 540
5.21.4.4 Modify bridge rlinstance map .................................................................... 540

5.21.5 Rl actionprofile info Commands............................................................ 542
5.21.5.1 Get rl actionprofile info ..............................................................................542
5.21.5.2 Create rl actionprofile info .........................................................................542
5.21.5.3 Delete rl actionprofile info ......................................................................... 542
5.21.5.4 Modify rl actionprofile info ......................................................................... 543

5.21.6 Rl instance info Commands.................................................................. 546
5.21.6.1 Get rl instance info ....................................................................................546
5.21.6.2 Create rl instance info ...............................................................................546
5.21.6.3 Delete rl instance info................................................................................546

5.21.7 Rl profile info Commands ..................................................................... 548
5.21.7.1 Get rl profile info........................................................................................ 548
5.21.7.2 Create rl profile info................................................................................... 548
5.21.7.3 Delete rl profile info ...................................................................................548
5.21.7.4 Modify rl profile info ...................................................................................549

5.21.8 Scheduling profile class Commands..................................................... 552
5.21.8.1 Get sched profile class..............................................................................552
5.21.8.2 Modify sched profile class .........................................................................552

5.21.9 Scheduling profile info Commands ....................................................... 555
5.21.9.1 Get sched profile info ................................................................................555
5.21.9.2 Create sched profile info ...........................................................................555

18

IDL series User Guide

5.21.9.3 Delete sched profile info ........................................................................... 556

5.21.10 Trfclass profile class Commands ........................................................ 557
5.21.10.1 Get trfclass profile class ..........................................................................557
5.21.10.2 Modify trfclass profile class ..................................................................... 558

5.21.11 Trfclass profile info Commands........................................................... 559
5.21.11.1 Get trfclass profile info............................................................................. 559
5.21.11.2 Create trfclass profile info........................................................................559
5.21.11.3 Delete trfclass profile info ........................................................................559

5.21.12 Trfclass stats Commands ................................................................... 560
5.21.12.1 Get trfclass stats .....................................................................................560
5.21.12.2 Reset trfclass stats..................................................................................561

5.22 RMON Commands............................................................................................ 562
5.22.1 RMON Statistics Group Commands ..................................................... 562
5.22.1.1 Create srmon probe ..................................................................................562
5.22.1.2 Delete srmon probe .................................................................................. 562
5.22.1.3 Get srmon probe .......................................................................................562

5.22.2 RMON Task Info Commands ................................................................ 564
5.22.2.1 Get rmon task............................................................................................564

5.22.3 RMON Memory Pool Info Commands .................................................. 566
5.22.3.1 Get rmon mpool ........................................................................................ 566
5.22.3.2 Get rmon mpool threshold.........................................................................570
5.22.3.3 Reset rmon mpool..................................................................................... 572

5.22.4 RMON Queue Info Commands............................................................. 572
5.22.4.1 Get rmon queue ........................................................................................572
5.22.4.2 Get rmon queue threshold ........................................................................ 575
5.22.4.3 Reset rmon queue ....................................................................................576

5.22.5 RMON Net buffers Info Commands ...................................................... 576
5.22.5.1 Get rmon netbuf ........................................................................................576
5.22.5.2 Get rmon netbuf threshold ........................................................................ 578
5.22.5.3 Reset rmon netbuf ....................................................................................579

5.22.6 RMON Semaphore Info Commands..................................................... 579
5.22.6.1 Get rmon semaphore ................................................................................ 579

5.22.7 RMON Event Group Info Commands ................................................... 580
5.22.7.1 Get rmon eventgrp .................................................................................... 580

5.23 SNMP Commands ............................................................................................ 582
5.23.1 SNMP Comm Commands .................................................................... 582
5.23.1.1 Get snmp comm........................................................................................ 582
5.23.1.2 Create snmp comm...................................................................................582
5.23.1.3 Delete snmp comm ...................................................................................582

5.23.2 SNMP Host Commands........................................................................ 583
5.23.2.1 Get snmp host...........................................................................................583

IP DSLAM

19

5.23.2.2 Create snmp host......................................................................................583
5.23.2.3 Delete snmp host ...................................................................................... 584

5.23.3 SNMP Stats Commands ....................................................................... 585
5.23.3.1 Snmp stats ................................................................................................585
5.23.3.2 Modify snmp stats .....................................................................................585

5.23.4 SNMP Traphost Commands ................................................................. 588
5.23.4.1 Get snmp traphost ....................................................................................588
5.23.4.2 Create snmp traphost................................................................................ 588
5.23.4.3 Delete snmp traphost ................................................................................ 589
5.23.4.4 Modify snmp traphost................................................................................589

5.24 SNTP Commands ............................................................................................. 591
5.24.1 SNTP Cfg Commands .......................................................................... 591
5.24.1.1 Get sntp cfg...............................................................................................591
5.24.1.2 Modify sntp cfg ..........................................................................................591

5.24.2 SNTP servaddr Commands.................................................................. 592
5.24.2.1 Get sntp servaddr .....................................................................................592
5.24.2.2 Create sntp servaddr ................................................................................592

5.24.3 SNTP Stats Commands........................................................................ 593
5.24.3.1 Get sntp stats ............................................................................................593
5.24.3.2 Reset sntp stats ........................................................................................593

5.25 System Commands........................................................................................... 594
5.25.1 Cbuftrace cfg Commands ..................................................................... 594
5.25.1.1 Get cbuftrace cfg.......................................................................................594
5.25.1.2 Reset cbuftrace cfg ................................................................................... 594

5.25.2 System Configuration Save and Restore Commands .......................... 595
5.25.2.1 Commit......................................................................................................595
5.25.2.2 Reboot ......................................................................................................595

5.25.3 System Control Table Commands ........................................................ 597
5.25.3.1 Create user ...............................................................................................597
5.25.3.2 Delete user................................................................................................ 597
5.25.3.3 Get user ....................................................................................................597
5.25.3.4 Passwd .....................................................................................................599

5.25.4 System crash info Commands.............................................................. 600
5.25.4.1 Get system crash info ...............................................................................600
5.25.4.2 Get system crash configinfo......................................................................608
5.25.4.3 Modify system crash configinfo ................................................................. 608

5.25.5 System info Commands........................................................................ 609
5.25.5.1 Get system info .........................................................................................609
5.25.5.2 Modify system info ....................................................................................609
5.25.5.3 Get rmon idletime...................................................................................... 613

5.25.6 System manuf info Commands............................................................. 614

20

IDL series User Guide

5.25.6.1 Get system manuf info .............................................................................. 614

5.25.7 System reboot info Commands ............................................................ 616
5.25.7.1 Get system reboot info ..............................................................................616

5.25.8 Nbize Commands ................................................................................. 618
5.25.8.1 Get nbsize.................................................................................................618
5.25.8.2 Modify nbsize ............................................................................................618

5.25.9 System Stats Commands ..................................................................... 627
5.25.9.1 Get system stats .......................................................................................627
5.25.9.2 Reset system stats....................................................................................627

5.25.10 System Traps Commands .................................................................. 629
5.25.10.1 Reset traps..............................................................................................629

5.25.11 System Traps Log Table Commands .................................................. 629
5.25.11.1 Get traps..................................................................................................629

5.25.12 System Version Commands ............................................................... 637
5.25.12.1 Get system version .................................................................................637

5.25.13 Trace Log Configuration Commands .................................................. 638
5.25.13.1 Get trace cfg ...........................................................................................638
5.25.13.2 Modify trace cfg.......................................................................................638

5.25.14 Trace Log Statistics Commands ......................................................... 640
5.25.14.1 Get trace stats.........................................................................................640

5.26 VC Aggregation Commands.............................................................................. 642
5.26.1 Atm vcaggr intf Commands................................................................... 642
5.26.1.1 Get atm vcaggr intf.................................................................................... 642
5.26.1.2 Create atm vcaggr intf............................................................................... 642
5.26.1.3 Delete atm vcaggr intf ...............................................................................642
5.26.1.4 Modify atm vcaggr intf ............................................................................... 642

5.26.2 Atm vcaggr map Commands ................................................................ 644
5.26.2.1 Get atm vcaggr map ................................................................................. 644
5.26.2.2 Create atm vcaggr map ............................................................................ 645
5.26.2.3 Delete atm vcaggr map ............................................................................. 645
5.26.2.4 Modify atm vcaggr map.............................................................................645

5.27 VLAN Commands ............................................................................................. 648
5.27.1 GVRP Info Commands ......................................................................... 648
5.27.1.1 Get gvrp info .............................................................................................648
5.27.1.2 Modify gvrp info......................................................................................... 648

5.27.2 GVRP Port Info Commands.................................................................. 649
5.27.2.1 Get gvrp port info ......................................................................................649
5.27.2.2 Modify gvrp port info..................................................................................649

5.27.3 GVRP Port Stats Commands................................................................ 654
5.27.3.1 Get gvrp port stats.....................................................................................654
5.27.3.2 Reset gvrp port stats .................................................................................654

IP DSLAM

21

5.27.4 Vlan curr info Commands ..................................................................... 655
5.27.4.1 Get vlan curr info.......................................................................................655

5.27.5 VLAN mapprofile info Commands ........................................................ 657
5.27.5.1 Get vlan mapprofile info ............................................................................ 657
5.27.5.2 Create vlan mapprofile info ....................................................................... 658
5.27.5.3 Delete vlan mapprofile info ....................................................................... 658

5.27.6 Vlan mapprofile param Commands ...................................................... 659
5.27.6.1 Get vlan mapprofile param........................................................................ 659
5.27.6.2 Create vlan mapprofile param................................................................... 659
5.27.6.3 Delete vlan mapprofile param ................................................................... 659

5.27.7 VLAN Static Commands ....................................................................... 661
5.27.7.1 Get vlan static ...........................................................................................661
5.27.7.2 Create vlan static ......................................................................................661
5.27.7.3 Modify vlan static.......................................................................................662
5.27.7.4 Delete vlan static.......................................................................................662

5.28 Miscelleneous Commands ................................................................................ 672
5.28.1 File Commands .................................................................................... 672
5.28.1.1 Apply .........................................................................................................672
5.28.1.2 Download ..................................................................................................674
5.28.1.3 List ............................................................................................................676
5.28.1.4 Permission ................................................................................................681
5.28.1.5 Ping ...........................................................................................................682
5.28.1.6 Remove.....................................................................................................683
5.28.1.7 Upgrade ....................................................................................................684
5.28.1.8 Upload.......................................................................................................685

5.28.2 Other Commands ................................................................................. 687
5.28.2.1 Unalias ......................................................................................................688
5.28.2.2 Help...........................................................................................................689
5.28.2.3 Logout .......................................................................................................690
5.28.2.4 Prompt ......................................................................................................690
5.28.2.5 Traceroute .................................................................................................691
5.28.2.6 Verbose.....................................................................................................692

Appendix A --- FD.cfg in detail .................................................................................... 693
Appendix B --- Supported mibs .................................................................................. 698
PropMib (Conexant) .................................................................................................. 698
StdMib (Standard) ..................................................................................................... 699
Appendix C --- IEEE 802.1x protocol over IP DSLAM ............................................... 700
Understanding How 802.1X Authentication Works.................................................... 700
Device Roles ................................................................................................... 701
Authenticcation Initiation and Message Exchange .......................................... 702
802.1X CLI commands.............................................................................................. 703
Specifying RADIUS Servers ............................................................................ 703

22

IDL series User Guide

Specifying the RADIUS Key ............................................................................ 703
Configuring 802.1X Authentication .................................................................. 703
Enabling 802.1X globally ........................................................................................704
Disabling 802.1X globally........................................................................................704
Enabling and Initializing 802.1X Authentication Individual Ports............................. 704
Enabling Multiple Hosts........................................................................................... 705
Disabling Multiple Hosts..........................................................................................705

802.1X Protocol over IP DSLAM ..................................................................... 705
Appendix D --- What’s IP DSLAM................................................................................ 706

IP DSLAM

23

1. Introduction
With built-in POTS splitter 24 / 48 ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Subscriber ports, the PLANET
IDL series are advanced IP based DSLAM which is designed for Network Service Provider
to offer excellent services to multiple subscribers. The replaceable 1000Base-T or
1000Base-LX uplink interfaces, and stackable support other units that provide the flexibility
of the network implementation.
The PLANET IDL series support local and remote management capabilities of CLI, SNMP
and Telnet via RS-232 CID and Ethernet MGNT ports, Microsoft Windows based GUI
Management system provides Network Service Provider a centrally management
capability.
The PLANET IP DSLAM provides many features such as QoS, VLAN, Bandwidth
Management, Traffic Prioritization, and Data Flow Security Control. The IDL series offer
Network Service Provider the most suitable solution and makes subscribers an efficient
way to meet triple play (data, voice, and video).

1.1 Package Contents
Please inspect your package. The following items should be included in the package:
IDL-2400/2401
z IDL-2400/2401 unit x 1
z AC Power Cord x 1
z CD (Containing User’s Manual, QIG, IDL Manager) x 1
z Quick Installation Guide x 1
z RJ-45 Cable x 1
z RS-232 Cable x 1
z Telco-50 Cable x 1
IDL-4800/4801
z IDL-4800/4801 unit x 1
z AC Power Cord x 1
z CD (Containing User’s Manual, QIG, IDL Manager) x 1
z Quick Installation Guide x 1
z RJ-45 Cable x 1
z RS-232 Cable x 1
z Telco-50 Cable x 2

24

IDL series User Guide

1.2 Features
z

24-Port or 48-Port ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ subscriber interface with build-in POTS splitter

z

DMT data rate: Downstream 32 kbps up to 25 Mbps / Upstream 32 kbps up to 1Mbps

z

1000Base-T (IDL-2400/IDL-4800) or 1000Base-LX (IDL-2401/IDL-4801) uplink interface

z

Stackable support

z

Microsoft Windows based GUI management

z

Local RS-232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP/Telnet management

z

Firmware upgradeable via FTP or TFTP

z

6K MAC address & 256 Multicast MAC address support

z

Static VLAN and Port based VLAN

z

VLAN / MAC / IP filtering

z

Access Control List by MAC and IP address

z

Traffic prioritization (802.1p)

z

Traffic bandwidth management by MAC and IP address

1.3 Application
The PLANET IDL series offer the benefit of high performance to central office co-location
and MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) / MDU (Multi-Dwelling Unit) markets. It provides broadband
data service over existing copper wires without affecting the conventional voice service by
24/48 subscriber ports with built-in POTS splitter. A PLANET IP DSLAM is the perfect
solution for NSP a cost-effective but high-value centrally management capability.

IP DSLAM

25

1.4 Outlook

IDL-2400

IDL-4800

IDL-2401 / IDL-4801 with 1000Base-LX UPLINK
1 x 1000Base-LX UPLINK1
1 x 1000Base-T UPLINK2
1 x 1000Base-T MGNT

26

IDL series User Guide

1.4.1 Front Panel
The front panels of IDL series are shown below.

IDL-2400

IDL-2401

IDL-4800

IDL-4801
LED Definition
LED

Color

LED Description

POWER

Green

Lit when power on

MAINT

Yellow

Lit when maintenance commands were issued

ALARM

Red

Lit when MJ/MN events happen

MASTER

Green

Lit when system was acted as management master for
stacking application
( * Future feature )

ADSL 1~24
or
ADSL 1~48

Green
Orange
No Light
Red

Lit when ADSL link is in a active state
When the specified ADSL link is in connection training stat
When ADSL link is not in service
Lit when loss of signal occurs

1000/ACT

Green

Blinking when information action is transmitted

100/ACT

Green

Blinking when information is transmitted

GIGA

Green

Blinking when information is transmitted
( * IDL-2401/4801 )

ACT

Green

When uplink is activated
( * IDL-2401/4801 )

IP DSLAM

27

1.4.2 Rear Panel
The rear panels of IDL series are shown below.

IDL-2400/2401

IDL-4800/4801

Port Definition

Port

Port Description

AC IN

AC Power cord in

POWER

Power switch

PHONE 1
LINE 1

28

24 port ADSL module with built-in POTS

PHONE 2

24 port ADSL module with built-in POTS

LINE 2

( * IDL-4800/4801 )

IDL series User Guide

1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Hardware Specifications
Model
Uplink 1
Uplink 2
MGNT
Ports
Console
Line
Phone

LED Indicators

Model
Uplink 1
Uplink 2
MGNT
Ports
Console
Line
Phone

LED Indicators

IP DSLAM

IDL-2400
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
1 x RS-232
1 x Telco-50
1 x Telco-50
1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
24 x ADSL LEDs
2 x 1000/ACT LEDs
3 x 100/ACT LEDs

IDL-4800
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
1 x RS-232
2 x Telco-50
2 x Telco-50
1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
48 x ADSL LEDs
2 x 1000/ACT LEDs
3 x 100/ACT LEDs

IDL-2401
1 x SC (1000Base-LX)

1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
24 x ADSL LEDs
1 x 1000/ACT LEDs
2 x 100/ACT LEDs
1 x GIGA LED
1 x ACT LED

IDL-4801
1 x SC (1000Base-LX)

1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
48 x ADSL LEDs
1 x 1000/ACT LEDs
2 x 100/ACT LEDs
1 x GIGA LED
1 x ACT LED

29

1.5.2 Software Specifications
Compliant with ADSL standard
- ANSI T1.413 issue 2
- G.dmt (ITU G.992.1)
- G.lite (ITU G.992.2)
Standard

- G.hs (ITU G.994.1)
Capable of ADSL2 standard
- G.dmt.bis (ITU G.992.3)
Capable of ADSL2+ standard
- G.dmt.bisplus (ITU G.992.5)
STP
IGMP snooping

Protocol

GMRP
GVRP
LACP
SNMP / UDP / IP / MAC / Ethernet
Up to 256 multicast addresses
IGMP v1, v2, v3

Multicast

Multicast VLAN mapping: Independent VLAN multicast (IVM)
Multicast VLAN mapping: Shared VLAN Multicast (SVM)
Handle PPPoE Encapsulated IGMP packets
Subscriber interface with built-in POTS splitter
Downstream DMT data rate 32 kbps up to 25 Mbps
Upstream DMT data rate 32 kbps up to 1Mbps
Extended power management capabilities to optimize power
consumption for each application
Distance up to 18 kft
1000Base-T / 1000Base-LX uplink interface via model
Stackable support
Centronic 50 pin connector for Telco line in and out

System

8 VCs per xDSL port
128 MAC address per x DSL port
6K MAC address
Ethernet Bridging: Broadcast, Flooding / Dropping
VLAN Bridging: 512 VLAN, Static VLAN, VLAN Stacking / Trunking
Packet size 64 byte to 1522byte
PPPoE Intermediate Agent
DHCP Relay Agent
IPOA to IPOE Tunneling
PPPoA to PPPoE inter-working

30

IDL series User Guide

Input Rate Limiting (IRL) on a per-AAL5 interface
Output Rate Limiting (ORL) on a per ATM-port and Ethernet basis
Rate Limiting

Security

Multiple mechanisms of prioritizing traffic
VLAN filtering
MAC filtering
IP filtering
Access Control List by MAC address
Access Control List by IP address
Throttling Control
Sticky Bridge Ports
Microsoft Windows based GUI management
Local RS-232 CLI, and Ethernet SNMP / Telnet management

Management

Remote in-band SNMP / Telnet management
Firmware upgradeable via FTP or TFTP
SNMP v1, v2c

IP DSLAM

31

2. Installation
The followings are instructions for setting up the IDL series IP DSLAM. Refer to the
illustration and follow the simple steps below to quickly install your IP DSLAM.

2.1 Safety Instruction
The following is the safety instructions for IP DSLAM before installing.
>> The maximum recommended operating temperature is 50ºC. Care must be taken to
allow sufficient air circulation or space between units when the IP DSLAM is installed
inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the combined weight of all
IP DSLAM.
>> The connections and equipment that supply power to the IP DSLAM should be capable
of operating safely with the maximum power requirements of the IP DSLAM. In the event
of a power overload, the supply circuits and supply wiring should not become hazardous.
>> The AC power cord must plug into the right supply voltage. Make sure that the supplied
AC voltage is correct and stable. If the input AC voltage is over 10% lower than the
standard may cause the IP DSLAM to malfunction.
>> Generally, when installed after the final configuration, the product must comply with the
applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is
installed. If necessary, consult for technical support.
>> A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or
more buildings. If products installed in separate building are interconnected, the voltage
potential can cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical consultant to
determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary, implement corrective
action before interconnecting the products. If the equipment is to be used with
telecommunications circuit, take the following precautions:
- Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
- Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially - designed for
wet location.
- Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
- Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines (other than a cordless
telephone) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
- Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to report a
gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

32

IDL series User Guide

2.2 Hardware Installation
The PLANET IDL series can be installed in a standard 19-inch rack by using the mounting
brackets provided. Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided. The
procedure to connect and wire the system is as follows.
2.2.1 System Requirements
z Workstation with Windows NT/2000/XP
z RJ-45 cables
z RJ-11 cables
z Telco-50 cables
z RS-232 cables
z  MDF Patch Panel (Model No.: IDL-PAN-48).

2.2.2 Rear Panel Connection
The following figure shows the rear panel connection of IDL series:

Step 1: Ground the IP DSLAM by connecting a grounded wire (Optional).
Step 2: Connect the ADSL line connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of IP DSLAM to
CPE by using telco cable. Each line connector supports 24 ports of
ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ for Data path from MDF (Main Distribution Frame).

IP DSLAM

33

Step 3: Connect the Phone connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of IP DSLAM to
Exchange/PBX by using telco cable. Phone connector is an optional module
supporting Voic path to Exchange/PBX; it must be along with Line Connector.

Note:
1. The MDF Patch panel is optional to standard package.

Step 4: Hook power cord and apply the power.

2.2.3 Front Panel Connection
The following figure shows the front panel connection of IDL series:

UPLINK: Connect to Internet or downlink to the other IDL-series for stacking by RJ-45
cable.
MGNT: Connect to PC by RJ-45 cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through IDL
Manager.
CID: Connect to PC by RS-232 cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through CLI.

34

IDL series User Guide

2.3 IDL Manager Installation
This following shows how to prepare the system to perform basic communication functions
through IDL Manager.
2.3.1 System Requirements
z Windows NT/2000/XP
z CD-ROM
z Ethernet card
z 2GB Hard disk with a minimum of 650MB of free space
z Super VGA (800x600 resolution) or higher with 256 colors
z Manual CD

2.3.2 Installing IDL Manager
Perform initial configuration procedures as follows:
1. Insert CD into CD-ROM.
2. From the autorun screen, click the “IDL Manager” hyperlink to download the file. And
then click “setup.exe” to start the installation process.
3. The welcome window appears. Click on “Next” to continue.

IP DSLAM

35

4. When the Start Copying Files window appears, you can confirm the current settings.
Click on “Next” to start copying files.

5. When Setup Process Status window appears, the installation process is now in
progress. This window display a bar indicating the percentage of completion for the
current installation. In addition, the names of the files being installed appear above the
bar until the installation is complete.

6. At the end of the installation process, the following Setup Complete window presents.
Simply click on “Finish” to complete setup. Now the installation of IDL Manager is
completed.

36

IDL series User Guide

2.3.3 Starting IDL Manager
Perform basic communication functions through IDL Manager, procedures as follows:
1. Users can activate the IDL Manager either from Program manager or clicking the
shortcut icon on the desktop as below.

2. Before starting to IDL Manager, it is necessary that your PC’s IP and IP DSLAM’s IP
are in the same subnet.
Note:
Default IP address of Management port is 192.168.200.111.

3. To enable SNMP for accessing, one needs to issue commands below to IDL series by
Telnet to management port or connecting to console port (9600, N, 8,1) and then log in
with default username and password that both are “admin”.
a. “$create snmp comm community public rw”.
b. “$create snmp host ip 192.168.200. xxx community public”, where 192.168.200.xxx
is the IP of your PC.
c. “$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.200.xxx community public version v1”, where
192.168.200.xxx is the IP of your PC.
4. Launch the IDL Manager and then log in with the user name and password.
Click on “OK” to enter the IDL Manager system.

Note:
Default Username is “Supervisor” and password is blank.
5. After launching IDL Manager and logging in, the main window appears as below.

IP DSLAM

37

2.4 IDL Manager Functions
IDL Manager is divided into the task-oriented functional groups as follows.

2.4.1 Session
Allow you to start and to terminate a session as well as to shutdown the system.
2.4.1.1 Logout
To terminate the current session, choose Logout command from Session Menu. The
user account, then, is logged out and Login window prompts for a new login. Normally,
this is used when a user wants to re-login in order to gain a higher level of authority for
certain operations.

2.4.1.2 Exit
To terminate the system at any time, simply choose the Exit command from Session
Menu. The system then terminates.

38

IDL series User Guide

2.4.2 Tools
This chapter describes how to use tools in the IDL Manager, including Environmental
options, Territory manager, Agent manager, User Manager and Telnet, which are detailed
in the following sections.
2.4.2.1 Environment Options
Choose Environmental Options from Tools Menu, user can define SNMP, Desktop
and Surveillance respectively.
1. SNMP Configuration

The SNMP Time-out Period and Retransmission times can be configured as shown in
the following steps:
a. Click on the TabControl of “SNMP” that will bring SNMP dialogue box to front.
b. Click on
times.
c. Click on

/

to change the Time-out Period seconds and Retransmission

to submit your changes.

2. Desktop Configuration

IP DSLAM

39

The Desktop is user for setting the map of a required territory.
a. Click on the tab of “Desktop” that will bring Desktop dialogue box to front.
b. Click on
to quick start territory manager in which users can
define a desired territory. Please refer to “Territory Manager Configuration” for
more details.
c. Click on
loaded map.

to load the map of a territory or click on

to clear a

Note:
The format of map is limited to *.bmp, *.emf and *.wmf.

d. Click on
Mounted Agent.

to submit your setting, and then the map will apply to the

3. Surveillance Configuration

40

IDL series User Guide

a. Click on the tab of “Surveillance” that will bring the Surveillance dialogue box to
front.
b. Click on

or

to change the monitor period.

c. Select the checkbox of Save expired records to save surveillance archive,
which can be browsed by clicking on the tab of Achieved in the Event Log
window as shown in the following figure.

IP DSLAM

d. Clicking on
or
press

to choose the directory to record surveillance data and
to define expired period.

e. Click on

to submit your settings.

41

2.4.2.2 Territory Manager
Territory manager help users to build up monitoring territories and agents could be
categorized into different territories by users. Territory manager can be activated
either from menu bar or from environmental options.
Territory Manager Window
Choose Territory Manager via Tools Menu, or Environmental option, and then the Territory
Management window appears.

If to add a territory to the system,
a. Click on
the data.

, the Territory Name fields then cleared to blank for entering

b. Enter Territory Name and

then become enable.

c. Click on

to apply the territory to the system. After that, you can proceed to
group management by Territory Management dialog box.

As the following figure shown, the agent, 192.168.100.176 is available in the territory named
ALL on the left. Users can shift the monitoring territory from ALL to Taipei simply by selecting
Taipei in the Drop-down list on the right.

42

IDL series User Guide

d. Choose the agent, 192.168.100.176 on the left and then click on
. The agent IP
will appear on the right and will be mornitored under the territory, Taipei.

e. If users want to move the agent IP from Taipei to other territory, select a desired agent
to shift it to the left.
IP and click on
f. Click on
same window.

to exit the window or continue to perform other operations in the

Correspondently, the Agent Desktop displays that Agent IP 192.168.100.176 has been
monitored under the territory, Taipei.

IP DSLAM

43

2.4.2.3 Agent Manager
All of the IP DSLAM agents that are to be managed by the IDL Manager must be
“registered” to the system. The “registration” process is to make the system aware of
agent’s IP address and alias name. Once an agent is registered, it is put into the
“demount” agent pool, which is still “inactive” for the network monitor. You then have
to activate it if you want it to be monitored. An active agent can also be deactivated
from the monitor for certain operational purpose when necessary. Agent Manager is
designed for you to perform these operations.
Agent Manager Window
Choose Agent Manager from Tools Menu, this window then appears.

Field
IP Address
Alias name
Description

Definition
***.***.***.***
Name of IP DSLAM
Note

If to add an agent to the system,
a. Select a territory that a new agent belongs to. Click on
activate territory manager.

to

b. Click on
, the data fields then cleared to blank for entering the data.
Enter values in fields, IP Address, Alias Name and Description. The Apply
buttons to the left of these fields then become enable.
c. Click on

to apply the agent to the system.

d. If to activate (so-called “Mount”) the system’s monitoring of an agent, click on
the required agent entry in the Demount agent list, then click on
. The
agent will appear on the Mount agent list on the right.
e. Click on

44

to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.

IDL series User Guide

If to remove an agent to the system,
.

a. Click the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on
The agent will disappear.
b. Click on
in the same window.

to exit the window or continue to perform other operations

If to change the information of an agent,
a. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list. The information of the
selected agent will then presented on the data fields.
to Change IP, Alias Name, and Description and then

b. Click on

becomes enable.
c. Click on

to apply the change to the system.

d. Click on

to exit the window.

Note:
User can only change alias and description of the agent in the Mount agent list and
changing IP is prohibited.

If to activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,
a. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on the Mount
. The agent will appear on the Mount agent list.
button
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations
b. Click on
in the same window.
If to de-activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,
a. Select the required agent in the Mount agent list, and then click on the Demount
button
. The agent will then disappears from the Mount agent list and
appears on the Demount agent list on the left.
b. Click on

IP DSLAM

to exit the window.

45

2.4.2.4 Telnet
Users can use the Telnet to connect to a specific IP DSLAM, and then monitor and
interact with the system.
How to activate Telnet from Agent Desktop?

a. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.
b. Click on the right button of mouse and then select Telnet or choose Telnet from
tool menu in the IDL Manager window’s menu bar. Then Telnet screen will
come up immediately.

c. Enter user name and password to access the CID screen.
Note:
The default login and password are admin.

46

IDL series User Guide

2.4.2.5 PING
Ping is a command used to determine whether a particular IP DSLAM is currently
connected to the agent. It works by sending a packet to the specific IP address and
waiting for reply.
How to activate PING from Agent Desktop?

a. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.
b. Click on the right button of mouse and then select Ping or choose it from tool
menu in the IDL Manager window’s menu bar. Ping screen will come up
immediately and then starts to send packets to check the connection with the IP
DSLAM.

c. After showing the connection status, the screen will be closed automatically.

IP DSLAM

47

2.4.2.6 User Manager
The IDL Manager uses user accounts, password as well as power level (system
privileges) to control access and log in. There are three types of privileges, Supervisor,
Constructor and Tester.
Supervisor:
The highest level user with this privilege can access ANY functions and data.
Constructor:
User can set and modify the configuration of network equipments.
Tester:
User can run maintenance test, such as loop back function.

To perform user manager, proceed as follows,
Choose User Manager from Tools Menu to access this window. From the following
window, User Manager, you can add and remove users as well as change passwords,
which are used to control the login.

Field
User Account
User Name
Description
Power Level

48

Definition
an ID to be used for login
The full name of a user
Remarks for note purpose
Privileges; Administrator and Tester

IDL series User Guide

If to add a User Account to the system,
a. Click on

, the Security window then prompts.

b. Enter the account information as described in Security window below.
c. Click on

to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.

If to remove a User Account from the system,
a. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account selection
list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.
b. Click on

to delete it.

c. Click on

to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.

If to change User Account information,
a. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account selection
list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.
b. Click on

button, the Security window then prompts.

c. Change the account information as described in Security window below.
d. Click on

button to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations. Or click on

IP DSLAM

button, the Security window then prompts.

49

Field
User Account
User Name
Description
Password
Verify Password
To change password
when next login
Account Suspended
Power Level

Definition
An ID to be used for login
The full name of a user
Remark for note purpose
Any character string, including blank
Re-enter the password as a confirmation
If this is checked, the associated user needs to change
their password at the next login.
Suspend the account.
Privileges; Administrator and tester

This window is a daughter window of User Manager Window, and is used when
adding a user account or changing account information.
a. Either

or

is selected, this window appears.

b. Enter data in the fields, User Account, User Name, Description, and Password
as required. Re-enter the password in field, Verify Password, for purpose of
verification.
c. If to force the user to change their password at the next login, click on the
checkbox to the left of the field, To Change Password When Login Next Time.
d. If to suspend a user account, click on the checkbox to the left of the field,
Account Suspended.
e. If to assign a new Power Level to the user, click on the desired entry in the
Demount list, then click on the Mount button,
. The selected Power
Level entry will then be added to the Mount list on the right.
f. If to remove a Power Level from the user, click on the desired entry in the Mount
list on the right, then click on the Demount button,
Power Level entry will then be removed.

.

The selected

g. Click on
to complete the operation or
to abort the
change. Either one is selected; the window is exited to User Manager Window.

50

IDL series User Guide

2.4.3 Windows
Users may open many daughter windows in the IDL Manager. To benefit user’s viewing
every Window, Commands of the Windows menu is designed to arrange daughter windows.
Those commands will be introduced separately.

2.4.3.1 Cascade
Choose Cascade from Windows menu in the IDL Manager menu bar. The cascade
command can cascade those opened windows as follows. User can select a window
to perform operations or view status simply by clicking on a specified window.

2.4.3.2 Next Window
Next Window helps user to view next window so that it will bring the window in the
second layer to front.

2.4.3.3 Previous Window
Previous Window command can help user to bring the previous window to front.

IP DSLAM

51

2.4.3.4 Arrange Icons
By selecting Arrange Icons of Windows Menu in the menu bar, it will locate those
minimized daughter windows in the bottom left of IDL Manager Window as the
following figure shown. User can select a required icon to perform IDL Manager
Management.

2.4.4 Help
Allow users to view the software version.
2.4.4.1 About
To view the version of IDL Manager, choose “About” command via Help menu, as
to exit the window.
shown in the following figure. Click on

52

IDL series User Guide

3. IDL Manager Management
After successfully setting up the environment of IDL Manager, you can manage different IP
DSLAM via your IDL Manager remotely. This chapter will tell you how to interact with a
specified IP DSLAM.

3.1 Agent Desktop
Agent Desktop is the main window for the network administrators in performing their
day-to-day network monitoring jobs. Like the standard desktop of MS Windows, Agent
Desktop appears once the system is started. First appears on the Agent Desktop is the
status of agents by an array of colors. By which you may monitor the status of agents, and
judge if they are normal or in situations of alarms. You may then double click on the
required agent IP to activate the event log window. Similarly, the Mounted Agents Desktop
can be started up by double clicking on the icon of territory.

3.1.1 Agent Desktop Window
In the Agents Desktop, press

to refresh the status of all agents.

Gray icon indicates that the agent is disconnected.
Green icon indicates that the agent is in normal condition.
Red icon indicates that “Major Alarm” is occurred to the
agent and requires network administrator’s attention.
Network administrator pays attention to alarms by looking
into the alarms using Event Log – Outstanding.
The red icon will turn into a yellow icon after the network
administrator has looked into the alarms.

However, this

does not mean the situation is released. If any new alarm
happens, yellow will turn red.
Black icon indicated that the agent is demounted.

IP DSLAM

53

3.1.2 Mounted Agent Desktop
Mounted agent desktop provides users with flexibility in viewing your network using
graphical presentation of network elements. Mounted agent desktop can be easily activated
by double clicking the icon of territory in the agent desktop and appears promptly as shown
in the following figure. By the mounted agent desktop, the location of agents and overall
network status of a specific territory is presented.

: This icon can be moved to where the agent is located in the map. In addition, its
color also changes with the status of the agent. For example, the icon in red means that
alarm is occurred to the agent and requires network administrator’s attention.

54

IDL series User Guide

3.2 Active Function Management Windows
Via IDL Manager, users can remotely monitor the current status of a specified IP DSLAM,
and then proceeding advanced configuration. To activate the function management
windows, choose a specified agent that you want to manage, and then double click the
agent. After that, the function management windows, including Function window and Front
panel status window, will prompt as shown in the following figure.

The Function management windows include Function List Window and Front Panel Status
Window which are provided to monitor the status in real time and configure related settings.

3.2.1 Function List Window
From the Function List Window, users can activate a specified function
immediately by double clicking a specified item.

IP DSLAM

55

3.2.2 Front Panel Status Window
After choosing a specified agent, the Front Panel Status Window, together with the
Function Window, will come out immediately to present the current status of front panel of
the IP DSLAM.

3.3 Default Setting
This section describes how to get the information of the default setting of the IP DSLAM.
Click on “Default Setting” from the Function List window. The window appears as follows.

In the default setting window, the status of, IP, System, VCC connection, DSL line profile
and Alarm profile are displayed clearly. How to modify them will be introduced in the
following sections.

56

IDL series User Guide

3.4 System Information
This section describes how to get and input the information of the IP DSLAM. Double Click
on “System Information” from the Function List Window. The window appears as follows.

Field
Name
Location
Contact
Vendor
Object ID
DST
UpTime
HwVersion
CPSwVersion
Log Threshold

Time Zone

Current Time

IP DSLAM

Definition
Alias name of the IP DSLAM
Location of the IP DSLAM
The contact person of the IP DSLAM
The vendor of the IP DSLAM
Vendor ID
Daylight Savings Time has been enabled or not.
System up time
Hardware version of the IP DSLAM.
Control plant version
The severity level of the trap equal to or lower than that shall be logged.
0 represents log threshold is disabled. 1 is the lowest and represents critical
traps. Valid values: 0-4
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values, followed by their descriptions.
IDLW - International Date Line West
EET - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1
NT - Nome
IST - Israeli Standard
HST - Hawaii Standard
BT - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2
CAT - Central Alaska
IT - Iran
AHST- Alaska-Hawaii Standard
ZP4 - "Russia Zone 3"
YST - Yukon Standard
ZP5 - "Russia Zone 4"
PST- US Pacific Standard
INST - "Indian Standard"
MST- US Mountain Standard
ZP6 - "Russia Zone 5"
CST- US Central Standard
NST - "North Sumatra"
EST- US Eastern Standard
WAST - West Australian Standard
AST- Atlantic Standard
SSMT - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6
NFST- Newfoundland Standard
JT- Java
NFT- Newfoundland
CCT - China Coast, Russia Zone 7
BRST-Brazil Standard
ROK - Korean Standard
AT- Azores
KST - Korean Standard
WAT - West Africa
JST - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8
GMT - Greenwich Mean
CAST - Central Australian Standard
UTC - Universal (Coordinated)
EAST - Eastern Australian Standard
WET - Western European
GST - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9
CET - Central European
IDLE - International Date Line East
FWT - French Winter
NZST - New Zealand Standard
MET - Middle European
NZT - New Zealand
MEWT - Middle European Winter
Example: IDLW , that stands for
SWT - Swedish Winter
International Date Line West
The current time.

57

3.5 Current Event
Describes the facility for the network administrators to track and trace the history of events
happened and released. Current Event window can be activated from Function List Window.
There are three daughter windows provided to accomplish above tasks.

3.5.1 Outstanding Event
Allow you to view the outstanding events or status and system information. If to view the
event log of a specific agent, click “Current Event” from Function List Window. The Event
Log window appears as follow.

58

Field

Description

Happen Time

The date/time when the event is occurred.

Agent

The IP address of the agent associated

Grade

Severity level of event or status.

DSL

DSL Port

Site

Down stream or upstream

Description

The description of the event or status.

IDL series User Guide

3.5.2 Closed Event
This window allows you to browse the closed alarms and events of specified agents. Click
on the tab of “Closed“, that will bring the closed screen to front as the following figure
shown. Click on

IP DSLAM

to clear all records or

to exit the window.

Field

Description

Happen Time

The date/time when the event is occurred.

Release Time

The date/time when the event is closed.

Agent

The IP address of the agent associated

Grade

Severity level of event or status.

DSL

DSL Port

Site

Down stream or upstream

Description

The description of the event or status.

59

3.5.3 Archived
This window allows you to browse the expired records, which can be configured in the
Environment window. Click on the tab of “Archived“, that will bring the archived screen to
front as the following figure shown. Click on

to clear all records or

to

exit the window.

60

Field

Description

Happen Time

The date/time when the event is occurred.

Release Time

The date/time when the event is closed.

Agent

The IP address of the agent associated

Grade

Severity level of event or status.

DSL

DSL Port

Site

Down stream or upstream

Description

The description of the event or status.

IDL series User Guide

3.6 System
This section allows users to perform commit and reboot that will be introduced as follows.

3.6.1 Commit and Reboot
This section describes how to commit the current configuration to flash or reboot the IP
DSLAM. Double Click on “Commit and Reboot” from the Function List Window. The
System Information screen appears as follows.

a. If to commit the active configuration to the flash, click on

b. If to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration, click on

c. Click on

IP DSLAM

.

.

to close the window.

61

3.7 Configuration
This section describes how to configure the IP DSLAM by selecting Configuration from
Function List window.

3.7.1 VLAN
Allow user to view and modify VLAN configuration. Double Click on “VLAN” from the
Function List Window. The VLAN configuration window appears as follows.

Field

Definition

VLAN ID

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for
a multicast mac addr is shared across vlans hence vlan id
is an optional parameter. In devices supporting
"Independent Vlan for multicast" capability each vlan can
have its own information for a multicast mac addr hence
vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the commands
other than - get. For No Vlan case vlan id is not required.

VLAN Name

62

Egress PVC

Name of the VLAN
The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the
egress list for this VLAN by management.

Untagged PVC

The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for
this VLAN, as untagged.

IDL series User Guide

a. Select the VLAN to view or modify by using the VLAN ID drop-down list.
b. Use Egress PVC and Untagged PVC drop-down list to set the specified DSL port’s
Egress PVC and Untagged PVC.
c. Click on
to submit your settings or click on
Configuration window.

to close the VLAN

3.7.2 Ethernet
Allow user to view and modify Ethernet configuration. Double Click on “Ethernet” from the
Function List Window. The Ethernet Configuration window appears as follows.

Field
DHCP
Type
Admin Status
Operation Status
IP address
Mask
Gateway

Mgmt Vlan Index

IP DSLAM

Definition
DHCP client enabled or disabled
Uplink or Downlink
The desired state of UPLINK (enable/disable)
System is enabled or not.
IP address of the UPLINK
The network mask of the UPLINK.
Gateway IP
VLAN for management traffic on this interface. Nonzero value
of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true. If no Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'portvlanid'
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the
Management Vlan Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is
zero) doesn't exist on the system then management shall not
happen on this interface till the corresponding VLAN is created
with the Net side port as its member.

63

a. To view the Ethernet Configuration of UPLINK1, UPLINK2, or MGNT by using the
Select Ethernet drop-down list.
b. If to modify the Ethernet Configuration, click on
first and then proceeding
advanced configurations as shown in the following figure.

c. If to create a new Ethernet configuration, click on

and then select a new

Ethernet configuration by using Select Ethernet drop-down list. After that, users can
set related parameters as follows.

d. Click on
to submit your settings or click on
Configuration window.

64

to close the Ethernet

IDL series User Guide

3.8 DSL
This section describes how to configure DSL settings by selecting DSL from Function List
Window.
3.8.1 Profile
Allow users to configure Line Profile and Alarm Profile.
3.8.1.1 Line Profile
If to configure Line Profile, double click on “Line Profile” from the Function List
Window. The Line Profile configuration window appears.

Field
Line Type

Definition
The ADSL line type, Fast or Interleaved.

Transmit Rate Mode

Defines what form of transmitting rate, Fixed or adaptAtStartup.

Target SNR (dB/10)
Min Tx Rate(bps)

Target Signal / Noise Margin. (0-310).
The minimum transmitting rate of ATU-C side or ATU-R side.
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its transmit
rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.
Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS can also
be disabled.
Preferred standard compliance. Outcome is dependent
upon standard support of the remote unit. GlobespanVirata High Speed
ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only.
The maximum transmitting rate of ATU-C side or ATU-R side.
The value of Interleave Delay for this channel.
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin rises
above this level, the modem should attempt to increase its transmit rate.
In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.

Down Shift SNR (dB/10)
IntCorrectionUP
Preferred Standard
Maximum Transmit Rate
Interleave Delay (ms)
UP Shift SNR (dB/10)
IntCorrectionDown

This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream interleaved
buffer. RS can also be disabled.

Annex Type

This parameter is set as per Annex compliance of the code release.
GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only.

IP DSLAM

65

a. To create up a new line profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then
select the blank.

b. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and then
name the new line profile.
c. Click on
profile.

to submit your setting or click on

to delete a line

3.8.1.2 Alarm Profile
If to configure Alarm Profile, double click on “Alarm Profile” from the Function List
Window. The Alarm Profile Configuration window appears.

66

IDL series User Guide

Field

Definition

Loss of frame within 15 minutes

The threshold of the number of “Loss of Frame Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.

The threshold of the number of “Loss of Signal Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
The threshold of the number of “Loss of Link Seconds”
Loss of link within 15 minutes
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
(But only ATU-C side)
The threshold of the number of “Loss of Power Seconds”
Loss of power within 15 minutes
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
Loss of signal within 15 minutes

Errored seconds

The threshold of the number of “Errored Seconds” within
15 minutes performance data collection period.

a. To create a new alarm profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then
select the blank.
b. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and then
name the new alarm profile.
c. Click on

to submit or click on

to delete a alarm profile.

3.8.1.3 All Line Profile
Display all the Line Profile Configuration.

3.8.2 Port Config
Allow users to configure port configuration. Double Click on “Port Config” from the
Function List Window. The Port Configuration window appears.

IP DSLAM

67

Field
DSL Port
VPI
VCI

Definition
Port No. of the IP DSLAM
Virtual Path Identifier
Virtual Channel Identifier

Learning Status

The state of learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1)
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the
value disable indicates that unicast Mac address learning is
disabled on this bridge port.

Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable (1)
indicates that the entries learned on this port will not be aged out.
It also indicates that the entries learned on this port shall not be
Sticky Status
learned on any other port. The entries learned on this port can
only be removed by management action or by making the value
as disable (2), so that the entries can be aged out.
Pvid
Port VID
Accepted Frame Type Used to up/down connection.
Ingress Filter

When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames for
VLANs, which do not include this Port in its Member set. When
false, the port will accept all incoming frames.

Priority

Optional Connection priority. No VLAN tag, no priority.

a. Choose the port to configure from the DSL Port drop-down list.
b. Configure the Administration status as “Up” or “Down”.
c. Choose a Line Profile from the Line Profile Name drop-down list. If to configure a
Line Profile, Click on

to activate the Line Profile Configuration window.

d. Choose an Alarm Profile from the Alarm Profile Name drop-down list. If to configure
an Alarm Profile, Click on

to activate the Alarm Profile Configuration window.

If necessary, modify values of specified PVC, including VPI, VCI, Admin Status, Learning
Status, Sticky Status, Pvid, Accepted Frame Type and Ingress Filter, and priority.

e. Click on

to submit or click on

f. If to create new PVC, click on

to close the fmBridgeport window.

and then PVC2 appears and then users can

set perimeters via PVC2. after that, click on

68

to submit your setting.

IDL series User Guide

IP DSLAM

69

3.9 DSL PM
This section describes how to utilize DSL Performance Management by selecting “DSL
PM” from Function List window.
3.9.1 Physical Layer Info
Allow users to view the physical layer information of a specified DSL port from the IP
DSLAM. Double Click on “Physical Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The
Physical Layer Info window appears.

Field
SNR margin
Attenuation
Status
output power
attainable rate
ActualStandard
Bert Error
TxAtm CellCt
RxAtm CellCt
Start Progress
Idle Bert Error
Idle Bert Cells

70

Definition
Noise margin value. (dB)
Difference in the total power transmitted and the total power received by the peer
atu. (db)
Current status of the ATU line.
Total output power transmitted by atu. (dBm)
The maximum currently attainable data rate by the atu. (kbps)
Actual standard used for connection, based on the outcome of the negotiation
with the Remote Unit.
Provides the number of bit errors detected during BERT.
Provides Tx ATM cell counter.
Provides Rx ATM cell counter.
Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr.
0x0 – startup not in progress; 0x0 – 0x0FFF Handshake/Training/ Profile
Management/ Fast Retrain in progress; 0x8000 – 0x8FFF DSP firmware DownLoad in progress; 0xF000 – 0xFFFF illegal Parameter
Number of bit errors.
Number of idle cells.

IDL series User Guide

Bert Sync
Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.
Select Information Valid Indicates the information validity for the SELT operation conducted on the Xcvr.
Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the SELT information is valid on
Select Loop Length
the Xcvr.
Indicates whether the loop is short or open once when the SELT information is
Select Loop End
valid on the Xcvr.
Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once, when the SELT information is
Select Loop Gauge
valid on the Xcvr.

Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list to view a specified DSL’s physical Layer
Info. Click on

to close the window.

3.9.2 Channel Layer Info
Allow users to view the Channel layer information of a specified DSL port from the IP
DSLAM. Double Click on “Channel Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The
Channel Layer Info window appears.

Field
Interleave delay
Previous TX rate
Current TX rate
CRC block length
Current Atm Status
Rs Symbols
Rs Depth
Rs Redundency

Definition
Interleave delay for this channel. (milli-seconds)
Previous actual transmit rate on this channel if ADSL loop retain. (kbps)
Actual transmit rate on this channel. (kbps)
The length of the channel data-block on which the CRC operates.
Indicates the current ATM Status.
Indicates the number of DMT symbols per Reed-Solomon code word (S),
in the downstream direction.
Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream direction.
Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per Reed-Solomon code in
the downstream direction

Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list view a specified DSL’s channel Layer
Info. Click on

IP DSLAM

to close the window.

71

4. Application Note
4.1 Basic Configuration
The IP DSLAM provides multiple services to users according to the demand of application
scenarios. To reduce time consuming in deployment, this document provides simple and
easy configuration procedure according different applications.

4.1.1 Create a new user
Users can create a root user whose user name and password are “admin” as follow.

$create user name admin passwd admin root

Entry Created
Privilege

UserName

----------------------------------admin

admin

Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created
$

4.1.2 FD.cfg Configuration
Fd.cfg is a useful tool that contains a set of default configuration commands for IP DSLAM.
Using FD.cfg, you can do as follow.
z
z
z
z

72

Restore the default configuration
Modify FD.cfg
Upload FD.cfg
Create new services

IDL series User Guide

4.1.2.1 Contents of FD.cfg
Use WordPad or Word to open FD.cfg. (See the following figure)

The default configuration in FD.cfg summarized as follows.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z

Default IP: 192.168.100.111
SNTP: disable
RFC-1483 Bridge mode only
One PVC (8/81) for each ADSL port
Bridge port numbering 1 to 48 mapping to PVC 8/81 for ADSL port1 to port 48/24
VLAN feature Disable
Eth0 enable (for uplink), its bridge port number is 385
Eth1 disable (for downlink)
MGMT interface disable

Note:
To view the detailed contents, please refer to the Appendix A.

IP DSLAM

73

4.1.2.2 Download procedure
This section describes how to upload FD.cfg to IP DSLAM by tftp server. The
configuration procedure is shown as follows.
Step 1:
Prepare FD.cfg and tftp server. (Including file_id.diz, tftpd32.exe;TFTPD32.HLP
and uninst.exe)
Step 2:
Put the “FD.cfg” and “tftpd32” at the same folder on your PC.
Step 3:
Activate tftpd32 and then tftp32 window appears.

Step 4:
Click on

to set the current directory where FD.cfg located.

Step 5:
Click Sever interface drop-down list to select the DHCP Server‘s IP.

74

IDL series User Guide

Step 6:
Assign an IP pool starting address.

Step 7:
Rename the boot file as FD.cfg.

Step 8:
Input the mask

Step 9:
Save the configuration.

Step 10:
If needed, click the settings button to re-configure your setting.

Step 11:
Activate Telnet and login IP DSLAM.

IP DSLAM

75

Step 12:
Input ‘list’ to show the path and s/w information
$list
Name
Acc

Ver

Time

Size

State

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------/nvram/bin/bootptftp/
TftpBootp.bin

1

Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004

111064

RO

active

/nvram/bin/control/
CP.bin.gz

1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004

1280744

RW

active

1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004

231572

RW

active

/nvram/bin/dataplane/
DP.bin.gz
/nvram/bin/decompressor/
Decompressor.bin

1

Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004

81928

RO

active

/nvram/bin/dslphy/
gsv_dsl_AD_DM_3C00000C.bin.gz

1

Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004

155220

RW

active

/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
FD.cfg

1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004

19136

RW

active

$

Step 13:
Input ‘remove fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 1’ to remove the
obsolete FD.cfg file.
$remove fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 1

FLASH program starts at ADDR 20008
File Removed
$

Step 14:
Input ‘download src FD.cfg dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg ip 192.168.100.66’ to
download config file “fd.cfg” from Server PC to IP DSLAM.
Note:
The file name to download could be different from FD.cfg but do not change the path.
dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg is the path of firmware file located on IP DSLAM.

76

IDL series User Guide

$download src FD.cfg dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg ip 192.168.100.66

Downloading the File...
......................................
Block 1 erase in progress
........Flash block 1 erase successful...

FLASH program starts at ADDR 20000
###############

Step 15:
Input ‘upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg’ to upgrade and activate the
access state.
$upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 2
FLASH program starts at ADDR 2000c
$

Step 16:
Input ‘commit’ to store your new configuration before rebooting.
$commit

Step 17:
Input ‘reboot config default’ to let your new configuration take effect.
$reboot config default

IP DSLAM

77

4.1.3 How to create myconfig.cfg
z myconfig.cfg is a txt file that ensures all commands be executed at once.
z 4.1.3.3 shows the format of myconfig.cfg.
z If there are many configurations you would like to execute then you can write all
commands into myconfig.cfg and then execute it at once.
z Be note to save ($commit) to IP DSLAM if this would be executed after rebooting.
z Required of equipment: TFTP Server (Tftpd32).
4.1.3.1 TFTP Server Configuration
Step
1

Image

Usage
1. Click “Browse” bottom to indicate current
directory of firmware.
2. Click down-arrow bottom to indicate IP of
DHCP Server.
3. Assign starting address for IP pool.
4. Input subnet mask
5. Save input parameters.
6. Press “Setting” bottom to configure more
details
(option)

2

78

7. After assigned this parameter and reboot
Tftpd32 that “Current Directory” at previous
step will follow it.

IDL series User Guide

4.1.3.2 myconfig.cfg Configuration
Step Image

Usage

1

1. Enable TFTP Server

Enable TFTP server (tftpd32)

and direct the
myconfig.cfg path for it.
2

$list
2. List the table and verify
Name
Ver Time
Size
Acc State
that myconfig.cfg had not
------------------------------------------------------------------------------created.
/nvram/bin/bootptftp/
TftpBootp.bin
1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 111064
RO active
/nvram/bin/control/
CP.bin.gz
1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 1293028
RW active
/nvram/bin/dataplane/
DP.bin.gz
1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 231572
RW active
/nvram/bin/decompressor/
Decompressor.bin
1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 81928
RO active
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
gsv_dsl_AD_DM_3C00000C.bin.gz1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 155220
RW active
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
FD.cfg
1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 18973
RW active

3

$download src myconfig.cfg dest /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg ip
192.168.100.188
Downloading the File...
....................................
Block 30 erase in progress
........Flash block 30 erase successful...

3. Download myconfig.cfg to
NVRAM.
4. 192.168.100.188 is the
PC of TFTP Server..

FLASH program starts at ADDR 3c0000
###############
FLASH program starts at ADDR 3c0000
Download session Completed,Bytes received 18180...
$
4

$apply fname /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg

5

$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-71 lowif atm-23 vpi 8 vci 82
Entry Created
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-71 lowif aal5-71
:
:
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-145 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 83
Entry Created
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-145 lowif aal5-145
Entry Created
$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-145 portid 146 learning enable status
enable
Entry Created
$
$commit

5. Apply to execute the
commands step by step.

6. If this myconfig.cfg will be
running after
7. It will be disappear after
“reboot config default”.

IP DSLAM

79

4.1.3.3 Format of myconfig.cfg
verbose off

create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status enable

create atm vc intf ifname aal5-49 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-49 lowif aal5-49
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-49 portid 50 learning enable status enable
：
：
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-94 lowif atm-46 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-94 lowif aal5-94
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-94 portid 95 learning enable status enable

create atm vc intf ifname aal5-95 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-95 lowif aal5-95
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-95 portid 96 learning enable status enable

create atm vc intf ifname aal5-96 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 83
create eoa intf ifname eoa-96 lowif aal5-96
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-96 portid 97 learning enable status enable

create atm vc intf ifname aal5-97 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 83
create eoa intf ifname eoa-97 lowif aal5-97
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-97 portid 98 learning enable status enable
：
：
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-145 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 83
create eoa intf ifname eoa-145 lowif aal5-145
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-145 portid 146 learning enable status enable

80

IDL series User Guide

4.1.4 Line Rate Configuration
This section describes how to configure the transmission rate manually via CLI. Before
configuration, see follows.
1. Input the line rate by using hexadecimal values. Following tables shows the
hexadecimal values that are frequently used.
Hexadecimal

0x1f38300

0x177000

0x109a00

0x7d000

0x1f400

0xfa00

0x7d00

Decimal

32M

1.5M

1M

512K

128K

64K

32K

2. Be noted that GsStandard, GsTxPowerAtten and GsAnnexType must be modified
at the same time.
3. Frequently used commands are listed below for your reference:
z aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 atucgsannextype adsl2 atucgsstandard adsl2plus
atucgstxpoweratten 0 atucmaxintldelay 1
z atucfastmintxrate 0xfa00 aturfastmintxrate 0x7d00 atucgsannextype annexa
atucgsstandard glite atucgstxpoweratten 0 type fastonly atucrateadaptation fixed
RATE
ATUC

ATUR

IP DSLAM

Fixed/ Adaptive

Fixed/ Adaptive

type

Standard

Interleaved / fast

Adsl2+ / G.dmt /

only

G.lite / T1.413

Interleaved / fast

Adsl2+ / G.dmt /

only

G.lite / T1.413

Annex type
Adsl2 / annex A

Adsl2 / annex A

81

4.1.4.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Disable the DSL port that you want to re-configure its transmission rate.
$modify adsl line intf ifname dsl-0 disable
IfName

: dsl-0

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr

:0

Coding Type

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Gs Action

: startup

Admin Status

: Up

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

Oper Status

: Down

q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual

:-

Trans Atuc Config

: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped

q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOn

Trans Atur Cap

: ansit1413

q9921PotsOverlapped

q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
PM Conf PMSF

:-

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

Set Done

IfName

: dsl-0

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr

:0

Coding Type

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Gs Action

Admin Status

: Down

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

Oper Status

: startup
: Down

q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual

:-

Trans Atuc Config

: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped

q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped

82

GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOn

Trans Atur Cap

:-

IDL series User Guide

PM Conf PMSF

:-

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
$
Thu Jan 01 00:01:49 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ADSL ATUC Up : Interface - dsl-1

Step 2:
Set the line rate you need.
$modify adsl line profile ifname dsl-0 atucintlmaxtxrate 0x177000 aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 atucgsannextype
annexa atucgsstandard glite atucgstxpoweratten 0 atucmaxintldelay 1

IfName

: dsl-0

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------Rate Adaptation

: adaptAtStartup

Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 60

GsRsIntCorrectionUp

: 125us

: 310

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

:0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

:0

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 63

GsTxStartBin

: 0x6

GsTxEndBin

: 0x1ff

GsRxStartBin

: 0x6

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

GsMaxBitsPerBin

: 15

GsMaxDCo

GsRxBinAdjust

: Disable

GsEraseProfiles

: Disable

GsAdi2x

: standard

GsStandard

: adsl2PlusAuto

GsInitiate

:-

GsTxPowerAtten

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 1Ms

: 256

:0

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

: Disable

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

: Disable
: Expanded

GsDrStby

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

GsEscapeFastRetrain

: Disable

GsFastRetrain

: Disable

GsBitSwap

: Enable

GsNtr

: LocalOcs

GsAlctlUsVer

: Unknown

GsAnnexType

: adsl2

GsUseCustomBin

: Disable

GsPsdMaskType

: Adsl2NonovlpFlatDmtConfMode

GsExtRsMemory

: notpresent

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd

: 0x40

GsAdvertisedCapabilities
GslTriggerMode
Type

IP DSLAM

Max Snr Margin(dB/10)

GsFullRetrain

ParamHybridLossTestStart
GsDmtTrellis

: Enable
: ecMode
: 0x2
: on

: AnnexA
: Disable
: interleavedOnly

83

GsDnBinUsage

: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile

:-

Data Boost

: Enable

Conf PM Mode

:

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 60

Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)

: 0xfa000

MSG Min Ds

: 4000

FrontEnd H/W Design

: El1508

H/W Pwr Reduction

: Disable

GsUsBitSwap

: Enable

PML2 Entry Thresh Rate

: 0x3e800

PML2 Entry Rate Min Time

: 1800

Upstream PSD

: Standard

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 0

Minimum INP

: InpAuto

PML2 Exit Thresh Rate

: 0x7d000

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 60

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 30

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 90

Min Upshift Time(sec)

: 30

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

: 30

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 16

MSG Min Us

: 4000

Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310

Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
________________________________________________________________________
Set Done
IfName

: dsl-0

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------Rate Adaptation

: adaptAtStartup

Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 60

GsRsIntCorrectionUp

84

: 125us

Max Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 310

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

:0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

:0

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x177000

Max Intl Delay(ms)

:1

GsTxStartBin

: 0x6

GsTxEndBin

: 0x1ff

GsRxStartBin

: 0x6

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

GsMaxBitsPerBin

: 15

GsMaxDCo

GsRxBinAdjust

: Disable

GsEraseProfiles

: 256
: Disable

IDL series User Guide

GsAdi2x

: standard

GsInitiate

:-

GsStandard
GsTxPowerAtten

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 1Ms

: gLite
:0

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

: Disable

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

: Disable
: Expanded

GsDrStby

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

GsEscapeFastRetrain

: Disable

GsFastRetrain

: Disable

GsBitSwap

: Enable

GsNtr

: LocalOcs

GsAnnexType

: AnnexA

GsAlctlUsVer

GsUseCustomBin

: Disable

GsFullRetrain

GsPsdMaskType

: Adsl2NonovlpFlatDmtConfMode

GsExtRsMemory

: notpresent

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd

: 0x40

GsAdvertisedCapabilities

: Unknown
: Enable
: ecMode

ParamHybridLossTestStart

: 0x2

GsDmtTrellis

: on

: AnnexA

GslTriggerMode

: Disable

Type

: interleavedOnly

GsDnBinUsage

: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile

:-

Data Boost

: Enable

Conf PM Mode

:

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 60

Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)

: 0xfa000

MSG Min Ds

: 4000

FrontEnd H/W Design

: El1508

H/W Pwr Reduction

: Disable

GsUsBitSwap

: Enable

PML2 Entry Thresh Rate

: 0x3e800

PML2 Entry Rate Min Time

: 1800

Upstream PSD

: Standard

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 0

Minimum INP
PML2 Exit Thresh Rate

: InpAuto
: 0x7d000

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 60

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 30

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 90

Min Upshift Time(sec)

: 30

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

: 30

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d000

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 16

MSG Min Us

: 4000

Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310

Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310

IP DSLAM

85

Step 3:
Enable the port
$modify adsl line intf ifname dsl-0 enable

IfName

: dsl-0

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr

:0

Coding Type

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Gs Action

Admin Status

: Down

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

Oper Status

: startup
: Down

q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual

:-

Trans Atuc Config

: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped

GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOn

Trans Atur Cap

:-

PM Conf PMSF

:-

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

Set Done

IfName

: dsl-0

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr

:0

Coding Type

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Gs Action

Admin Status

: Up

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

Oper Status

: startup
: Down

q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual

:-

Trans Atuc Config

: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped

GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOff

Trans Atur Cap

:-

PM Conf PMSF

:-

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

86

IDL series User Guide

4.1.5 Set System Time
IDL series support SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), used to synchronize its clocks in
the Internet. IP DSLAM will get the system time via SNTP server while a SNTP sever is
created.

4.1.5.1 Configuration
Follow the steps below to set the SNTP server.
Note:
System time will lost while the system is powered off.

Step 1:
Set the IP DSLAM as the SNTP client
$create sntp?
Command
-------

Description
-----------

servaddr

SNTP Server address

$create sntp servaddr 192.168.100.253

Entry Created

Server Addr : 192.168.100.253 Status : active

Step 2:
Enable SNTP client
$modify sntp cfg enable

Status : Disable

Set Done

Status : Enable
$

IP DSLAM

87

Step 3:
Confirm the status of SNTP client
$get sntp stats

Requests count

:1

Invalid Response count : 0

Response count

:1

Lost Response count : 0

Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Apr 29 10:24:36 2004

Option 2: Set up the system time manually.
Step 1:
View the system information
$get system info

Description

:

Name

:

Location

:

Contact

:

Vendor

:

LogThreshold

:0

Object-id

: 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12

Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:4:46
HwVersion

: ADSL-1.0

CPLDVersion

: 1.4

CPSwVersion

: COL2.6.1.0.040412

CPSwVersion(Build)
DPSwVersion

: 1.00.040407-ADSL
: DP_B02_06_22_05

System Time

: Thu Jan 01 00:04:46 1970

Time Zone

: GMT

DST

: off

Services

: physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications

$

88

IDL series User Guide

Step 2:
Get SNTP parameter definitions
$modify system info?
Parameter

Description

---------

-----------

[ contact "" ]

Identification of the contact person

[ name "" ]

Name of the system

[ location "" ]

The physical location of this node

[ vendor "" ]

Vendor-specific information

[ logthresh  ]

The severity level of trap

[ systime "" ]

SysTime in format mon dd hh:mm:ss year

[ dst  ]

Daylight Saving Time

[ timezone "" ]

Time Zone

______________________________________________________________
Valid System Time Zone : IDLW|NT|HST|CAT|AHST|YST|PST|MST|CST|EST|AST|NFST|
NFT|BRST|AT|WAT|GMT|UTC|WET|CET|FWT|MET|MEWT|SWT|
EET|IST|BT|IT|ZP4|ZP5|INST|ZP6|NST|WAST|SSMT|JT|
CCT|ROK|KST|JST|CAST|EAST|GST|IDLE|NZST|NZT

Step 3:
Set up system time and time zone
$modify system info systime " May 10 10:17:00 2004" timezone "CCT"

Description

:

Name

:

Location

:

Contact

:

Vendor

:

LogThreshold

:0

Object-id

: 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12

Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18
HwVersion

: ADSL-1.0

CPLDVersion

: 1.4

CPSwVersion

: COL2.6.1.0.040412

CPSwVersion(Build): 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion
System Time

: Mon May 10 10:17:23 2004

Time Zone

: GMT

DST

: off

Services

IP DSLAM

: DP_B02_06_22_05

: physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications

89

Set Done
Description

:

Name

:

Location

:

Contact

:

Vendor

:

LogThreshold

:0

Object-id

: 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12

Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18
HwVersion

: ADSL-1.0

CPLDVersion

: 1.4

CPSwVersion

: COL2.6.1.0.040412

CPSwVersion(Build)
DPSwVersion

: DP_B02_06_22_05

System Time

: Mon May 10 10:17:00 2004

Time Zone

: CCT

DST

: off

Services

90

: 1.00.040407-ADSL

: physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications

IDL series User Guide

4.1.6 VLAN Configuration
IP series support port-based VLAN, and Group VLAN. This section describes how to create
two VLAN groups (VLAN ID = 2, and 3). ADSL ports 1 & 2 (PVC 8/81) will join in VLAN
group 2, and create new PVC (8/82) for ADSL1, and assign this PVC to VLAN group 3.
Besides, uplink interface ETH-0 will join VLAN group 2 & 3 as trunk interface.

4.1.6.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Create a VLAN group No.2, and assign to Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81),
and 385(Eth-0)
$create vlan static vlanname vlan2 vlanid 2 egressports 1 385 untaggedports 1

Entry Created

VLAN Name

: vlan2

VLAN Index

:2

Egress ports

:1

Forbidden Egress Ports

385
: None

Untagged Ports

:1

Bridging Mode

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

$

Step 2:
Set Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81) as PVID 2
$modify gvrp port info portid 1 portvlanid 2 acceptframetypes all ingressfilteri ng true

Port Id
Port VLAN Index

:1
:1

Accept Frame Types: All

Ingress Filtering

: False

Gvrp Status

: Disable

Failed Registrations

:0

Last Pdu Origin

: 00:00:00:00:00:00

Restricted Vlan Registration

: False

Set Done

Port Id
Port VLAN Index

IP DSLAM

:1
:2

Accept Frame Types: All

91

Ingress Filtering

: True

Gvrp Status

: Disable

Failed Registrations

:0

Last Pdu Origin

: 00:00:00:00:00:00

Restricted Vlan Registration

: False

$

Step 3:
Show current VLAN status
$get vlan curr info

VLAN Index

:1

VLAN Status

: Other

Egress ports
14

15

31

:1
16

32

17

33

2
18

3
19

4
20

5
21

6
22

7
23

8
24

9
25

10
26

11
27

12
28

13
29

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

:1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

30

4
7

48

385

Untagged Ports
14

15

31

16

32

17

33

18

34

19

35

36

20
37

21
38

22
39

23
40

24
41

25
42

26
43

27
44

28
45

29

30

46

4
7

48

385

Bridging Mode

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

VLAN Index

:2

VLAN Status

: permanent

Egress ports
Untagged Ports
Bridging Mode

:1
:1

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

VLAN Index

:3

VLAN Status

: permanent

Egress ports
Untagged Ports
Bridging Mode

:2

385

:2
: Residential

Flood support Status
Broadcast support Status

92

385

: enable
: enable

IDL series User Guide

Step 4:
Create new PVC (8/82) in ADSL port 1
z
Create atm vc and aal5 interface
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82

Entry Created

VC IfName
VPI

: aal5-48

Low IfName

:8

VCI

: atm-0
: 82

Admin Status

: Up

Oper Status

: Up

Aal5 Tx Size

: 1536

Aal5 Rx Size

: 1536

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel
MgmtMode
VC Type

z

AAL5 Encap

: Interleaved

: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)

: Data

:0

Row Status

: PVC

: active

VC Topology

: Point to Point

Create eoa interface

$create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48

Entry Created

IfName

: eoa-48

FCS

: False

Pkt Type

: ALL

Oper Status

LowIfName

: Up

Admin Status

: aal5-48

: Up

Step 5:
Create a new bridge port 49, and maps to new created PVC 8/82 in ADSL port 1.
$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status enable

Entry Created

Port Id

: 49

IfName

: eoa-48

Max Unicast Addresses : 16

Learning Status

Port Oper Status

: Enable

Port Admin Status: Enable

Sticky Status

: Disable

FDB Modify

: Enable

: Enable

Acl Global Deny Apply : Enable
Acl Global Track Apply: Enable

IP DSLAM

93

Step 6:
Create a new VLAN group No.3, and assign to Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC
8/82), and 385(Eth-0)
$create vlan static vlanname vlan3 vlanid 3 egressports 49 385 untaggedports 49

Entry Created

VLAN Name

: vlan3

VLAN Index

:3

Egress ports

: 49

Forbidden Egress Ports

385

: None

Untagged Ports

: 49

Bridging Mode

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

Step 7:
Set Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/82) as PVID 3
$modify gvrp port info portid 49 portvlanid 3 acceptframetypes all ingressfiltering true

Port Id

: 49

Port VLAN Index

:1

Accept Frame Types: All

Ingress Filtering

: False

Gvrp Status

Failed Registrations

:0

Last Pdu Origin

: Disable
: 00:00:00:00:00:00

Restricted Vlan Registration: False

Set Done

Port Id
Port VLAN Index

: 49
:3

Accept Frame Types: All

Ingress Filtering

: True

Gvrp Status

: Disable

Failed Registrations

:0

Last Pdu Origin

: 00:00:00:00:00:00

Restricted Vlan Registration: False

94

IDL series User Guide

Step 8:
Modify the VLAN group 2, and add Bridge port 2 (ADSL port 2 PVC 8/81)
$modify vlan static vlanname vlan2 egressports 1 2 385 untaggedports 1 2

VLAN Name

: vlan2

VLAN Index

:2

Egress ports

:1

Forbidden Egress Ports
Untagged Ports
Bridging Mode

385

: None
:1
: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

Set Done

VLAN Name

: vlan2

VLAN Index

:2

Egress ports

:1

Forbidden Egress Ports
Untagged Ports
Bridging Mode

2

385

: None
:1

2

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

Step 9:
Add port3 to vlan2 use vlanid index
$modify vlan static vlanid 2 egressports 1 2 3 385 untaggedports 1 2 3
VLAN Name

: vlan2

VLAN Index

:2

Egress ports

:1

Forbidden Egress Ports
Untagged Ports
Bridging Mode

2

385

: None
:1

2

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

Set Done

IP DSLAM

VLAN Name

: vlan2

VLAN Index

:2

95

Egress ports

:1

Forbidden Egress Ports
Untagged Ports

2

385

: None
:1

Bridging Mode

3

2

3

: Residential

Flood support Status

: enable

Broadcast support Status

: enable

Step 10:
Modify the VLAN from 8/81 to 0/35
z
Set the AAL5 strat number is 0
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 disable

VC IfName
VPI

: aal5-1
:8

Low IfName
VCI

: 81

Admin Status

: Up

Oper Status

Aal5 Tx Size

: 1536

Aal5 Rx Size

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel
MgmtMode
VC Type

: atm-1

: PVC

: 1536

AAL5 Encap

: Interleaved
: Data

: Down

: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)

:0

Row Status

: active

VC Topology

: Point to Point

Set Done

VC IfName
VPI

: aal5-1
:8

Admin Status

VCI
: Down

Aal5 Tx Size

: 1536

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel
MgmtMode
VC Type

z

Low IfName

: Interleaved
: Data
: PVC

(Set VPI / VCI

: atm-1
: 81

Oper Status

: Down

Aal5 Rx Size

: 1536

AAL5 Encap

: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)
Row Status
VC Topology

:0
: active

: Point to Point

is 0 / 35)

$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 vpi 0 vci 35

VC IfName
VPI
Admin Status

96

: aal5-1
:8

Low IfName
VCI

: Down

Aal5 Tx Size

: 1536

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel

: Interleaved

: atm-1
: 81

Oper Status

: Down

Aal5 Rx Size
AAL5 Encap

: 1536
: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)

:0

IDL series User Guide

MgmtMode
VC Type

: Data

Row Status

: active

: PVC

VC Topology

: Point to Point

: aal5-1

Low IfName

: atm-1

Set Done

VC IfName
VPI

:0

Admin Status

VCI
: Down

Aal5 Tx Size

: 1536

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel

: Interleaved

MgmtMode
VC Type

: 35

: Data
: PVC

Oper Status

: Down

Aal5 Rx Size
AAL5 Encap

: 1536
: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)
Row Status
VC Topology

:0

: active
: Point to Point

Step 11:
Set AAL5 as enable
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 enable

VC IfName
VPI
Admin Status

: aal5-1
:0

: 1536

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel

: Interleaved

VC Type

VCI

: Down

Aal5 Tx Size

MgmtMode

Low IfName

: Data
: PVC

: atm-1
: 35

Oper Status

: Down

Aal5 Rx Size
AAL5 Encap

: 1536
: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)
Row Status
VC Topology

:0

: active
: Point to Point

Set Done

VC IfName
VPI

:0

Low IfName
VCI

: Up

Oper Status

Aal5 Tx Size

: 1536

Aal5 Rx Size

AAL Type

: AAL5

Channel

: Interleaved

VC Type

: Data
: PVC

: atm-1
: 35

Admin Status

MgmtMode

IP DSLAM

: aal5-1

AAL5 Encap

: Down
: 1536
: LLC Mux

Last Change (sec)
Row Status
VC Topology

:0

: active
: Point to P

97

4.1.7 Modify the Downstream/Upstream Rate
4.1.7.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Set ADSL port12 disable
$modify adsl line intf disable ifname dsl-11

IfName

: dsl-11

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr : 26

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Admin Status

: Up

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413

q9921PotsOverlapped

Coding Type
GsUtopia L2RxAddr
Gs Action

: Up

q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

l2PlusPotsOverlapped

q9921isdnOverlapped

q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads

q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped

Trans Atuc Actual

: q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped

GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOn

d

: 26
: startup

Oper Status

q9922potsOverlapped

Trans Atur Cap

: dmt

: q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Adsl2PlusPotsOverlappe

q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped

PM Conf PMSF

: idleop

Line DELT Conf LDSF

: inhibit

Set Done

Thu Jan 01 07:19:36 1970 : MAJOR ALARM : ADSL ATUC Down : Interface - dsl-11

IfName

: dsl-11

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr : 26

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Admin Status

: Down

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413

q9921PotsOverlapped

l2PlusPotsOverlapped

GsDmtTrellis
Trans Atur Cap
PM Conf PMSF

98

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Action

: startup

Oper Status

: Down

q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

q9922potsOverlapped

Trans Atuc Actual

Coding Type

q9921isdnOverlapped

q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads

q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped

:: trellisOn
:: idleop

IDL series User Guide

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

Step 2:
Set ADSL port 12 interleave mode Downstream 512K. The value is hex so you
must conversion to decimal.
$modify adsl line profile atucintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11

IfName

: dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------Rate Adaptation

: adaptAtStartup

Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 60

Max Snr Margin(dB/10)

GsRsIntCorrectionUp

: 125us

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120
Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

: 310

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

:0
: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Max Intl Delay(ms)

:0

GsTxStartBin

: 0x20

GsTxEndBin

: 0x1ff

GsRxStartBin

: 0x6

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

: 15

GsMaxDCo

GsMaxBitsPerBin
GsRxBinAdjust

: Disable

GsAdi2x

: standard

GsInitiate

:-

GsEraseProfiles
GsStandard
GsTxPowerAtten

: 256
: Disable
: adsl2Plus
:-

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 1Ms

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

: Expanded

GsFastRetrain

: Disable

GsDrStby
GsEscapeFastRetrain
GsBitSwap
GsAnnexType

: Disable
: Enable
: adsl2

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

: LocalOcs

GsAlctlUsVer

: Unknown

: Disable

GsFullRetrain

GsPsdMaskType

:-

DmtConfMode

GsExtRsMemory

: notpresent

GsAdvertisedCapabilities
GslTriggerMode
Type
GsDnBinUsage

: 0x40

:1

GsNtr

GsUseCustomBin

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd

:1

: Enable
: fdmMode

ParamHybridLossTestStart
GsDmtTrellis

: 0x2
: on

: AnnexA
: Disable
: interleavedOnly
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile

IP DSLAM

:-

Data Boost

: Enable

Conf PM Mode

: pmstatel3enable

Upstream PSD

: Standard

pmstatel2enable

99

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Rate(bps)

: 0x10000

Conf GsREADSL2 Enable

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

: disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

:0

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 16

______________________________________________________________

Set Done

IfName

: dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------Rate Adaptation

: adaptAtStartup

Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60
GsRsIntCorrectionUp

: 310

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

:0

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d000

Max Intl Delay(ms)

:0

GsTxStartBin

: 0x20

GsTxEndBin

: 0x1ff

GsRxStartBin

: 0x6

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

GsMaxBitsPerBin

: 15

GsMaxDCo

GsRxBinAdjust

: Disable

GsEraseProfiles

: Disable

GsAdi2x

: standard

GsStandard

: adsl2Plus

GsInitiate

:-

GsTxPowerAtten

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 1Ms

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

GsDrStby

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

GsEscapeFastRetrain

: Disable

GsFastRetrain

GsBitSwap

: Enable

GsAnnexType

100

: 125us

Max Snr Margin(dB/10)

: adsl2

: 256

:-

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

:1
:1
: Expanded
: Disable

GsNtr

: LocalOcs

GsAlctlUsVer

: Unknown

GsUseCustomBin

: Disable

GsFullRetrain

GsPsdMaskType

:-

DmtConfMode

GsExtRsMemory

: notpresent

: Enable
: fdmMode

ParamHybridLossTestStart

: 0x2

IDL series User Guide

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd
GsAdvertisedCapabilities

: 0x40

GsDmtTrellis

: on

: AnnexA

GslTriggerMode

: Disable

Type

: interleavedOnly

GsDnBinUsage

: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : Data Boost

: Enable

Conf PM Mode

: pmstatel3enable

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Rate(bps)

: 0x10000

Conf GsREADSL2 Enable

Upstream PSD

: Standard

pmstatel2enable

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

: disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

:0

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

:0
: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 16

Step 3:
Set ADSL port12 interleave mode upstream 512K. The value is hex so you must
conversion to decimal.
$modify adsl line profile aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11

IfName

: dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------Rate Adaptation

IP DSLAM

: adaptAtStartup

Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 60

Max Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 310

GsRsIntCorrectionUp

: 125us

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

: 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

:0

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Max Intl Delay(ms)

:0

GsTxStartBin

: 0x20

GsTxEndBin

: 0x1ff

GsRxStartBin

: 0x6

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

GsMaxBitsPerBin

: 15

GsMaxDCo

GsRxBinAdjust

: Disable

GsEraseProfiles

: 256
: Disable

101

GsAdi2x

: standard

GsInitiate

GsStandard

:-

GsTxPowerAtten

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 1Ms

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

GsDrStby
GsEscapeFastRetrain

:1
:1
: Expanded

GsFastRetrain

: Enable

GsAnnexType

:-

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

: Disable

GsBitSwap

: adsl2Plus

: adsl2

: Disable

GsNtr

: LocalOcs

GsAlctlUsVer

: Unknown

GsUseCustomBin

: Disable

GsFullRetrain

: Enable

GsPsdMaskType

:-

DmtConfMode

: fdmMode

GsExtRsMemory

: notpresent

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd

: 0x40

GsAdvertisedCapabilities

: AnnexA

GslTriggerMode

ParamHybridLossTestStart
GsDmtTrellis

: 0x2
: on

: Disable

Type

: interleavedOnly

GsDnBinUsage

: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : Data Boost

: Enable

Conf PM Mode

Upstream PSD

: pmstatel3enable

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Rate(bps)

: 0x10000

Conf GsREADSL2 Enable

: Standard

pmstatel2enable

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

: disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

:0

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 16

______________________________________________________________

Set Done

IfName

: dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------Rate Adaptation

102

: adaptAtStartup

IDL series User Guide

Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60
GsRsIntCorrectionUp

Max Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 125us

: 310

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

:0

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x1f38300

Max Intl Delay(ms)

:0

GsTxStartBin

: 0x20

GsTxEndBin

: 0x1ff

GsRxStartBin

: 0x6

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

GsMaxBitsPerBin

: 15

GsMaxDCo

GsRxBinAdjust

: Disable

GsEraseProfiles

: Disable

GsAdi2x

: standard

GsStandard

: adsl2Plus

GsInitiate

:-

GsTxPowerAtten

: 256

:-

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 1Ms

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

GsDrStby

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

GsEscapeFastRetrain

: Disable

GsFastRetrain

: Disable

GsBitSwap

: Enable

GsNtr

: LocalOcs

GsAlctlUsVer

: Unknown

GsAnnexType

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

: adsl2

GsUseCustomBin

: Disable

GsFullRetrain

GsPsdMaskType

:-

DmtConfMode

GsExtRsMemory

: notpresent

:1
:1
: Expanded

: Enable
: fdmMode

ParamHybridLossTestStart: 0x2

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd: 0x40

GsDmtTrellis

: on

GsAdvertisedCapabilities: AnnexA
GslTriggerMode

: Disable

Type

: interleavedOnly

GsDnBinUsage

: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : Data Boost

: Enable

Conf PM Mode

Upstream PSD

: pmstatel3enable

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 180

Conf PML2 Rate(bps)

: 0x10000

Conf GsREADSL2 Enable

: Standard

pmstatel2enable

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

: disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120

Min Upshift Time(sec)

:0

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d00

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x109a00

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

IP DSLAM

:0
: 0x7d00

103

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x7d000

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 16

Step 4:
Set ADSL port12 enable.
$modify adsl line intf enable ifname dsl-11

IfName

: dsl-11

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr : 26

Coding Type

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Gs Action

: startup

Admin Status

: Down

Oper Status

: Down

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413

q9921PotsOverlapped

q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

q9922potsOverlapped
l2PlusPotsOverlapped

q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads

q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped

Trans Atuc Actual

:-

GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOn

Trans Atur Cap

q9921isdnOverlapped

:-

PM Conf PMSF

: idleop

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

Set Done

IfName

: dsl-11

Line Type

: interleavedOnly

GsUtopia

L2TxAddr : 26

Gs Clock Type

: oscillator

Admin Status

: Up

Trans Atuc Cap

: ansit1413

q9921PotsOverlapped

:-

GsDmtTrellis

: trellisOn

PM Conf PMSF

Gs Action
Oper Status

: startup
: Down

q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped

q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads

q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped

Trans Atuc Actual

Trans Atur Cap

: dmt

GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26

q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

q9922potsOverlapped
l2PlusPotsOverlapped

Coding Type

:: idleop

Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

104

IDL series User Guide

4.1.8 Enable SNMP Function
4.1.8.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Create SNMP community
$create snmp comm community public rw

Entry Created

Community

Access

------------------------public

RW

Setp 2:
Create SNMP host
$create snmp host ip 192.168.100.55 community public

Entry Created

Host Address

Community

----------------------------------192.168.100.55

public

$

Setp 3:
Create SNMP traphost
$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.100.55 community public

Entry Created

Ip Address : 192.168.100.55
Community : public
Port

IP DSLAM

: 162

Version : v2c

105

5. System Administration with CLI
5.1 About CLI Administration
Command Line Interface (CLI) is the primary user interface to administrate the system. CLI
can be accessed either from the CID port or telnet session. All CLI commands are simple
strings designed for the Administrator to manage your IP DSLAM easily.

5.1.1 Notation Conventions
z
z
z
z
z
z
z

Keywords in a command that you must enter exactly as shown are presented in bold.
User specified values in a command are presented in regular typeface, i.e., not bold or
italic.
Parameter values enclosed in < > must be specified.
Parameters enclosed in [ ] are optional. All modify parameters are shown as optional in
CLI commands even if there exists only a single parameter.
Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar ì|î only when one of the specified
values can be used.
Parameter values are enclosed in { } when you must use one of the values specified.
Parameters are enclosed in [ ] + when you can specify the parameter one or more
times, in the command line.

5.1.2 Command Structure
CLI commands conform to the following structure except for some basic service
com-mands such as ping, traceroute etc.
:
This is the first keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the type of operation to be
performed. "create" is an example of this keyword. However, if no action is specified it
will mean ìmodifyî. For example, modify bridge port intf portid portid status enable and
bridge port intf portid portid status enable ì mean the same.
:
This is the second keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the group of a CLI
command. "Bridge" is an example of this keyword.

106

IDL series User Guide

:
This is the third keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the sub group of a CLI
command. "Port" is an example of this keyword.
:
This is the fourth keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the sub group of a CLI
command. "intf" is an example of this keyword.
 :
These are  pairs and can vary from 0 to N. They indicate the parameter
values passed to a CLI command. "ifname aal5-0", "portid 20", are examples of tag
value pairs.

5.1.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms
This section contains a brief list of selected acronyms.
Abbreviation
AAL5
ACL
ADSL
Attribute
ATM
CLI
CP
DHCP
DP
DRA
DSL
EOA
GARP
GMRP
GVRP
IGMP
Index
IP
IRL
IVL
IVM
LACP
LAN
ME - Management Entity
MO ID - MO Identifier
MO - Managed Object
Operations
ORL

IP DSLAM

Description
ATM Adaptation Layer 5
Access Control list
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
An element of an MO
Asynchronous Transmission Mode
Command Line Interface
Control Plane
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Data Plane
DHCP Relay Agent
Digital Subscriber Line
Ethernet over ATM
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GARP Multicast Registration Protocol
GARP VLAN Regenration Protocol
InternetGroup Management Protocol
An element of a tabular MO that uniquely identifies an entry
Internet protocol
Input Rate Limiting
Individual VLAN Learning
Individual VLAN for Multicast
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Local Area Network
The entity, modified, controlled and monitored through MOs.
A unique number that identifies an MO. Interpretation of the
information passed to GenAg for an MO depends upon this
identifier
Logical unit of manageable information. It is similar to a MIB. An ME
is visible to the outside world in the form of one or more MOs that
constitute it.
GAG supports five operations - Create, Delete, Modify, Get,
Get-Next
Output Rate Limiting

107

OAM
PIA
RMON
STP
SNTP
SVL
SVM
Specific Agent
TEA
VC
VLAN

Operations Administration and Management
PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Remote Monitoring
Spanning Tree Protocol
Simple Network Time Protocol
Shared VLAN Learning
Shared VLAN for Multicast
Entities that use GenAg interfaces to manage the system
Target Engine Agent
Virtual Channel
Virtual LAN

5.1.4 CLI Command Brief Description
CLI Command - Action List


Description

alias
apply
climode
commit
Create

Used to create an alias for any CLI command.
Used to apply a configuration file stored on the system
Modes of cli/Prio change of CLI task
Used to commit the active configuration to the flash.
Used to create configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier and parameters.
Used to delete configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier and parameters.
If the delete action is confirmed, the configuration of objects will no longer exist.
Defragment the compact blocks in flash
Used to download a binary, configuration or user specific file from theremote host.
Used to view information of the selected identifier and parameters.
Used to view the detailed usage of CLI commands.
Used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit
Used to terminate the CLI.
Specify the length of memory set
Used to set or modify existing configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier
and parameters.
Used to change the password associated with a user login.
Use this command to change the permission of the files stored on flash
Used to send one or more ICMP messages to another host for a reply.
Used to set the new CLI prompt.
Used to read Flash
Used to read Memory
Used to restart the system.
Used to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit
Used to reset a port of system.
Used to save the configuration to Flash RAM.
Used to Sync
Used to trace the route to the specified destination.
Used to delete an alias.
Used to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the system.
Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before and after the
execution of a command (create, delete, modify, get).
Used to write Memory

delete
defragment
download
get
help
list
logout
memset
modify
passwd
permission
Ping
prompt
rdf
rdm
reboot
remove
reset
save
Sync
traceroute
unalias
upgrade
verbose
wrm

108

IDL series User Guide

5.1.5 Categories of the CLI commands
Command
802.1p Commands
Bridge port accessprio Commands
Bridge port prioinfo Commands
Bridge port trfclassmap Commands
Bridge port priomap commands
ABOND
ABOND group intf Commands

ABOND group stats Commands
Abond link entry Commands
Abond link stats Commands
Aggregation Commands
Active Standby aggr info Commands
Aggr intf Commands
LACP Aggr Commands
LACP AGGRPort Info Commands
LACP AGGRPort List Command
LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands
Redundancy aggr info Commands
Redundancy aggrport list Commands
Redundancy aggr stats Commands
ATM Commands
AAL5 VC Statistics Commands
ATM OAM CC Commands
ATM OAM Loopback Commands
ATM Port Commands
ATM VC Commands
ATM VC Statistics Commands
Bridging Commands
Bridge forwarding Commands
Bridge Mode Commands
Bridge Port Cap Commands
Bridge port forwarding Commands
Bridge Port Map Commands
Bridge Port Stats Table Commands
Bridge Port Table Commands
Bridge static mcast Commands
Bridge static ucast Commands
Bridge tbg traps Commands
GARP Port Info Commands
STP Group Commands
STP Port Commands
Transparent Bridging Table Commands
Bridge Multicast Commands
Bridge mcast forwarding Commands
Bridge mcast forwarding Commands
Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands
Bridge Static Multicast Commands
DHCP Commands
DHCP Client Commands
DSL Commands
ADSL Alarm Profile Commands
ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands
ADSL ATUC Channel Commands

IP DSLAM

Implemented by

Recommend for end-users

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes, but this is a legacy
command and you should
contact KEYMILE support
personal when you plan to
use.
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant

Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes

109

ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands
ADSL ATUC ChanIntvl Commands
ADSL ATUC Interval Commands
ADSL ATUC Perf Commands
ADSL ATUC Physical Commands
ADSL ATUC Trap Commands
ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands
ADSL ATUR ChanIntrvl Commands
ADSL ATUR Channel Commands
ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands
ADSL ATUR Interval Commands
Adsl atur intervalext Commands
ADSL ATUR Perf Commands
Adsl atur perfext Commands
ADSL ATUR Physical Commands
ADSL ATUR Traps Commands
DSL ATUR Trapsext Commands
ADSL Cap Commands
ADSL Line Intf Commands
ADSL Line Profile Commands
Dsl chip Commands
Dsl dsp chip Commands
Dsl dsp port Commands
Dsl system Commands
EHDLC Commands
Ehdlc intf Commands
Ethernet Commands
Dot3 stats Commands
Ethernet Commands
Filtering Commands
ACL Global Macentry Commands
Clfr list genentry commands
ACL Port Macentry Commands
Clfr namedlist genentry Commands
Clfr namedlist info Commands
Clfr namedlist map Commands
Clfr profile branch Commands
Clfr profile info Commands
Clfr profile node Commands
Clfr tree branch Commands
Clfr tree info Commands
Clfr tree map Commands
Clfr tree node Commands
Clfr tree profile Commands
Filter expr entry Commands
Filter list genentry Commands
Filter namedlist genentry Commands
Filter namedlist info Commands
Clfr tree node Commands
Clfr tree profile Commands
Filter expr entry Commands
Filter list genentry Commands
Filter namedlist genentry Commands
Filter namedlist info Commands
Filter namedlist map Commands
Create filter namedlist map
Filter rule actionmap Commands
Filter rule entry Commands
Filter rule map Commands
Filter rule stats Commands
Filter seq entry Commands

110

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant

Yes

Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

IDL series User Guide

Filter seq info Commands
Filter subrule arp Commands
Filter subrule clfrtree Commands
Filter subrule ether Commands
Filter subrule generic Commands
Filter subrule ICMP Commands
Filter subrule IGMP Commands
Filter subrule IP Commands
Filter subrule PPP Commands
Filter subrule TCP Commands
Filter subrule UDP Commands
EOA Commands
EOA Commands
IGMP Commands
Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands
Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands
Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands
Igmpsnoop port info Commands
Igmpsnoop port stats Commands
Igmpsnoop querier info Commands
Interface Commands
Interface Commands
IP Commands
IP Net to Media Table Commands
IP Route Commands
Ipoa intf Commands
ipoe intf Commands
Rid static Commands
MacProfile Commands
Macprofile global Commands
Resvdmac profile info Commands
Resvdmac profile param Commands
Management Traffic Commands
Ctlpkt group info Commands
Ctlpkt instance info Commands
Ctlpkt profile info Commands
PPPoE Tunneling Commands
PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands
PPPoE Global Config Commands
PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands
PPPoE Global Stats Commands
Pppoe intf Commands
PPPoE Session Stats Commands
PPPR Interface Commands
IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands
Dra global stats Commands
Dra instance entry Commands
Dra stats entry Commands
Dra global config Commands
Ia profile entry Commands
Pia instance entry Commands
Pia stats entry Commands
Pia global config Commands
QoS Commands
IRL Map Commands
IRL Profile Commands
IRL Stats Commands
Bridge rlinstance map Commands
Rl actionprofile info Commands
Rl instance info Commands
Rl profile info Commands

IP DSLAM

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant

Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant

Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes

Conexant
Conexant
Conexant

Yes
Yes
Yes

111

Scheduling profile class Commands
Scheduling profile info Commands
Trfclass profile class Commands
Trfclass profile info Commands
Trfclass stats Commands
RMON Commands
RMON Statistics Group Commands
RMON Task Info Commands
RMON Memory Pool info Commands
RMON Queue info Commands
RMON Net buffers info Commands
RMON Semaphore info Commands
RMON Event Group info Commands
SNMP Commands
SNMP Comm Commands
SNMP Host Commands
SNMP Stats Commands
SNMP Traphost Commands
SNTP Commands
SNTP Cfg Commands
SNTP servaddr Commands
SNTP Stats Commands
System Commands
Cbuftrace cfg Commands
System Configuration Save and Restore
Commands
System Control Table Commands
System crash info commands
System Info Commands
System manuf info Commands
System reboot info command
Nbize Commands
System Stats Commands
System Traps Commands
System Trap Log Table Commands
System version commands
Trace Log Configuration Commands
Trace Log Statistics Commands
VC Aggregation Commands
Atm vcaggr intf Commands
Atm vcaggr map Commands
VLAN Commands
GVRP Info Commands
GVRP Port Info Commands
GVRP Port Stats Commands
Vlan curr info Commands
VLAN mapprofile info Commands
Vlan mapprofile param Commands
VLAN Static Commands
Miscelleneous Commands
File Commands
Other Commands
PLANET CLI Commands
System ADSL Port Operation Status
Commands
System Alarm Commands
System Control Commands
System Hardware Inventory Commands
System ivmconfig Commands
System SFP Commands
System Version Commands
System Debug Commands

112

IDL series User Guide

Configuration FD Commands
Configuration USER Commands
Temperature Configuration Commands
Temperature State Commands
Temperature Supervision Commands
Temperature Configuration Commands
Temperature State Commands
Temperature Supervision Commands
System Commands
System Hardware Inventory Commands
System ivmconfig Commands
System Debug Commands

IP DSLAM

PLANET
PLANET
PLANET

Yes
Yes
No, for KEYMILE and
PLANET support personal
only

113

5.2 802.1p commands
5.2.1 Bridge port accessprio Commands
5.2.1.1 Get bridge port accessprio
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port accessprio [portid ] [regenprio ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
Type : Get-—Optional
Valid values: 1-386

regenprio 

Regenerated user priority from which the access priority is
mapped.
Type :

Get —Optional

Valid values: 0 - 7

Example:
$ get bridge port accessprio portid 1 regenPrio 1
Output:
PortId
:1
AcessPriority : 0

regenPrio : 1

Output field:
Field

Description

PortId

Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.

regenPrio

Regenerated user priority from which the access priority is mapped.

AcessPriority

The Outbound Access Priority the received frame is mapped to.

References:
Bridge port commands

114

IDL series User Guide

5.2.2 Bridge port prioinfo Commands
5.2.2.1 Get bridge port prioinfo
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port prioinfo [portid ]
5.2.2.2 Modify bridge port prioinfo
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port prioinfo portid portid [defprio ] [numtrfclass
] [defsvprio ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
Type:

Modify

-- Mandatory

Get

Optional

--

Valid values: 1 - 386
defprio 

The default ingress User Priority which can be configured by
the user.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7

numtrfclass


The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8

defsvprio

Not supported



Type: Modify Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7

Example:
$ get bridge port prioinfo portid 1

IP DSLAM

115

Output:
PortId
:1
DefaultPriority : 1
DefaultSVPriority : 1

NumTrafficClass : 3

Output field:
Field

Description

PortId

Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.

DefaultPriority

The default ingress User Priority which can be configured
by the user. The default value of this attribute can be 0 or 0
depending on interface over which the bridge port is
created. The default value is 0 for bridge port created over
ethernet or aggregator interface.

And the default value is 0

if the interface over which the bridge port has been created
is one of EOA, PPPoE and IPoE.
NumTrafficClass

The number of egress traffic classes supported on this
port. It depends on whether bridge port is over EOA, in
which case, the max number of queues is value of
maxnumeoaprioQs in gsvSystemSizingGroup and default
value is also value of maxnumeoaprioQs in nbsize or over
Ethernet / aggregated interface, in which case, the max
number of queues is value of MaxNumEthPrioQs in nbsize
and default value is also value of MaxNumEthPrioQs in
nbsize. It is modifiable only when the bridge port is in
disabled state.

DefaultSVPriority

Not supported

References:
Bridge port commands

116

IDL series User Guide

5.2.3 Bridge port trfclassmap Commands
5.2.3.1 Get bridge port trfclassmap
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port trfclassmap [portid ] [regenprio ]
5.2.3.2 Modify bridge port trfclassmap
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port trfclassmap portid  regenprio 
[trfclass ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Port number of the port for which this entry contains
bridge management information.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1-386

regenprio

The Priority value evaluated for the received frame. In



our case, it is the regenerated user priority. This
regenerated priority is mapped from user priority
determined by a) packet classifier rule indicating user
priority for that port b) user priority received in the tag
header and c) default source priority of the port, in that
order. It lies in the range 0-7
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7

trfclass 

The Traffic Class the received frame is mapped to. The
maximum value of trafficClass is defined by numTrfClass
parameter of Bridge Port PrioInfo. The default value of
this field shall be determined according to table 7-2
described in ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1d 1998 Edition

IP DSLAM

117

Document. This mapping is modifiable only when the
bridge port is in disabled state.
Type: Modify － Optional

Example:
$ get bridge port trfclassmap portid 1 regenPrio 1
Output:
PortId
:1
TrafficClass : 2

regenPrio : 1

Output field:
Field

Description

PortId

Port number of the port for which this entry contains
bridge management information.

regenPrio

The Priority value evaluated for the received frame. In
our case, it is the regenerated user priority. This
regenerated priority is mapped from user priority
determined by a) packet classifier rule indicating user
priority for that port b) user priority received in the tag
header and c) default source priority of the port, in that
order. It lies in the range 0-7

TrafficClass

The Traffic Class the received frame is mapped to. The
maximum value of trafficClass

is defined by

numTrfClass parameter of Bridge Port PrioInfo. The
default value of this field shall be determined according to
table 7-2 described in ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1d 1998 Edition
Document. This mapping is modifiable only when the
bridge port is in disabled state.

References:
Bridge port commands

118

IDL series User Guide

5.2.4 Bridge port priomap Commands
5.2.4.1 Get bridge port priomap
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port priomap [portid ] [usrprio ]
5.2.4.2 Modify bridge port priomap
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port priomap portid  usrprio 
[regenprio ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
Type:

Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional

Valid values: 1-386
usrprio 

The User Priority for a frame received on this port. Since it
can arrive in a tag header, it can have range 0-7.
Type:

Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional

Valid values: 0 - 7
regenprio

The priority to which the incoming User priority is mapped



for this port.
Type:

Modify --Optional

alid values: 0 - 7

Example:
$ get bridge port priomap portid 1 usrPrio 1

IP DSLAM

119

Output:
PortId
:1
RegenUserPrio : 1

UserPriority : 1

Output field:
Field

Description
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge

PortId
management information.
The User Priority for a frame received on this port. Since it can arrive in
UserPriority
a tag header, it can have range 0-7.
RegenUserPrio

The priority to which the incoming User priority is mapped for this port.

References:
Bridge port commands

120

IDL series User Guide

5.3 ABOND Commands
5.3.1 ABOND group intf Commands
5.3.1.1 Get abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond group intf [ifname ]
5.3.1.2 Create abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create abond group intf ifname groupid 
[ minaggrrateupstrm  ] [ minaggrratednstrm
 ] [ diffdelaytolupstrm  ]
[ diffdelaytoldnstrm  ] [ asmprotocol Enable | Disable ]
[ sidformat EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ] [ maxrxbitrateratio
 ] [ linkhecthrshld  ]
[ numoflinksupforgrpup One | All ] [ asmirlthreshold  ]
[ maxatmportusrate  ]
5.3.1.3 Delete abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete abond group intf ifname 

IP DSLAM

121

5.3.1.4 Modify abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify abond group intf ifname  [ groupid  ]
[ minaggrrateupstrm  ] [ minaggrratednstrm
 ] [ diffdelaytolupstrm  ]
[ diffdelaytoldnstrm  ] [ asmprotocol Enable | Disable ]
[ sidformat EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ] [ maxrxbitrateratio
 ] [ linkhecthrshld  ]
[ numoflinksupforgrpup One | All ] [ asmirlthreshold  ]
[ maxatmportusrate  ] [ enable | disable ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair Bonding



type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Modification and deletion is not
possible if interface is enabled
Type:

Create－ Mandatory
Delete --－Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

Valid values: 0 - 31
groupid 

This specifies the group id configured for this interface. This field is
configured statically when the bonded group is provisioned and must not be
changed while the group is in service. These fields may be used by an
operator to help identify mis-configuration or to assist in management or
debugging of the link.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional

minaggrrateupstrm

Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Upstream direction.



Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0

minaggrratednstrm

Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Downstream



direction.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0

122

IDL series User Guide

diffdelaytolupstrm

The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in



Upstream direction. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -4
Default value: 4

diffdelaytoldnstrm

The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in



downstream direction. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -24
Default value: 4

asmprotocol Enable

This parameter specifies whether Autonomous Status Messages will be

|Disable

exchanged between CO and CPE. If it is disabled then the group would be
bonded statically and CO would assume CPE to know all the configuration
parameters like SID format, number of links in the bonded group and the
links participating in bonding. If it is enabled then CO would inform all these
parameters to CPE using Autonomous Status Messages.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: enable

sidformat EightBitSid

SID Format: 8 bit or 12 bit SID. Only 8 bit format is being supported

|TwelveBitSid

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 1

maxrxbitrateratio

The maximum bit rate ratio among member links in a bonding group in



upstream direction.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -4
Default value: 4

linkhecthrshld

HEC Error percentage of the link upstream rate which will act as Threshold



for link to be part of group in Rx direction
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -10
Default value: 2

numoflinksupforgrpup
One | All

This field specifies the number of links required to be up for bonding to start
ASM protocol
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0

IP DSLAM

123

asmirlthreshold

IRL Threshold for ASM messages



Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
Default value: 8

maxatmportusrate

Maximum ATM port Upstream Rate



Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -8000
Default value: 4000

enable | disable

Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable

Example:
$ create abond group intf ifname abond-0 groupid 1 minaggrrateupstrm 5
minaggrratednstrm 5 diffdelaytolupstrm 0 diffdelaytoldnstrm 0 asmprotocol Disable
sidformat EightBitSID maxrxbitrateratio 2 linkhecthrshld 1 numoflinksupforgrpup
One asmirlthreshold 0 maxatmportusrate 0
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ifname
: abond-0
MinAggrRateUpstrm : 5
DiffDelayTolUpstrm : 4
AsmProtocol
: Disable
MaxRxBitRateRatio
:2
CtrlVpi
:0
NoOfLinksUpForGrpUp : One
MaxAtmPortUsRate
:0
Oper Status
: Up
Verbose Mode Off:

124

GroupId
:1
MinAggrRateDnstrm : 5
DiffDelayTolDnstrm : 4
SidFormat
: EightBitSID
LinkHecThreshold
:1
CtrlVci
:0
AsmIrlThreshold
:0
Admin Status

: Enable

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
Field

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair Bonding
type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Modification and deletion is not
possible if interface is enabled

GroupId

This specifies the group id configured for this interface. This field is configured
statically when the bonded group is provisioned and must not be changed
while the group is in service. These fields may be used by an operator to help
identify mis-configuration or to assist in management or debugging of the link.

MinAggrRateUpstrm

Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Upstream direction.

MinAggrRateDnstrm

Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Downstream direction.

DiffDelayTolUpstrm

The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in
Upstream direction.

DiffDelayTolDnstrm

The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in
downstream direction.

AsmProtocol

This parameter specifies whether Autonomous Status Messages will be
exchanged between CO and CPE. If it is disabled then the group would be
bonded statically and CO would assume CPE to know all the configuration
parameters like SID format, number of links in the bonded group and the links
participating in bonding. If it is enabled then CO would inform all these
parameters to CPE using Autonomous Status Messages.

SidFormat

SID Format: 8 bit or 12 bit SID. Only 8 bit format is being supported

MaxRxBitRateRatio

The maximum bit rate ratio among member links in a bonding group in
upstream direction.

LinkHecThreshold

HEC Error percentage of the link upstream rate which will act as Threshold for
link to be part of group in Rx direction

CtrlVpi

Control Channel VPI: VPI value being used for Sending and Receiving ASM
Messages

CtrlVci

Control Channel VCI: VCI value being used for Sending and Receiving ASM
Messages

NoOfLinksUpForGrpUp

This field specifies the number of links required to be up for bonding to start
ASM protocol

AsmIrlThreshold

IRL Threshold for ASM messages

MaxAtmPortUsRate

Maximum ATM port Upstream Rate

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.

IP DSLAM

125

5.3.2 ABOND group stats Commands
5.3.2.1 Get abond group stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond group stats [ifname ]
5.3.2.2 Reset abond group stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset abond group stats ifname 
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM based Multi pair Bonding
type of interfaces. Valid value is abond-X

Ifname


Type: Reset － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: abond-0-abond-1

Example:
$ get abond group stats ifname abond-0
Output:
ifname
: abond-0
AchievedAggrRateUpstrm : 10
CellLossUpstrmCurrent
: 12
CellLossUpstrmPrv15min
: 12
CellLossUpstrmCurrentDay : 12
CellLossUpstrmPrevDay
: 12
GroupFailureCntCurrent
: 15
GrpFailureCntCurrentDay
: 15
GrpUnavailableSecCurrent : 15
GrpUnavailblSecCurrentDay : 15
ASMTxCnt
: 10

126

AchievedAggrRateDnstrm
: 12
CellLossDnstrmCurrent
: 20
CellLossDnstrmPrev15Min : 20
CellLossDnstrmCurrentDay
: 20
CellLossDnstrmPrevDay
: 20
GroupFailureCntPrev15Min
: 15
GrpFailureCntPrevDay
: 15
GrpUnavailableSecPrev15Min : 15
GrpUnavailblSecPrevDay
: 15
ASMRxCnt
: 10

IDL series User Guide

GrpFailureReason
AsmRxCrcErrorCount

: MinRateNotAchievedUpAndDn
: 10

Output Fields:
Field

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based
Multi pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X

AchievedAggrRateUpstrm

Achieved aggregate data rate in bits per sec in upstream
direction.

AchievedAggrRateDnstrm

Achieved aggregate data rate in bits per sec in downstream
direction.

IP DSLAM

CellLossUpstrmCurrent

Group cell loss count upstream for current 15 minutes.

CellLossDnstrmCurrent

Group Rx cell loss count downstream for current 15 minutes.

CellLossUpstrmPrv15min

Group cell loss count upstream for Last 15 minutes.

CellLossDnstrmPrev15Min

Group cell loss count downstream for Last 15 minutes.

CellLossUpstrmCurrentDay

Group cell loss count upstream for current Day.

CellLossDnstrmCurrentDay

Group Rx cell loss count downstream for current Day.

CellLossUpstrmPrevDay

Group Rx cell loss count upstream for previous Day.

CellLossDnstrmPrevDay

Group Rx cell loss count downstream for Previous Day.

GroupFailureCntCurrent

Group failure count for current 15 minutes.

GroupFailureCntPrev15Min

Group failure count for previous 15 minutes.

GrpFailureCntCurrentDay

Group failure count for current Day.

GrpFailureCntPrevDay

Group failure count for previous Day.

GrpUnavailableSecCurrent

Group unavailable second current.

GrpUnavailableSecPrev15Min

Group unavailable second previous 15 Min.

GrpUnavailblSecCurrentDay

Group unavailable second current Day.

GrpUnavailblSecPrevDay

Group unavailable second for previous Day.

ASMTxCnt

Group ASM Tx count.

ASMRxCnt

Group ASM Rx count.

GrpFailureReason

Failure reason for the abond Group.

AsmRxCrcErrorCount

group Asm Rx crc error count.

127

5.3.3 ABOND link entry Commands
5.3.3.1 Get abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond link entry [ifname ] [lowif ]
5.3.3.2 Create abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create abond link entry ifname  lowif 
[txlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable] [rxlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable]
[asmrxgroupintf ] [asmrxlinkindex ]
5.3.3.3 Delete abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete abond link entry ifname  lowif 
5.3.3.4 Modify abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify abond link entry ifname  lowif 
[txlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable] [rxlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable]

128

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi
pair Bonding type of interfaces. ValidValue is abond-X. Link
can not be created, deleted or modified if associated abond
group interface is enabled.

Ifname

Type: Create － Mandatory



Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: abond-0-abond-1

lowif 

This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)
entry. Valid Value is dsl-X ,dsli-X , dslf-X
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify －Mandatory
Get － Optional

txlinkadminstatus

This specifies the Tx Status for the link in a Group. Type:

Enable | Disable

Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: enable

rxlinkadminstatus

This specifies the Rx Status for the link in a Group. Type:

Enable | Disable

Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: enable

asmrxgroupintf

Abond group Interface Index of proxy link.



Type:

Create

-- Optional

Valid values: abond-0_ABONDGR_MAX_IFINDEX
Default value: 0xffffffff
asmrxlinkindex

Lower Interface Index of Proxy link.



Type:

Create

-- Optional

Default value: 0xffffffff

Example:
$ create abond link entry ifname abond-0 lowif dsl-0 txlinkadminstatus enable
rxLinkadminstatus enable asmrxgroupintf abond-0 asmrxlinkindex dsl-0

IP DSLAM

129

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ifname
: abond-0
lowif
: dsl-0
AsmRxGroupIntf
: abond-0
AsmRxLinkIndex
: dsl-0
TxLinkAdminStatus : enable
RxLinkAdminStatus : enable
TxLinkOperStatus
: Disable
RxLinkOperStatus : Disable
AsmTxLinkStatus
: SelectedToCarryBondingTraffic
AsmRxLinkStatus
: SelectedToCarryBondingTraffic
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair
Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Link can not be
created , deleted or modified if associated abond group interface is
enabled.

lowif

This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL) entry.
Valid Value is dsl-X ,dsli-X , dslf-X

AsmRxGroupIntf

Abond group Interface Index of proxy link.

AsmRxLinkIndex

Lower Interface Index of Proxy link.

TxLinkAdminStatus

This specifies the Tx Status for the link in a Group.

RxLinkAdminStatus

This specifies the Rx Status for the link in a Group.

TxLinkOperStatus

The current operational status of the abond link in Tx direction.

RxLinkOperStatus

This specifies the rx operational Status for the link in a Group.

AsmTxLinkStatus

The current Tx Link status of the abond link as reflected in ASM
Messages.

AsmRxLinkStatus

The current Rx Link status of the abond link as reflected in ASM
Messages.

130

IDL series User Guide

5.3.4 ABOND link stats Commands
5.3.4.1 Get abond link stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond link stats [ifname ] [lowif ]
5.3.4.2 Reset abond link stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset abond link stats ifname lowif 
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi



pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X
Type: Reset － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 30

lowif 

This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)
interfaces. Valid Value is dsl-X, dsli-X, dslf-X
Type: Reset － Mandatory
Get － Optional

Example:
$ get abond link stats ifname abond-0 lowif dsl-0
Output
ifname
: abond-0
lowif
: dsl-0
ASMTxCount
: 10
ASMRxCount : 10
TxLinkFailureReason : HecLimitExceeded
RxLinkFailureReason : HecLimitExceeded

IP DSLAM

131

Output Fields:
Field

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi
pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X

lowif

This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)
interfaces. Valid Value is dsl-X, dsli-X, dslf-X

ASMTxCount

Per-link ASM Tx count. These are not exact counts and have
been kept for debugging.

ASMRxCount

Per-link ASM Rx count. These are not exact counts and have
been kept for debugging.

TxLinkFailureReason

Failure reason for the abond link in Tx direction.

RxLinkFailureReason

Failure reason for the abond link in Rx direction.

5.4 Aggregation commands
5.4.1 Active Standby aggr info Commands
5.4.1.1 Get actstdby aggr info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get actstdby aggr info [ifname ]
5.4.1.2 Modify actstdby aggr info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
modify actstdby aggr info ifname  [status Enable | Disable]

132

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname ifname

This specifies the aggregator interface index on which active standby is to be
enabled. Valid Value is aggr-0.
Type:

Modify
Get

-- Mandatory
--

Optional

Valid values: aggr-0
Status

This specifies whether active standby mode is to be enabled or not.

enable | disable

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Example:
$ get actstdby aggr info IfName aggr-0
Output:
Interface Index : aggr-0
Status
: Enable
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface Index

This specifies the aggregator interface index on which
active standby is to be enabled. Valid Value is aggr-0.

Status

This specifies whether active standby mode is to be
enabled or not.

Caution:
z
Active Standby mode shall not be enabled, if aggregator interface and
redundancy aggregator are not created, or if LACP aggregator is created for the
aggregator interface.
z
If only Active Standby is desired and no load sharing is expected then bridge
port shall be created over the aggregator only after Active Standby has been
enabled for redundancy aggregator. If the bridge port is created over aggregator
before enabling Active Standby for it, the load sharing shall start and continue till
Active Standby is enabled.
z
References:
Redundancy commands.

IP DSLAM

133

5.4.2 Aggr info Commands
5.4.2.1 Get aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get aggr intf [ifname ]
5.4.2.2 Create aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create aggr intf ifname  [ ip  ] [ mask  ]
[ usedhcp False | True ] [ mgmtvlanid  ] [ mgmtsvlanid
 ] [ priority  ] [ enable | disable ]
5.4.2.3 Delete aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get aggr intf [ifname ]
5.4.2.4 Modify aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create aggr intf ifname  [ ip  ] [ mask  ]
[ usedhcp False | True ] [ mgmtvlanid  ] [ mgmtsvlanid
 ] [ priority  ] [ enable | disable ]

134

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator type
of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0 Type: Create －
Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0

ip 

This specifies the IP address configured for the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0

mask 

This specifies the network mask configured for the interface. If
either of 'IP Address' or 'mask' is non-null the other must also
be non-null and vice versa. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0

usedhcp False | True

This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to
obtain an IP address for this interface from a DHCP server.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: False, True
Default value: false

mgmtvlanid

VLAN(C-Vlan) for management traffic on this interface.



Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no Management Vlanid is
specified (in the create operation) or it's value is set to zero
(either in create or modify operation) then the system shall use
the value of 'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created
on this interface as the Management Vlan Index. In case the
management vlan (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated
'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) doesn't exist on the system
then IP based management on this management VLAN shall
not happen on the interface till the corresponding VLAN is
created with the Net side port as its member.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 4095
Default value: 0

IP DSLAM

135

mgmtsvlanid

Applicable only in stacked vlan mode, this is S-Vlan for



management traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this
field is valid only if either 'ip' field is nonzero or 'usedhcp' field
is true. If no management Svlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'psvlanid'
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the
management vlan id. In case the management vlan (virtual
vlan mapped to S-VLAN and C-VLAN for the frame) doesn't
exist (ie. Virtual vlan mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the
associated ' psvlanid ', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system
then IP based management shall not happen on the interface
till the corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net side
port as its member.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 – 4095
Default value: 0

priority 

Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on
Management VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if
either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native
Vlan mode this priority shall be used for C-Vlan tag while in
stacked vlan mode it shall be used for S-Vlan tag.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 7

enable | disable

Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable

Example:
$ create aggr intf IfName aggr-0 ip 172.25.100.100 mask 255.255.0.0 usedhcp
False mgmtvlanid 2 mgmtsvlanid 2 priority 2 enable

136

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface Index
: aggr-0
IP Address
: 172.25.100.100
UseDhcp
: False
Mgmt VLAN Index
:2
Mgmt S-VLAN Index
:2
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio : 2
Oper Status
: Up
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Mask

: 255.255.0.0

Admin Status

: Enable

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface Index

This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator type of
interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0

IP Address
Mask

This specifies the IP address configured for the interface.
This specifies the network mask configured for the interface. If either
of 'IP Address' or 'mask' is non-null the other must also be non-null
and vice versa.

UseDhcp

This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to obtain an
IP address for this interface from a DHCP server.

Mgmt VLAN Index

VLAN(C-Vlan) for management traffic on this interface. Non-zero
value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true. If no Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'portvlanid'
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the
Management Vlan Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero)
doesn't exist on the system then IP based management on this
management VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net side port as its member.

Mgmt S-VLAN Index

Applicable only in stacked vlan mode, this is S-Vlan for management
traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if
either 'ip' field is nonzero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no management
Svlanid is specified (in the create operation) or it's value is set to zero
(either in create or modify operation) then the system shall use the
value of 'psvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this

IP DSLAM

137

interface as the management vlan id. In case the management vlan
(virtual vlan mapped to S-VLAN and C-VLAN for the frame) doesn't
exist (ie. Virtual vlan mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated '
psvlanid ', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system then IP based
management shall not happen on the interface till the corresponding
virtual-VLAN is created with the Net side port as its member.
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio

Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on Management
VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if either 'ip' field is
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native Vlan mode this priority
shall be used for C-Vlan tag while in stacked vlan mode it shall be
used for S-Vlan tag.

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.

Cautions:
z
If an aggregator interface is being created, all configurations of aggregated
links (layer2 Ethernet interfaces), should be same.

5.4.3 LACP Aggr Commands
5.4.3.1 Get lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
gets lacp aggr [aggrifname ]
5.4.3.2 Create lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create lacp aggr aggrifname  [actorsystemprio
] [actoradminkey ]
[collectormaxdelay ] [aggrtype Static | Lacp]

138

IDL series User Guide

5.4.3.3 Delete lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete lacp aggr aggrifname 
5.4.3.4 Delete lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify lacp aggr aggrifname  [actorsystemprio
] [actoradminkey ]
[collectormaxdelay ] [aggrtype Static | Lacp]
Parameters:
Name

Description

aggrifname

The Aggregator interface name.



Type: Create ---－ Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: aggr-0

actorsystemprio

A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority



value associated with the Actor's System ID.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
Default value: 10

actoradminkey

The current administrative value of the Key for



the Aggregator
Type: Create Optional
Modify Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535
Default value: 0

collectormaxdelay

The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute



defines the maximum delay,in tens of
microseconds,that may be imposed by the

IP DSLAM

139

Frame Collector between receiving a frame from
an Aggregator Parser,and either delivering the
frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535
Default value: 0
aggrtype Static | Lacp

Aggregation type. It can be either static or lacp
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Static

Example:
$ create lacp aggr aggrifname aggr-0 actorsystemprio 2 actoradminkey 1000
collectormaxdelay 2 aggrtype Static
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Aggr IfName
: aggr-0
Mac Address
: 23:45:67:89:00:01 Aggregate
Actor Sys Priority : 2
Partner Sys Priority : 2
Actor Sys ID
: 23:45:67:89:00:01
Partner Sys ID
: 23:45:67:89:00:01
Actor Oper Key
: 10
Partner Oper Key
Actor Admin Key
: 1000
Collector Max Delay
Aggregation Type
: Static
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

: true

:2
:2

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Aggr IfName

The Aggregator interface name.

Mac Address

A 6-octet read-only value carrying the individual MAC
address assigned to the Aggregator.

Aggregate

A read-only Boolean value indicating whether the
Aggregator represents an Aggregate (TRUE) or an
Individual link (FALSE).

Actor Sys Priority

140

A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority value

IDL series User Guide

associated with the Actor's System ID.
Partner Sys Priority

A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority value
associated with the Partners SystemID.

Actor Sys ID

A 6-octet read only MAC address value used as a unique
identifier for the System that contains this Aggregator.

Partner Sys ID

A 6-octet read-only MAC address value consisting of the
unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this
Aggregator.A value of zero indicates that there is no known
Partner.

Actor Oper Key

The current operational value of the Key for the
Aggregator.

Partner Oper Key

The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator
is current protocol Partner.

Actor Admin Key

The current administrative value of the Key for the
Aggregator

Collector Max Delay

The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute defines the
maximum delay,in tens of microseconds,that may be
imposed by the Frame Collector between receiving a frame
from an Aggregator Parser,and either delivering the frame
to its MAC Client or discarding the frame.

Aggregation Type

Aggregation type. It can be either static or lacp

Cautions:
z
LACP aggregator creation shall fail, if aggregator interface is not created.
z
LACP aggregator shall not be created, if Redundancy aggregator is created
for an aggregator interface.
References:
z
create aggr intf
z
get aggr intf

IP DSLAM

141

5.4.4 LACP AGGRPort Info Commands
5.4.4.1 Get aggrport info
Description:
Use this command to get a LACP aggregator port information.
Command Syntax:
get lacp aggrport info [ifname ]
5.4.4.2 Modify lacp aggrport info
Description:
Use this command to modify LACP aggregator port information.
Command Syntax:
modify lacp aggrport info ifname  [actoradminkey
] [partadminkey ] [actorportprio
] [partadminportprio ] [actorsysprio
] [partadminsysprio ] [partadminsysid
] [partadminport ] [actoradminstate
activity | timeout | aggr] [partadminstate activity | timeout | aggr] [aggrstatus
enable|disable] [pktpriority ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Ifname

The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the



aggregator.
Type : Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values : eth-*, eoa-*

actoradminkey

The current administrative value of the Key for the



Aggregator.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 2^16 – 1

partadminkey

The current administrative value of the Key for the



Aggregator's current protocol Partner.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 2^16 – 1

actorportprio

142

The priority value assigned to this Aggregation

IDL series User Guide



Port Type : Optional
Valid values : 0 - 2^8 – 1

partadminportprio

The current administrative value of the port priority,



Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 – 255

actorsysprio

A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority



value associated with the Actor's System ID.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 – 255

partadminsysprio

A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority



value associated with the Partner's System ID.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255

partadminsysid

A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value



representing the administrative value of the
Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's SystemID
Type : Optional
Valid values: 00:00:00:00:00:00 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

partadminport

The current administrative value of the port



number for the protocol Partner.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535

actoradminstate

Administrative state of actor

activity | timeout |

Type: Optional

aggr
partadminstate

Administrative state of Partner.

activity | timeout |

Type: Optional

aggr
aggrstatus

Specifies whether aggregation(bonding) is to be

enable|disable

enabled over this Aggregation Port.
Type : Optional
Valid values: enable|disable

pktpriority

For LACP PDUs, this priority shall be used for



choice of traffic class/Queue on outgoing interface.
Type: Modify Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7

IP DSLAM

143

Example:
$ get lacp aggrport info ifname eth-0
Output:
Interface

: eth-0

Port Is Aggregate

Actor Oper Key

: 10

Partner Oper Key

Actor Admin Key

: 1000

Partner Admin Key

Actor Port Priority

:1

Actor System Priority

: true
:2
:2

Partner Admin Port Priority : 1

:2

Partner Oper Port Priority

:1

Actor System ID

: 23:45:67:89:00:01

Partner Admin Sys Priority

:2

Actor Port

:2

Partner Oper Sys Priority

:2

Partner Admin Sys Id

: 23:45:67:89:00:01

Partner Admin Port

:1

Partner Oper Sys Id

: 23:45:67:89:00:01

Partner Oper Port

:1

Port Actor Admin State

: distrib

Port Partner Admin State : activity
Port Actor Oper State

: default

Port Partner Oper State

: default

Attached Agg ID

: aggr-0

Selected Agg ID

Aggregation Status

: Enable

LACP PacketsPrio

: aggr-0
:2

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface

The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the aggregator.

Port Is Aggregate

Boolean value indicating whether the Aggregation Port is able to
Aggregate ('TRUE'), or is only able to operate as an Individual link
('FALSE').

Actor Oper Key

The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator.

Partner Oper Key

The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator's current
protocol Partner.

Actor Admin Key

The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator.

Partner Admin Key

The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator's current
protocol Partner.

Actor Port Priority

The priority value assigned to this Aggregation Port.

Partner Admin Port

The current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol

Priority

Partner.

Actor System Priority

A 2-octet, read-write value indicating the priority value associated with
the Actor's System ID.

Partner Oper Port Priority

The current operational value of the port priority for the protocol Partner.

Actor System ID

A 6-octet, read-write MAC address value, used as a unique identifier for
the System that contains this Aggregator.

144

IDL series User Guide

Partner Admin Sys

A 2-octet, read-only value that indicates the priority value associated with

Priority

the Partner's System ID.

Actor Port

The port number locally assigned to the Aggregation Port.

Partner Oper Sys Priority

A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority value associated with
the PartnerÌs System ID.

Partner Admin Sys Id

A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value representing the administrative
value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's System ID.

Partner Admin Port

The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol
Partner.

Partner Oper Sys Id

A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value representing the operational
value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's System ID.

Partner Oper Port

The current operational value of the port number for the protocol Partner.

Port Actor Admin State

Administrative state of Actor.

Port Partner Admin State

Administrative state of Partner.

Port Actor Oper State

Operational state of Actor.

Port Partner Oper State

Operational state of Partner.

Attached Agg ID

The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has
currently selected.

Selected Agg ID

The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has
currently selected.

Aggregation Status

Whether or not aggregation(bonding) is to be enabled over this
Aggregation Port..

LACP PacketsPrio

For LACP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic
class/Queue on outgoing interface.

References:
z
lacp aggrport list
z
lacp aggrport stats

IP DSLAM

145

5.4.5 LACP AGGRPort List Commands
5.4.5.1 Get lacp aggrport list
Description:
Use this command to get a LACP aggregator port list.
Command Syntax:
get lacp aggrport list [aggrifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Aggrifname

The Aggregator interface name.



Type : Optional
Valid values: aggr-*

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get lacp aggrport list
Output:
Aggr IfName : aggr-0
Port List
: eth-0 eth-1
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Aggr IfName

The Aggregator interface name.

Port List

List of the ports corresponding to given aggregator index.

References:
z
lacp aggr
z
lacp aggrport info
z
lacp aggrport stats.

146

IDL series User Guide

5.4.6 LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands
5.4.6.1 Get lacp aggrport stats
Description:
Use this command to get LACP aggregator port statistics.
Command Syntax:
get lacp aggrport stats [ifname ]
5.4.6.2 Reset lacp aggrport stats
Description:
Use this command to reset LACP aggregator port statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset lacp aggrport stats ifname 
Note:
This command is not supported in this release.
Parameters:
Name

Description

Ifname

The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the



aggregator.
Type : Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values : eth-*, eoa-*

Example :
$ get lacp aggrport stats ifname eth-0
Output:
Interface
: eth-0
LACPDUs Rx
:1
MarkerPDUs Rx
:1
Marker Response PDUs Rx : 1
Unknown Rx
:1

IP DSLAM

LACPDUs Tx
:1
MarkerPDUs Tx
:1
Marker Response PDUs Tx : 1
Illegal Rx
:1

147

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface

The Interface name of the Ethernet interface for the aggregator.

LACPDUs Rx

The number of valid LACP PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.

LACPDUs Tx

The number of LACP PDUs transmitted on this Aggregation Port.

MarkerPDUs Rx

The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.

MarkerPDUs Tx

The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this Aggregation Port.

Marker Response

The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this

PDUs Rx

Aggregation Port.

Marker Response

The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this

PDUs Tx

Aggregation Port.

Unknown Rx

The number of frames received, that either carry the Slow Protocols
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or, are addressed
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type.

Illegal Rx

The number of frames received, that carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain a badly
formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.

References:
z
lacp aggr
z
lacp aggrport list
z
lacp aggrport info.

5.4.7 Redundancy aggr info Commands
5.4.7.1 Get rdncy aggr info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rdncy aggr info [ifname 
5.4.7.4 Modify rdncy aggr info
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify rdncy aggr info ifname  [revdistrib Enable | Disable]
[fallback Enable | Disable]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This specifies the interface index used for the Redundancy



Aggregator type of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: aggr-0
revdistrib Enable |

It denotes whether reverse distribution filtering is to be enforced

Disable

for traffic in the receiving direction, when both the links are
active, for this aggregator interface. If duplicate packets are
expected on the redundant links (if uplink aggregating device is
layer2 switch), Reverse distribution filtering may be enabled.

IP DSLAM

149

But if there is no chance of such duplicate packets, or the
duplicate packets need not have a special handling, reverse
distribution filtering may be disabled.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: enable
fallback Enable |

This specifies whether fallback is to happen for aggregator

Disable

interface, when a link goes down. As fallback trigger leads to
re-propagation of protocol PDUs to the links based on the state
of the links, this may be enabled if re-propagation of protocol
PDUs is required for immediate restoration of peer protocol
state on uplink devices. If such a treatment is not required and
Protocol time out may only be triggered for re-propagation,
Fallback trigger should be disabled.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: enable

Example:
$ create rdncy aggr info IfName aggr-0 revdistrib disable fallback disable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface Index
: aggr-0
Reverse Distribution : disable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

FallBack : disable

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface Index

This specifies the interface index used for the Redundancy Aggregator
type of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0

Reverse Distribution

It denotes whether reverse distribution filtering is to be enforced for
traffic in the receiving direction, when both the links are active, for this
aggregator interface. If duplicate packets are expected on the redundant
links (if uplink aggregating device is layer2 switch) Reverse distribution
filtering may be enabled. But if there is no chance of such duplicate
packets or the duplicate packets need not have a special handling
reverse distribution filtering may be disabled.

150

IDL series User Guide

FallBack

This specifies whether fallback is to happen for aggregator interface,
when a link goes down. As fallback trigger leads to re-propagation of
protocol PDUs to the links based on the state of the links, this may be
enabled if re-propagation of protocol PDUs is required for immediate
restore of peer protocol state on uplink devices. If such a treatment is
not required and Protocol time out may only be trigger for
re-propagation, Fallback trigger should be disabled.

Caution:
z
Redundancy aggregator shall not be created, if aggregator interface is not
created or if LACP aggregator is created for the aggregator interface.
References:
z
create aggr intf command
z
get aggr intf command

5.4.8 Redundancy aggrport list Commands
5.4.8.1 Get aggrport list
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rdncy aggrport list [aggrifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

aggrifname

Index of the redundancy aggregator, for which layer2



interfaces are associated. Valid Value is aggr-0
Type:

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: aggr-0

Example:
$ get rdncy aggrport list aggrifname aggr-0

IP DSLAM

151

Output:
Aggr IfName
: aggr-0
PortList
: eth-0 eth-1
Port List Interface type : None
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Aggr IfName

Index of the redundancy aggregator, for which layer2
interfaces are associated. Valid Value is aggr-0

PortList

The complete list of active layer2 interfaces associated
with the aggregator interface by virtue of redundancy.
Each bit set represents the Ethernet interface, that is
actively associated with redundancy based
aggregation. An interface is actively associated with
aggregator interface, if data for the aggregator interface
can be transmitted/received over it.

Port List Interface type

It denotes what type of interfaces (Physical ethernet)
are present in Port List. If no interface are present in
port list the value shall be None

5.4.9 Redundancy aggr stats Commands
5.4.9.1 Get rdncy aggr stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rdncy aggr stats [ifname ]
5.4.9.2 Reset rdncy aggr stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset rdncy aggr stats ifname 

152

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator
type of interfaces for which the redundancy stats are
desired. Valid Value is aggr-0
Type:

Reset
Get

--

Optional
--

Optional

Valid values: aggr-0

Example:
$ get rdncy aggr stats IfName aggr-0
Output:
Interface Index
: aggr-0
Collapse Count
:1
DeCollapse Count
:1
Last Collapse Time [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS]
: 04/21/2003:12:23:34
Last De-Collapse Time [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : 04/21/2003:12:23:34
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface Index

This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator
type of interfaces for which the redundancy stats are desired.
Valid Value is aggr-0

Collapse Count

This specifies the number of times one of the redundant
interfaces has gone down and the traffic had to be moved on
to the other redundant interface, which is up.

DeCollapse Count

This specifies the number of times one of the failed
redundant interfaces has come up and the traffic had to be
redistributed among mutually redundant interfaces.

Last Collapse Time

This specifies time at which the last collapse (one of the

[MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS]

redundant interface has gone down) occurred. The display
format shall be mm/dd/yyyy:hr:min:sec.

Last De-Collapse Time

This specifies time at which the last de-collapse (one of the

[MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS]

failed redundant interface has come up) occured. The display
format shall be mm/dd/yyyy:hr:min:sec.

IP DSLAM

153

5.5 ATM commands
5.5.1 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands
5.5.1.1 Get atm aal5 stats
Description:
Use this command to get AAL5 VC statistics.
Command Syntax:
get atm aal5 stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Ifname

This parameter specifies the interface for which



information is desired
Type : Get - Optional
Valid values : aal5-0 -

Example:
$ get atm aal5 stats ifname aal5-0
Output:
Low IfName
: atm-0
VPI
:0
Tx Frames count : 100
Tx Bytes count
: 1535
CRC Errors count : 0

VC IfName
: aal5-0
VCI
:1
Rx Frames count : 85
Rx Bytes count
: 1200
Oversized SDU
:0

Output Fields:
Field

Description

VC IfName

The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for which statistics needs to be
retrieved.

154

Low IfName

This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0

VPI

This is the Virtual Port Identifier.

VCI

This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.

Tx Frames count

The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs transmitted on this AAL5 VCC.

Rx Frames count

The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.

Tx Bytes count

The number of octets contained in AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.

Rx Bytes count

The number of octets contained in AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.

IDL series User Guide

CRC Errors count

This specifies the number of CRC errors encountered.

Oversized SDU

This specifies the number of oversized SDUs received.

References:
z
atm vc related commands
z
atm port and statistics related commands
z
atm vc statistics commands.

5.5.2 ATM OAM CC Commands
5.5.2.1 Get oam cc vc
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get oam cc vc [ifname ]
5.5.2.2 Modify oam cc vc
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify oam cc vc ifname  [action act | deact] [dir sink | src |
both] [mode auto | manual]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This parameter specifies the interface, for which information is desired.



In case the field is not specified, then the information for all valid
interfaces should be displayed.
Type:
Get

action act | deact

Modify
--

-- Mandatory

Optional

This field specifies the CC action to be taken. This is used along with
CC direction field.
Type:

dir sink | src | both

Modify

--

Optional

This field specifies the direction for CC
activation/Deactivation.Direction could be source (src), sink or both.

IP DSLAM

155

Type:
mode auto | manual

Modify

--

Optional

This specifies the activation/deactivation capability at a VCC.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Example:
$ get oam cc vc ifname aal5-0
Output:
ifName
Mode
SourceOperStatus SinkOperStatus Initiator
-----------------------------------------------------------aal5-0
Manual activated
LOC
Self
Output Fields:
Field

Description

ifName

This parameter specifies the interface, for which information is desired. In
case the field is not specified, then the information for all valid interfaces
should be displayed.

Mode

This specifies the activation/deactivation capability at a VCC.

SourceOperStatus

This field specifies the current operational state of source point of the VCC.

SinkOperStatus

This field specifies the current operational state of sink point of the VCC.

Initiator

This field is valid only in auto mode and it specifies the current initiator of CC
Activation/Deactivation.

References:
z
atm vc related commands.
z
atm port and statistics related commands.
z
atm oam loopback commands.

156

IDL series User Guide

5.5.3 ATM OAM Loopback Commands
5.5.3.1 Get oam lpbk vc
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get oam lpbk vc [ifname ]
5.5.3.2 Modify oam lpbk vc
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify oam lpbk vc ifname  [e2e | seg] [lbid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting



configured.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Mandatory

e2e | seg

This specifies the loop back type used. It may be: e2e or segment.
Type: Modify － Optional

Lbid < lbid-val>

This defines the loopback site, which will loopback the cell.
Type: Modify － Optional

Example:
$ get oam lpbk vc ifname aal5-0
Output:
IfName
: aal5-0
VPI : 1
LB Type
: e2e
OAM Location Id : 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
OAM LB Result
: E2e Succeeded

IP DSLAM

VCI : 1

157

Output Fields:
Field

Description

IfName

Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.

VPI

This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.

VCI

This is the Virtual Port Identifier.

LB Type

This specifies the loop back type used. It may be:e2e or segment.

OAM Location Id

This defines the loopback site, which will loopback the cell.

OAM LB Result

This specifies the result of the loop back test. It may be Result
Unavailable, Seg Succeeded, Seg Failed, E2e Succeeded, E2e Failed,
Test Aborted, or Test In Progress.

References:
z
atm vc related commands.
z
atm port and statistics related commands.

5.5.4 ATM Port Commands
5.5.4.1 Get atm port
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get atm port [ifname ]
5.5.4.2 Create atm port
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create atm port ifname  lowif  [ maxvc  ]
[ maxvpibits  ] [ maxvcibits  ] [ oamsrc
 ] [ orl  ] [ trfclassprofileid  ]
[ profilename  ] [ ctlpktinstid  ]
[ atmtransporttype cell | packet ] [ mirrormode data | mirror ] [ enable |
disable ]

158

IDL series User Guide

5.5.4.3 Delete atm port
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete atm port ifname 
5.5.4.4 Modify atm port
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify atm port ifname [ maxvc  ] [ maxvpibits
 ] [ maxvcibits  ] [ oamsrc  ] [ orl
 ] [ trfclassprofileid  ] [ profilename
 ] [ atmtransporttype cell | packet ] [ enable | disable ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

Physical interface index



Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

lowif 

This is the IfIndex of the low interface on which this ATM port is
configured. Lower interface can be of type dsl-* or dsli-* or dslf-* or
abond-*
Type: Create － Mandatory

maxvc 

This specifies the maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs), supported at
this ATM interface. This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the
value packet
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
Default value: 8

maxvpibits

The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM



interface.
Type: Create － Optional

IP DSLAM

159

Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
Default value: 8
maxvcibits

This specifies the maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use



at this ATM interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 16
Default value: 16

oamsrc 

Loopback source id assigned to the ATM port. The ATM port will
respond to all loopback cells, which carry this OAM id. This field is not
valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

orl 

This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value in KBPS to be
applied on this interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 64 - 6000
Default value: 54000

trfclassprofileid

This specifies the traffic class profile to be associated with the ATM port.



Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
Default value: 1

profilename

This specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the ATM port.



Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "SPPROFILE"

ctlpktinstid

This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this



interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while
creating an interface an instance is created internally from the default
profile governed by the macro 1 and associated to the interface. This will
reduce the total number to instances that can be now created by one.
The default instance is governed by macro 0. Type: Create － Optional
Valid values: 1 -146
Default value: 0

160

atmtransporttype cell

This specifies the transport type of the atm interface. This can be either

|packet

Cell which means that actual Atm Cells shall be received over the

IDL series User Guide

UTOPIA interface, or Packet , which means that Pseudo Cells
corresponding to Packet VDSL shall be received over this ATM
interface. This is not modifiable if any ATM VC is created on top of this
ATM port.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 1
mirrormode data |

This field configures ATM port in data mode or mirror mode. In mirror

mirror

mode, only the mirrored packets are allowed to go out of the port and
regular customer data is forbidden. Scheduling profile field is ignored in
mirror mode.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: data

enable | disable

Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable

Example:
$ create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0 maxvc 5 maxvpibits 6 maxvcibits 12S
oamsrc 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff orl 3000 trfclassprofileid 3 profilename gold
ctlpktinstid 1 atmtransporttype Cell mirrormode mirror enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName
: atm-0
LowIfName
: dsl-0
MaxVccs
:5
MaxVpiBits
:6
MaxVciBits
: 12
OAMSrc
: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
ORL(kbps)
: 3000
UnknownVPI
: 35
UnknownVCI
: 35
ProfileName
: gold
Current Output Rate : 64
trfclassprofileid
:3
Ctl Pkts Instance Id : 1
ATM Transport Type
: Cell
Mirror Mode
: mirror
Oper Status

IP DSLAM

: Up

Admin Status : Enable

161

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field

Description

IfName

Physical interface index

LowIfName

This is the IfIndex of the low interface on which this ATM port is configured.
Lower interface can be of type 94 or 124 or 125 or 0xfffffff9

MaxVccs

This specifies the maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs), supported at this
ATM interface. This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype

has the value

packet
MaxConfVccs

This specifies the current number of VCCs configured on this port.

MaxVpiBits

The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM
interface.

MaxVciBits

This specifies the maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use at
this ATM interface.

OAMSrc

Loopback source id assigned to the ATM port. The ATM port will respond to
all loopback cells, which carry this OAM id. This field is not valid if the
atmtransporttype has the value packet.

ORL(kbps)

This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value in KBPS to be applied
on this interface.

UnknownVPI

This parameter specifies the last seen unknown VPI on this ATM interface.
This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.

UnknownVCI

This parameter specifies the last seen unknown VCI on this ATM interface.
This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.

ProfileName

This specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the ATM port.

Current Output Rate

This parameter specifies the current output rate value in KBPS that is
available on this interface, based on the minimum of DSL trained rate and
OutPut Rate limit configured for the ATM port.

trfclassprofileid

This specifies the traffic class profile to be associated with the ATM port.

Ctl Pkts Instance Id

This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while creating an
interface an instance is created internally from the default profile governed by
the macro 1 and associated to the interface. This will reduce the total number
to instances that can be now created by one. The default instance is
governed by macro 0.

ATM Transport Type

This specifies the transport type of the atm interface. This can be either Cell
which means that actual Atm Cells shall be received over the UTOPIA
interface, or Packet , which means that Pseudo Cells corresponding to
Packet VDSL shall be received over this ATM interface. This is not modifiable

162

IDL series User Guide

if any ATM VC is created on top of this ATM port.
Mirror Mode

This field configures ATM port in data mode or mirror mode. In mirror mode,
only the mirrored packets are allowed to go out of the port and regular
customer data is forbidden. Scheduling profile field is ignored in mirror mode.

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.

5.5.5 ATM VC Commands
5.5.5.1 Create atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to create a new ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).
Command Syntax :
create atm vc intf ifname  vpi  vci  lowif
 [enable | disable] [aal5] [a5txsize
] [a5rxsize ] [vcmux | llcmux | auto
| ethernet] [pvc] [channel fast|interleaved] [ mgmtmode
data|mgmt|DataAndMgmt| raw] [ maxnumproto  ]
[ autostatus Enable|Disable ] [ autosupportedprot none|{pppoa | eoa | ipoa}+]
[ autovcmuxforcedprot None | pppoa | eoa | ipoa] [ autosensetriggertype
dynamic | opstatechange ] [ ctlpktgroupid  | none ]
5.5.5.2 Delete atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to delete an existing ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).
Command Syntax:
delete atm vc intf ifname 
5.5.5.3 Get atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to display information corresponding to a single VC, or for all
VCs.
Command Syntax: get atm vc intf [ifname ]

IP DSLAM

163

5.5.5.4 Modify atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to modify ATM VC parameters.
Command Syntax:
modify atm vc intf ifname  [vpi ] [vci ]
{enable | disable} [a5txsize ] [a5rxsize
] [vcmux | llcmux | auto | ethernet] [ mgmtmode data |
mgmt | DataAndMgmt | raw] [ autosupportedprot none|{pppoa | eoa | ipoa}+]
[ autovcmuxforcedprot None | pppoa | eoa | ipoa] [ autosensetriggertype
dynamic | opstatechange ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This specifies name of VC Interface.



Type: Create – Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Get – Optional
Modify – Mandatory
Valid values : aal5-0 - *

lowif

Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.



Valid values : atm-0 - *

vpi 

Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI value shall be the new
VPI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also,
the VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in
one command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be
0.
Type : Create – Mandatory
Modify – Optional
Valid values : 0-2^8

vci 

Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI value shall be the
new VCI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled.
Also, the VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status
in one command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to
be 0.
Type: Create – Mandatory
Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1-2^16

164

IDL series User Guide

mgmtmode Data |

It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If it is Data, then only

Mgmt | DataAndMgmt

data transmission can take place. If it is Mgmt, then management of

| Raw

remote CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and packets on that
ATM VC shall start coming to Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode,
data transmission as well as remote CPE management can happen on
the same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt mode, the acceptable
values for atmVCCAAL5EncapType are llcmux and auto. In Mgmt
mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM VC and both
Ethernet as well as non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be
received at the Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created,
then only non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be received at the
Control Plane. However, if EoA is not created then all the packets on
that ATM VC shall be received at the Control Plane. However, to
configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, a good practice is to to
create ATM VC in disable mode till EoA is created on it, to prevent
flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to
Control Plane. In this mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the
ATM VC. If EoA interface is already created on the ATM VC, its mode
cannot be changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4). This field is not
valid if encaptype is Ethernet.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Data

enable|disable

This specifies the Admin Status of the VC.
Type: Optional
Default Value: enable

aal5

This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The only type of AAL
supported in Columbia Packet is AAL5. This field is not valid for an ATM
VC with encaptype as Ethernet.
Type: Create Optional
Default value: aal5

a5txsize

This specifies the maximum transmit CPCS SDU size to be used.



Type: Optional
Valid values : 1-1536
Default Value: 1536

a5rxsize

This specifies the maximum receive CPCS SDU size to be used



Type: Optional
Valid values : 1-1536
Default Value: 1536

IP DSLAM

vcmux|llcmux|auto|

This specifies the data encapsulation method to be used over the AAL5

ethernet

SSCS layer. "auto" means autosense the muxType(llc/vc). Auto mode

165

is only used to sense the llc/vcmux. Atm VC with encaptype as ethernet
can be created only over an ATM port which has value of
atmtransporttype as packet.The VPI/VCI values for this atm vc shall be
0/0. aaltype, mgmtmode and oam related parameters are not valid for
an ATM VC with encaptype as Ethernet.
Type: Optional
Default Value: llcmux
Pvc

This specifies the type of VC. The only value supported is PVC.
Type: Optional
Default Value: pvc

channel

This extension specifies the type of channel on which the ATM VC's

fast|interleaved

cells have to be transmitted/ received. This field is deprecated and
currently not in use.
Type: Optional
Default Value: Interleaved

Maxnumproto

This field specifies the maximum number of simultaneous active



protocol stacks supported on this interface. Currently, only one protocol
stack is supported.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: 1

Autostatus

This field specifies whether the Auto mode is to be enabled or not. In

Enable|Disable

the Auto mode, the stack above this interface will be determined and
created based on the protocol packets sensed on this interface. For
example, if the protocol packet sensed above this interface is an EoA
packet, then the corresponding EoA stack will be created above this
interface. However, the corresponding EoA interface must have been
created with the config status field set as config mode. This field is not
valid if encaptype is Ethernet.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: disable

autosupportedprot

This field specifies Higher layer protocols which are supported for auto

none|{pppoa | eoa |

detection on the given ATM VC. Only the packets if the protocols

ipoa}+

mentioned in this field can lead to Auto detection. This field is
meaningful only when autostatus flag as enable.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 1

166

autovcmuxforcedprot

This field specifies that if the encap type detected is VCMux, the user

None | pppoa | eoa |

can configure to build a specific protocol stack automatically. It can only

ipoa

be present with the autostatus flag as enable. In case of a conflict with

IDL series User Guide

autoSupportedProtocols, its value will override.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: none
autosensetriggertype

This field specifies at what time autodetection of Encapsulation type or

dynamic |

higher protocol layers is to be done - all the time or only when

opstatechange

Operational Status of ATM VC is changed to UP. If its value is
'dynamic', then detection can happen anytime a packet is received. If its
value is 'opstatechange', then autodetection happens only when
Operational status of ATM VC changes to UP. This field is not valid if
encaptype is Ethernet.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: dynamic

ctlpktgroupid

The Control packet instance group associated with this VC. The flows

ctlpktgroupid | none

for this interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as
mapped for the flows corresponding to the groupid configured in ctrlpkt
group info command. If this group does not have entries for some of the
flows, then those flows shall be mapped to the ctlpktinstid of ATM port,
for which this VC is being created. If the group id is 0, then all the flows
shall be mapped to ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this VC is being
created.
Type: Create － Optional
Valid values: 0 -50
Default value: 0

Example:
$ create atm vc intf ifname aal5-0 lowif atm-0 vpi 10 vci 10 enable aal5 pvc
a5txsize 1536 a5rxsize 1536 llcmux mgmtmode data autosupportedprot pppoa
eoa autovcmuxforcedprot pppoa autosensetriggertype dynamic ctlpktgroupid none
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VC IfName
: aal5-0
VPI
: 0
Admin Status
: Up
Aal5 Tx Size
: 1536
AAL Type
: AAL5
channel
: Interleaved
MgmtMode
: Data

IP DSLAM

Low IfName
: atm-0
VCI
: 35
Oper Status
: Down
Aal5 Rx Size
: 1536
AAL5 Encap
: llcmux
Last Change(sec) : 0
Row Status
: active

167

VC Type
: PVC
VC Topology
Max simultaneous protocol
:1
Auto Status
: Disable
Auto Supported Protocol
: pppoa eoa
Auto VC Mux Forced Protocol : None
Auto Sense Trigger Type
: dynamic
Auto Curr Sensed Encaps Typee : none
Ctl Pkts Group Id
: none
Auto Supported Protocol : pppoa eoa

: Point to Point

Output Fields:
Field

Description

VC IfName

VC Interface Name. It can be : aal5-0 - *

Low IfName

Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.

VPI

Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI value shall be the new
VPI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the
VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in one
command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be 0.

VCI

Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI value shall be the new
VCI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the
VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in one
command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be 0.

Oper Status

This specifies the actual/current state of the interface. It can be either Up
or Down

Admin Status

This specifies the desired state of the interface. It may be either Up/Down.

Aal5 Tx Size

This specifies the transmit CPCS SDU size to be used.

Aal5 Rx Size

This specifies the receive CPCS SDU size to be used.

Aal Type

This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The only type of AAL
supported in Columbia Packet is AAL5. This field is not valid for an ATM
VC with encaptype as Ethernet.

Aal5 Encap

This specifies the data encapsulation method to be used over the AAL5
SSCS layer. "auto" means autosense the muxType(llc/vc). Auto mode is
only used to sense the llc/vcmux . Atm VC with encaptype as ethernet can
be created only over an ATM port which has value of atmtransporttype as
packet.The VPI/VCI values for this atm vc shall be 0/0. aaltype,
mgmtmode and oam related parameters are not valid for an ATM VC with
encaptype as Ethernet.

channel

This extension specifies the type of channel on which the ATM VC's cells
have to be transmitted/received. This field is deprecated and currently
not in use.

168

IDL series User Guide

Last Change

The value of sysUpTime at the time this VC entered its current operational
state.

MgmtMode

It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If it is Data, then only
data transmission can take place. If it is Mgmt, then management of
remote CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and packets on that ATM
VC shall start coming to Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, data
transmission as well as remote CPE management can happen on the
same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt mode, the only acceptable
value for atmVCCAAL5EncapType is llc. In Mgmt mode, EoA interface
can't be created on the ATM VC and both Ethernet as well as non-Ethernet
packets on that ATM VC shall be received at Control Plane. In
DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created then only non-Ethernet packets on
that ATM VC shall be received at Control Plane. However, if EoA is not
created then all the packets on that ATM VC shall be received at Control
Plane. However, to configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, good
practice is to create ATM VC in disable mode till EoA is created on it, to
prevent flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to
Control Plane. In this mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM
VC. If EoA interface is already created on the ATM VC, its mode cannot be
changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4). This field is not valid if
encaptype is Ethernet.

RowStatus

This defines the row-status of the interface entry

VC Type

This field specifies whether VC type is PVC or SVC.

VC Topology

This field specifies the VC connection topology type.

Max simultaneous

This field specifies the maximum number of simultaneous active protocol

protocol

stacks supported on this interface. Currently, only one protocol stack is
supported.

Auto Status

This field specifies whether the Auto mode is to be enabled or not. In the
Auto mode, the stack above this interface will be determined and created
based on the protocol packets sensed on this interface. For example, if the
protocol packet sensed above this interface is an EoA packet, then the
corresponding EoA stack will be created above this interface. However,
the corresponding EoA interface must have been created with the
gsvEoaConfigMode field's bit corresponding to the 'Auto' set.

Auto Supported

This field specifies Higher layer protocols which are supported for auto

Protocol

detection on the given ATM VC. Only the packets if the protocols
mentioned in this field can lead to Auto detection. This field is meaningful
only when autostatus flag is enable.

Auto VC Mux Forced

IP DSLAM

This field specifies if the encap type detected is VCMux, the user can

169

Protocol

configure to build a specific protocol stack automatically. This field is
meaningful only when autostatus flag as enable. In case of conflict with
autoSupportedProtocols, its value will override.

Auto Sense Trigger

This field specifies at what time autodetection of Encapsulation type or

Type

higher protocol layers is to be done - all the time or only when Operational
Status of ATM VC is changed to UP. If its value is 'dynamic', then detection
can happen anytime a packet is received. If its value is 'opstatechange',
then autodetection happens only when Operational status of ATM VC
changes to UP. This field is not valid if encaptype is Ethernet.

Auto Curr Sensed

This field specifies the current sensed Encapsulation type in case the

Encaps Type

Encapsulation type is being autodetected. The value of this field will be the
same as the field 'AAL5 Encapsulation Type' if the Encapsulation type is
preconfigured. This is a read only field for all agents, except for the Auto
Sense Agent.

Ctl Pkts Group Id

The Control packet instance group associated with this VC. The flows for
this interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as mapped for
the flows corresponding to the groupid configured in ctrlpkt group info
command. If this group does not have entries for some of the flows, then
those flows shall be mapped to the ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this
VC is being created. If the group id is 0, then all the flows shall be mapped
to ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this VC is being created.

Caution:
The specified lower interface should exist. Please refer to the create atm port
command.
References:
z
ATM interface commands
z
ATM statistics commands
z
ATM OAM commands
z
ATM VC statistics commands.

170

IDL series User Guide

5.5.6 ATM VC Statistics Commands
5.5.6.1 Get atm vc stats
Description:
Use this command to get statistical information about a specific or all ATM virtual
circuits.
Command Syntax:
get atm vc stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This specifies the Virtual Circuit. If this is not specified,



then information for all VCs is displayed.
Type : Get – Optional
Valid values : aal5-0 - *

Example:
$ get atm vc stats ifname aal5-0
Output:
Low IfName
: atm-0
VPI
:1
Total Tx Cells count : 250
CLPI 0 Rx Cells count : 10

VC IfName
: aal5-0
VCI
:1
Total Rx Cells count : 20
Rx Pkts Rejected count : 0

Output Fields:
Field

Description

LowIf

This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0

VPI

It is the Virtual Port Identifier.

VCI

It is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.

VC IfName

The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for which statistics
needs to be retrieved.

Total Tx Cells count

The total number of valid ATM cells transmitted by this interface.

Total Rx Cells count

The total number of valid ATM cells received by this interface.

CLPI 0 Rx Cells

The number of valid ATM cells received by this interface with
CLP=0.

Rx Pkts Rejected count

IP DSLAM

The total number of valid ATM cells discarded by the interface.

171

References:
z
Other atm vc related commands
z
oam lpbk command
z
atm port related commands
z
atm statistics related commands

172

IDL series User Guide

5.6 Bridging Commands
5.6.1 Bridge forwarding Commands
5.6.1.1 Get bridge forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge forwarding [vlanid ] [macaddr ]
5.6.1.2 Delete bridge forwarding
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge forwarding [vlanid ] [macaddr ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding and/or
filtering information. To delete an individual learnt entry or all learnt entries, the
FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is
ignored except when the value is 4097 which is the value of a special Vlan Id
used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are neither created nor
learnt in the system. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid
range for this also includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

macaddr


A unicast MAC address for which the bridge has forwarding and/or filtering
information. In the case of "delete all" entries in a given FDB; the MacAddr shall
have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an
individual entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional

IP DSLAM

173

Example:
$ get bridge forwarding vlanid 10 macaddr 02:2e:22:3d:44:56
Output:
MAC Addr
PortId
VlanId
----------------------------------------------------------02:2e:22:3d:44:56
10
10

Status
learned

Output Fields:
Field

Description

MAC Addr

A unicast MAC address for which the bridge has forwarding and/or filtering
information. In the case of "delete all" entries in a given FDB; the MacAddr shall
have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an individual
entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.

VlanId

Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding and/or
filtering information. To delete an individual learnt entry or all learnt entries, the
FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is
ignored except when the value is 4097 which is the value of a special Vlan Id used
for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are neither created nor learnt in the
system. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid range for this also
includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and
Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.

PortId

Port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the
value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been seen. This
may have a value of "0" if the statically configured address has a dynamic port
binding and the port has not been learnt yet.

Status

The status of this entry. The value learned (3), indicates that the value of the
corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbPort was learned, and is being used. mgmt
(5) - the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress is also the
value of an existing instance of dot1qStaticAddress. The value internal (6) indicates
that the entry is an internal entry and cannot be deleted by the user. This entry gets
created for the IPOE/PPPOE interfaces when the bridge port over those
IPOE/PPOE interfaces gets admin enabled. The mac address in this entry shall be
the one specified in the mac address profile and VlanId shall be the PortVlanId of
the Bridge Port.The value other (1) indicates that this is associated with a sticky
port.

174

IDL series User Guide

References:
z
bridge port related commands
z
bridge port stats command
z
bridge static related commands
z
bridge mode related commands.

5.6.2 Bridge Mode Commands
5.6.2.1 Get bridge mode
Description:
Use this command to get the current bridging mode.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mode
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get bridge mode
Output:
Bridging Mode is Enabled
Output Fields:
None
References:
z
modify bridge mode command
z
bridge port command
z
bridge port stats command
z
bridge static command
z
bridge forwarding command
z
DHCP Client commands.

IP DSLAM

175

5.6.3 Bridge Port Cap Commands
5.6.3.1 Get bridge port cap
Description:
Use this command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port cap [portid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

The index of base port
Type :Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386
Default value: None

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$get bridge port cap
Output:
Portid : 45
Port Capabilities : Tagging FrameTypes IngressFiltering
Output Fields:

176

Field

Description

portid

The index of base port.

Port Capabilites

Capabilities that are allowed on a per-port basis.

IDL series User Guide

5.6.4 Bridge port forwarding Commands
5.6.4.1 Get bridge port forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port forwarding [portid ] [vlanid ] [macaddr
]
5.6.4.2 Delete bridge port forwarding
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge port forwarding portid  [vlanid ]
[macaddr ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to
the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been
seen. This may have a value of "0" if the statically configured address has a
dynamic port binding and the port has not been learnt yet.
Type: Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386

vlanid 

Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding
and/or filtering information. To delete an individual learned entry or all
learned entries, the FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In
SVL case, this value is ignored except when the value is 4097, which is the
value of a special Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that
are neither created nor learned in the system. When Vlan transparency
feature is supported, the valid range for this also includes 4097. VLAN here
means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case
of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional

IP DSLAM

177

Valid values: 0 -4096
macaddr

In the case of "delete all" entries corresponding to a port in a given FDB; the



MacAddr shall have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To
delete an individual entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional

Example:
$ get bridge port forwarding portid 10 vlanid 10 macaddr 02:03: ee: 34:55:66
Output :
Port Id : 10
vlan id : 10
Mac Addr : 02:03:ee:34:55:66
Status
: Mgmt
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Port Id

Port number of the port on which a frame having a source
address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of
dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been seen. This may have a value of
"0" if the statically configured address has a dynamic port
binding and the port has not been learnt yet.

vlan id

Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has
forwarding and/or filtering information. To delete an individual
learned entry or all learned entries, the FdbId should be set to a
valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is ignored
except when the value is 4097, which is the value of a special
Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are
neither created nor learned in the system. When Vlan
transparency feature is supported, the valid range for this also
includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan
Mode.

Mac Addr

In the case of "delete all" entries corresponding to a port in a
given FDB; the MacAddr shall have INVALID value specified by
FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an individual entry, valid
value of Mac address has to be specified.

Status

The status of this entry. The value learned (3), indicates that
the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbPort was
learned, and is being used. mgmt (5) - the value of the

178

IDL series User Guide

corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress is also the
value of an existing instance of dot1qStaticAddress. The value
internal (6) indicates that the entry is a internal entry and
cannot be deleted by the user. This entry gets created for the
IPOE/PPPOE interfaces when the bridge port over those
IPOE/PPOE interfaces gets admin enabled. The mac address
in this entry shall be the one specified in the mac address
profile and VlanId shall be the PortVlanId of the Bridge Port.
The value other (1) indicates that this is associated with a sticky
port.

5.6.5 Bridge Port Map Commands
5.6.5.1 Get bridge port map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port map [portid ] [ifname ]
5.6.5.2 Create bridge port map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge port map portid  ifname 
5.6.5.3 Delete bridge port map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge port map portid  ifname 

IP DSLAM

179

Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

The bridge port with which a lower interface is being associated in the
autosensing scenario.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe-*

ifname

'ifname' associated with 'portid'. Only the indices of interfaces



belonging the types eoa, pppoe or ipoe, are valid values for this
interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Values: eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe-*

Example:
$ create bridge port map portid 2 ifname eoa-0
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Interface Index : eoa-0

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Port Id

The bridge port with which a lower interface is being
associated in the autosensing scenario.

Interface Index

'ifname' associated with 'portid'. Only the indices of interfaces
belonging the types eoa, pppoe or ipoe, are valid values for
this interface..

180

IDL series User Guide

5.6.6 Bridge Port Starts Table Commands
5.6.6.1 Get bridge port stats
Description:
Use this command to get the statistics of a single port, or all the ports.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port stats [portid ]
5.6.6.2 Reset bridge port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset bridge port statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset bridge port stats portid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid

This is the bridge port identifier. If this is not specified in



the get command, then information for all ports is
displayed.
Type : Get － Optional
Reset － Mandatory
Valid values : 1- 578

Example:
$ get bridge port stats portid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
PortId
:1
Out Frames
: 138
In Discards
:3
HC In Frames
: 300
HC Out Frames
: 350
HC In Discards
: 400

IP DSLAM

Max Info Size
In Frames

: 1500
: 129

181

Output Fields:
Field

Description

PortId

This is the bridge port identifier. It can be : 1- 386

Max Info Size

The maximum size of the INFO (non-MAC) field that this port will
receive or transmit.

Out Frames

The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its
segment.

In Frames

The number of frames that have been received by this port from its
segment.

In Discards

Count of valid frames received, which were discarded (i.e., filtered)
by the Forwarding Process.

HC In Frames

Number of frames that have been received by this port from its
segment. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.

HC Out Frames

Number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its
segment. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.

HC In Discards

Count of valid frames received and discarded (i.e filtered) by the
Forwarding Process. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.

5.6.7 Bridge Port Table Commands
5.6.7.1 Create bridge port intf
Description:
Use this command to create a new bridge port.
Command Syntax:
create bridge port intf portid  ifname  [maxucast
 ] [learning enable|disable][status enable|disable]
[stickystatus enable | disable] [FdbModify enable | disable][ aclglbdenyapply
Enable | Disable ] [ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ] [ proxyarpstatus enable |
disable ] [ arptstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ porttype
trusted | untrusted ]
5.6.7.2 Delete bridge port intf
Description:
This command is used to delete an existing bridge port.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge port intf portid 

182

IDL series User Guide

5.6.7.3 Get bridge port intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port intf [portid ]
5.6.7.4 Modify bridge port intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port intf portid  [ maxucast  ]
[ learning enable | disable ] [ status enable | disable ] [ stickystatus enable |
disable ] [ fdbmodify enable | disable ] [ aclglbdenyapply Enable | Disable ]
[ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ] [ proxyarpstatus enable | disable ]
[ arptstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ porttype trusted |
untrusted ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

The bridge port id
Type: Modify －Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 578

ifname

Interface name associated with the Port,



Type: mandatory,
Values: eth-*, eoa-*, pppoe-*, ipoe-*, vir-*

maxucast

This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses, which can be



learnt from this port. This is modifiable when the admin status of bridge
port is disabled. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on CPE side is 128. The default value
for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a CPE
side bridge port is 16. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on NET side is 4096. The default value
for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a bridge
port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on downlink side is 256. The default
value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a

IP DSLAM

183

bridge port is 256. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
learning enable |

The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1) indicates

disable

that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the value disable
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this bridge port.
The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side bridge ports
shall be enable and for NET side bridge port default value shall be enable.
This field is unused if the bridge port is created over a PPPOE/IPOE
interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field shall be
ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional

status enable | disable

The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the bridge port shall be
created in enabled AdminStatus by default.
Type: Modify － Optional

stickystatus enable

Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable(1) indicates

|disable

that the entries learnt on this port won't be aged out. It also indicates that
the entries learnt on this port shall not be learnt on any other port. The
entries learnt on this port can only be removed by management action or
by making the value as disable (2) so that the entries can be aged out.
This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an PPPOE/ IPOE
interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field shall be
ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional

fdbmodify enable |

This specifies whether this port can overwrite an existing forwarding

disable

database entry. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional

aclglbdenyapply

This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list represented by

Enable |Disable

MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default value
of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the
default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the default value
shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional

184

aclglbtrackapply

This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list represented by

Enable |Disable

MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default value

IDL series User Guide

of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the
default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the default value
shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
proxyarpstatus enable

The Proxy Arp Status on this bridge port. The value enable of this field

|disable

indicates that Proxy Arp request can be received through this port. This
field can be enabled only on bridge port created over ethernet or
aggregator interface. Before enabling this field user should create a filter
rule with rule action as Copy to Control and rule description as
IPOE_CONTROL and map it to all those interfaces through which user
wants to receive proxy arp requests.
Type: Modify － Optional

arptstatus Enable |

This specifies whether ARP translation will be done on the ARP packets

Disable

received/transmitted on this port. When enabled, ARP source MAC
address of the incoming ARP packets (both request/reply) will be changed
to virtual MAC address (if applicable) and the ARP target MAC address of
the outgoing ARP reply packets will be changed to the original host MAC
address (if applicable).
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

darpstatus Enable |

This specifies whether the ARP packets received on this bridge port are to

Disable

be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge port
mapping learnt using DRA. This field can be enabled only on the NET
side bridge port. This attribute is effective in conjunction with the attribute
'gsv dot1qVlanStaticDirectedARP' of 'Dot1qVlanStatic' MO. ARP
packets are to be directed as mentioned above, only if both the flags are
enabled. If any of the two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded
as per the normal bridging flow.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

porttype trusted |

This field specifies whether the port is trusted or not. This information is

untrusted

used by some of the control plane applications to send packet on trusted
ports, in case the application fails to uniquely determine a port.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Example:
$ create bridge port intf ifname eth-0 portid 10 maxucast 10 learning enable
stickystatus enable status enable fdbmodify disable aclglbdenyapply Disable
aclglbtrackapply Disable proxyarpstatus enable arptstatus enable darpstatus
enable porttype trusted

IP DSLAM

185

Output:
Port Id
: 10
Max Unicast Addresses : 10
Port Oper Status
: Disable
Sticky Status
: enable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Disable
Acl Global Track Apply : Disable
ProxyArpStatus
: enable
ArpTStatus
: enable
Port Type
: trusted

Learning Status
Port Admin Status
FDB Modify

: enable
: Disable
: Disable

Sensed IfIndex
: eoa-1
Directed ARP status : enable

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Port Id

The bridge port id

If Name

The interface name associated with the given port.

Max Unicast Addresses

This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses, which can
be learnt from this port. This is modifiable when the admin status of
bridge port is disabled. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on CPE side is 4096. The default
value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on
a CPE side bridge port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries that
can be learnt/configured on a birdge port on NET side is 4096. The
default value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or
configured on a bridge port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries
that can be learnt/configured on a birdge port on downlink side is 256.
The default value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or
configured on a bridge port is 256. This field is unused if the bridge
port is created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is
sensed. Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port
created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.

Learning Status

The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1)
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the value
disable indicates that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this
bridge port. The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side
bridge ports shall be enable and for NET side bridge port default value
shall be disable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over
an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of
this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE
interface.

Port Oper Status

186

The current operational state of the bridge port. If AdminStatus of the

IDL series User Guide

bridge port is disable (2), then OperStatus of the port should be disable
(2). If AdminStatus of the bridge port is changed to enable(1), then
OperStatus of the port should change to enable(1) if the bridge port is
ready to transmit and receive network traffic. The bridge port will have
the OperStatus value as dormant (5) if the 'configstatus' of the bridge
port is 'config' and it is waiting for a packet to be sensed, on its lower
interface index, to get activated.
Port Admin Status

The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the bridge port shall
be created in enabled AdminStatus by default.

Sticky Status

Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable(1)
indicates that the entries learnt on this port won't be aged out. It also
indicates that the entries learnt on this port shall not be learnt on any
other port. The entries learnt on this port can only be removed by
management action or by making the value as disable (2) so that the
entries can be aged out. This field is unused if the bridge port is
created over an PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed.
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a
PPPOE/IPOE interface.

FDB Modify

This specifies whether this port can overwrite an existing forwarding
database entry. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this
field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE
interface.

Acl Global Deny Apply

This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list represented by
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default
value of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side
ports, the default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the
default value shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is
created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed.
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a
PPPOE/IPOE interface.

Acl Global Track Apply

This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list represented by
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default
value of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side
ports, the default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the
default value shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is
created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed.
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a
PPPOE/IPOE interface.

ProxyArpStatus

IP DSLAM

The Proxy Arp Status on this bridge port. The value enable of this field

187

indicates that Proxy Arp request can be received through this port.
This field can be enabled only on bridge port created over ethernet or
aggregator interface. Before enabling this field user should create a
filter rule with rule action as Copy to Control and rule description as
IPOE_CONTROL and map it to all those interfaces through which user
wants to receive proxy arp requests.
Sensed IfIndex

This specifies the sensed interface index corresponding to the bridge
port. This field is used to determine the stack sensed for this bridge
port in the auto sensing scenario. This field cannot be modified. If the
oper status of the bridge port is 'enable' or 'disable' then the value of
this field gives the interface index on which the bridge port is currently
stacked. If the oper status is 'dormant' and the value of this field is
other than '-', then it represents the last interface index on which the
bridge port had been stacked.

ArpTStatus

This specifies whether ARP translation will be done on the ARP
packets received/transmitted on this port.

When enabled,

ARP

source MAC address of the incoming ARP packets (both
request/reply) will be changed to virtual MAC address (if applicable)
and the ARP target MAC address of the outgoing ARP reply packets
will be changed to the original host MAC address (if applicable).
Directed ARP status

This specifies whether the ARP packets received on this bridge port
are to be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to
bridge port mapping learnt using DRA. This field can be enabled only
on the NET side bridge port. This attribute is effective in conjunction
with the attribute 'gsv dot1qVlanStaticDirectedARP' of
'Dot1qVlanStatic' MO. ARP packets are to be directed as mentioned
above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the two is disabled,
the ARP packets will be forwarded as per the normal bridging flow.

Port Type

This field specifies whether the port is trusted or not. This information
is used by some of the control plane applications to send packet on
trusted ports, in case the application fails to uniquely determine a port.

188

IDL series User Guide

5.6.8 Bridge static mcast Commands
5.6.8.1 Get bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge static mcast [vlanid ] [mcastaddr ]
5.6.8.2 Create bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge static mcast vlanid  mcastaddr 
[egressports egressports | none] [forbidegressports  |
none]
5.6.8.3 Delete bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge static mcast vlanid  mcastaddr 
5.6.8.4 Modify bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge static mcast vlanid  mcastaddr 
[egressports  | none | none] [forbidegressports
> | none]

IP DSLAM

189

Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for multicast"
capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is shared across VLANS.
Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed as zero or a valid vlanid value. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can
have its own information for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a
mandatory parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case
when the attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for VLAN with
vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode
and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

mcastaddr


The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the filtering
information of this entry applies.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

egressports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and destined for a



specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded. A port may not be added in

|none

this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
Default value: 0

Forbidegressports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and destined for a



specific Multicast MAC address must not be forwarded, regardless of any

| none

dynamic information. A port may not be added in this set if it is already a member
of the set of ports in EgressPorts.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
Default value: 0

190

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7 mcastaddr 00:30:4F:00:00:01 recvport 0
egressports 10 forbidegressports 20 SKIP 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VLan Index
:7
Egress ports
: 10
Forbidden Egress ports : 20
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Mcast Address : 00:30:4F:00:00:01

Output Fields:
Field

Description

VLan Index

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed
as zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices supporting "Independent
Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information
for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory
parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case
when the attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable"
has value "none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not
supported for VLAN with vlanid as
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan
in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan
Mode.

Mcast Address

The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the
filtering information of this entry applies.

Egress ports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded. A
port may not be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of
ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.

Forbidden Egress ports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be forwarded,
regardless of any dynamic information. A port may not be added in
this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in EgressPorts.

IP DSLAM

191

Cautions:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z
Bridge Commands

5.6.9 Bridge static ucast Commands
5.6.9.1 Get bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge static ucast [vlanid ] [ucastaddr ]
5.6.9.2 Create bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge static ucast vlanid  ucastaddr 
[portid ]
5.6.9.3 Delete bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge static ucast vlanid  ucastaddr 

192

IDL series User Guide

5.6.9.4 Modify bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge static ucast vlanid  ucastaddr 
[portid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

The VLAN index referring to this VLAN. In case of device
capability not supporting vlans, vlan id "0" is a valid value.
VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode
and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

ucastaddr

The destination unicast MacAddr to which filtering info applies.



Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

portid 

The set of ports, for which a frame with a specific unicast
address will be flooded in the event that it has not been
learned. It also specifies the set of ports a specific unicast
address may be dynamically learnt on. This list shall have only
the CPE side ports. Currently only one port can be set in this
list. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values:1-386

Example:
$create bridge static ucast vlanid 1 ucastaddr 1:1:1:1:1:1 recvport 0 portid 2 status
1 cfgmode Config

IP DSLAM

193

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Vlan Index : 1
Port Id
:2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Ucast Address : 1:1:1:1:1:1

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Vlan Index

The VLAN index referring to this VLAN. In case of
device capability not supporting vlans, vlan id "0" is
a valid value. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in
case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case
of Stacked Vlan Mode.

Ucast Address

The destination unicast MacAddr to which filtering
info applies.

Port Id

The set of ports, for which a frame with a specific
unicast address will be flooded in the event that it
has not been learned. It also specifies the set of
ports a specific unicast address may be
dynamically learnt on. This list shall have only the
CPE side ports. Currently only one port can be set
in this list. Type - optional, Valid values:1-386

Cautions:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z
Bridge Commands.

194

IDL series User Guide

5.6.10 Bridge tbg traps Commands
5.6.10.1 Get bridge tbg traps
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge tbg traps
5.6.10.2 Modify bridge tbg traps
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge tbg traps [bindingstatus enable | disable] [fdbtrapstatus enable |
disable] [vmactrapstatus enable | disable] [traploss Ok | Notok]
Parameters:
Name

Description

bindingstatus enable

This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of 'binding

|disable

status changed' trap. This trap is sent when the port binding of a unicast entry
changes, i.e. the same address is learnt on a different port in the same
Forwarding Database.
Type: Modify － Optional

fdbtrapstatus enable

This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of

|disable

forwarding table trap. This trap is sent when an entry in the forwarding table is
learnt/ created/modified/deleted or aged out. These traps shall be given by
the packet filter module to the applications registered for these traps.
Type: Modify － Optional

vmactrapstatus

This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of trap

enable |disable

when MAC to Virtual MAC mapping for the MAC address is not found in the
M2VMac database associated with the corresponding interface. These traps
shall be given by the packet filter module to the applications registered for
these traps.
Type: Modify － Optional

traploss Ok | Notok

This parameter tells whether the loss of binding status and forwarding table
trap is acceptable or not. Such a trap can be lost because of the unavailability
of resources. ‘OK’ means trap loss is acceptable. In this case, when the trap
is lost an indication shall be given to the application, which can then

IP DSLAM

195

synchronize its database with the forwarding table. ‘NotOK’ means trap loss is
not acceptable. In this case, if it is not possible to raise the trap for any
forwarding table entry getting learnt/modified/deleted, that entry shall not get
learnt/modified/delete.
Type: Modify － Optional

Example:
$ get bridge tbg traps
Output:
Binding Status Changed Trap : enable
Virtual Mac Trap
: enable
Forwarding Table Trap Loss : OK

Forwarding Table Trap : enable

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Binding Status

This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of 'binding

Changed Trap

status changed' trap. This trap is sent when the port binding of a unicast entry
changes, i.e. the same address is learnt on a different port in the same Forwarding
Database.

Forwarding Table

This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of forwarding

Trap

table trap. This trap is sent when an entry in the forwarding table is learnt/
created/modified/deleted or aged out. These traps shall be given by the packet
filter module to the applications registered for these traps.

Virtual Mac Trap

This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of trap when
MAC to Virtual MAC mapping for the MAC address is not found in the M2VMac
database associated with the corresponding interface. These traps shall be given
by the packet filter module to the applications registered for these traps.

Forwarding Table

This parameter tells whether the loss of binding status and forwarding table trap is

Trap Loss

acceptable or not. Such a trap can be lost because of the unavailability of
resources. OK means trap loss is acceptable. In this case, when the trap is lost an
indication shall be given to the application, which can then synchronize its
database with the forwarding table. NotOK means trap loss is not acceptable. In
this case, if it is not possible to raise the trap for any forwarding table entry getting
learnt/modified/deleted, that entry shall not get learnt/modified/delete.

References:
z
Bridge Commands

196

IDL series User Guide

5.6.11 GARP Port Info Commands
5.6.11.1 Get garp port info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get garp port info [portid ]
5.6.11.2 Modify garp port info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify garp port info portid  [jointimer ] [leavetimer
] [leavealltimer ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Index of the Bridge Port
Type

: Get - Optional
Modify - Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 386
jointimer

The GARP Join time, in centiseconds. Join time value should be



less than half the Leave time value
Type

:Optional

Valid values: 10-255
leavetimer

The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds. Leave time value should



be greater than 2 times Join time value.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 10-255
leavealltimer

The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds. LeaveAll time value



should be large (more than 15 times) relative to Leave time value.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 10-65535

Example:
$ get garp port info

IP DSLAM

197

Output:
PortId
Join Timer Leave Timer LeaveAll Timer
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------6
30
90
5000
Output Fields:
Field

Description

PortId

Index of the Bridge Port.

Join Timer

The GARP Join time, in centiseconds. Join time value should be
less than half the Leave time value.

Leave Timer

The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds. Leave time value
should be greater than 2 times Join time value.

LeaveAll Timer

The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds. LeaveAll time value
should be large (more than 15 times) relative to Leave time
value.

References:
z
GVRP Commands

5.6.12 STP Group Commands
5.6.12.1 Get stp info
Description:
Use this command to display the current status of the Spanning Tree Protocol
Group.
Command Syntax:
get stp info
5.6.12.2 Modify stp info
Description:
Use this command to alter the configuration for the spanning tree protocol group.
Command Syntax:
modify stp info [priority ] [maxage ] [htime
] [fdelay ] [enable|disable]

198

IDL series User Guide

5.6.12.3 Reset stp stats
Description:
Use this command to reset STP global statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset stp stats
Parameters:
Name

Description

Priority 

The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID,i.e.,the
first two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID.

The other

(last) 6 octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 0 - 65535.
Maxage

The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information



learned from the network on any port before it is discarded,
in units of seconds. This is the actual value that this bridge
is currently using.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 6 - 40.
htime 

The amount of time between the transmission of
Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it
is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in
units of second. This is the actual value that this bridge is
currently using.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 1 - 10
Fdelay 

This is the actual time value, measured in units of seconds,
controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when
moving towards the Forwarding state. The value
determines how long the port stays in each of the Listening
and Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state.
This value is also used, when a topology change has been
detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in the
Forwarding Database.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 4 - 30
Enable|disable

Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.
Spanning Tree Protocol can not be enabled in Stacked Vlan

IP DSLAM

199

mode.
Type : Optional
Valid values:

disable | enable

Example:
$ modify stp info priority 0x20 maxage 25 htime 5 fdelay 20 enable
Output:
Protocol Spec. : IEEE 8021D
Priority : 0x20
Top. Changes
:1
Curr Top. Age(sec) : 35.0
Desig Root
: 00:30:4F:10:5A:6C:DB:20 Root Cost : 0
Root Port
: None
Hold Time (sec) : 1.0
Br Max Age(sec) : 25
Curr Max Age (sec) : 20.0
Br Hello Time(sec) : 5
Curr Hello Time(sec) :2.0
Br Fwd Delay(sec) : 20
Curr Fwd Delay (sec) :15.0
STP status
: enable
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Protocol Spec

An indication of what version of the Spanning Tree Protocol is
being run.

Priority

The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID,i.e.,the first
two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other (last) 6
octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.

Top. Changes

The total number of topology changes detected by this bridge
since the management entity was last reset or initialized.

Curr Top. Age(Sec)

The time (in second) since the last time a topology change was
detected by the bridge entity.

Desig Root

The bridge identifier of the root of the spanning tree as
determined by the Spanning Tree Protocol as executed by this
node. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all
Configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this node.

Root Cost

The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge.

Root Port

The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost path from
this bridge to the root bridge.

Hold Time (Sec)

This time value determines the interval length during which no
more than two Configuration bridge PDUs shall be transmitted by

200

IDL series User Guide

this node, in units of seconds.
Br Max Age(Sec)

The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned
from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of
seconds, when this bridge is the root of the spanning tree. Note
that IEEE-802.1D specifies that the range for this parameter is
related to the value of dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime.

Curr Max Age (Sec)

The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned
from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of
seconds. This is the actual value that this bridge is currently
using.

Br Hello Time(Sec)

The value that all bridges use for HelloTime when this bridge is
acting as the root.

Curr Hello Time(Sec)

The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration
bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the
spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of second.

This is

the actual value that this bridge is currently using.
Br Fwd Delay(Sec)

The value that all bridges use for ForwardDelay when this bridge
is acting as the root. Note that IEEE-802.1D specifies that the
range for this parameter is related to the value of
dot1dStpBridgeMaxAge.

Curr Fwd Delay (Sec)

This is the actual time value, measured in units of seconds,
controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving
towards the Forwarding state. The value determines how long the
port stays in each of the Listening and Learning states, which
precede the Forwarding state.

This value is also used, when a

topology change has been detected and is underway, to age all
dynamic entries in the Forwarding Database.
STP status

Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.
Spanning Tree Protocol can not be enabled in Stacked Vlan
mode.

References:
z
get stp info command
z
stp port related commands.

IP DSLAM

201

5.6.13 STP Port Commands
5.6.13.1 Get stp port
Description:
Use this command to display port specific information for the Spanning Tree
Protocol, for all ports, or for the specified port.
Command Syntax:
get stp port info portid 
5.6.13.2 Modify stp port
Description:
Use this command to alter the configuration for the spanning tree protocol.
Command Syntax:
modify stp port info portid  [enable|disable] [pcost ]
[priority ] [pktpriority ]
5.6.13.3 Reset stp port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset the STP port stats for a specific interface.
Command Syntax:
reset stp port stats portid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning
Tree Protocol management information.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: 1 to 386;

enable|disable

Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Port or not
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable, disable

pcost 

The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the
spanning tree root, which include this port.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

priority 

202

The value of the priority field which is contained in the most

IDL series User Guide

significant 6 bits of the more significant octet of the (2 octet long)
Port ID. The least significant 2 bits of the more significant octet
and the less significant octet (total 10 bits) of the Port ID is given
by the value of dot1dStpPort.
Type: Optional
Valid values: 0 -255.
pktpriority

For STP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic



class/ Queue on out¦going interface. In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the
VC, on which the packet is to be sent.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7

Example:
$ modify stp port portid 1 disable pcost 1000 priority 0x10
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Port ID : 1
Priority
: 0x0
State : Forwarding
PortStatus : Enable
Path Cost : 100
Desig Cost : 0
Desig Root:00:30:4F0:10:5A:6C Desig Bridge:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C
Desig Port : 0x8000
Fwd Transitions : 1
STP Status : Enable
Set Done
Port ID : 1
Priority : 0x0
State : Forwarding
PortStatus : Enable
Path Cost : 100
Desig Cost : 0
Desig Root:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C Desig Bridge:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C
Desig Port : 0x8000
Fwd Transitions : 1
STP Status : Enable
STP PacketsPrio : 2
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done

IP DSLAM

203

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Port Id

The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning
Tree Protocol management information.

Priority

The value of the priority field which is contained in the most
significant 6 bits of the more significant octet of the (2 octet long)
Port ID. The least significant 2 bits of the more significant octet
and the less significant octet (total 10 bits) of the Port ID is given
by the value of dot1dStpPort.

State

The port's current state as defined by application of the Spanning
Tree Protocol. This state controls what action a port takes on
reception of a frame.

Port Status

The enabled/disabled status of the port.

Path Cost

The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the
spanning tree root which include this port.

Desig Cost

The path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to
this port. This value is compared to the Root Path Cost field in
received bridge PDUs.

Desig Root

The unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge recorded as the Root in
the Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Designated Bridge
for the segment to which the port is attached.

Desig Bridge

The Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port considers to be
the Designated Bridge for this port's segment.

Desig Port

The Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this
port's segment.

Fwd Transitions

The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning
state to the Forwarding state.

STP status

Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.

STP PacketsPrio

For STP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic
class/ Queue on out¦going interface. In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the
VC, on which the packet is to be sent

Caution:
z
The specified interface should be an existing bridge interface.
References:
z
bridge port intf command.

204

IDL series User Guide

5.6.14 Transparent Bridging Table Commands
5.6.14.1 Modify bridge tbg info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntac:
modify bridge tbg info [aging  ] [slaveaging  ]
[netaging  ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport
enable | disable] [ mcastsupport enable | disable ] [ mcastdrop enable | disable ]
[ dropiffdbfull  ] [ resnetlearning  ]
[resvmacprofileid  ]
5.6.14.2 Get Bridge tbg info
Description:
Use this command to get bridging related global information.
Command Syntax:
get bridge tbg info
Parameters:
Name

Description

Aging 

The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned
forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can be configured
when aging is to be stopped.
Type: Modify Optional
Valid values: 10 -1000000

slaveaging

The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned



forwarding information learned from the slave device. The
recommended value for this is more than or equal to the value for
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be configured when aging is to
be stopped.
Valid values: 10 -1000000

netaging 

forwarding information from NET side port. This is used only for full
bridge configuration. The recommended value of net aging timeout
should be greater than that of the ìAgingî parameter. The value 0 can
be configured when aging is to be stopped.
Valid values: 10 -1000000

IP DSLAM

205

floodsupport enable |

This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets are to be

disable

flooded or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan
configuration for flood support to determine if flooding has to be done
for unknown unicast packet.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable | disable

bcastsupport

This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported or not.

enable|disable

The value for this is used along with per vlan configuration broadcast
support, to determine if broadcasting has to be done for the broadcast
packet.

mcastsupport

Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.

enable|disable

Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable| disable

mcastdrop

Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be dropped, or to

enable|disable

be forwarded, if multicast is not supported. This is only valid if
dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable|disable

dropiffdbfull enable |

This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be done

disable

because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be dropped. If this
is enabled the frame for which learning could not be done because of
limit exceeded shall be dropped, else forwarded based on bridge
forwarding logic.This being enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a
response to such a frame from which learning could not be done shall
come the frame shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address,
shall not be found in forwarding table.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: enable

resnetlearning enable

This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for residential

| disable

bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in case of vlan with
residential bridging if 'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and
'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of vlan with
'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is governed only by per
port configuration i.e. 'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification
of this parameter is not supported.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: enable

resvmacprofileid

206

The Profile is used to determine the behavior for Reserved Mac

IDL series User Guide



destined frames on the bridge. Reserved Mac addresses are the
multicast addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE
802.1ad. If it does not contain any valid value then the behavior for
Reserved Mac destined frames

is determined based on Resvd Mac

profile associated with the VLAN in which the frame belongs to.VLAN
here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual
Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -4

Example:
$ modify bridge tbg info aging 20 slaveaging 100
Output:
Verbose Mode On
MacAddress
: 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
No. of Ports
:0
Base Type
: Transparent
Aging Timeout(sec)
: 300
Slaveaging TimeOut(sec) : 600
Netaging TimeOut(sec) : 600
Flood Support
: Disable
BroadCast Support
: Enable
MultiCast Support
: Enable
MultiCast Drop
: Disable
Full Bridging Status
:
Unrestricted
Drop If FDB full status: Enable
ResidentialNetLearning : Enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id: 1
Set Done
MacAddress
No. of Ports
Base Type

: 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
:0
: Transparent

Aging Timeout(sec)
: 20
Netaging TimeOut(sec) : 600
BroadCast Support
: Enable
MultiCast Drop
: Disable
Unrestricted
Drop If FDB full status: Enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id: 1

IP DSLAM

Slaveaging TimeOut(sec) : 100
Flood Support
: Disable
MultiCast Support
: Enable
Full Bridging Status
:
ResidentialNetLearning

: Enable

207

Output Fields:
Field

Description

MacAddress

The MAC address used by this bridge, when it must be
referred to, in a unique fashion. It is the address of one of the
Ethernet ports.

No. of Ports

The maximum number of ports that can be controlled by this
bridge.

Base Type

Indicates what type of bridging this bridge can perform. It is
always Transparent Bridging or STP.

Aging TimeOut

The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can
be configured when aging is to be stopped.

Slaveaging TimeOut

The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information learned from the slave device.
The recommended value for this is more than or equal to the
value for dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be
configured when aging is to be stopped.

Floodsupport

This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets
are to be flooded or not. The value for this is used along with
per vlan configuration for flood support to determine if
flooding has to be done for unknown unicast packet.

Bcastsupport

This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported
or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan
configuration broadcast support, to determine if broadcasting
has to be done for the broadcast packet.

Mcastsupport

Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.

Mcastdrop

Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be
dropped, or to be forwarded, if multicast is not supported.
This is only valid if dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.

NetAgingTimeout

The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information from NET side port. This is
used only for full bridge configuration. The recommended
value of net aging timeout should be greater than that of
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut.

Full Bridging Status

This specifies the current state of full bridging on the bridge.
Thebridge can be set to residential bridging, restricted full
bridging or unrestricted full bridging. In residential bridging, all
packets from a CPE side port are sent to Net side port without
doing a lookup in the forwarding table. In restricted full
bridging, there is a lookup and a packet coming from a CPE

208

IDL series User Guide

port destined for another CPE port is dropped. Hence,
CPE-CPE switching is not permitted. In unrestricted full
bridging, all traffic is forwarded based on lookup.
Drop If FDB full status

This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be
done because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be
dropped. If this is enabled the frame for which learning could
not be done because of limit exceeded shall be dropped, else
forwarded based on bridge forwarding logic.This being
enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a response to such a
frame from which learning could not be done shall come the
frame shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address,
shall not be found in forwarding table.

ResidentialNetLearning

This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for
residential bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in
case of vlan with residential bridging if
'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and
'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of
vlan with 'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is
governed only by per port configuration i.e.
'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification of this
parameter is not supported.

Reserved Mac Profile Id

The Profile is used to determine the behavior for Reserved
Mac destined frames on the bridge. Reserved Mac addresses
are the multicast addresses defined as reserved in IEEE
802.1Q and IEEE 802.1ad. If it does not contain any valid
value then the behavior for Reserved Mac destined frames is
determined based on Resvd Mac profile associated with the
VLAN in which the frame belongs to.VLAN here means the
802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in
case of Stacked Vlan Mode.

References:
z
Bridge Port commands
z
Bridge Port stats commands
z
Ethernet commands

IP DSLAM

209

5.7 Bridge Multicast Commands
5.7.1 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands
5.7.1.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mcast fwdall [vlanid ]
5.7.1.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdall
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge mcast fwdall [vlanid ] [egressports
 | none] [forbidegressports  | none]
Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional
parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for
a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory
parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan
case, vlan id is not required. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan
in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked
Vlan Mode.
Type: Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

egressports

The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, to

 | none

which all multicast group-addressed frames are to be
forwarded. More than one value can be given, separated by
spaces.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0
forbidegressports

210

The set of ports configured by management in this VLAN, for

IDL series User Guide

 |

which the Service Requirement attributes Forward All Multicast

none

Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More
than one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0

Example:
$ get bridge mcast fwdall vlanid 1
Output:
VLAN Index
:1
Forward All Ports
: 34
Forward All Static Ports
:1235
Forward All Forbidden Ports : 4 9 10 11
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Vlan Index

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address
is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC
address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not
required. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.

Forward All Ports

The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which all multicast
group-addressed frames are to be forwarded. This includes ports
for which this need has been determined dynamically by GMRP,
or configured statically by management.

Forward All Static Ports

The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, to
which all multicast group-addressed frames are to be forwarded.
More than one value can be given, separated by spaces.

Forward All Forbidden

The set of ports configured by management in this VLAN, for

Ports

which the Service Requirement attribute Forward All Multicast
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than
one value can be given, separated by spaces.

IP DSLAM

211

Cautions:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z
bridge static multicast

5.7.2 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands
5.7.2.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mcast forwarding [vlanid ] [macaddr ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed as
zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability.
Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value of vlanid
must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is not required. When Vlan
transparency feature is supported, the valid range for vlanid also
includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there shall always
be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN Id is created.
VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and
Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Modify － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

macaddr

The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this entry's



filtering information applies
Type:

212

Get

--

Optional

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ get bridge mcast forwarding vlanid 1 macaddr 00:30:4F:00:08:01
Output:
Vlan Index : 1
Egress ports : 1 2
Group Learnt : 1

Mac Address : 00:30:4F:00:08:01

Output Fields:
Field

Description

VLAN Index

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed
as zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast"
capability. Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast
MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a
valid value of vlanid must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is
not required. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the
valid range for vlanid also includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan
Multicast also there shall always be a seperate entry for 4097 if the
VLAN with that VLAN Id is created. VLAN here means the 802.1q
Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of
Stacked Vlan Mode.

Mac Address

The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this
entry's filtering information applies

Egress ports

The complete set of bridge ports, in this VLAN, to which frames
destined for this Group MAC address are currently being explicitly
forwarded. This does not include ports for which this address is
only implicitly forwarded, in the dot1qForwardAllPorts list.

Group Learnt

The subset of bridge ports in EgressPorts, which were learned by
GMRP or some other dynamic mechanism, in this Filtering
database.

References:
z
bridge static multicast

IP DSLAM

213

5.7.3 Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands
5.7.3.1 Get bridge mcast fwdunreg
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mcast fwdunreg [vlanid ]
5.7.3.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdunreg
Description Syntax:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge mcast fwdunreg [vlanid ] [egressports
 | none] [forbidegressports  | none]
Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required
and is passed as zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan
for multicast" capability. Each vlan can have its own information
for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory
parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For No
Vlan case VLAN id is not required. When Vlan transparency
feature is supported, the valid range for vlanid also includes
4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there shall always
be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN Id is
created. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Modify － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

egressports
 | none

The set of ports, configured by management, in this VLAN, to
which multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no
more specific forwarding information, are to be forwarded. More
than one value can be given, separated by spaces.

214

IDL series User Guide

Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, for

forbidegressports
 |

which the Service Requirement attribute Forward Unregistered

none

Multicast Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP.
More than one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0

Example:
$ get bridge mcast fwdunreg vlanid 1
Output:
VLAN Index
:1
Forward Unregistered Ports
: 45
Forward Unregistered Static Ports
:1236
Forward Unregistered Forbidden Ports : 4 9 10
Output Fields:
Field

Description

VLAN Index

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed as
zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast"
capability. Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC
address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value
of vlanid must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is not required.
When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid range for
vlanid also includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there
shall always be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN
Id is created. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.

Forward Unregistered

The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which multicast

Ports

group-addressed frames for which there is no more specific
forwarding information, will be forwarded. This includes ports, for
which this need has been determined dynamically by GMRP, or
configured statically by management.

Forward Unregistered
Static Ports

The set of ports, configured by management, in this VLAN, to which
multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no more specific
forwarding information, are to be forwarded. More than one value can

IP DSLAM

215

be given, separated by spaces.
Forward Unregistered
Forbidden Ports

The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, for which
the Service Requirement attribute Forward Unregistered Multicast
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than one
value can be given, separated by spaces.

Cautions:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z
Bridge commands.

5.7.4 Bridge Static Multicast Commands
5.7.4.1 Create bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge static mcast [vlanid ] mcastaddr 
[egressports ] [forbidegressports ]
5.7.4.2 Delete bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge static mcast [vlanid ] mcastaddr 
5.7.4.3 Get bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge static mcast [vlanid ] [mcastaddr ]

216

IDL series User Guide

5.7.4.4 Modify bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to modify
Command Syntax:
modify bridge static mcast [vlanid ] mcastaddr 
[egressports ] [forbidegressports ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Vlanid 

The VLAN ID for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across VLANs. Hence vlan id is an optional
parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for
a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory
parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan
case, vlan id is not required. This feature is not supported for
VLAN with vlanid as 4097.
Type: Optional for all commands
Valid values: 0 - 4095
Default value:

mcastaddr

The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which this



entry's filtering information applies. Bit 0 of the first octet of the
MAC address indicates a group (multicast) MAC address, if the
bit is SET. For example, 01:00:00:00:00:00,03:FF:FF:FF:FF.
Addresses in the range 01:80:C2:00:00:00 -01:80:C2:00:00:0f
and 01:80:C2:00:00:20 -01:80:C2:00:00:2f have been blocked
as value of this index, as these are reserved GARP addresses.
Type : Create － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Default value:

egressports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port

|none

and destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be
forwarded. A port may not be added in this set, if it is already a
member of the set of ports in ForbidEgressPorts. More than
one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Type :Optional for all commands

IP DSLAM

217

Valid values: 1 – 386
Default value: none
forbidegressports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port



and destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be

|none

forwarded, regardless of any dynamic information. A port may
not be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of
ports in EgressPorts. Type

:Optional for all commands

Valid values : 1 – 386
Default value: none

Example:
$ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7 mcastaddr 00:30:4F:00:00:01 egressports 10
forbidegressports 20
Output:
Verbose Mode On:
Entry Created
VLan Index
:7
Egress ports
: 10
Forbidden Egress ports : 20
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Mcast Address : 00:30:4F:00:00:01

Output Fields:
Field

Description

VLan Index

The VLAN ID for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address
is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC
address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not
required. This feature is not supported for VLAN with vlanid as
4097

Mcast Address

The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the
filtering information of this entry applies.

Egress ports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded.
A port may not be added in this set if it is already a member of the
set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.

218

IDL series User Guide

Forbidden Egress ports

The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be
forwarded, regardless of any dynamic information. A port may not
be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in
EgressPorts.

Cautions:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z
Bridge commands.

IP DSLAM

219

5.8 DHCP Commands
5.8.1 DHCP Client Commands
5.8.1.1 Get dhcp client info
Description:
Use this command to get DHCP client information for clients, on the specified
interface, or for all the interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get dhcp client info [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running. If this
is not specified, then information for clients on all such interfaces will

Ifname
be displayed.

Type : Optional
Valid values : eth-*, aggr-*

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$get dhcp client info ifname eth-0
Output:
If-name
Server
Status Lease Start Date Lease Time (sec)
-----------------------------------------------------------eth-0
1.1.1.1
Bound
Thu Jan 01 00:00:38 1970 500
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description
This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can be :

If-Name
eth-*, aggr-*
This specifies the address of the DHCP server with whom
Server

the client has obtained the IP address and other
configuratio.s

Status

220

This specifies the current state of the client. It may be:Init,

IDL series User Guide

Selecting, Bound, Requesting, Renew or Bind.
This signifies the date on which the DHCP server leased
Lease Start Date
out the IP address to the client.
This specifies the time period, (in seconds), for which an IP
address was leased out by the server.
Lease Time
The client is expected to renew the lease before the expiry
of this timer or release the IP Address.

References:
z
dhcp client stats related commands
5.8.1.2 Get dhcp client stats
Description:
Use this command to get DHCP client statistics on an interface on which the DHCP
client is running, or on all such interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get dhcp client stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
FIELD

Description

Ifname  This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running. If this is
not specified then information for clients on all such interfaces will be
displayed.
Type: Optional
Valid values : eth-0- *

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$get dhcp client stats ifname eth-0
Output:
If-name
Msgs Sent
Decline Sent
Discover Msgs Sent
Req Sent

IP DSLAM

: eth-0
:4
:0
:4
:0

Msgs Rcvd
Offer Msgs Rcvd
Acks Rcvd

:0
:0
:0

221

Rel Sent
Inform Sent

:0
:0

Nacks Rcvd
Invalid Rcvd

:0
:0

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

If-Name

This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can be : eth-0
This specifies number of DHCP messages received sent on this

Msgs Sent
interface.
This specifies number of DHCP messages sent received on this
Msgs Rcvd
interface.
Decline Sent

This specifies number of DHCP decline messages sent on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP offer messages received on this

Offer Msgs Rcvd
interface.
This specifies number of DHCP discover messages sent on this
Discover Msgs Sent
interface.
Req Sent

This specifies number of DHCP request messages sent on this interface.

Acks Rcvd

This specifies number of DHCP acks received on this interface.

Rel Sent

This specifies number of DHCP release messages sent on this interface.

Nacks Rcvd

This specifies number of DHCP nacks received on this interface.

Inform Sent

This specifies number of DHCP inform messages sent on this interface.
This specifies number of invalid dhcp messages received on this

Invalid Rcvd
interface.

References:
z
dhcp client info related commands

222

IDL series User Guide

5.9 DSL Commands
5.9.1 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands
5.9.1.1 Get adsl alarm profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl alarm profile [ifname ]
5.9.1.2 Modify adsl alarm profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl alarm profile ifname  [ atucthresh15minlofs
 ] [ atucthresh15minloss  ]
[ atucthresh15minlols  ] [ atucthresh15minlprs
 ] [ atucthresh15miness  ]
[ atucthreshfastrateup  ] [ atucthreshintlrateup
 ] [ atucthreshfastratedn  ]
[ atucthreshintlratedn  ] [ atucinitfailtrap False | True ]
[ atucoptrapenable False | True ] [ aturthresh15minlofs
 ] [ aturthresh15minloss  ]
[ aturthresh15minlprs  ] [ aturthresh15miness
 ] [ aturthreshfastrateup  ]
[ aturthreshintlrateup  ] [ aturthreshfastratedn
 ] [ aturthreshintlratedn  ]
[ atucgspmstatetrapenable False | True ] [ linealarmgscntrsreset False | True ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified or
viewed
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

IP DSLAM

atucthresh15minlofs

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 15 minutes performance data collection

223

period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minloss

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minlols

The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minlprs

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15miness

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface



within any given 15 minute performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthreshfastrateup

Applies to 'Fast' channels only.

Configured change in rate causing



an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucthreshintlrateup

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate



causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucthreshfastratedn

Applies to 'Fast' channels only.

Configured change in rate causing



an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.

224

IDL series User Guide

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucthreshintlratedn

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate



causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
Type:

atucinitfailtrap False | True

Modify

--

Optional

Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This object is defaulted
disable.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: False, True
atucoptrapenable False |

Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap

True

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: False, True
aturthresh15minlofs

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15minloss

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15minlprs

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15miness

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface



within any given 15 minutes performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthreshfastrateup

Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing



an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.

IP DSLAM

225

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

aturthreshintlrateup

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate



causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

aturthreshfastratedn

Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing



an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

aturthreshintlratedn

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate



causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgspmstatetrapenable

This indicates change in power mangement state

False | True

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: False, True
linealarmgscntrsreset False

This parameter resets performance counters at runtime

| True

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: False, True

Example:
$ get adsl alarm profile ifname dsl-0
Output:
IfName
: dsl-0
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
-----------------------------Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)
: 10 Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) : 20
Thresh 15Min Lols(sec)
: 30
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 50
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)
: 40 Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps): 70
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) : 30 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps):10
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 30
Init Fail Trap
: true
OpStateTrapEnable
: false PowerMgmtTrapEnable : True
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
-----------------------------Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)
: 10
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec)
: 10
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 10
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)
: 10
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps: 10
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps)
: 10 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps):10
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 10

226

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

IfName

The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified
or viewed

Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 15 minutes performance data
collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.

Thresh 15Min Loss(sec)

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.

Thresh 15Min Lols(sec)

The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.

Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec)

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.

Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.

Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps)

Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this
object.

Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps)

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this
object.

Thresh Fast Rate

Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate

Down(bps)

causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.

Thresh Intl Rate

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate

Down(bps)

causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.

IP DSLAM

227

Init Fail Trap

Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This object is defaulted
disable.

OpStateTrapEnable

Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap

PowerMgmtTrapEnable

This indicates change in power mangement state

Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'

Thresh 15Min Loss(sec)

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'

Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec)

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'

Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'

Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps)

Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.

Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps)

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.

Thresh Fast Rate

Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate

Down(bps)

causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.

Thresh Intl Rate

Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate

Down(bps)

causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.

References:
z
ADSL Commands

228

IDL series User Guide

5.9.2 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands
5.9.2.1 Get adsl alarm profilext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl alarm profilext [ifname ]
5.9.2.2 Modify adsl alarm profilext
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl alarm profilext ifname  [ atucthresh15minffstr
 ] [ atucthresh15minsesl  ]
[atucthresh15minuasl  ] [atucthresh15minfecsl
] [ atucthresh1daylofs  ]
[atucthresh1dayloss  ] [ atucthresh1daylols
 ][ atucthresh1daylprs  ]
[ atucthresh1dayess  ][ atucthresh1daysesl
 ] [ atucthresh1dayuasl ]
[atucthresh1dayfecsl  ] [ aturthresh15minsesl
 ] [ aturthresh15minuasl
 ][aturthresh15minfecsl ]
[ aturthresh1daylofs  ] [ aturthresh1dayloss
 ] [aturthresh1daylprs  ]
[ aturthresh1dayess  ] [aturthresh1daysesl
 ] [ aturthresh1dayuasl
 ][aturthresh1dayfecsl ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified or
viewed
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

atucthresh15minffstr

The number of failed retrains encountered by an ADSL interface within



any giving 15 minute performance data collection period, which cause the

IP DSLAM

229

SNMP agent to send an adslAtucFailedFastRTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minsesl

The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any giving 15 minute performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP to send an adslAtucSesLTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

atucthresh15minuasl

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any giving 15 minutes performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucUasLThreshTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

atucthresh15minfecsl

The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an



ADSL interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection
period, which causes adslAtucPerfFecsLThreshTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

atucthresh1daylofs

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

atucthresh1dayloss

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

atucthresh1daylols

The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,



within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAtucPerfLolsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

atucthresh1daylprs

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional

230

IDL series User Guide

Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1dayess

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,



within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAtucPerfESsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

atucthresh1daysesl

The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

atucthresh1dayuasl

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an
adslAtucPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

atucthresh1dayfecsl

The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an



ADSL interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection
period, which causes atucPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh15minsesl

The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any giving 15 minute performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP to send an adslAturPerfSesLThresh15MInTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

aturthresh15minuasl

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

aturthresh15minfecsl

The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an



ADSL interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection
period, which causes adslAturPerfFecsLThreshTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

aturthresh1daylofs

IP DSLAM

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL

231



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh1dayloss

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh1daylprs

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh1dayess

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,



within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAturPerfESsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh1daysesl

The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh1dayuasl

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL



interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

aturthresh1dayfecsl

The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an



ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes aturPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400

232

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ get adsl alarm profilext ifname dsl-0
Output:
IfName
: dsl-0
Atuc Thresh 15Min Fail FastR(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 15Min SesL(sec)
: 14
Atuc Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lols(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)
: 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)
: 10
Atur Thresh 15Min Sesl(sec)
: 10
Atur Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)
: 10
Atur Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)
: 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)
: 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)
: 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)
Atur Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec)
Atur Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)
Atur Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)
Atur Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)

: 10
: 10
: 10
: 10
: 10

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

IfName

The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be
modified or viewed

Atuc Thresh 15Min Fail FastR(sec)

The number of failed retrains encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data
collection period, which causes adslAtucFailedFastRTrap.

Atuc Thresh 15Min SesL(sec)

The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any given 15 minute performance
data collection period, which causes adslAtucSesLTrap.

Atuc Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 15 Minute

IP DSLAM

233

performance data collection period, which causes
adslAtucUasLThreshTrap.
Atuc Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)

The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15
Minute performance data collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfFecsLThreshTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLossThresh1DayTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lols(sec)

The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLolsThresh1DayTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)

The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by
an ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.

Atuc Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)

The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day
performance data collection period, which causes
atucPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 15Min Sesl(sec)

The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any given 15 minute performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfSesLThresh15MInTrap.

Atur Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 15 Minute

234

IDL series User Guide

performance data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)

The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15
Minute performance data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfFecsLThreshTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)

The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfLossThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)

The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec)

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfESsThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)

The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by
an ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)

The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.

Atur Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)

The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day
performance data collection period, which causes
aturPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.

References:
z
ADSL Commands

IP DSLAM

235

5.9.3 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands
5.9.3.1 Get adsl atuc channel
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc channel [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Type: Get – Optional
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23

Example:
$ get adsl atuc channel ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname
: dsli-0
Interleave Delay(ms) : 20
Curr Tx Rate(bps)
: 80
Prev Tx Rate(bps)
: 40
Crc Block Length(byte) : 90
Gs Curr Atm Status : NoAtmDefect GsSymbolsPerRsWord : 10
GsRsDepth
: 20
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode: 100
AtucChanPerfAtmCD
: 10
AtucChanPerfAtmCU
: 10
AtucChanGsINPdn
: 10
AtucChanGsL0dn
: 10
AtucChanGsM0dn
: 10
AtucChanGsT0dn
: 10
AtucChanGsB0dn
: 10
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.

Interleave Delay(ms)

Interleave delay for this channel.

Curr Tx Rate(bps)

Actual transmit rate on this channel.

Prev Tx Rate(bps)

The rate at the time of the last adslAtucRateChangeTrap
event.

Crc Block Length(byte)

Indicates the length of the channel data-block, on which
the CRC operates.

Gs Curr Atm Status

236

Indicates the current ATM Status.

IDL series User Guide

GsSymbolsPerRsWord

Indicates the number of DMT symbols per
Reed-Solomon code word (S), in the downstream
direction.

GsRsDepth

Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream
direction.

GsRedundantBytesPer

Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per

RsCode

Reed-Solomon code in the downstream direction.

AtucChanPerfAtmCD

Provides a count of the total number of cells passed
through the cell delineation and HEC function process
operating on the ATM Data Path while in the SYNC
state.(length = 4 bytes).

AtucChanPerfAtmCU

Provides a count of the total number of cells in the ATM
Data Path delivered at the logical interface between the
ATU-C and a digital network element, such as one or
more switching systems.

AtucChanGsINPdn

The actual number of Impulse Noise Protection(INP)
symbols for the downstream interleaved channel. One
symbol equals 250 µs, so an INP of 1 correlates to a
correction time of 250 µs.

AtucChanGsL0dn

The number of bits from the upstream latency path
function #0 included per DMT symbol.(length = 4 bytes).
It is not available for ADSL.

AtucChanGsM0dn

The number of Mux Data Frames per FEC Data Frame in
upstream latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is
not available for ADSL.

AtucChanGsT0dn

The ratio of the number of Mux Data Frames to the
number of sync octets in the upstream latency path
function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not available for
ADSL.

AtucChanGsB0dn

The nominal number of octets from frame bearer #0 per
Mux Data Frame at Reference Point A in upstream
latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not
available for ADSL.

IP DSLAM

237

5.9.4 ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands
5.9.4.1 Get adsl atuc chanperf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc chanperf [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name, for which
performance is to be viewed.
Type : Get － Optional
Valid values : dsli-0 - *, dslf-0 - *

Example:
$ get adsl atuc chanperf ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname
Perf Valid Intervals
Perf Invalid Intervals
Perf Valid 1Day Intvl
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl
Time Elapsed
/Monitored(sec)
Rx Blocks
Tx Blocks
Corrected Blocks
Uncorrected Blocks
NCD Count
OCD Count
HEC Count
NCD Failure Count
LCD Failure Count

238

: dsli-0
: 20
: 30
: 20
: 20
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
15
10
20
25
30
90
60
45
20
20

10
45
65
35
95
86
42
21
20
20

20
30
70
35
80
35
15
75
20
20

45
89
48
25
30
20
20
35
20
20

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

IfIndex of the interface of type adslfast and adslInterleave.

Perf Valid Intervals

The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table for which
data was collected. (length = 4 bytes)

Perf Invalid Intervals

The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
"adslAtucChanPerfValidIntervals" for which no data is available. This object
will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some intervals are
not available (e.g., in proxy situations). (length = 4 bytes)

Perf Valid 1Day Intvl

The number of previous 1-Day intervals in the interval table for which data
was collected.(length = 4 bytes)

Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl

The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
adslAtucChanPerfValid1DayIntervals for which no data is available. This
object will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some
intervals are not available (e.g., in proxy situations).(length = 4 bytes)

Time

Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min, Curr1Day and

Elapsed/Monitored(se

Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.

c)
Rx Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel since agent was
reset .
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel in the current 15
minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

Tx Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel in the current
15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.

Corrected Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors on this channel
since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors on this channel,
in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

Uncorrected Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this
channel since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this

IP DSLAM

239

channel in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
NCD Count

Performance Data :
Number of packets with NCD (No Cell Delineation) error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with NCD error received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.

OCD Count

Performance Data :
Number of packets with OCD (Out of Cell Delineation) error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with OCD error received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.

HEC Count

Performance Data :
Number of packets with HEC error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with HEC error received in the current 15 minute/
current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

NCD Failure Count

Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation(NCD) failures since
agent reset. An NCD failure is declared when an NCD defect is present for
2-3 seconds after SHOWTIME. (length = 4 bytes).
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation(NCD) failures in the
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1
day interval.

LCD Failure Count

Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation(LCD) failures since
agent reset. An LCD failure is declared when an LCD defect persists for
more than 2 - 3 seconds.(length = 4 bytes).
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation(LCD) failures in
the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1
day interval.

240

IDL series User Guide

5.9.5 ADSL ATUC Chanlntvl Commands
5.9.5.1 Get adsl atuc chanintvl
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc chanintvl [ifname ] [nintrvl ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-23

nintrvl 

Performance Data Interval number.
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 96

Example:
$ get adsl atuc chanintvl ifname dsli-0 nintrvl 1
Output:
Ifname
: dsli-0
Rx Blocks
: 10
Corrected Blocks
: 20
Gs Time Elapsed(sec)
: 30
GsNoCellDelineation
: 20
GsOutOfCellDelineation : 0
AtucChanIntvlLcds
: 20

IntervalNumber
:1
Tx Blocks
: 45
Uncorrected Blocks : 1
Valid Data
: true
GsHeaderErrorCheck : 0
AtucChanIntvlNcds : 20

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.

IntervalNumber

Performance Data Interval number.

Rx Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel during this interval.

Tx Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel during this
interval.

Corrected Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that were corrected on
this channel during this interval.

IP DSLAM

241

Uncorrected Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this
channel during this interval.

Gs Time Elapsed(sec)

Total time elapsed (in seconds) in this interval.

Valid Data

Indicates if the data for this interval is valid.

GsNoCellDelineation

Count of no cell delineation on this channel for this interval.

GsHeaderErrorCheck

GlobespanVirata parameter. Header error check counter (hec) on this
channel during this interval (length = 4 bytes).

GsOutOfCellDelineatio

GlobespanVirata parameter. Count of out of cell delineation (ocd) on this

n

channel during this interval (length = 4 bytes).

AtucChanIntvlNcds

Count of all blocks received with NCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).

AtucChanIntvlLcds

Count of all blocks received with LCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).

5.9.6 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands
5.9.6.1 Get adsl atuc interval
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc interval ifname  [nintrvl ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.



Type:

Get --

Mandatory

Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
nintrvl

Number of intervals.



Type: Get – Optional
Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 12

Example:
$ get adsl atuc interval ifname dsl-0 sintrvl 1 nintrvl 1

242

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
IntervalNumber
: 12
IntervalLofs(sec)
: 83
IntervalLols(sec)
: 85
IntervalESs(sec)
: 87
IntervalFastR
: 191
IntervalSesL(sec)
: 193
IntervalFecsL(sec) : 15
IntervalInitsFailed : 15

IntervalValidData
: False
IntervalLoss(sec)
: 84
IntervalLprs(sec)
: 86
IntervalInits
: 88
IntervalFailedFastR : 192
IntervalUasL(sec)
: 194
GsTimeElapsed(sec) : 1001

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.

IntervalNumber

Count from 1 through 96 of 15-minute intervals. Performance
Data Interval number 1 is the most recent previous interval;
interval 96 is 24 hours ago (length = 4 bytes).

IntervalValidData

This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.

IntervalLofs(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Framing.

IntervalLoss(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Signal.

IntervalLols(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Link.

IntervalLprs(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Power.

IntervalESs(sec)

Count of Errored Seconds in the interval.

IntervalInits

Count of the line initialization attempts during the interval.

IntervalFastR

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Fast Retrains.

IntervalFailedFastR

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Failed Fast
Retrains.

IntervalSesL(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was severely errored
seconds.

IntervalUasL(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was unavailable
errored seconds.

IntervalFecsL(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Forward error
correction seconds (length = 4 bytes).

GsTimeElapsed(sec)

Total elapsed seconds in this interval.

IntervalInitsFailed

Count of the failed full line initialization attempts during the
interval (length = 4 bytes).

IP DSLAM

243

5.9.7 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands
5.9.7.1 Get adsl atuc perf
Description:
Use this command to get ADSL ATUC interface performance.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc perf [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL ATUC interface name, for which performance is to



be viewed.
Type : Get – Optional
Valid values : dsl-0 - dsl-*

Example:
$ get adsl atuc perf ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname
Perf Valid Intervals
Perf Invalid Intervals
AtucPerfStatLossL

: dsl-0
: 20
: 30
: 10
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day

Time Elapsed
/Monitored(sec)
30
LOFS (sec)
40
LOSS (sec)
30
LOLS (sec)
30
LPRS (sec)
10
ES (sec)
90
INITS
60
Perf Stat FastR
45
Perf Stat Failed FastR 43
Perf Stat SESL
41
Perf Stat UASL
37
Perf Stat FecsL
10
Perf Stat InitsFailed 10

244

10
45
65
35
95
85
42
21
46
48
49
16
16

20
35
75
65
30
32
15
75
40
67
90
11
11

Prev1Day
30
50
20
10
80
90
20
35
45
65
50
11
11

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

Ifindex of the type Adsl port Count of the number of Loss of
Framing failures since agent reset.

Perf Valid Intervals

The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table,
for which data was collected. (length = 4 bytes)

Perf Invalid Intervals

The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
"adslAtucPerfValid-Intervals", for which no data is available. This
object will typically be zero except in cases where the data for
some intervals are not available (e.g., in proxy situations). (length
= 4 bytes)

AtucPerfStatLossL

Count of 1-second intervals containing one or more loss of signal
(LOS) defects. (Not available for ADSL)

Time

Performance Data : Total time elapsed in seconds

Elapsed/Monitored(se

Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min, Curr1Day

c)

and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day

LOFS (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of Framing failures
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of Framing.

LOSS (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of signal failures
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of signals.

LOLS (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of link failures
since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of link.

LPRS (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of power failures
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of power.

ES (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of errored seconds since
agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of errored seconds in
the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.

IP DSLAM

245

INITS

Performance Data : Count of line initialization attempts since
agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of line initialization
attempts in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.
Includes both successful and failed attempts.

Perf Stat FastR

Performance Data : Count of fast retrain.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Fast Retrain.

Perf Stat Failed FastR

Performance Data : Count of failed fast retrain.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when
there was Failed Fast Retrain.

Perf Stat SESL

Performance Data : Count of severely errored second line.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when
there was severely errored second.

Perf Stat UASL

Performance Data : Count of unavailable errored seconds.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when
there was unavailable errored seconds.

Perf Stat FecsL

Performance Data:
Count of 1-second intervals, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies, since agent reset. (Not available for
ADSL)
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day:
Count of 1-second intervals, in the current 15-minute/current
1-day/previous 1-day interval, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies. (Not available for ADSL)

Perf Stat InitsFailed

Performance Data:
Count of the failed full initialization attempts in current
15-minute/current 1-day/previous 1-day interval. A failed full
initialization is when showtime is not reached at the end of the full
initialization procedure.

246

IDL series User Guide

5.9.8 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands
5.9.8.1 Get adsl atuc physical
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc physical [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.



Type: Get – Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get adsl atuc physical ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname

: dsl-0

Serial Number

: Conexant 1.0

Vendor ID

: 0039

Version Number

: 1.0

Curr Status

: NoDefect

Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)

: 20

CurrAttainable Rate(bps)
GsOpState
GsActualStandard
GsTxAtmCellCounter
GsStartProgress
GsIdleBertError
GsBertSync

IP DSLAM

: 40

Curr Atn(dB/10) : 80
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10):90

: Data
: T1_413
: 214

GsRxAtmCellCounter

: 215

: 213
: 200 GsIdleBertCells

: 100

: BertOutOfSync

GsBertError

:0

Data Boost Status

: Enable

Chan Perf CD

:2

247

Chan Perf BE

:5

PM State

: L2

Extended PSD Status

: True Chip Version

Pilot Tone

Chan Perf Cu

: 21

Overhead Channel

Psd Mask

: FlatMsk

System Vendor ID

: 12345678

ATU-C Self Test Result

: 10
:2
:4000

: 10 Atuc G9941 Vendor ID:12345678

Atuc ACTPSDus (dB/10)
StartUp Error Code

: 90

AtucStartBin(GSpan++):90

: StartupErrorCodeMAXNOMATPus

BitSwapCount

: 90

ModPhase

: FlatRateCheck

Transmit Spectrum Shaping info
----------------------------------[ 0]

90

UpStream Gains per bin
--------------------------[ 0]

15

GsSeltInfoValid

: NotConnected

GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet)

: 20

GsSeltLoopEnd

: open

GsSeltLoopGauge

: greater_26awg

GsSeltUpShannonCap (in bps)

: 10

GsSeltDownShannonCap (in bps)

: 20

Selt InbandNoise Len (dBM/Hz)
---------------------------------[ 0] 0110030607
Selt Termination Resp (0-18Kft ms)
--------------------------------------[ 0] 0110030607
Selt UpMgnAtRate (dB/10)
----------------------------[ 0] 0110030607

248

IDL series User Guide

Selt DownMgnAtRate (dB/10)
------------------------------[ 0] 0110030607
Delt HLINSCus

:2

Delt HLOGMTus

:2

Delt LNMTus

DELT Last Tx State

: dmtatucg9941

Delt SnrmtUs

: 100

:2

DELT Curr Status: FailedUnknown

Delt HLINpsus
-----------------[ 0]

5

Delt HLOGpsus
-----------------[ 0]

20

Delt QLNpsus
----------------[ 0]

12

Delt DMT Bin SNR
--------------------[ 0]

16

Signal Atn(dB/10)

: 40

GsParametricTestResult

: Ok

Parametric Info
-------------------Bin Number

Number of bits/bin

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.

Serial Number

The vendor specific string that identifies the vendor
equipment.

Vendor ID

Vendor ID Code.

Version Number

The vendor specific version number sent by this ATU as
part of the initialization messages.

IP DSLAM

249

Curr Status

Indicates current state of the ATUC line. This is a bit-map
of possible conditions.

Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)

Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect to its
received signal in tenth dB.

Curr Atn(dB/10)

Measured difference in the total power transmitted by the
peer ATU and the total power received by this ATU.

CurrAttainable Rate(bps)

Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate by
the ATU. This value will be equal to, or greater than the
current line rate.

Curr Output Pwr(dB/10)

Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.This
is the measurement that was reported during the last
activation sequence.

GsOpState

Operational state of the Xcvr.

GsActualStandard

Actual standard used for connection, based on the
outcome of the negotiation with the Remote Unit.

GsTxAtmCellCounter

Provides Tx ATM cell counter.

GsRxAtmCellCounter

Provides Rx ATM cell counter.

GsStartProgress

Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr. 0x0ñ
startup not in progress; 0x0 ñ 0x0FFF
Handshake/Training/ Profile Management/ Fast Retrain
inprogress; 0x8000 ñ 0x8FFF DSP firmware DownLoad in
progress; 0xF000 ñ 0xFFFF illegal Parameter

GsIdleBertError

Number of bit errors.

GsIdleBertCells

Number of idle cells.

GsBertSync

Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.

GsBertError

Provides the number of bit errors detected during BERT.

Data Boost Status

Conexant parameter that indicates whether DataBoost is
utilized for the connection.

Chan Perf CD

The near-end delineated total cell count performance
parameter is a count of the total number of cells passed
through the cell delineation and HEC function process,
operating on the ATM Data Path, while in the SYNC state.
(Not available for ADSL)

Chan Perf BE

The near-end idle bit error count performance parameter is
a count of the number of bit errors in the idle cell payload
received in the ATM Data Path at the near-end. (Not
available for ADSL)

PM State

The Line Power Management state. (Not available for
ADSL)

Chan Perf Cu

250

The total number of data-only cells received by ATUC.

IDL series User Guide

Extended PSD Status

Conexant parameter that indicates whether an extended
upstream PSD is used - for G.Span Plus mode of
operation only. Only supported for G.Span Plus, therefore
this parameter is not valid for ADSL2/ADSL2plus modes of
operation.

Chip Version

The DSP version number.

Pilot Tone

Conexant parameter that indicates the Pilot Tone Index.

Overhead Channel

Indicates the Overhead Channel. This feature is not
supported by DSLPHY as yet.

Psd Mask

Conexant parameter that indicates the actual Psd Mask
currently being used.

System Vendor ID

Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-C in the
Overhead Messages(ADSL2). Typically identifies the
ATU-C system integrator which usually refers to the
vendor of the smallest field-replaceable unit. ATU-C
System Vendor ID may not be the same as ATU-C Vendor
ID. It is not available for ADSL. This is string of 8 octets
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2
octet vendor revision number.

ATU-C Self Test Result

Defines the ATU-C selftest result. The most significant
octet is: 00 hex if the self-test passed or 01 hex if the
self-test failed. Interpretation of the other octets is vendor
discretionary and can be interpreted in combination with
G.994.1 and system Vendor IDs.

Atuc G.994.1 Vendor ID

Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-C in the
G.994.1 CL message. Typically identifies the vendor of the
ATU-C G.994.1 functionality. This is string of 8 octets
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2
octet vendor revision number.

Atuc ACTPSDus (dB/10)

This parameter defines the average upstream transmit
power spectrum density over the used subcarriers
delivered by the ATU-C at the U-C reference point, at the
instant of measurement. It's value ranges from -90 to 0, in
0.1 dB/Hz steps. It is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus.

AtucStartBin (GSpan++)

This Gspan++ parameter indicates the start bin of the bit
loading up array.

StartUp Error Code

Conexant parameter which indicates the startup error
code.

BitSwapCount

This Conexant parameter indicates the bit swap count. It
can read only in data mode

IP DSLAM

251

ModPhase

Conexant parameter to monitor the status of MoD

Atuc TSSpsUs

This parameter provides the Upstream Transmit Spectrum
Shaping parameter expressed as the set of break points
exchanged during G994.1. Each breakpoint consists in a
subcarrier index and the associated shaping parameter.
Value of this parameter is in range 0 - 127, in multiples of
-0.5 dB. 127 is a special value indicating the subcarrier is
not transmitted. It is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus.

GainspsUs

This parameter defines the upstream gains allocation table
per subcarrier. It is an array of integer values in the 0 to
4093 range for subcarriers 0 to NSCus-1. The gain value
is represented as a multiple of 1/512 on linear scale. It is
supported for ADSL2/ADSl2plus only.

GsSeltInfoValid

Indicates the information validity for the SELT operation
conducted on the Xcvr.

GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet)

Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the SELT
information is valid on the Xcvr.

GsSeltLoopEnd

Indicates whether the loop is short or open once when the
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.

GsSeltLoopGauge

Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once, when
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.

GsSeltUpShannonCap (in bps)

Indicates the upstream shannon capacity once, when the
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.

GsSeltDownShannonCap (in bps)

Indicates the downstream shannon capacity once, when
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.

AtucGsSeltInbandNoise

512 values that indicate inband noise length in dBM/Hz,
covering both bands from 0 to 1.1 MHz.

AtucGsSeltTerminationResp

180 discrete values that indicate termination response
magnitude from 0 to 18Kft.

AtucGsSeltUpMgnAtRate

300 values that indicate SNR margin in dB/10 at a
particular rate are provided, at 100K increments, up to 15
Mbps.

AtucGsSeltDownMgnAtRate

300 values that indicate SNR margin in dB/10 at a
particular rate are provided, at 100K increments, up to 15
Mbps.

Delt HLINSCus

The DELT-related parameter that provides the scale factor
to be applied to the upstream Hlin (f) values. (Not available
for ADSL and ADSL2plus)

Delt HLOGMTus

The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of
symbols used to measure the upstream Hlog (f). (Not

252

IDL series User Guide

available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt QLNMTus

The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of
symbols used to measure the upstreamQLN (f) values.
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)

DELT Last Tx State

The DELT-related parameter that provides the last
successful transmitted initialization state by the ATUC.
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)

Delt SnrmtUs

DELT-related parameter that provides the number of
symbols used to measure the upstream SNR(f) values.
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus).

DELT Curr Status

Current Status of Atuc Line in DELT Mode

Delt HLINpsus

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
complex upstream Hlin (f) values in linear scale. (Not
available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)

Delt HLOGpsus

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
real upstream Hlog (f) values in dB. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)

Delt QLNpsus

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
real upstream QLN (f) values in dB. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)

Delt DMT Bin SNR

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
real upstream SNR (f) values in dB. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)

Signal Atn(dB/10)

DELT-related parameter that provides the upstream signal
attenuation (length = 4 bytes). (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus).

GsParametricTestResult

Indicates the Result of the Parametric Test conducted on
the Xcvr.

Parametric Info

Conexant parameter that indicates the Parametric Test
Array.

AtucDMTBinBits

Number of bits per bin for the bin indexed by this element
of the string. The 0th element contains the number of bits
for bin 0 through to the 31st element, which contains the
number of bits for bin 31. The range of expected values is
from 0 to 15 bits per bin.

IP DSLAM

253

5.9.9 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands
5.9.9.1 Get adsl atuc traps
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc traps [ifname 
Example:
$ get adsl atuc traps ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
Lofs Thresh Trap : 0
Lols Thresh Trap : 0
ESs Thresh Trap : 1
Rate Change Trap : 0
PM State Trap
:2

Loss Thresh Trap
:1
Lprs Thresh Trap
:1
Init Failure Trap
:1
Gs OpState Trap
:1
Command Failure Trap : 2

Output Fields :
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The IfIndex of DSL port.

Lofs Thresh Trap

Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).

Loss Thresh Trap

Loss of Signal 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).

Lols Thresh Trap

Loss of Link 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).

Lprs Thresh Trap

Loss of Power 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).

ESs Thresh Trap

Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).

Init Failure Trap

ATU-C initialization failed. Refer to adslAtucCurrStatus for potential reasons
(length = 4 bytes).

Rate Change Trap

The ATU-Cs transmit rate has changed (RADSL mode only) (length = 4 bytes).

Gs OpState Trap

Op State change (length = 4 bytes).

PM State Trap

PM state change trap used for ADSL2/ADSL2plus PM operation. This trap is not
valid for ADSL mode.

Command Failure Trap

When the APIs fail to send a customer command to the DSP, the customer is
notified by a new trap and they need to re-issue the command.

254

IDL series User Guide

5.9.10 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands
5.9.10.1 Get adsl atuc trapsext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc trapsext [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The IfIndex of DSL port.



Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get adsl atuc trapsext ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
Failed FastR Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 SesL Thresh 15Min Trap:1
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap
: 1 FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap:0
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap
: 0 Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
Lols Thresh 1Day Trap
: 1 Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap: 1
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap
: 0 SesL Thresh 1Day Trap: 0
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap
: 1 FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap: 0
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The IfIndex of DSL port.

Failed FastR Thresh

Failed retrains 15-minute interval threshold reached.

15Min Trap
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap

Severely Errored Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.

UasL Thresh 15Min Trap

Unavailable Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.

FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap

Forward error correction Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.

Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap

IP DSLAM

Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached.

255

Loss Thresh 1Day Trap

Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached.

Lols Thresh 1Day Trap

Loss of Link 1-day interval threshold reached.

Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap

Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached.

ESs Thresh 1Day Trap

Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.

SesL Thresh 1Day Trap

Severely Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.

UasL Thresh 1Day Trap

Unavailable Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.

FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap

Forward error correction Seconds 1-day interval threshold
reached.

5.9.11 ADSL ATUR Chanlntrvl Commands
5.9.11.1 Get adsl atuc chanintrvl
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur chanintrvl [ifname ] [nintrvl ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name



Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23

nintrvl 

Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 96

Example:
$ get adsl atur chanintrvl ifname dsli-0 nintrvl 2
Output:
Ifname
: dsli-0
Rx Blocks
: 10
Corrected Blocks
: 10
GsNoCellDelineation : 10
Valid Data
: true
AturChanIntvlLcds
: 20

256

IntervalNumber
:2
Tx Blocks
: 10
Uncorrected Blocks : 10
GsHeaderErrorCheck : 10
AturChanIntvlNcds : 20

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL interface name

IntervalNumber

Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.

Rx Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel, during this interval.

Tx Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel, during this interval.

Corrected Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that were corrected on this
channel, during this interval.

Uncorrected Blocks

Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that cannot be corrected,
on this channel, during this interval.

GsNoCellDelineation

GlobespanVirata parameter. Count of no cell delineation (ncd) on this
channel during this interval.

GsHeaderErrorCheck

Conexant parameter. Header error check counter (HEC) on this channel,
during this interval.

Valid Data

This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.

AturChanIntvlNcds

Count of all blocks received with NCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).

AturChanIntvlLcds

Count of all blocks received with LCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).

References:
z
atur interval related commands

5.9.12 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands
5.9.12.1 Get adsl atur channel
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur channel [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name



Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23

IP DSLAM

257

Example:
$ get adsl atur channel ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname
: dslf-0
Interleave Delay(ms) : 10
Prev Tx Rate(bps)
: 10
Gs Curr Atm Status : 1
GsRsDepth
: 10
AturChanPerfAtmCD
: 10
AturChanGsINPup
: 10
AturChanGsM0up
: 10
AturChanGsB0up
: 10

Curr Tx Rate(bps)
: 10
Crc Block Length(byte)
: 10
GsSymbolsPerRsWord
: 10
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode : 10
AturChanPerfAtmCU
: 10
AturChanGsL0up
: 10
AturChanGsT0up
: 10

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL Interface Name

Interleave Delay(ms)

Interleave delay for this channel. Interleave delay
applies only to the interleave channel and defines the
mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input
bytes at the interleaver input and their placement in the bit
stream at the interleaver output. Larger numbers provide
greater separation between consecutive input bytes in the
output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency.

Curr Tx Rate(bps)
Prev Tx Rate(bps)

Actual transmit rate on this channel
The rate at the time of the last adslAturRateChangeTrap
event.

Crc Block Length(byte)

Indicates the length of the channel data-block on which
the CRC operates.

Gs Curr Atm Status

Indicates an ncd or lcd failure if the counter surpasses
127. If neither ATM counter surpasses 127, the return
value will be NoAtmDefect.

GsSymbolsPerRsWord

Indicates number of DMT symbols per Reed- Solomon
code word (S) in the upstream direction Note that S is not
restricted to interleaved mode only. Even in fast mode, S
is a valid constant value and is equal to 1.

GsRsDepth

Indicates interleaving depth (D) in the upstream direction
Note that D is not restricted to interleaved mode only.
Even in fast mode, D is a valid constant value and is

258

IDL series User Guide

equal to 1.
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode

Indicates number of redundant bytes (R) per
Reed-Solomon code in the upstream direction

AturChanPerfAtmCD

Provides a count of the total number of cells passed
through the cell delineation and HEC function process
operating on the ATM Data Path while in the SYNC
state.(length = 4 bytes).

AturChanPerfAtmCU

Provides a count of the total number of cells in the ATM
Data Path delivered at the interface(s) between ATU-R
and ATM switching layer.(length = 4 bytes).

AturChanGsINPup

The actual number of Impulse Noise Protection(INP)
symbols for the upstream interleaved channel. One
symbol equals 250 µs, so an INP of 1 correlates to a
correction time of 250 µs.

AturChanGsL0up

The number of bits from the upstream latency path
function #0 included per DMT symbol.(length = 4 bytes). It
is not available for ADSL.

AturChanGsM0up

The number of Mux Data Frames per FEC Data Frame in
upstream latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is
not available for ADSL.

AturChanGsT0up

The ratio of the number of Mux Data Frames to the
number of sync octets in the upstream latency path
function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not available for ADSL.

AturChanGsB0up

The nominal number of octets from frame bearer #0 per
Mux Data Frame at Reference Point A in upstream
latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not
available for ADSL.

References:
z
ADSL commands

IP DSLAM

259

5.9.13 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands
5.9.13.1 Get adsl atur chanperf
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur chanperf [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name.



Type : Get – Optional
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-23

Example:
$ get adsl atur chanperf ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname
: dsli-0
Perf Valid Intervals
: 10
Perf Invalid Intervals
: 10
Perf valid 1Day Intvl
: 20
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl
: 20
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day
Time Elapsed
/Monitored(sec)
10
10
Rx Blocks
10
10
10
Tx Blocks
10
10
10
Corrected Blocks 10
10
10
Uncorrected Blocks 10
10
10
NCD Count
10
10
10
HEC Count
10
10
10
NCD Failure Count 20
20
20
LCD Failure Count 20
20
20

260

Prev1Day
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL interface name.

Perf Valid Intervals

Number of previous 15-minute intervals, for which the
data was collected.

Perf Invalid Intervals

Number of previous 15- minute intervals, for which no
data is available.

Perf valid 1Day Intvl

The number of previous 1-day intervals in the interval
table for which data was collected.(length = 4 bytes).

Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl

The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value
of adslAturChanPerfValid1DayIntervals for which no
data is available. This object will typically be zero except
in cases where the data for some intervals are not
available (e.g., in proxy situations).(length = 4 bytes).

Time

Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,

Elapsed/Monitored(sec)

Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.

Rx Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel,
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel in
the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day
interval.

Tx Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this Channel,
since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.

Corrected Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected
errors on this channel, since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected
errors on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current
1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

Uncorrected Blocks

Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected
errors on this channel, since agent was reset.

IP DSLAM

261

Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected
errors on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current
1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
NCD Count

Performance Data :
Number of packets with NCD (No Cell Delineation)
errors.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with NCD error, received in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.

HEC Count

Performance Data :
Number of packets with HEC error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with HEC error received in the
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

NCD Failure Count

Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation
(NCD) failures since agent reset. An NCD failure is
declared when an NCD defect is present for 2-3
seconds after SHOWTIME.(length = 4 bytes).
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with no cell
delineation(NCD) failures in the current 15 minute/
current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

LCD Failure Count

Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation
(LCD) failures since agent reset. An LCD failure is
declared when an LCD defect persists for more than 2 3 seconds.(length = 4 bytes)
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation
(LCD) failures in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/
previous 1 day interval.

References:
z
ADSL commands

262

IDL series User Guide

5.9.14 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands
5.9.14.1 Get adsl atur interval
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur interval ifname  [nintrvl ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name.



Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

nintrvl 

Number of 15 minutes intervals.
Type: Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 96

Example:
$ get adsl atur interval ifname dsl-0 nintrvl 1
Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
IntervalNumber
:1
IntervalLofs(sec) : 10
IntervalLprs(sec) : 10
IntervalLESs(sec) : 10

IntervalValidData : true
IntervalLoss(sec) : 10

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The IfIndex of DSL port

IntervalNumber

Count from 1 through 96 of 15 minute intervals. Performance Data Interval number 1 is the
most recent previous interval; interval 96 is 24 hours ago.

IntervalValidData

This variable indicates if the data for this interval is valid.

IntervalLofs(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Framing.

IntervalLoss(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Signal.

IntervalLprs(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Power.

IntervalESs(sec)

Count of Errored Seconds in the interval. The errored second parameter is a count of
one-second intervals containing one or more crc anomalies, or one or more los or sef defects.

IP DSLAM

263

5.9.15 Adsl atur intervalext Commands
5.9.15.1 Get adsl atur intervalext
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur intervalext [ifname ] [nintrvl ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name.



Type : Get – Mandator
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

nintrvl 

Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
Type:

Get --

Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 96

Example:
$ get adsl atur intervalext IFNAME dsl-0 NINTRVL 1
Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
IntervalNumber
:1
IntervalSesl(sec) : 10
IntervalFecsL(sec) : 10

IntervalUasL(sec) : 10

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL interface name.

IntervalNumber

Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.

IntervalSesl(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was severely errored seconds.

IntervalUasL(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was unavailable errored seconds.

IntervalFecsL(sec)

Count of seconds in the interval when there was Forward error correction seconds.

References
z
atur interval related commands

264

IDL series User Guide

5.9.16 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands
5.9.16.1 Get adsl atur perf
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur perf [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name.



Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23.

Example:
$ get adsl atur perf ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname
Perf Valid Intervals
Perf Invalid Intervals

: dsl-0
: 10
: 10
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day
Prev1Day
Time Elapsed/Monitored(sec) 10
10
10
LOFS (sec)
10
10
10
10
LOSS (sec)
10
10
10
10
LPRS (sec)
10
10
10
10
ES (sec)
10
10
10
10
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

Ifindex of the type Adsl port

Perf Valid Intervals

The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table for
which data was collected.

Perf Invalid Intervals

The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
'adslAturPerfValid-Intervals' for which no data is available. This object
will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some intervals
are not available (e.g., in proxy situations).

Time

IP DSLAM

Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,

265

Elapsed/Monitored(sec)

Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.

LOFS (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of
Framing failures since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of Framing.

LOSS (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of
signal failures since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of signals.

LPRS (sec)

Performance Data: Count of number of Loss of power failures, since
agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval, when
there was Loss of power.

ES (sec)

Performance Data : Count of number of errored seconds since agent
was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of errored seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.

5.9.17 Adsl atur perfext Commands
5.9.17.1 Get adsl atur perfext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur perfext [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

Ifindex of the type Adsl port
Type:

Get --

Mandatory

Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get adsl atur perfext ifname dsl-0

266

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
AturPerfStatLossL : 14
PerfData
Perf Stat SESL
10
Perf Stat UASL
10
Perf Stat FecsL 11

Curr15Min Curr1Day
Prev1Day
10
10
10
10
10
10
13
19
21

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

Ifindex of the type Adsl port

AturPerfStatLossL

Count of 1-second intervals containing one or more far end loss of
signal (LOS) defects (Not available for ADSL)

Perf Stat SESL

Performance Data : Count of severely errored second line.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval,
when there was severely errored second.

Perf Stat UASL

Performance Data : Count of unavailable errored seconds.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval,
when there was unavailable errored seconds.

Perf Stat FecsL

Performance Data:
Count of 1-second intervals, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies, since agent reset. (Not available for
ADSL)
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day:
Count of 1-second intervals, in the current 15-minute/current
1-day/previous 1-day interval, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies. (Not available for ADSL)

References:
z
atur perfdata related commands

IP DSLAM

267

5.9.18 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands
5.9.18.1 Get adsl atur physical
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur physical [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL interface name.



Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get adsl atur physical ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname

: dsl-0

Serial Number
Vendor ID
Version Number
Curr Status
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)
Atn(dB/10)
: 10
CurrAttainable Rate(bps)
10
AturGsConfig
Chan Perf CD
CU
:5
Chan Perf BE
Overhead Channel
ID
: 12345678
ATU-R Self Test Result
ID
: 12345678
Atur ACTPSDds (dB/10)
BitSwapCount
PSDMaskMode

268

: CO123456
: Vendor123
: VerNo98114
: LossOfFraming
: 10
: 10

Curr
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10) :

: 0x0121020203
:5
:5
: 4000
: 0x10

Chan Perf

System Vendor
ATUR G9941 Vendor

: 90
: 90
: CoMsk2

IDL series User Guide

DownStream Gains per bin
----------------------------[ 0]
15
Transmit Spectrum Shaping info
----------------------------------[ 0]
90
Delt HLINSCds
:2
Delt HLOGMTds
:8
QLNMTds
:5
DELT Last Tx State
: dmtaturg9941
SnrmtDs
: 100
Delt HLINpsds
-----------------[ 0]
18
Delt HLOGpsds
-----------------[ 0]
20
Delt QLNpsds
----------------[ 0] 22
Delt DMT Bin SNR
--------------------[ 0] 22
Signal Atn(dB/10)
: 40
Bin Number
Number of bits/bin
------------------------------------[ 0] 0110030607

Delt
Delt

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL Interface Name

Serial Number

The vendor specific string that identifies the vendor equipment
(EOC - read 5 seconds after data mode).

Vendor ID

Vendor ID code (EOC - read 5 seconds after data mode).

Version Number

The vendor specific version number sent by this ATU,as part of
the initialization messages (EOC - read 5 seconds after data
mode).

Curr Status

Indicates current State of ATUR Line. This is a bitmap of possible
conditions. Due to the isolation of the ATU-R when line problems
occur, many state conditions such as loss of power, loss of quality

IP DSLAM

269

signal, and initialization errors, cannot be determined.
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)

Noise Margin as seen by this ATU, with respect to its received
signal, in tenth dB.

Curr Atn(dB/10)

Measured difference in the total power transmitted by the peer
ATU, and the total power received by this ATU.

CurrAttainable Rate(bps)

Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate by the ATU.
This value will be equal to, or greater than, the current line rate.

Curr Output Pwr(dB/10)

Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.This is the
measurement that was reported during the last activation
sequence.

AturGsConfig

The upstream and downstream ATU-R configuration data (EOC read 5 sec after data mode).

Chan Perf CD

The far-end delineated total cell count performance parameter is a
count of the total number of cells passed through the cell
delineation and HEC function process, operating on the ATM Data
Path, while in the SYNC state. (Not available for ADSL)

Chan Perf CU

The far-end user total cell count performance parameter is a count
of the total number of cells in the ATM Data Path delivered at the
V-C (for ATU-C) or TR (for ATUR) interface. (Not available for
ADSL)

Chan Perf BE

The far-end idle bit error count performance parameter is a count
of the number of bit errors in the idle cell payload received in the
ATM Data Path at the far-end. (Not available for ADSL)

Overhead Channel

Indicates the Overhead Channel. This feature is not supported by
DSLPHY as yet.

System Vendor ID

Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the Embedded
Operations Channel(ADSL). Typically identiies the ATU-R system
integrator which usually refers to the vendor of the smallest
field-replaceable unit. ATU-R System Vendor ID may not be the
same as ATU-R G.994.1 Vendor ID. For ADSL2, provides the
Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the Overhead Messages. It
is not available for ADSL. This is string of 8 octets containing 2
octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2 octet vendor revision
number.

ATU-R Self Test Result

Defines the ATU-R selftest result. The most significant octet is: 00
hex if the self-test passed or 01 hex if the self-test failed.
Interpretation of the other octets is vendor discretionary and can be
interpreted in combination with G.994.1 and system Vendor IDs.

ATUR G9941 Vendor ID

Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the G.994.1
CLR message.The G.994.1 Vendor ID typically identifies the

270

IDL series User Guide

vendor of the ATU-R G.994.1 functionality. This is string of 8 octets
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2 octet
vendor revision number.
Atur ACTPSDds (dB/10)

This parameter defines the average downstream transmit power
spectrum density over the used subcarriers delivered by the ATU-C
at the U-C reference point, at the instant of measurement. It's value
ranges from -90 to 0, in 0.1 dB/Hz steps. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus.

BitSwapCount

This Conexant parameter indicates the bit swap count. It can read
only in data mode

PSDMaskMode

This conexant parameter that indicates the actual PSD Mask
currently being used by ATU-R

Gain Spsds

This parameter defines the downstream gains allocation table per
bin. It is supported for ADSL2/ADSl2plus only.

Atur TSSpsds

This parameter provides the Downstream Transmit Spectrum
Shaping parameter expressed as the set of break points
exchanged during G994.1. Value of this parameter is in range 0 127, in multiples of -0.5 dB. 127 is a special value indicating the
subcarrier is not transmitted. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus.

Delt HLINSCds

The DELT-related parameter that provides the scale factor to be
applied to the downstream Hlin (f) values. (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)

Delt HLOGMTds

The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of symbols
used to measure the downstream Hlog (f). (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)

Delt QLNMTds

The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of symbols
used to measure the downstream QLN (f) values. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)

DELT Last Tx State

The DELT-related parameter that provides the last successful
transmitted initialization state by ATU-R. (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)

Delt SnrmtDs
Delt HLINpsds

DELT-number of symbols to measure DS SNR
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of complex
downstream Hlin (f) values in linear scale. (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)

Delt HLOGpsds

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real
downstream Hlog (f) values in dB. (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)

Delt QLNpsds

IP DSLAM

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real

271

downstream QLN (f) values in dB. (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)
DMT Bin SNR

The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real
downstream SNR (f) values in dB (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)

Signal Atn(dB/10)

DELT-related parameter that provides the downtream signal
attenuation (length = 4 bytes). (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus).

AturDMTBinBits

Number of bits per bin for the bin indexed by this element of the
string. The 0th element contains the number of bits for bin 0
through to the 255th element, which contains the number of bits for
bin 255. The range of expected values is from 0 to 15 bits per bin
(256 bytes for Annex A and Annex B, 512 bytes for G.Span/Adsl+,
1024 bytes for G.Span Plus).

References:
z
ADSL commands

5.9.19 ADSL ATUR Traps Commands
5.9.19.1 Get adsl atur traps
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur traps [ifname 

Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get adsl atur traps ifname dsl-0

272

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
Lofs Thresh Trap : 1
Lprs Thresh Trap : 1
Rate Change Trap : 0

Loss Thresh Trap : 1
ESs Thresh Trap : 0

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL Interface Name

Lofs Thresh Trap

Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold reached

Loss Thresh Trap

Loss of Signal 15-minute interval threshold reached

Lprs Thresh Trap

Loss of Power 15-minute interval threshold reached

ESs Thresh Trap

Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold reached

Rate Change Trap

The ATU-Rs transmit rate has changed (RADSL mode only).

References
z
ADSL Commands

5.9.20 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands
5.9.20.1 Get adsl atur trapsext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur trapsext [ifname 

Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get adsl atur trapsext ifname dsl-0

IP DSLAM

273

Output:
Ifname
: dsl-0
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap : 1
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap: 0
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0

UasL Thresh 15Min Trap : 0
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap
:1
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The ADSL Interface Name.

SesL Thresh 15Min Trap

Severely Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.

UasL Thresh 15Min Trap

Unavailable Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.

FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap

Forward error correction Seconds 15-minute interval
threshold reached.

Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap

Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached.

Loss Thresh 1Day Trap

Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached.

Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap

Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached.

ESs Thresh 1Day Trap

Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.

SesL Thresh 1Day Trap

Severely Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold
reached.

UasL Thresh 1Day Trap

Unavailable Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold
reached.

FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap

Forward error correction Seconds 1-day interval
threshold reached.

References:
z
ADSL Commands

274

IDL series User Guide

5.9.21 ADSL Cap Commands
5.9.21.1 Get adsl cap
Description:
Use this command to view DSL transmission capability.
Command Syntax:
get adsl cap
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get adsl cap
Output:
Tx Capability : q9921potsOverlapped q9921potsNonOverlapped
Output Fields:
Field

Description
This bitmap specifies which all transmission modes, which the
ATU-C is capable of supporting. Right now support for Annex A,

Tx Capability
Annex B, G.Span/ADSL+ and G.Span Plus is present. This value
depends on the DSL PHY firmware present on Columbia MxU.

References:
z
create dsl system
z
get dsl system

IP DSLAM

275

5.9.22 ADSL Line Intf Commands
5.9.22.1 Get adsl line intf
Description:
Use this command to view ADSL line configuration.
Command Syntax:
get adsl line intf [ifname ]
5.9.22.2 Modify adsl line intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl line intf ifname  [ lineconfgsaction startup |
spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb | atmLp | spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot |
spectrumCMtpr | spectrumRMtpr | hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest | rcvFilterTest
| rcvPowerPerBinTest | idleNoisePerBinTest | totalIdleNoiseTest | selt | shutdown |
wakeup | AbortReq ] [ linepmconfpmsf L3ToL0StateForce | L0ToL2StateForce |
L3StateForce | L2ToL0StateForce ] [ linedeltconfldsf inhibit | force ]
[ linetransatucconfig ansit1413 | etsi | q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped | q9921isdnOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9921tcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922potsNonOverlapeed | q9922potsOverlapped | q9922tcmIsdnNonOverlapped
| q9922tcmIsdnOverlapped | q9921tcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped | adslPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped
| q9923IsdnNonOverlapped | q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9925IsdnOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ] [ dsbinsnrupdate Disable | Enable ]
[ enable | disable ]

276

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The interface name of the DSL port.
Type:

Modify

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
lineconfgsaction startup |
spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb |

Allows action on per-line basis.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atmLp | spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot |
spectrumCMtpr | spectrumRMtpr |
hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest |
rcvFilterTest | rcvPowerPerBinTest |
idleNoisePerBinTest | totalIdleNoiseTest
| selt | shutdown | wakeup | AbortReq
linepmconfpmsf L3ToL0StateForce |

PM-related parameter used by ATU-C to force a

L0ToL2StateForce | L3StateForce |

change in the line state. (Not available for

L2ToL0StateForce

ADSL/ADSL2Plus)
Type:

linedeltconfldsf inhibit | force

Modify

--

Optional

The DELT-related parameter used by ATU-C to force
the line into the loop diagnostics mode. (Not available
for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

linetransatucconfig ansit1413 | etsi |

The transmission modes that the ATU-C is capable of

q9921PotsNonOverlapped |

supporting. The modes available are limited by the

q9921PotsOverlapped |

design of the equipment. REFERENCE"Section 7.3.2

q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |

ITU G.997.1" (length = 4 bytes).

q9921isdnOverlapped |

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

q9921tcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922potsNonOverlapeed |
q9922potsOverlapped |
q9922tcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9922tcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |

IP DSLAM

277

q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
adslPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlappe
d | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped
| q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9923IsdnOverlapped |
q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
| q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
| q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped
dsbinsnrupdate Disable | Enable

Conexant parameter to enable or disable collection of
downstream SNR bin status
Type:

enable | disable

Modify

--

Optional

Administrative status of the interface.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable

Example:
$ get adsl line intf ifname dsl-0
Output:
IfName
Line Type
dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr
L2RxAddr
: 10
GsUtopia L2RxAddr2nd
L2TxAddr2nd : 11
Gs Clock Type
analoglb
Trans Atuc Cap
Trans Atuc Actual
Trans Atuc Config
GsDmtTrellis
Trans Atur Cap

278

: dsl-0
: noChannel

Coding Type

: 23

GsUtopia

: 11

GsUtopia

: oscillator

Gs Action

:

:

: ansit1413
: q9921PotsNonOverlapped
: ansit1413
: trellisOn
: ansit1413

IDL series User Guide

PM Conf PMSF
: idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF
: inhibit
Curr Output Pwr(dBm/10)
: 10
Enable
Bin Number
SNR Margin/bin
--------------------------------[ 0] 16
Oper Status
Enable

: Up

DS Bin SNR Update

Admin Status

:

:

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

IfName

The interface name of the DSL port.

Line Type

Line type used by the DSL port.

Coding Type

Line coding type used by the port.

GsUtopia L2TxAddr

UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for a line.

GsUtopia L2RxAddr

UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address.

GsUtopia L2RxAddr2nd

Conexant parameter to set UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address for the
secondary bearer channel in case of Dual Latency. (length = 4
bytes)

GsUtopia

Conexant parameter to set UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for the

L2TxAddr2nd

secondary bearer channel in case of Dual Latency. (length = 4
bytes)

Gs Clock Type

Indicates use of crystal or oscillator.

Gs Action

Allows action on per-line basis.

Trans Atuc Cap

Transmission modes that ATU-C is capable of.

Trans Atuc Actual

Transmission modes

Trans Atuc Config

The transmission modes that the ATU-C is capable of supporting.
The modes available are limited by the design of the equipment.
REFERENCE"Section 7.3.2 ITU G.997.1" (length = 4 bytes).

GsDmtTrellis
Trans Atur Cap

Indicates whether trellis coding has been enabled or not.
The transmission modes that the ATU-R is capable of supporting.
The modes available are limited by the design of the equipment
(length = 4 bytes).

PM Conf PMSF

PM-related parameter used by ATU-C to force a change in the
line state. (Not available for ADSL/ADSL2Plus)

Line DELT Conf LDSF

The DELT-related parameter used by ATU-C to force the line into
the loop diagnostics mode. (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)

IP DSLAM

279

Curr Output

This conexant parameter indicates the measure of total output

Pwr(dBm/10)

power transmitted by this ATU. The value of this parameter is
dynamic and will also show the change in Tx power due to Power
Management. For example, the value will decrease in L2 low
power mode. This value can be negative.

DS Bin SNR Update

Conexant parameter to enable or disable collection of
downstream SNR bin status

Bin SNR Margin(dB/10)

Bin SNR margin for particular sub carrier

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or
down.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.

5.9.23 ADSL Line Profile Commands
5.9.23.1 Get adsl line profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl line profile [ifname ]
5.9.23.2 Modify adsl line profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl line profile ifname  [ atucrateadaptation fixed |
adaptAtStartup | adaptAtRuntime ] [ gsparamtestinputfile
 ] [ atuctargetsnr  ]
[ atucmaxsnrmargin  ] [ atucgsrsintcorrectionup
125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms | 2ms | 4ms | disable ] [ atucdnshiftsnrmargin
 ] [ atucupshiftsnrmargin  ]
[ atucminupshifttime  ] [ atucmindnshifttime
 ] [ atucfastmintxrate  ]
[ atucintlmintxrate  ] [ atucfastmaxtxrate
 ] [ atucintlmaxtxrate  ]
[ atucmaxintldelay  ] [ type noChannel | fastOnly |
interleavedOnly | fastOrInterleaved | fastAndInterleaved ] [ atucgstxendbin
 ] [ atucgstxstartbin  ]

280

IDL series User Guide

[ atucgsmaxbitsperbin  ] [ atucgsrxstartbin
 ] [ atucgsrxendbin  ]
[ atucgsrxbinadjust disable ] [ atucgsltriggermode locCrc | rmtCrc | snrInc |
snrDec | disable ] [ atucgsadi2x standard ] [ atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone |
initiatePn ] [ atucgstxpoweratten 0 | point1 | point2 | point3 | point4 | point5 |
point6 | point7 | point8 | point9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15
| 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 |
35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 ] [ atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 256 ]
[ atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25 | 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable ]
[ atucgsrsintcorrectiondn 125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms | 2Ms | 4Ms | Disable ]
[ atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25 | 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable ] [ atucgsdrstby Disable |
Enable ] [ atucgsexpexch Expanded | Short ] [ atucgsescfastretrain Enable |
Disable ] [ atucgsfastretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsbitswap Disable | Enable ]
[ atucgsntr LocalOcs | Refck8K ] [ atucgsalctlusver Unknown ]
[ atucgsusecustombin Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsdnbinusage
 ] [ atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 | 256 | 511 ]
[ atucgsfullretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgspsdmasktype CoMsk2 | FlatMsk |
CabMsk2 | CoMsk2Rfi | FlatMskRfi | CabMsk2Rfi | CoMsk2Rfi0 | Adsl2NonovlpM1
| Adsl2NonovlpM2 | Adsl2NonovlpFlat ] [ atucgseraseprofs enable | disable ]
[ atucgsextrsmemory notpresent | present ] [ paramhybridlossteststart
 ] [ paramhybridlosstestend
 ] [ dmttrellis on | off ] [ aturtargetsnrmargin
 ] [ aturdnshiftsnrmargin  ]
[ aturupshiftsnrmargin  ] [ aturminupshifttime
 ] [ aturmindnshifttime  ]
[ aturfastmintxrate  ] [ aturintlmintxrate
 ] [ aturfastmaxtxrate  ]
[ aturintlmaxtxrate  ] [ aturmaxintldelay
 ] [ databoost Enable | Disable ] [ upstreampsd Extended |
Standard | Jj100 ] [ atucconfpmmode pmstatel3enable | pmstatel2enable |
disable ] [ atucconfpml0time  ] [ atucconfpml2time
 ] [ atucconfpml2atpr  ]
[ atucconfpml2minrate  ] [ atucconfmsgminds
 ] [ aturconfmsgminus  ]
[ atucminsnrmgn  ] [ aturminsnrmgn
 ] [ atucfrontenddesigntype El1508 | El1528 | Le87213 ]
[ atuchwpwrreduction Disable | Enable ] [ atucgsusbitswap Disable | Enable ]
[ aturmaxsnrmgn  ] [ atucconfmininp Inp0 | InpPoint5 |
Inp1 | Inp2 | InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16 ] [ atucpml2entrythreshrate
atucpml2entrythreshrate ] [ atucpml2exitthreshrate
 ] [ atucpml2entryratemintime

IP DSLAM

281

 ] [ atucgscabinethsenable Disable | Enable ]
[ atucgsseltlooptype RealCable | Dls90 | Dls400 ] [ atucgsrxstartbinu1
 ] [ atucgsrxendbinu1  ]
[ gspsdmaskdsenable PsdMaskDisable | PsdMaskEnable | PsdMaskEnableMod ]
[ gspsdmaskusenable PsdMaskDisable | PsdMaskEnable | PsdMaskEnableMod ]
[ psdmaskdsfallbackenable False | True ] [ psdmaskusfallbackenable False |
True ] [ atucconfmaxnompsdds  ]
[ aturconfmaxnompsdus  ]
[ atucconfmaxnomatpds  ]
[ aturconfmaxnomatpus  ] [ atucconfpsdmaskds
 ] [ aturconfpsdmaskus  ]
[ aturratemode fixed | adaptAtStartup | adaptAtRuntime ] [ aturconfmininp Inp0 |
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 | InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16 ] [ gsannexcoltocxswitch
CxSwitch19DB | CxSwitch20DB | CxSwitch21DB | CxSwitch22DB | CxSwitch23DB
| CxSwitch24DB | CxSwitch25DB | CxSwitch26DB | CxSwitch27DB |
CxSwitch28DB | CxSwitch29DB | CxSwitch30DB ] [ atucconfgsannexcswitch
Gspan19DB | Gspan20DB | Gspan21DB | Gspan22DB | Gspan23DB |
Gspan24DB | Gspan25DB | GspanPlus7DB | GspanPlus8DB | GspanPlus9DB |
GspanPlus10DB | GspanPlus11DB | GspanPlus12DB | GspanPlus13DB |
GspanPlus14DB | GspanPlus15DB ] [ gsannexctouqswitch CUqSwitch6DB |
CUqSwitch6_5DB | CUqSwitch7DB | CUqSwitch8DB | CUqSwitch9DB |
CUqSwitch10DB | CUqSwitch11DB | CUqSwitch12DB | CUqSwitch13DB |
CUqSwitch14DB | CUqSwitch15DB ] [ atucminsnrmgntime
 ] [ atuccustomerid WorldWide | France | China |
Portugal ] [ atucmpsdmasktype Adsl2MEu64 | Adsl2MEu60 | Adsl2MEu56 |
Adsl2MEu52 | Adsl2MEu48 | Adsl2MEu44 | Adsl2MEu40 | Adsl2MEu36 |
Adsl2MEu32 | Adsl2MAll ] [ atucgsseltloopgauge 26awg | 24awg ]
[ atucconfrateratio  ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to bemodified or viewed
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

atucrateadaptation fixed |

Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this

adaptAtStartup |

modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more information.

adaptAtRuntime

Type:

gsparamtestinputfile

Indicates Name of the Input file from which to take the Mask Array Size,



lower and upper mask Array. Null string means no file is specified
Type:

282

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

IDL series User Guide

atuctargetsnr

Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise Margin the



modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7, or better, to
successfully complete initialization.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
atucmaxsnrmargin

Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If the Noise



Margin is above this, the modem hould attempt to reduce its power
output to optimize its operation.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
atucgsrsintcorrectionup

Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS can

125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms |

also be disabled.

2ms | 4ms | disable

Type:

atucdnshiftsnrmargin

Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin



falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its

Modify

--

Optional

transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value
will be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
atucupshiftsnrmargin

Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin



rises above this level, the modem should attempt to increase its
transmit rate. In thecase that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
atucminupshifttime

Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before



an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 16383
atucmindnshifttime


Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 16383
atucfastmintxrate


Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucintlmintxrate

IP DSLAM

Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.

283



Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucfastmaxtxrate


Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucintlmaxtxrate


Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucmaxintldelay


Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel. Interleave
delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines the mapping
(relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver
input and their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.
Larger numbers provide greater separation between consecutive input
bytes in the output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 255
type noChannel | fastOnly |
interleavedOnly |

This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line mode.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

fastOrInterleaved |
fastAndInterleaved
atucgstxendbin

The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.



Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0x06 - 0xff
atucgstxstartbin

The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.



Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0x06 - 0xff
atucgsmaxbitsperbin

The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.



Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 15
atucgsrxstartbin

The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.



Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0x01 - 0x1ff
atucgsrxendbin

284

The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.

IDL series User Guide



Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0x06 - 0x1ff
atucgsrxbinadjust disable

This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsltriggermode locCrc |

The type of event that triggers a fast retrain

rmtCrc | snrInc | snrDec |

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

disable
atucgsadi2x standard

For non-standard compliant ADI CPE
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone

Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send a C-tone to

| initiatePn

the remote unit.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgstxpoweratten 0 |

The value in dB of Tx power attenuation

point1 | point2 | point3 | point4

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

| point5 | point6 | point7 |
point8 | point9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 |
14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |
21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 |
28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 |
35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40
atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 |

Sets the coding gain in dB increments

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 256

Type:

atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25

This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the downstream fast

| 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable

buffer. RS can also be disabled.
Type:

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

atucgsrsintcorrectiondn

This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream interleaved

125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms |

buffer.RS can also be disabled.

2Ms | 4Ms | Disable

Type:

atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25

This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the upstream fast

| 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable

buffer.RS can also be disabled.
Type:

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

atucgsdrstby Disable |

This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the line driver

Enable

Type:

atucgsexpexch Expanded |

T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES

Short

Type:

atucgsescfastretrain Enable

This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain capability

| Disable

Type:

atucgsfastretrain Enable |

This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability. Currently

Disable

supported only in G.lite mode.

IP DSLAM

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

285

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsbitswap Disable |

This parameter enables/disables bit swapping

Enable

Type:

atucgsntr LocalOcs |

This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis

Refck8K

Type:

atucgsalctlusver Unknown

For T1.413 demo purposes only
Type:

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

atucgsusecustombin Enable

This parameter enables/disables user selection which of the 511 bins

| Disable

will be enabled for upstream and downstream transmission.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsdnbinusage

'1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,whereas a '0'



disables usage of corresponding bin.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 | 256

Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's hardware

| 511

Type:

atucgsfullretrain Enable |

Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability

Disable

Type:

atucgspsdmasktype

This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be used

CoMsk2 | FlatMsk | CabMsk2

Type:

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

| CoMsk2Rfi | FlatMskRfi |
CabMsk2Rfi | CoMsk2Rfi0 |
Adsl2NonovlpM1 |
Adsl2NonovlpM2 |
Adsl2NonovlpFlat
atucgseraseprofs enable |

This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast retrain

disable

profiles at startup
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsextrsmemory

Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS RAM

notpresent | present

Type:

paramhybridlossteststart

Start bin for range of bins to be measured. The default value mentioned



DO-400523-AN and DO-401163-AN.
Type:

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

Valid values: 0x0 - 0x1ff
paramhybridlosstestend

End bin for range of bins to be measured.



Valid values: 0x0 - 0x1ff

dmttrellis on | off

This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis coding should

Modify

--

Optional

always be enabled for its clear performance advantage.
Type:

286

Modify

--

Optional

IDL series User Guide

aturtargetsnrmargin

Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power



7 or better to successfully complete initialization
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturdnshiftsnrmargin


Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value
will be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturupshiftsnrmargin


Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin
rises above this level, the modem should attempt to increase itís
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturminupshifttime


Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn, before
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturmindnshifttime


Minimum time that the current margin is below DownshiftSnrMgn,
before a downshift occurs. In the case that RADSL mode is not present,
the value will be 0.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturfastmintxrate


Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturintlmintxrate


Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturfastmaxtxrate


Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff

IP DSLAM

287

aturintlmaxtxrate


Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturmaxintldelay


Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel. Interleave
delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines the mapping
(relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver
input and their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.
Larger numbers provide greater separation between consecutive input
bytes in the output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
databoost Enable | Disable

Conexant parameter that enables/disables DataBoost option.
Type:

upstreampsd Extended |
Standard | Jj100

Modify

--

Optional

Conexant parameter that sets the upstream PSD to be either
extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucconfpmmode

PM-related parameter used by the ATU-C to set the allowed link states.

pmstatel3enable |

Both bit values can be given simultaneously in the input. Additional

pmstatel2enable | disable

value to disable pmmode is disable, which is equal to 0.
Type:

atucconfpml0time


Modify

--

Optional

PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds) between an exit
from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2 state. It ranges from 0 to
255 seconds.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 255
atucconfpml2time


PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds) between an Entry
into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the L2 state and between
two consecutive Power Trims in the L2 State. It ranges from 0 to 255
seconds.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 255
atucconfpml2atpr


PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter represents the maximum aggregate transmit power
reduction (in dB) that can be performed through a single Power Trim in
the L2 state. It ranges from 0 dB/10 to 310 dB/10.

288

IDL series User Guide

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
atucconfpml2minrate


PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter specifies the minimum net data rate during the low power
state (L2). The data rate is coded in bit/s, and can range from 0x1F40
(8000) bps to 0xFA000 (1024000) bps.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0x1F40 - 0xFA000
atucconfmsgminds


Configures downstream overhead channel bandwidth. This feature is
not supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 4000 - 64000
aturconfmsgminus


Configures upstream overhead channel bandwidth.This feature is not
supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 4000 - 64000
atucminsnrmgn


Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7 or
better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
aturminsnrmgn


Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7 or
better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310
atucfrontenddesigntype

Front end hardware reference design

El1508 | El1528 | Le87213

Type:

atuchwpwrreduction Disable

Hardware configuration parameter

| Enable

Type:

atucgsusbitswap Disable |

This parameter enables/disables upstream bit swapping

Enable

Type:

aturmaxsnrmgn

Configured Maximum acceptable downstream Signal/Noise Margin. If



the Noise Margin is above this the modem attempts to reduce its power

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

output to optimize its operation. The value set by the user is in dB/10,
and ranges from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB steps.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 310

IP DSLAM

289

atucconfmininp Inp0 |

Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection for

InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 |

the downstream bearer channel.

InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16

Type:

atucpml2entrythreshrate

PM config param. L2 state entry data rate.



Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff

atucpml2exitthreshrate

PM config param. L2 state exit data rate.



Type:

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucpml2entryratemintime

PM config param.Min L2 entry rate time



Valid values: 900 - 65535

atucgscabinethsenable

Enable/Disable HS tones in Cabinet mode

Disable | Enable

Type:

atucgsseltlooptype

Conexant parameter that is used to specify the loop type for SELT. The

RealCable | Dls90 | Dls400

default value mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type:

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

atucgsrxstartbinu1

Conexant parameter that specifies lowest bin number allowed for Rx



signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive start and
end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

atucgsrxendbinu1

Conexant parameter that specifies highest bin number allowed for Rx



signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive start and
end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

gspsdmaskdsenable

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point

PsdMaskDisable |

between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)

PsdMaskEnable |

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

PsdMaskEnableMod
gspsdmaskusenable

Conexant parameter used to enable the Mask on Demand(MoD)

PsdMaskDisable |

feature in the upstream direction. It is available only for ADSL2 Annex A

PsdMaskEnable |

ONLY.(length = 4 bytes)

PsdMaskEnableMod

Type:

psdmaskdsfallbackenable

Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD) fallback

False | True

mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the base ADSL2

Modify

--

Optional

depending upon the downstream rate. It is avaiable only for ADSL2
Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

290

Modify

--

Optional

IDL series User Guide

Valid values: False, True
psdmaskusfallbackenable

Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD) fallback

False | True

mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the base ADSL2
depending upon the upstream rate. It is avaiable only for ADSL2 Annex
A.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: False, True
atucconfmaxnompsdds

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit



PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and near end transmitter
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only
for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to -40 in steps of 0.1
dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: (-600) - (-400)
aturconfmaxnompsdus

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit



PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and near end transmitter
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only
for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to -38 in steps of 0.1
dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: (-600) - (-380)
atucconfmaxnomatpds

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate transmit



power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and local capabilities and is
exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps of 0.1
dBm.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 255
aturconfmaxnomatpus

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate transmit



power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and local capabilities and is
exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps of 0.1
dBm.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 255
atucconfpsdmaskds

IP DSLAM

This configuration parameter defines that the downstream PSD mask

291



applicable at the U-C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined in
the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). (length = 4 bytes).
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

aturconfpsdmaskus

This configuration parameter defines that the upstream PSD mask



applicable at the U C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined in
the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). It is available only for
Annexes J and M of ADSL2/ADSL2plus.(length = 4 bytes)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

aturratemode fixed |

Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this

adaptAtStartup |

modem. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.

adaptAtRuntime

Type:

aturconfmininp Inp0 |

Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection for

InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 |

the upstream bearer channel. Supported for ADSL2/ADSL2plus ONLY

InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16

Type:

gsannexcoltocxswitch

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point

CxSwitch19DB |

between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)

CxSwitch20DB |

Type:

Modify

Modify

Modify

--

--

--

Optional

Optional

Optional

CxSwitch21DB |
CxSwitch22DB |
CxSwitch23DB |
CxSwitch24DB |
CxSwitch25DB |
CxSwitch26DB |
CxSwitch27DB |
CxSwitch28DB |
CxSwitch29DB |
CxSwitch30DB
atucconfgsannexcswitch

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point

Gspan19DB | Gspan20DB |

between Annex C and G.Span (IFM) and between Annex C and

Gspan21DB | Gspan22DB |

G.Span Plus.(length = 4 bytes)

Gspan23DB | Gspan24DB |

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Gspan25DB | GspanPlus7DB
| GspanPlus8DB |
GspanPlus9DB |
GspanPlus10DB |
GspanPlus11DB |
GspanPlus12DB |
GspanPlus13DB |
GspanPlus14DB |

292

IDL series User Guide

GspanPlus15DB
gsannexctouqswitch

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point

CUqSwitch6DB |

between Annex C and G.Span Plus SUQ.(length = 4 bytes)

CUqSwitch6_5DB |

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

CUqSwitch7DB |
CUqSwitch8DB |
CUqSwitch9DB |
CUqSwitch10DB |
CUqSwitch11DB |
CUqSwitch12DB |
CUqSwitch13DB |
CUqSwitch14DB |
CUqSwitch15DB
atucminsnrmgntime

This parameter indicates the time when the snr margin violation is



allowed. After this time expires and current snr is less than min snr, the
DSL line is dropped by the APIs.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 255
atuccustomerid WorldWide |

This parameter indicates the customer ID.

France | China | Portugal

Type:

atucmpsdmasktype

Conexant parameter that selects the PSD mask option to be used for

Adsl2MEu64 | Adsl2MEu60 |

Adsl2M.

Adsl2MEu56 | Adsl2MEu52 |

Type:

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

Adsl2MEu48 | Adsl2MEu44 |
Adsl2MEu40 | Adsl2MEu36 |
Adsl2MEu32 | Adsl2MAll
atucgsseltloopgauge 26awg

This parameter should be set to the expected loop gauge.

| 24awg

Type:

atucconfrateratio

This parameter specifies the latency rate for both channels in a dual



latency configuration. This parameter must be set the parameter to a

Modify

--

Optional

value greater than 0 and less than 100.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 100

Example:
$ get adsl line profile ifname dsl-0

IP DSLAM

293

Output:
IfName

: dsl-0

ADSL ATUC Configuration :
-----------------------------Rate Adaptation

: fixed

Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20
GsRsIntCorrectionUp

Max Snr Mgn(dB/10)

: 1ms

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50

Min Upshift Time(sec)

: 70

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

: 10

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x20

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x40

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x50

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x60

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 10

GsTxStartBin

: 0x20

GsTxEndBin

: 0x06

GsRxStartBin

: 0x06

GsRxEndBin

: 0x1f

GsMaxBitsPerBin

: 15

GsMaxDCo

: 64

GsRxBinAdjust

: enable

GsAdi2x

GsInitiate

: waitPn

GsTxPowerAtten

: standard
: point6

GsCodingGain

: Auto

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

:1

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

: 125Us

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

: 50

GsDrStby

: Disable

GsExpandedExchange

GsEscapeFastRetrain

: Enable

GsFastRetrain

GsBitSwap

: Enable

GsNtr

GsAlctlUsVer

: Short
: Enable
: LocalOcs

: Unknown

GsUseCustomBin

: Enable

GsFullRetrain

: Enable

GsPsdMaskType

: FlatMsk

GsEraseProfiles

: enable

GsExtRsMemory

: ExtRsMemory

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x23
GslTriggerMode

: rmtCrc

Type

: noChannel

GsDnBinUsage
ParametricTestInputFile
Data Boost

294

: 40

ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x10
GsDmtTrellis

: on

: 0xff
: TestFile
: Enable

Upstream PSD

: Extended

Conf PM Mode

: pmstatel3enable pmstatel3disable

IDL series User Guide

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

: 120

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

: 255

Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

: 30

Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)

: 0xFA00

MSG Min Ds

: 4000

Min Snr Mrg(dB/10)

: 20

FrontEnd H/W Design

: El1508

H/W Pwr Reduction

: Enable

GsUsBitSwap

: Enable

PML2 Entry Thresh Rate

Minimum INP

: 0x1000

PML2 Exit Thresh Rate

PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800
GsSeltLoopType

: Real Cable

GsRxStartBinU1

: 0x3aa

GsRxEndBinU1

: Inp0
: 0x1000

CabinetHsEnable

: 0x4a6

: Disable

PSD MoD Enable

:

PsdMaskEnable
PsdMod FallBackEnable

: Enable

Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)

: 204

Max Nom PSD(dB/10)

: -40

Downstream PSD Mask :
-------------------------[ 0]

0

GsAnnexCOlToCxSwitch

: CxSwitch19DB

GsAnnexCSwitch

: Gspan19DB

GsAnnexCToUqSwitch

:

CUqSwitch6_5DB
Min SnrMgnTime(sec)

: 20

Customer ID

: WorldWide

GsMPsdMaskType

: Adsl2MEu32

Rate Ratio

GsSeltLoopGauge

: 26awg

: 30

ADSL ATUR Configuration :
-----------------------------Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50

Min Upshift Time(sec)

: 70

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

: 10

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x20

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x10

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x40

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

: 0x60

Max Intl Delay(ms)

: 10

MSG Min Us

: 4000

Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20

Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20
PSD MoD Enable
PsdMod FallBackEnable

IP DSLAM

: Enable
: PSDFallbackEnable Max Nom PSD(dB/10)

: -38

295

Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)
Min INP

: 125

Rate Adaptation

: fixed

: Inp0

Upstream PSD Mask :
-----------------------[ 0]

0

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

IfName

The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to be modified or
viewed

Rate Adaptation

Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on
this modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more information.

Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise Margin
the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7, or
better, to successfully complete initialization.

Max Snr Mgn(dB/10)

Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If the
Noise Margin is above this, the modem hould attempt to reduce its
power output to optimize its operation.

GsRsIntCorrectionUp

Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS
can also be disabled.

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise
margin falls below this level, the modem should attempt to
decrease its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not
present, the value will be 0.

Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise
margin rises above this level, the modem should attempt to
increase its transmit rate. In thecase that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.

Min Upshift Time(sec)

Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for
ATU-C receive rates.

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

296

Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in

IDL series User Guide

bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for
ATU-C receive rates.
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C
receive rates.

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C
receive rates.

Max Intl Delay(ms)

Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines
the mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at
the interleaver input and their placement in the bit stream at the
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of payload
latency.

GsTxStartBin

The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.

GsTxEndBin

The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.

GsRxStartBin

The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.

GsRxEndBin

The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.

GsMaxBitsPerBin

The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.

GsMaxDCo

Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's
hardware

GsRxBinAdjust

This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings

GsAdi2x

For non-standard compliant ADI CPE

GsInitiate

Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send a
C-tone to the remote unit.

GsTxPowerAtten

The value in dB of Tx power attenuation

GsCodingGain

Sets the coding gain in dB increments

GsRsFastOvrhdDown

This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the downstream
fast buffer. RS can also be disabled.

GsRsIntCorrectionDown

This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream
interleaved buffer.RS can also be disabled.

GsRsFastOvrhdUp

This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the upstream
fast buffer.RS can also be disabled.

GsDrStby

This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the line
driver

IP DSLAM

297

GsExpandedExchange

T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES

GsEscapeFastRetrain

This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain
capability

GsFastRetrain

This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability.
Currently supported only in G.lite mode.

GsBitSwap

This parameter enables/disables bit swapping

GsNtr

This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis

GsAlctlUsVer

For T1.413 demo purposes only

GsUseCustomBin

This parameter enables/disables user selection which of the 511
bins will be enabled for upstream and downstream transmission.

GsFullRetrain

Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability

GsPsdMaskType

This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be used

GsEraseProfiles

This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast retrain
profiles at startup

GsExtRsMemory

Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS RAM

ParamHybridLossTestStart

Start bin for range of bins to be measured. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only, for exact value refer to
document number DO-400523-AN and DO-401163-AN.

GsParamHybridLossTestEnd
GsDmtTrellis

End bin for range of bins to be measured.
This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis coding
should always be enabled for its clear performance advantage.

GslTriggerMode
Type
GsDnBinUsage

The type of event that triggers a fast retrain
This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line mode.
'1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,whereas a
'0' disables usage of corresponding bin.

ParametricTestInputFile

Indicates Name of the Input file from which to take the Mask Array
Size, lower and upper mask Array. Null string means no file is
specified

Data Boost

Conexant parameter that enables/disables DataBoost option.

Upstream PSD

Conexant parameter that sets the upstream PSD to be either
extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only.

Conf PM Mode

PM-related parameter used by the ATU-C to set the allowed link
states. Both bit values can be given simultaneously in the input.
Additional value to disable pmmode is disable, which is equal to 0.

Conf PML0 Time(sec)

PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds)
between an exit from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2
state. It ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.

Conf PML2 Time(sec)

PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds)

298

IDL series User Guide

between an Entry into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the
L2 state and between two consecutive Power Trims in the L2
State. It ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)

PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter represents the maximum aggregate transmit
power reduction (in dB) that can be performed through a single
Power Trim in the L2 state. It ranges from 0 dB/10 to 310 dB/10.

Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)

PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter specifies the minimum net data rate during the low
power state (L2). The data rate is coded in bit/s, and can range
from 0x1F40 (8000) bps to 0xFA000 (1024000) bps.

MSG Min Ds

Configures downstream overhead channel bandwidth. This
feature is not supported by DSLPHY as yet.

Min Snr Mrg(dB/10)

Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7
or better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.

FrontEnd H/W Design

Front end hardware reference design

H/W Pwr Reduction

Hardware configuration parameter

GsUsBitSwap

This parameter enables/disables upstream bit swapping

Minimum INP

Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection
for the downstream bearer channel.

PML2 Entry Thresh Rate

PM config param. L2 state entry data rate.

PML2 Exit Thresh Rate

PM config param. L2 state exit data rate.

PML2 Entry Rate Min Time

PM config param.Min L2 entry rate time

CabinetHsEnable

Enable/Disable HS tones in Cabinet mode

GsSeltLoopType

Conexant parameter that is used to specify the loop type for
SELT. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.

GsRxStartBinU1

Conexant parameter that specifies lowest bin number allowed for
Rx signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive
start and end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)

GsRxEndBinU1

Conexant parameter that specifies highest bin number allowed for
Rx signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive
start and end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)

PSD MoD Enable

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)

PsdMod FallBackEnable

Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD)
fallback mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the

IP DSLAM

299

base ADSL2 depending upon the downstream rate. It is avaiable
only for ADSL2 Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)
Max Nom PSD(dB/10)

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime.
Value depends on CO MIB element settings and near end
transmitter capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It
is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to
-40 in steps of 0.1 dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)

Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate
transmit power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and
showtime. Value depends on CO MIB element settings and local
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available
only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps
of 0.1 dBm.(length = 4 bytes)

DS PSD Mask

This configuration parameter defines that the downstream PSD
mask applicable at the U-C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask
may impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask
defined in the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). (length =
4 bytes).

GsAnnexCOlToCxSwitch

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)

GsAnnexCSwitch

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between Annex C and G.Span (IFM) and between Annex C and
G.Span Plus.(length = 4 bytes)

GsAnnexCToUqSwitch

Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between Annex C and G.Span Plus SUQ.(length = 4 bytes)

Min SnrMgnTime(sec)

This parameter indicates the time when the snr margin violation is
allowed. After this time expires and current snr is less than min
snr, the DSL line is dropped by the APIs.

Customer ID

This parameter indicates the customer ID.

GsMPsdMaskType

Conexant parameter that selects the PSD mask option to be used
for Adsl2M.

GsSeltLoopGauge

This parameter should be set to the expected loop gauge.

Rate Ratio

This parameter specifies the latency rate for both channels in a
dual latency configuration. This parameter must be set the
parameter to a value greater than 0 and less than 100.

Target Snr Margin(dB/10)

Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the
power 7 or better to successfully complete initialization

Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise
margin falls below this level, the modem should attempt to

300

IDL series User Guide

decrease its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not
present, the value will be 0.
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)

Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise
margin rises above this level, the modem should attempt to
increase itís transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.

Min Upshift Time(sec)

Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn,
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.

Min Dnshift Time(sec)

Minimum time that the current margin is below
DownshiftSnrMgn, before a downshift occurs. In the case that
RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.

Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R
receive rates.

Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR
receive rates.

Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR
receive rates.

Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)

Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R
receive rates.

Max Intl Delay(ms)

Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines
the mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at
the interleaver input and their placement in the bit stream at the
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of payload
latency

MSG Min Us

Configures upstream overhead channel bandwidth.This feature
is not supported by DSLPHY as yet.

Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10)

Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7

IP DSLAM

301

or better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10)

Configured Maximum acceptable downstream Signal/Noise
Margin. If the Noise Margin is above this the modem attempts to
reduce its power output to optimize its operation. The value set by
the user is in dB/10, and ranges from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB steps.

PSD MoD Enable

Conexant parameter used to enable the Mask on Demand(MoD)
feature in the upstream direction. It is available only for ADSL2
Annex A ONLY.(length = 4 bytes)

PsdMod FallBackEnable

Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD)
fallback mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the
base ADSL2 depending upon the upstream rate. It is avaiable only
for ADSL2 Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)

Max Nom PSD(dB/10)

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime.
Value depends on CO MIB element settings and near end
transmitter capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It
is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to
-38 in steps of 0.1 dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)

Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)

This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate
transmit power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and
showtime. Value depends on CO MIB element settings and local
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available
only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps
of 0.1 dBm.(length = 4 bytes)

Rate Adaptation

Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this
modem. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.

Min INP

Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection
for the upstream bearer channel. Supported for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus ONLY

US PSD Mask

This configuration parameter defines that the upstream PSD mask
applicable at the U C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined
in the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). It is available
only for Annexes J and M of ADSL2/ADSL2plus.(length = 4 bytes)

References:
z
ADSL Commands

302

IDL series User Guide

5.9.24 Dsl chip Commands
5.9.24.1 Get adsl chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl chip [chipid ]
5.9.24.2 Create dsl chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
create dsl chip chipid  [ dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl ]
[ linecoding Other | Dmt | Cap | Qam | Mcm | Scm ] [ adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi |
q9921PotsNonOverlapped | q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921IsdnOverlapped | q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped | q9922PotsNonOverlapped | q9922PotsOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric | adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
adslPlusPotsOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped | q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ]
[ shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 ]

IP DSLAM

303

5.9.24.3 Delete dsl chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delet dsl chip chipid 
Parameters:
Name
chipid 

Description
Identifies the chip to be build and initialized.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 9
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl

Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
Type:

linecoding Other | Dmt | Cap |
Qam | Mcm | Scm
adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi |

Create

-- Optional

ADSL line coding type. Not valid for SHDSL.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Transmission capabilities with which the DSL system

q9921PotsNonOverlapped |

is configured. Its default value depends on the Annex

q9921PotsOverlapped |

Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.

q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |

Type:

Create

-- Optional

q9921IsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922PotsNonOverlapped |
q9922PotsOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverla
pped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped
| q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlap
ped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |

304

IDL series User Guide

q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlappe
d | adslPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOv
erlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverla
pped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped
| q9923IsdnOverlapped |
q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOve
rlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlap
ped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOve
rlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlap
ped
shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2

Annexure Type, specifies the regional settings for the
SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Example:
$ create dsl chip chipid 1 dsltype Adsl linecoding Dmt adsltxcfg ansit1413
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921PotsNonOverlapped shdsltxmode region1 Region2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Chip Id
:1
DSL Type
: Adsl
Line coding
: Dmt
Adsl Tx Config : ansit1413 q9921PotsOverlapped q9921PotsNonOverlapped
Shdsl Tx Mode : region1 Region2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

IP DSLAM

305

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Chip Id

Identifies the chip to be build and initialized.

DSL Type

Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.

Line coding

ADSL line coding type. Not valid for SHDSL.

Adsl Tx Config

Transmission capabilities with which the DSL system is configured. Its default value
depends on the Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.

Shdsl Tx Mode

Annexure Type, specifies the regional settings for the SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.

5.9.25 Dsl dsp chip Commands
5.9.25.1 Get dsl dsp chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl dsp chip [chipid ]
5.9.25.2 Reset dsl dsp chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
reset dsl dsp chip
Parameters:
Name

Description

chipid chipid

This object is the Index of Dsl Chip for which reset is to be done.
Type:
Get

Reset
--

-- Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 9

Example:
$ get dsl dsp chip chipid 1

306

IDL series User Guide

Output:
ChipId
-----------------------------------------------------------------------1
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

ChipId

This object is the Index of Dsl Chip for which reset is to be done.

5.9.26 Dsl dsp port Commands
5.9.26.1 Get dsl dsp port
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl dsp port [ifname ]
5.9.26.2 Reset dsl dsp port
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
reset dsl dsp port ifname 
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This object is the Index of Dsl Port for which reset is to be done.



Type:

Reset

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23

Example:
$ get dsl dsp port ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname
-----------------------------------------------------------------------dsl-0

IP DSLAM

307

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

This object is the Index of Dsl Port for which reset is to be done.

5.9.27 Dsl system Commands
5.9.27.1 Get dsl system
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl system
5.9.27.2 Create dsl system
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create dsl system [dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl] [linecoding Other | Dmt |
Cap | Qam | Mcm | Scm] [adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi | q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped | q9921IsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922PotsNonOverlapped | q9922PotsOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric | adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
adslPlusPotsOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped | q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ]
[ shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 ]

308

IDL series User Guide

5.9.27.3 Delete dsl system
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delet dsl system
Parameters:
Name
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl |Shdsl | Vdsl

Description
Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Adsl

linecoding Other | Dmt |Cap | Qam |
Mcm | Scm

ADSL line code type.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Dmt

adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi|

Transmission capabilities with which the DSL

q9921PotsNonOverlapped |

system is configured. Its default value depends on the

q9921PotsOverlapped

Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.

|q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

Type: Create － Optional

|q9921IsdnOverlapped
|q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922PotsNonOverlapped
|q9922PotsOverlapped
|q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric
|adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped|q9921Gspa
nPlusPotsNonOverlapped
|q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped
|q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped|q9923Adsl2
PotsNonOverlapped
|q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped
|q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped
|q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped
|q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
|adslPlusPotsOverlapped
|q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlappe
d |q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped
|q9923IsdnNonOverlapped

IP DSLAM

309

|q9923IsdnOverlapped
|q9925IsdnNonOverlapped
|q9925IsdnOverlapped
|q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
|q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped
|q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
|q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped
shdsltxmode Region1 |Region2

Annexure Type specifies the regional settings for the
SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Region1 |Region2

Example:
$ create dsl system dsltype Adsl linecoding Dmt adsltxcfg ansit1413 shdsltxmode
region1 Region2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
DSL Type
: Adsl
Line coding
: Dmt
Adsl Tx Config : ansit1413
Shdsl Tx Mode : region1 Region2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

DSL Type

Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.

Line coding

ADSL line code type.

Adsl Tx Config

Transmission capabilities with which the DSL
system is configured. Its default value depends on
the Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.

Shdsl Tx Mode

Annexure Type specifies the regional settings for
the SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.

310

IDL series User Guide

5.10 EHDLC Commands
5.10.1 Ehdlc intf Commands
5.10.1.1 Get ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ehdlc intf [ifname ]
5.10.1.2 Create ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ehdlc intf ifname lowif  [sarstatus Enable |
Disable] [enable | disable]
5.10.1.3 Delete ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to delete
Command Syntax:
delete ehdlc intf [ifname ]
5.10.1.4 Modify ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify ehdlc intf ifname lowif  [sarstatus Enable |
Disable] [enable | disable]

IP DSLAM

311

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface.



Valid Values starts from ehdlc-0 and continues to ehdlc-*
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: IAD_MIN_EHDLC_IFINDEX IAD_MAX_EHDLC_IFINDEX
lowif

This specifies the lower interface index. This is the ifindex of
the DSL port on which EHDLC is being created. Valid Values
start from dsl-0 and continues to dsl-*
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
sarstatus Enable |

This defines the segmentation and reassembly status of the

Disable

hdlc/dsl interface. HDLC supports only 508 as frame size, to
support longer snmp messages, it should be turn off. By
default, the option taken is 'disable'.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: disable
enable | disable

Administrative status of the Ehdlc interface
Type: Optional

Example:
$ create ehdlc intf ifname ehdlc-0 lowif dsl-0 SarStatus Enable enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName
: ehdlc-0
EHDLC Sar Status : enable

LowIfName
: dsl-0
Admin Status : Enable

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

312

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

IfName

This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface. Valid
Values starts from ehdlc-0 and continues to ehdlc-*

LowIfName

This specifies the lower interface index. This is the ifindex of the
DSL port on which EHDLC is being created. Valid Values start
from dsl-0 and continues to dsl-*

EHDLC Sar Status

This defines the segmentation and reassembly status of the
hdlc/dsl interface. HDLC supports only 508 as frame size, to
support longer snmp messages, it should be turned off. By
default, the option taken is 'disable'.

Admin Status

Administrative status of the Ehdlc interface

5.11 Ethemet Commands
5.11.1 Dot3 stats Commands
5.11.1.1 Get dot3 stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dot3 stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

An index name that uniquely identifies an interface to



an ethernet-like medium.
Type:

Get

--

Optional

Valid values:eth-0 – eth01

Example
$ get dot3 stats Ifname eth-0
Output
IfName
: eth-0
Alignment Errors
: 11
Single Collision Frames : 13
Deferred Tx Frames
: 15
Excess Collisions Frames : 17

IP DSLAM

FCS Errors
: 12
Multiple Collision Frames : 14
Late Collisions
: 16
Mac Tx Errors Frames
: 18

313

Carrier Sense Errors
Mac Rx Error Frames
FullDuplex

: 18
: 20

Too Long Frames
Duplex Status

: 19
:

Output field:
Field

Description

IfName

An index name that uniquely identifies an interface to an
ethernet-like medium.

Alignment Errors

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not
an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS
check. The count represented by an instance of this object is
incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the
MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames
for which multiple error conditions pertain are, according to the
conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted
exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.
This counter does not increment for group encoding schemes
greater than 4 bits per group. For interfaces operating at 10 Gb/s,
this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsAlignmentErrors object for 10
Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,
and at other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

FCS Errors

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS
check. This count does not include frames received with
frame-too-long or frame-too-short error. The count represented
by an instance of this object is incremented when the
frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple
error conditions pertain are, according to the conventions of IEEE
802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the
error status presented to the LLC. For interfaces operating at 10
Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in

314

IDL series User Guide

order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsFCSErrors object for 10 Gb/s or
faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can
occur at e-initialization of the management system, and at other
times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Single Collision

A count of frames that are involved in a single collision, and are

Frames

subsequently transmitted successfully. A frame that is counted by
an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding
instance of the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or
ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding
instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames object. This
counter does not increment when the interface is operating in
full-duplex mode. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can
occur at re-initialization of the management system, and at other
times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

Multiple Collision

A count of frames that are involved in more than one collision and

Frames

are subsequently transmitted successfully. A frame that is
counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts,
ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by
the corresponding instance of the
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. This counter does not
increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

Deferred Tx Frames

A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a
particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. The
count represented by an instance of this object does not include
frames involved in collisions. This counter does not increment
when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

Late Collisions

The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular
interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a
packet. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an
instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision
for purposes of other collision-related statistics. This counter does
not increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at

IP DSLAM

315

re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Excess Collisions

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface

Frames

fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment
when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

Mac Tx Errors Frames

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error. A frame is
only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by
the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions
object, the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. The precise meaning of the
count represented by an instance of this object is
implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object
may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular
interface that are not otherwise counted. For interfaces operating
at 10 Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate.

Since that amount of time

could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsInternalMacTransmitErrors object
for 10 Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,
and at other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Carrier Sense Errors

The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or
never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a
particular interface. The count represented by an instance of this
object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt,
even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a
transmission attempt. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in full-duplex mode. Discontinuities in the
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and at other times as indicated by the value
of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

Too Long Frames

A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed
the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented by an
instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong
status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC

316

IDL series User Guide

user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions pertain
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC. For interfaces operating at 10 Gb/s, this
counter can roll over in less than 80 minutes if it is incrementing
at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time could be less
than management station's poll cycle time, in order to avoid a loss
of information, a management station is advised to poll the
dot3HCStatsFrameTooLongs object for 10 Gb/s or faster
interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Mac Rx Error Frames

A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. A frame is
only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by
the corresponding instance of either the
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors
object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. The precise meaning of
the count represented by an instance of this object is
implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object
may represent a count of receive errors on a particular interface
that are not otherwise counted. For interfaces operating at 10
Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsInternalMacReceiveErrors object
for 10 Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management
system, and at other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.

Duplex Status

The current mode of operation of the MAC entity.'unknown'
indicates that the current duplex mode could not be determined.
Management control of the duplex mode is accomplished thrugh
'duplexmode' in ethernet command. Note that this object provides
redundant information with etherActualDuplexMode
inetherIfTable.

IP DSLAM

317

5.11.2 Ethernet Commands
5.11.2.1 Create ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to create a physical Ethernet interface.
Command Syntax:
create ethernet intf ifname  [ip ] [mask
][usedhcp true|false] [speed {auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type
uplink|downlink][enable | disable] [pkttype Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]
[orl decvalue][duplex half| full|auto] [profilename ]
[mgmtvlanid ] [priority ] [trfclassprofileid
 ] [Ctlpktinstid ] [ ctlpktgroupid
 | none ] [mgmtsvlanid ] [m2vmacdbid
 |none] [ mgmttvlanid  ]
5.11.2.2 Delete ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to delete a physical Ethernet interface.
Command Syntax:
delete ethernet intf ifname 
5.11.2.3 Get ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to get information about a particular physical Ethernet interface,
or about all the interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get ethernet intf [ifname ]
5.11.2.4 Modify ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to modify physical Ethernet interface configuration.
Command Syntax:
modify ethernet intf ifname  [ip ] [mask
][usedhcp true|false] [speed {auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type
uplink|downlink][enable | disable] [pkttype Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]
[orl decvalue][duplex half| full|auto] [profilename ]

318

IDL series User Guide

[mgmtvlanid ] [priority ] [trfclassprofileid
 ] [Ctlpktinstid ] [ ctlpktgroupid
 | none ] [mgmtsvlanid ] [m2vmacdbid
 |none] [ mgmttvlanid  ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

This parameter specifies the interface index used for the Ethernet type of



interfaces. Valid Values starts from eth-0 and continues to eth-*
Type

: Create

– Mandatory

Delete

– Mandatory

Get

– Optional

Modify – Mandatory
Valid values : eth-0 - *
ip 

This parameter specifies the IP address configured for the interface. This
is required to be configured only if this interface is used for management
IP traffic. If it is not configured and 'etherUseDhcp' is configured as
GS_FALSE, then management IP traffic will not flow through this
interface. ‘Modify’ of IP Address for an Ethernet interface shall be
supported only if some IP address is configured on the interface or
'etherUseDhcp' was configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is
GS_TRUE and ‘modify’ is done for this field, then Usedhcp field shall be
set to GS_FALSE. Both ‘Usedhcp’ and this field shall not be specified
together.
Type

: Create - Optional.
Modify - Optional

Valid Values:

Any valid class A/B/C / Classless IP address.

Default Value: None

IP DSLAM

319

Mask 

This parameter specifies the network mask configured for the interface.
This is given in conjunction with IP Address configured and shall be
given only if IP address has been given. This shall be removed whenever
IP Address is removed. ’Modify’ of network mask for an Ethernet
interface shall be supported only if some IP address is configured on the
interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If
Usedhcp is GS_TRUE and ’modify’ is done for this field, then usedhcp
field shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both usedhcp and this field shall not be
specified together.
Type : This field is not allowed when a physical interface is specified and
IP is 0.0.0.0. In all other cases the field is mandatory.
Valid Values

: 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255

Default Value: None
usedhcp true | false

This parameter specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to
obtain an IP address for this interface. If this is configured as GS_FALSE
and ‘etherIfIpAddress’ is not configured, then management IP traffic will
not flow through the interface. If an IP address is configured and ’modify’
is done for this field, then ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ and ‘tAggrIfNetMask’ fields
shall be set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both Usedhcp and ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ shall
not be specified together. In case Iftype is ‘slave’, then this field can not
be set to GS_TRUE.
Type
Valid value

: Optional
: true or false

Default value: false
speed {auto

|100 BT|

1000BT}+

The Ethernet speed for
Type
Valid Values

:

the net-side interfaces.

Optional.

: auto, 100BT,

1000BT.

Default Value : auto.
type uplink|downink

This parameter specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces. The Net is
towards the NET side (2 at most) and slave means the physical interface
connected to the slave device.
Type
Valid Values

: Optional.
: uplink, downlink.

Default Value : uplink.
enable|disable

Administrative status of the Ethernet interface.
Type

: Modify - Mandatory

Valid values : enable or disable
Default value: enable

320

IDL series User Guide

Duplex auto|half|full

This parameter defines the modes, in which the Ethernet Interface can
come up. It can be configured as ‘auto’, ‘half’, ‘full duplex’ or a
combination of these. Based on the values configured, the Ethernet
interface negotiates with the peer entity.
Type

: optional

Valid values: auto, half, full
Default value: auto
Pkttype

This parameter defines the packet type supported by the interface.

Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUc

‘etherPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for every Ethernet

ast | All|None

interface. By default, all packets will be transmitted. The interface shall
not transmit any other packet type than that configured.
Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values

: Mcast, Ucast, UnknownUcast, All

Default Value: All
Orl decvalue

This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value to be applied on
this Interface. The unit for the same is in Mbits/sec.
Type: Create - Optional
Modify - Optional
Valid Values: 1 -100
Default Value: 100

ProfileName

This parameter specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the



Ethernet interface.
Type

: Optional.

Default Value : SPROFILE
mgmtvlanid

This parameter specifies the VLAN (C-Vlan) for management traffic on



this interface. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no Management VLAN id is
specified (in the create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in
create or modify operation), then the system shall use the value of
'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this interface as
the Management VLAN Index. In case the management VLAN (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does
not exist on the system, then IP-based management on this
management VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its member. In
stacked-VLAN mode, the VLAN filtering mentioned above is based on
virtual-VLAN mapped to C-Vlan and S-Vlan for the frame.
Type

: Create - optional
Modify - optional

Valid values:

IP DSLAM

0 -4095

321

priority 

This parameter specifies the priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs
sent on Management VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if
either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native-VLAN
mode, this priority shall be used for C-Vlan tag, while in stacked-VLAN
mode it shall be used for S-Vlan tag.
Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values:

trfclassprofileid

0 -7

This parameter specifies the traffic class profile identifier to be
associated with the Ethernet interface.
Type: Optional
Valid values:1 to 10
Default Value: 1

Ctlpktinstid

This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while
creating an interface, an instance is created internally from the default
profile governed by the macro 2 and associated to the interface. This will
reduce the total number to instances that can be now created by one.
The default instance is governed by the macro 0.
TYPE: Create -- Optional
Valid Values:1 - 26
Default Value: 0

ctlpktgroupid

This parameter specifies the Control packet instance group associated

 |

with this Ethernet interface. The flows for this interface shall be mapped

none

to control packet instances as mapped for the flows corresponding to the
groupid configured in ctlpkt group info command. If this group does not
have entries for all of the flows, then those flows shall be mapped to the
ctlpktinstid. If groupid is 0, then all the flows shall be mapped to
ctlpktinstid.
Type:

Create

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 -50
Default value: 0

322

IDL series User Guide

mgmtsvlanid

This parameter specifies the S-VLAN for management traffic on this
interface. It is applicable only in stacked-VLAN Mode. Non-zero value of
this field is valid only if either 'etherIfIpAddress' field is non-zero or
'etherUseDhcp' field is true. If no management S-Vlan id is specified (in
the create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation), then the system shall use the value of 'psvlanid' associated
with the bridge port created on this interface as the management VLAN
id. In case the management VLAN (virtual VLAN mapped to S-VLAN and
C-VLAN for the frame) does not exist (ie. Virtual VLAN mapped to
'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated 'psvlanid', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the
system, then IP-based management shall not happen on the interface till
the corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its
member.
Type : Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

m2vmacdbid

This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated with this
interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature is disabled on this
interface. This field can be modified only when the interface is disabled.
Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_M2VMAC_DATABASES

mgmttvlanid

This specifies the value to be used for inserting TVLAN id or vlan id of



the third Vlan tag in the transmitted Ethernet frames and that is expected
in received frames over this interface. Currently this is configurable and
supported only for management Ethernet interface. For data Ethernet
interface, the value of TVLAN id is configurable and used from the
system sizing table. If the value for TVLAN id configured on a
management Ethernet interface is zero then third vlan tag shall not be
added neither shall it be supported in received frames. This attribute is
applicable only in stacked-VLAN mode.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 4095
Default value: 0

Example:
create ethernet intf ifname eth-0 ip 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0 speed 100bt
profilename sprofile mgmtvlanid 2 priority 2 trfclassprofileid 1 Ctlpktinstid 1
ctlpktgroupid 1

IP DSLAM

323

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface
: eth-0
Type
: Uplink
UseDhcp
: False
IP Address
: 192.168.1.1
Mask
: 255.255.0.0
Pkt Type
: Mcast
Orl(mbps)
: 100
Configured Duplex
: Auto
Duplex
: None
Configured Speed
: Auto
Profile Name
: SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index
:2
Mgmt S-VLAN Index : 2
Mgmt T-VLAN Index : 2
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 2
trfclassprofileid
:1
Ctl Pkts Instance Id:1
Ctl Pkts Group Id : 1
Speed
:Operational Status : Down
Admin Status : Up
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

If-Name

This parameter specifies the interface index used for the
Ethernet type of interfaces. Valid Values starts from eth-0
and continues to eth-*

Type

This parameter specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces.
The Net is towards the NET side (2 at most) and slave
means the physical interface connected to the slave device.

UseDhcp

This parameter specifies whether a DHCP client is to be
triggered to obtain an IP address for this interface. If this is
configured as GS_FALSE and ‘etherIfIpAddress’ is not
configured, then management IP traffic will not flow through
the interface. If an IP address is configured and ’modify’ is
done for this field, then ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ and
‘tAggrIfNetMask’ fields shall be set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both
Usedhcp and ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ shall not be specified

324

IDL series User Guide

together. In case Iftype is ‘slave’, then this field can not be
set to GS_TRUE.
Ip Address

This parameter specifies the IP address configured for the
interface. This is required to be configured only if this
interface is used for management IP traffic. If it is not
configured and 'etherUseDhcp' is configured as
GS_FALSE, then management IP traffic will not flow
through this interface. ‘Modify’ of IP Address for an Ethernet
interface shall be supported only if some IP address is
configured on the interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was
configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is
GS_TRUE and ‘modify’ is done for this field, then Usedhcp
field shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both ‘Usedhcp’ and this
field shall not be specified together.

Mask

This parameter specifies the network mask configured for
the interface. This is given in conjunction with IP Address
configured and shall be given only if IP address has been
given. This shall be removed whenever IP Address is
removed. ’Modify’ of network mask for an Ethernet interface
shall be supported only if some IP address is configured on
the interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to
"GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE
and ’modify’ is done for this field, then usedhcp field shall
be set to GS_FALSE. Both usedhcp and this field shall not
be specified together.

pkttype

This parameter defines the packet type supported by the
interface. ‘etherPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for
every Ethernet interface. By default, all packets will be
transmitted. The interface shall not transmit any other
packet type than that configured.

Orl

This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value to be
applied on this Interface.The units for the same is in
Mbits/sec

Configured Duplex

The duplex mode to be used by the interface, as configured
by the user.

Duplex

This parameter defines the modes, in which the Ethernet
Interface can come up. It can be configured as ‘auto’, ‘half’,
‘full duplex’ or a combination of these. Based on the values
configured, the Ethernet interface negotiates with the peer
entity.

IP DSLAM

325

Configured Speed

The Ethernet speed for the net-side interfaces.

Mgmt VLAN Index

This parameter specifies the VLAN (C-Vlan) for
management traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this
field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true. If no Management VLAN id is specified (in the
create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create
or modify operation), then the system shall use the value of
'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this
interface as the Management VLAN Index. In case the
management VLAN (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated
'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does not exist on the
system, then IP-based management on this management
VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its
member. In stacked-VLAN mode, the VLAN filtering
mentioned above is based on virtual-VLAN mapped to
C-Vlan and S-Vlan for the frame.

Mgmt S-VLAN Index

This parameter specifies the S-VLAN for management
traffic on this interface. It is applicable only in stacked-VLAN
Mode. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either
'etherIfIpAddress' field is non-zero or 'etherUseDhcp' field is
true. If no management S-Vlan id is specified (in the create
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or
modify operation), then the system shall use the value of
'psvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this
interface as the management VLAN id. In case the
management VLAN (virtual VLAN mapped to S-VLAN and
C-VLAN for the frame) does not exist (ie. Virtual VLAN
mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated 'psvlanid', if
'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system, then IP-based
management shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net-side
port as its member.

Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio

This parameter specifies the priority to be set in Tagged
Ethernet PDUs sent on Management VLAN over this
interface. This field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero
or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native-VLAN mode, this priority
shall be used for C-Vlan tag, while in stacked-VLAN mode it
shall be used for S-Vlan tag.

ProfileName

This parameter specifies the scheduling profile to be
associated with the Ethernet interface.

326

IDL series User Guide

Speed

The actual speed of the interface.

Operational Status

The operational status of the interface.

Admin Status

The administrative status of the interface.

trfclassprofileid

This parameter specifies the traffic class profile identifier to
be associated with the Ethernet interface.

Ctl Pkts Instance Id

This specifies the control packet instance identifier
associated with this interface. If the user does not provide
any instance identifier while creating an interface, an
instance is created internally from the default profile
governed by the macro 2 and associated to the interface.
This will reduce the total number to instances that can be
now created by one. The default instance is governed by
the macro 0.

Ctl Pkts Group Id

This parameter specifies the Control packet instance group
associated with this Ethernet interface. The flows for this
interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as
mapped for the flows corresponding to the groupid
configured in ctlpkt group info command. If this group does
not have entries for all of the flows, then those flows shall
be mapped to the ctlpktinstid. If groupid is 0, then all the
flows shall be mapped to ctlpktinstid.

M2VMacDbId

This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated
with this interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature
is disabled on this interface. This field can be modified only
when the interface is disabled.

Mgmt T-VLAN Index

This specifies the value to be used for inserting TVLAN id or
vlan id of the third Vlan tag in the transmitted Ethernet
frames and that is expected in received frames over this
interface. Currently this is configurable and supported only
for management Ethernet interface. For data Ethernet
interface, the value of TVLAN id is configurable and used
from the system sizing table. If the value for TVLAN id
configured on a management Ethernet interface is zero
then third vlan tag shall not be added neither shall it be
supported in received frames. This attribute is applicable
only in stacked-VLAN mode.

References:
z
Ethernet stats command.

IP DSLAM

327

5.12 EOA Commands
5.12.1 EOA Commands
5.12.1.1 Create eoa intf
Description:
Use this command to create an EoA interface towards the CPE side.
Command Syntax:
create eoa intf ifname  lowif  [pkttype
{multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast} + | all|None] [fcs false | true]
[enable|disable] [inactivitytmrintrvl ] [m2vmacdbid
 |none] [configstatus normal | config]
5.12.1.2 Delete oea intf
Description:
Use this command to delete an EoA interface.
Command Syntax:
delete eoa intf ifname 
5.12.1.3 Get eoa intf
Description:
Use this command to get information on a particular EoA interface, or on all the
EoA interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get eoa intf [ifname ]
5.12.1.4 Modify eoa intf
Description:
Use this command to modify the properties of an eoa interface.
Command Syntax:
modify eoa intf ifname  [pkttype {multicast |broadcast
|unknown- unicast} + | all| none] [fcs false | true] [m2vmacdbid
 | none] [enable|disable] [inactivitytmrintrvl
]

328

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Modify － Mandatory
Valid values: eoa-0,eoa-1….

lowif

This parameter specifies the lower interface index. It contains ifindex of



the AAL5 or VC Aggregation interface.
Type: Mandatory
Valid Values : aal5-0 - *

pkttype {multicast

This parameter defines the packet type supported by the interface.

|broadcast

‘EoAPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for every CPE side

|unknownunicast}+ |

Ethernet interface. By default, the option taken is 'ALL' and it means that

all|none

all packets will be transmitted. The value 'None' means that normal
Ucast packets will be transmitted. The interface shall not transmit any
other packet type than the ones configured.
Type: Optional.
Valid Values: {multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast}+ | all
Default Value: all.

fcs false | true

This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be computed for the CPE
side Ethernet interfaces. This can be set to true only if encaptype of the
lower interface is Ethernet.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: false or true
Default Value: false.

Enable|disable

Administrative status of the interface
Type: Optional
Valid values : enable or disable
Default Values: enable

inactivitytmrintrvl

This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which interfaces shall be



marked inactive if there is no data activity on this interface during this
interval. This is used only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is
set for gsvEoaConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer is not
running. In Aautosensing scenario, an inactive interface is a candidate
to deletion in case another protocol is sensed on Atm Vc Interface on
which this interface is created.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: 0

IP DSLAM

to 0xffffffff

329

Default Value: 0
configstatus normal |

This parameter describes the configuration mode for this interface.The

config

value of this parameter can be normal or config. If the value is config,
then this interface shall be created, but will have a dormant status. Only
after the receipt of an EoA packet from the CPE side, this interface shall
become active.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: normal | config
Default Value: normal

m2vmacdbid

This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated with this

 |

interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature is disabled on this

none

interface. This field can be modified only when the interface is disabled.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 1154
Default value: 0

Example:
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-0 lowif aal5-0 m2vmacdbid 1 enable fcs false
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName
FCS
Pkt Type
InActivity Tmr Interval
M2VMac Database Id
Config Status
Oper Status

: eoa-0
: False
: ALL

LowIfName

: aal5-0

:3
:1
: Normal
: Down

Admin Status : Up

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

IfName

The name of the interface that has been created.

LowIfName

This parameter specifies the lower interface index. It
contains ifindex of the AAL5 or VC Aggregation
interface.

FCS

This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be
computed for the CPE side Ethernet interfaces. This can

330

IDL series User Guide

be set to true only if encaptype of the lower interface is
Ethernet.
Pkt Type

This parameter defines the packet type supported by the
interface. ‘EoAPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured
for every CPE side Ethernet interface. By default, the
option taken is 'ALL' and it means that all packets will be
transmitted. The value 'None' means that normal Ucast
packets will be transmitted. The interface shall not
transmit any other packet type than the ones configured.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or
Down

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either
up or down.

InActivity Tmr Interval

This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which
interfaces shall be marked inactive if there is no data
activity on this interface during this interval. This is used
only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set
for gsvEoaConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the
timer is not running. In Aautosensing scenario, an
inactive interface is a candidate to deletion in case
another protocol is sensed on Atm Vc Interface on which
this interface is created.

Config Status

This parameter describes the configuration mode for this
interface.The value of this parameter can be Normal,
Config, NotInUse, or InUse. If the value is Config, then
this interface shall be created, but will have a dormant
status. Only after the receipt of an EoA packet from the
CPE side, this interface shall become active. The 'InUse'
and 'NotInUse' bits are read-only bits. The 'NotInUse' bit
indicates that the entry is dormant and the 'InUse' bit
indicates that the entry is activated.

M2VMac Database Id

This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated
with this interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC
feature is disabled on this interface. This field can be
modified only when the interface is disabled.

References:
z
Ethernet commands
z
Ethernet Stats commands.

IP DSLAM

331

5.13 Filtering Commands
5.13.1 ACL Global Macentry Commands
5.13.1.1 Get acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get acl global macentry [macaddr ]
5.13.1.2 Create acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create acl global macentry macaddr  [deny disable |enable]
[track disable | enable]
5.13.1.3 Delete acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete acl global macentry macaddr 
5.13.1.4 Modify acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify acl global macentry macaddr  [deny disable | enable]
[track disable | enable]

332

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description
Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be tracked/denied access
Type:

Create --Mandatory

macaddr
Delete --Mandatory

Modify -- Mandatory
Get

Optional

This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be denied access.
Type:

Create --Optional

deny disable | enable
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be tracked accross different ports. A
trap is raised when packet from the address comes over a port for the first time
and when it changes the port.
track disable | enable
Type:

Create --Optional
Modify -- Optional

Default value: disable

Example:
$ create acl global macentry macaddr 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34 deny enable track enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Mac Address
: 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34
Deny
: true
Track : enable
Number of times Port changed : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Mac Address

Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be tracked/denied access

Deny

This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be denied access.
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be tracked accross different ports. A

Track

trap is raised in case packet from the address comes over a port for the first time
and when it changes the port.

Number of times
Port changed

IP DSLAM

This specifies the number of times port has been changed by the MAC address.

333

5.13.2 Clfr list genentry commands
5.13.2.1 Get clfr list genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
5.13.2.2 Create clfr list genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr list genentry ifname value  [valtype
U8|U16|U32]
5.13.2.3 Delete clcfr list genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr list genentry ifname  [value 
Parameter:
Name

Description

ifname

Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the



classifier generic list is created. Valid values for the field are
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-192.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: eth-*, eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe*

value 

List Entry Value, of the classifier generic list
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get

334

--

Optional

IDL series User Guide

Valtype U8|U16|U32

This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should match
value type of matchingenlist nodes in case a tree attached on
same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP
subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'
value is supported.Create -- Optional.
Create -- Optional

Example:
$ create clfr list genentry Ifname eoa-1 value 0xAC1901AA valtype u8
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
If Name
: eoa-1
Value
: 0xAC1901AA
Value Type : U32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

If Name

Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the
classifier generic list is created. Valid values for the field are
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-192.

Value

List Entry Value, of the classifier generic list

Value Type

This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should match
value type of matchingenlist nodes in case a tree attached on
same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP
subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'
value is supported.

IP DSLAM

335

5.13.3 ACL Port Macentry Commands
5.13.3.1 Get acl port macentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get acl port macentry [portid ] [macaddr ]
5.13.3.2 Create acl port macentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create acl port macentry portid  macaddr 
5.13.3.3 Delete acl port macentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete acl port macentry portid  macaddr 
Parameter:
Name

Description
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC Address entry is created
Type:

Create --Mandatory
Delete --Mandatory

portid 

Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1-578
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to be allowed access over the
particular port.
macaddr
Type:

Create --Mandatory


Delete --Mandatory
Get -- Optional

Example:
$ create acl port macentry portId 2 macaddr 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34

336

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
PortId
:2
Mac Address : 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC

PortId
Address entry is created
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to
Mac Address
be allowed access over the particular port.

Caution:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.

5.13.4 Clfr namedlist genentry Commands
5.13.4.1 Get namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr namedlist genentry [listid ] [value ]
5.13.4.2 Create clfr namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr namedlist genentry listid value 

IP DSLAM

337

5.13.4.3 Delete clfr namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr namedlist genentry listid value 
Parameter:
Name

Description

listid 

This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row
indexed on the same id in the Classifier Named List Table.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
value 

This field specifies the list entry value. The value range
depends upon value type of list, as specified in Classifier
Named List table.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Example:
$ create clfr namedlist genentry listid 2 value 0xAC1901AA
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId : 2
Value : 0xAC1901AA
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

ListId

This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row
indexed on the same id in the Classifier Named List Table.

Value

This field specifies the list entry value. The value range
depends upon value type of list, as specified in Classifier
Named List table.

338

IDL series User Guide

5.13.5 Clfr namedlist info Commands
5.13.5.1 Get clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr namedlist info [listid ]
5.13.5.2 Create clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr namedlist info listid  [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]
5.13.5.3 Delete clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr namedlist info listid 
5.13.5.4 Delete clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr namedlist info listid  [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]
Parameter:
Name

Description

listid listid

This field stores the list identifier value.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535

IP DSLAM

339

valtype U8 | U16 | U32

This field specifies the value type of list. Value type
should match value type of matchingenlist nodes in case
a tree attached on same interface as the list. It should be
'U32' in case a rule containing IP subrule or Generic
subrule with cmptype as InGenList or NotInGenList is
attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is
supported.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: U32

Example:
$ create clfr namedlist info listid 2 valtype u32
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId
:2
Value Type : u32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

ListId

This field stores the list identifier value.

Value Type

This field specifies the value type of list. Value
type should match value type of matchingenlist
nodes in case a tree attached on same interface
as the list. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with
cmptype as InGenList or NotInGenList is
attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'
value is supported.

340

IDL series User Guide

5.13.6 Clfr namedlist map Commands
5.13.6.1 Get clfr namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr namedlist map [ifname ]
5.13.6.2 Create clfr namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr namedlist map ifname listid 
5.13.6.3 Delete clfr namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr namedlist map ifname 
Parameter:
Name

Description

ifname 

This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to which
named generic list is attached. Valid values for the field are between
EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and
IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-192.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get
listid



--

Mandatory

Optional

This field stores the list identifier value.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 65535

Example
$ create clfr namedlist map ifname eoa-1 listid 2

IP DSLAM

341

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-1
ListId : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

IfName

This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet
interface to which named generic list is attached.
Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and
EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between
IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-192.

ListId

This field stores the list identifier value.

5.13.7 Clfr profile branch Commands
5.13.7.1 Get clfr profile branch
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr profile branch [pname ] [nodeid ] [brtype
]
5.13.7.2 Create clfr profile branch
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr profile branch pname nodeid brtype
 [cnodeid ]

342

IDL series User Guide

5.13.7.3 Delete clfr profile branch
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr profile branch pname  nodeid brtype

Parameter:
Name

Description

pname 

Name of the classifier profile
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get
nodeid 

--

Mandatory

Optional

Node Id of the node, with which the branch is to be
attached.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
brtype 

This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node,
only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For
binary type and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe) are
allowed. For

ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr

(0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For
Linear, Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32, U64,
atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get
cnodeid 

--

Optional

Child Node Id
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Default value: 0

Example:
$ create clfr profile branch pname IGMP nodeid 3 brtype truebr

IP DSLAM

343

Output
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name : IGMP
Node Id
:3
Child NodeId : 5
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Branch type : true

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Name

Name of the classifier profile

Node Id

Node Id of the node, with which the branch is to be
attached.

Branch type

This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node,
only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For
binary type and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only)
type, TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe)
are allowed. For

ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc),

GtBr (0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed.
For Linear, Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32, U64,
atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Child NodeId

Child Node Id

5.13.8 Clfr profile info Commands
5.13.8.1 Get clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr profile info [pname ]

344

IDL series User Guide

5.13.8.2 Create clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr profile info pname 
5.13.8.3 Delete clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr profile info pname 
5.13.8.4 Modify clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr profile info pname  [descr ] [rnode
] [enable | disable]
Parameter:
Name

Description

pname 

Name of the classifier profile
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Default value: ----descr



A brief description can be given with profile, to identify the profile
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
rnode 

Root node Id of the profile. Each profile can have only one root
node id
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0

IP DSLAM

345

enable | disable

A Profile can only be modified, if it is disabled. A tree can only
use a profile, if it is enabled. A profile cannot be disabled, if a
tree is using it.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: 2

Example:
$ create clfr profile info pname IGMP
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name : IGMP
Root NodeId : 0
Status : Enable
Description : Profile to match the IGMP packet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Name

Name of the classifier profile

Root NodeId

Root node Id of the profile. Each profile can have
only one root node id

Status

A Profile can only be modified, if it is disabled. A
tree can only use a profile, if it is enabled. A
profile cannot be disabled, if a tree is using it.

Description

A brief description can be given with profile, to
identify the profile

346

IDL series User Guide

5.13.9 Clfr profile node Commands
5.13.9.1 Get clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr profile node [pname ] [nodeid ]
5.13.9.2 Create clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr profile node pname nodeid  [ descr
 ] [export true|false ] Ntype
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternary|Linear|NonLinear modmask
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask|Val|ValueEnd|SBType|SBShiftCnt|SBMplr|Descrip|None
[ actval
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|TerCmp|SetPrio|MatchInList|AccD
eny|SetBase|Count|Retagprio | MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule|allow ] [ valuetype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|VlanId ][ offsetval
 ] [ maskval  ] [ value  ] [ valend
 ] [ sbasetype Abs|Add|Compute|SetFromVar ] [shiftcnt
] [ mplr  ] [ sbvarindex l2start|l3start ] [ nodeprio
low|high|asintree ]
5.13.9.3 Delete clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr profile node pname  nodeid 
5.13.9.4 Modify clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to modify.

IP DSLAM

347

Command Syntax:
modify clfr profile node pname nodeid  [ descr
descr ] [export true|false ] Ntype Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternary|Linear|NonLinear
modmask
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask|Val|ValueEnd|SBType|SBShiftCnt|SBMplr|Descrip|None
[ actval
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|TerCmp|SetPrio|MatchInList|AccD
eny|SetBase|Count|Retagprio | MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule|allow ] [ valuetype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|VlanId ][ offsetval
 ] [ maskval  ] [ value  ] [ valend
 ] [ sbasetype Abs|Add|Compute|SetFromVar ] [shiftcnt
] [ mplr  ] [ sbvarindex l2start|l3start ] [ nodeprio
low|high|asintree ]
Parameter:
Name

Description

pname 

Name of the classifier profile
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Default value: ----nodeid 

Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: ----descr 

A brief description can be given with node, to identify the node. If
the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl then this field is mandatory and
it can be used by the applications to receive the packets coming
from control plane because of this node.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
export true|false

Some of the nodes of a profile can be exported. This flag tells
whether this node is exported or not
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

348

Optional

IDL series User Guide

Default value: FALSE
Ntype

This specifies the type of the Classifier node.

Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternar

Type:

Create

-- Optional

y|Linear|NonLinear
maskval 

Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a packet.
If gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute, then this value is
used to specify the mask, which shall be used to identify the
individual bits of the field of the packet used to compute the new
base offset. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U8, U16, U32 or U64.
This field is also valid if the g gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is
MatchInGenList.
Type : Create --Optional
Default Value : --

value 

Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types,
this field is not valid. For Linear node types, this
value is used to specify the start of the range. If
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then
this field is used to specify the value, which is to be
added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If
the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field
is used to specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet.
If the
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is MatchInGenList then this field is not
valid. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is Count then this field is
read only and specifies total number of octets of the packets
hitting this node.
Type:

Create -- Optional

Default value: --valend 

For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end
of the range. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is
InRange then this field is used to specify the end of
the range. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is count
then this field is used to specify the total number of
packet hitting this node. For other actions this field is not valid.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Default value: -----

IP DSLAM

sbasetype Abs | Add |

This field is valid only for the SET_BASE action type. It is used to

Compute |

specify, whether the base off set is to be set to an absolute value,

349

or some value is to be added to existing base offset value to
calculate new base offset value, or the new base offset value is to
be computed using some value in the packet.
Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: --shiftcnt 

ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the
packet is to be shifted before multiplying it with the
gsvClfrProfileNodeMultiplier. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase. Value 32 is meant for
internal purpose and Agents should not pass this value to GAG.
GAG may return 32 value to Agent, in which case Agent should
treat it as invalid.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 31
Default value: --mplr 

Multiplier, is used to multiply the value shifted by
ShiftCount. It is used to calculate the new base
offset. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 32
Default value: ---Modmask

This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable and

Act|ValType|Offset|Mask

can be modified while the profile is part of a classifier tree.

|Val|None|ValueEnd|Sbt

Type:

ype|SBShiftCnt|SBMlpr|

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Descrip
Actval

Action tells what is to be done by a node. 'Drop' means drop the

Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpT

packet. 'Fwd' means Forward the packet. 'FwdToCtl' means

oCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|Te

Forward the packet to control plane. 'CpToCtl' means forward the

rCmp|

packet and also send a copy of the packet to control plane.'Allow'

SetPrio|MatchInList|Acc

means give the packet to the next stage. 'GoToNextRule' means

Deny|SetBase|Count|

go to the next rule (ruleid) attached on that interface and if no next

Retagprio |

rule is attached on that interface then forward the packet. 'Eq'

MatchIngenlist

means check if value specified in the packet is equal to 'Value'. 'Gt'

|GoToNextRule|allow

means check if the value at the location specified in the packet is
greater than 'Value'. 'Lt' means check if the value at the location
specified in the packet is Less than 'Value'. 'InRange' means

350

IDL series User Guide

check if the value at the location specified in the packet is in the
range specified by 'Value' and 'ValEnd'. 'TerCmp' means check if
the value at the location specified in the packet is less than, equals
to or greater than the 'Value'. 'MatchInList' means take the branch
of the node whose value is equals to the value at the location
specified in the packet. 'AccDeny' means check if the value at the
location specified in the packet is equals to any of the value of the
branches of this node. 'SetBase' means set the base address as
specified by 'setbase action'. 'SetPrio' means set the internal
priority, which is used along with egress port traffic class mapping
table, to determine the output queue. 'Count' means count the
number of packet and bytes in the packets reaching this nodes.
'RetagPrio' means set the priority in the outgoing packet, which is
also used along with egress port traffic class mapping table, to
determine the output queue. 'MatchInGenList' means match value
in packet with values in genlist. For Leaf node, Drop, Fwd,
FwdToCtl, CpToCtl, Allow and GoToNextRule are valid actions.
For Unary node, Count, SetPrio and RetagPrio are valid actions.
For Binary node, Eq, Gt, Lt, SetBase and MatchInGenList are valid
actions. For Ternary node, TerCmp and InRange are valid actions.
For Linear node, only MatchInList is a valid action. For NonLinear
node, MatchinList and AccDeny are valid actions.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Default value: ----Ntype

This specifies the type of the Classifier node.

Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternar

Type:

Create

y|Linear|NonLinear

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: ----Offsetval offsetval

OffSet, in

the packet with respect to the base offset,

from where we have to take the value, which is to be matched. If
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then this value is
used to specify the offset with respect to the base offset, which
shall be used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the
new base offset. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U8 the offset
can be odd or even. If the
gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U16, U32 or U64 then
the offset can only be even. This field is not valid for
any other value type.

IP DSLAM

351

Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 64
Default value: ----Valuetype valuetype

Value type tells, the type of value which is to be
matched/set. For leaf type nodes this field is not
valid. If gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then
this value is used to specify the value type (U8, U16, U32), which
shall be used to compute the new base offset. This field is not
valid for other values of
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType.

Type:

Create -- Optional
Modify --

Optional

Default value: ----sbvarindex

This specifies setbase variable index. This field is valid only if

L2Start|L3Start

'SetBaseType' is 'SetFromVar'. 'L2Start' is read-only containing
Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only containing Layer
3 header start offset. It should be ensured that packet is IP packet
before using 'L3Start' value
.Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: Invalid
nodeprio

This specifies the priority of profile node. Based on this priority

Low|High|AsInTree

value, the profile node is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'AsInTree', node priority will be same as
specified in the tree.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: AsInTree

Example:
$ create clfr profile node pname IGMP nodeid 1 ntype binary actval eq valuetype
u16 value 0xffff offsetval 12 maskval 0xffff

352

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name
: IGMP
Node Id
:3
Exported
: true
Node Type
Modification Mask : Act
Action
: eq
Value Type
: u16
Offset
Mask
: 0xffff
Value
: 0x800
Value End
: None
Set Base type
: none
Shift Count
: none
Multiplier
Description
: Node to match the ip address
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

: Binary

: 12

: none

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Name

Name of the classifier profile

Node Id

Node Id, should be unique within a profile

Exported

This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable
and can be modified while the profile is part of a classifier tree.

Node Type

This specifies the type of the Classifier node

Modification Mask

This specifies what fields of this nodes can be modified, if this
node is an exported node.

Action

Action tells what is to be done by a node.

Value Type

Value type tells the type of value, which is to be matched/set.
For leaf type nodes this field is not valid. if ActVal is SetBase and
SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to specify the
value type (U8, U16, U32), which shall be used to compute the
new base offset. This field is not valid for other values of
SBaseType.

Offset

OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where
we have to take the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is
SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to
specify the offset with respect to the base offset, which shall be
used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the new

IP DSLAM

353

base offset. if the valuetype is U8 the offset can be odd or even.
If the ValueType is U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be
even. This field is not valid for any other value type.
Mask

Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a
packet. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then
this value is used to specify the mask, which shall be used to
identify the individual bits of the field of the packet used to
compute the new base offset. This field is valid only if the
ValueType is U8, U16, U32 or U64. This field is also valid if the
ActVal is MatchInGenList.

Value

Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not
valid. For Linear node types, this value is used to specify the
start of the range. if ActVal is SetBase and SBaseTypeis
Compute then this field is used to specify the value,
which is to be added to base offset to calculate new base offset.
If the ActVal is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is used to
specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet. If the
ActVal is MatchInGenList then this field is not
valid. If the ActVal is Count then this field is read only and
specifies total number of octet of the packets hitting this node.

Value End

For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the
range. If the ActVal is InRange then this field is used to specify
the end of the range. If the ActVal is count then this field is used
to specify the total number of packet hitting this node. For other
actions this field is not valid.

Set Base type

SetBaseType is used to specify whether the base off set is to be
set to an absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing
base offset value to calculate new base offset value or the new
base offset value is to be computed using some value in the
packet. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.

Shift Count

ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the packet is to
be shifted before multiplying it with the Mplr.

This field is valid

only if the ActVal is SetBase. Value 32 is used to set shift count
to an invalid value.
Multiplier

Multiplier is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is
used to calculate the new base offset. This field is valid only if
the ActVal is SetBase.

Description

Description of the profile node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or
CpToCtl then this field is mandatory and it can be used by the
applications to receive the packets coming from control plane

354

IDL series User Guide

because of this node.
SBVar Index

This specifies setbase variable index. This field is valid only if
'SetBaseType' is 'SetFromVar'. 'L2Start' is read-only containing
Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only containing
Layer 3 header start offset. It should be ensured that packet is IP
packet before using 'L3Start' value

Node Priority

This specifies the priority of profile node. Based on this priority
value, the profile node is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'AsInTree', node priority will be same as
specified in the tree.

5.13.10 Clfr tree branch Commands
5.13.10.1 Get clfr tree branch
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree branch [tname ] [pid ] [nodeid ]
[brtype ]
5.13.10.2 Create clfr tree branch
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree branch tname pid nodeid
brtype childpid 
5.13.10.3 Delete clfr tree branch
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree branch tname pid nodeid
brtype 

IP DSLAM

355

Parameter:
Name

Description

tname 

Name of the classifier tree
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: ND - ND
pid 

Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
nodeid 

Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
brtype 

This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node, only
onlybr (0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For binary type
and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe) are allowed.
For

ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr

(0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For Linear,
Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is allowed. The actual
value can be U8, U16, U32, U64, atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get
childpid 

--

Optional

This object specifies Child Profile Id. The Child Profile Id value 0
is used to add true and false branches to a AccessDeny type
node.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Default value: 0

Example:
$ create clfr tree branch tname t1 pid 2 nodeid 1 brtype truebr childpid 1

356

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Tree Name
: tree1
Profile Id : 3
Branch type : eq
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Node Id
:2
Child Profile Id : 4

Output field:
Field

Description

Tree Name

Name of the classifier tree

Profile Id

Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree

Node Id

Node Id, should be unique within a profile

Branch type

This specifies the branch types. For a unary type
node, only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is
allowed. For binary type and
Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe)
are allowed. For ternary type nodes
LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr (0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr
(0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For Linear,
Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32,
U64, atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.

Child Profile Id

This object specifies Child Profile Id. The Child
Profile Id value 0, is used to add true and false
branches to a AccessDeny type node.

IP DSLAM

357

5.13.11 Clfr tree info Commands
5.13.11.1 Get clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree info [tname ]
5.13.11.2 Create clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree info tname  [descr ] [enable | disable]
[treeprio low | high]
5.13.11.3 Delete clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr tree info tname 
5.13.11.4 Modify clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr tree info tname  [descr ] [enable | disable]
[treeprio low | high]

358

IDL series User Guide

Parameter:
Name

Description

tname 

Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule of this rule.
This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A classifier tree can be
used only in one subrule. The Maximum length of Name should be 32.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Default value: ----A brief description can be given with tree, to identify the tree

descr 

Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
A tree cannot be deleted or modified, if it is enabled. A tree can only be

enable | disable

used, if it is enabled. A tree can not be disabled, if it is being used.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: 2
Tells the priority of the tree. Based on this priority value, the tree is

treeprio low | high

created in fast or slow memory.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: low

Example:
$ create clfr tree info tname tree1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Tree Name
Status
Description
Tree Priority

: tree1
: disable
: tree1
: High

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

IP DSLAM

359

Output field:
Field

Description

Tree Name

Name of the classifier tree

Status

A tree cannot be deleted or modified, if it is enabled. A tree can only be
used, if it is enabled. A tree can not be disabled, if it is being used.

Description

A brief description can be given with tree, to identify the tree

TreePriority

Tells the priority of the tree. Based on this priority value, the tree is
created in fast or slow memory.

5.13.12 Clfr tree map Commands
5.13.12.1 Get clfr tree map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree map [ifname ]
5.13.12.2 Create clfr tree map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree map ifname tname  entrypid

5.13.12.3 Delete clfr tree map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr tree map ifname 

360

IDL series User Guide

Parameter:
Name

Description

ifname

Interface name, with which the tree is to be associated



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Mandatory
tname 

Type:

Create -- Mandatory

entrypid 

Type:

Create -- Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff

Example:
$ create clfr tree map Ifname aal5-3 tname tree1 EntryPId 5
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
If Name : aal5-3
Tree Name : tree1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Entry Profile Id : 5

Output field
Field

Description

If Name

Interface name, with which the tree is to be associated

Tree Name
Entry Profile Id

5.13.13 Clfr tree node Commands
5.13.13.1 Get clfr tree node
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree node [tname ] [pid ] [nodeid ]

IP DSLAM

361

5.13.13.2 Modify clfr tree node
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr tree node tname pid nodeid 
[ descr  ] [ offset  ] [ mask  ] [ value
 ] [act Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange |TerCmp|
SetPrio|MatchInList|AccDeny|SetBase|Count| Retagprio |
MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule| allow] [valend valend ] [sbasetype Abs | Add |
Compute] [ shiftcnt  ] [ mplr  ] [valtype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|vlanid][ sbvarindex
l2start|l3start ] [nodeprio low]
Parameter:
Name
tname tname

Description
Name of the classifier tree
Type:

Modify
Get

-- Mandatory
--

Optional

Default value: ----pid pid

Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree.
Type:

Modify

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: ----nodeid nodeid

Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Type:

Modify
Get

-- Mandatory
--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: ----descr descr

Description of the tree node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl
then this field is mandatory and it can be used by the applications to
receive the packets coming from control plane because of this node.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: ----offset offset

OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where we
have to take the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is SetBase
and SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to specify the
offset with respect to the base offset, which shall be used to specify
the field of the packet used to compute the new base offset. If the

362

IDL series User Guide

ValueType is U8 the offset can be odd or even. If the ValueType is
U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be even. This field is not
valid for any other value type.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 65
Default value: ----mask mask

Mask, used to

select the individual bits to be matched in a

packet. If gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrTreeNodeSetBaseType is Compute, then this value is used
to specify the mask, which shall be used to identify the individual bits
of the field of the packet used to compute the new base offset. This
field is valid only if the gsvClfrTreeNodeValType is U8, U16, U32
or U64. This field is also valid if the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction

is

MatchInGenList.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: ----value value

Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not
valid. For Linear node types, this
value is used to specify the start of the range. If
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase and NodeSetBaseType is
Compute then this field is used to specify the value, which is to be
added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If the
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is
used to specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet. If
the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is MatchInGenList then this
field is not valid. If the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is Count, then this
field is read only and specifies total
number of octets of the packets hitting this node.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: ----act

Action tells what is to be done by a node. 'Drop' means drop the

Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|

packet. 'Fwd' means Forward the packet. 'FwdToCtl' means

CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InR

Forward the packet to control plane. 'CpToCtl' means forward the

ange|TerCmp|

packet and also send a copy of the packet to control plane.'Allow'

SetPrio|MatchInList|A

means give the packet to the next stage. 'GoToNextRule' means go

ccDeny|SetBase|Cou

to the next rule (ruleid) attached on that interface and if no next rule

nt| Retagprio |

is attached on that interface then forward the packet. 'Eq' means

MatchIngenlist|

check if value specified in the packet is equal to 'Value'. 'Gt' means

GoToNextRule|allow

check if the value at the location specified in the packet is greater
than 'Value'. 'Lt' means check if the value at the location specified in
the packet is Less than 'Value'. 'InRange' means check if the value

IP DSLAM

363

at the location specified in the packet is in the range specified by
'Value' and 'ValEnd'. 'TerCmp' means check if the value at the
location specified in the packet is less than, equals to or greater than
the 'Value'. 'MatchInList' means take the branch of the node whose
value is equals to the value at the location specified in the packet.
'AccDeny' means check if the value at the location specified in the
packet is equals to any of the value of the branches of this node.
'SetBase' means set the base address as specified by setbase
action. 'SetPrio' means set the internal priority, which is used along
with egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
queue. 'Count' means count the number of packet and bytes in the
packets reaching this nodes. 'RetagPrio' means set the prirority in
the outgoing packet, which is also used along with egress port traffic
class mapping table, to determine the output queue.
'MatchInGenList' means match value in packet with values in
genlist. For Leaf node, Drop, Fwd, FwdToCtl, CpToCtl, Allow and
GoToNextRule are valid actions. For Unary node, Count, SetPrio
and RetagPrio are valid actions. For Binary node, Eq, Gt, Lt,
SetBase and MatchInGenList are valid actions. For Ternary node,
TerCmp and InRange are valid actions. For Linear node, only
MatchInList is a valid action. For NonLinear node, MatchinList and
AccDeny are valid actions.
Type:
valend valend

Modify

--

Optional

For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the range. If
the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is InRange then this field is used to
specify the end of the range. If the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is count
then this field is used to specify the total number of packets hitting
this node. For other actions this field is not valid.
Type:

Modify -- Optional

Default value: ----sbasetype Abs | Add |

SetBaseType, is used to specify, whether the base off set is to be

Compute

set to an absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing
base offset value to calculate new base offset value or the new base
offset value is to be computed using some value in the packet.This
field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: 4
shiftcnt shiftcnt

ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the packet is to be
shifted before multiplying it with the
gsvClfrTreeNodeMultiplier. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase.

364

IDL series User Guide

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 – 31
Default value: ---mplr mplr

Multiplier, is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is
used to calculate the new base offset. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 32
Default value: ---valtype

Value type tells the type of value that is to be matched/set.

U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmI
f|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|D
ir|Prio|Len|vlanid
Sbvarindex

This specifies the setbase variable index. 'L2Start' is read-only,

l2start|l3start

containing Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only,
containing Layer 3 header start offset.

Nodeprio

This specifies the priority of the tree node. Based on this priority

low|high|asintree

value, the tree node is created in fast or slow memory.

Example:
$ get clfr tree node tname tree1 pid 2 nodeid 3
Output:
Tree Name
: tree1
Profile Id
:2
Node Id
:3
Exported
: true
Node Type
: Binary
Modification Mask : act offset
Action
: eq
Value Type
: u32
Offset
: 12
Mask
: 0x0000000f
Value
: 0x0000000f
ValueEnd
: NA
Set Base type
: NA
Shift Count
: NA
Multiplier
: NA
Description
: Node to match the ip address

IP DSLAM

365

Output field:
Field

Description

Tree Name

Name of the classifier tree.

Profile Id

Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree

Node Id

Node Id, should be unique within a profile

Exported

This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable and can be modified
while the profile is part of a classifier tree.

Node Type

This specifies the type of the Classifier node

Modification Mask

This specifies what fields of this nodes can be modified, if this node is an
exported node.

Action

Action tells what is to be done by a node.

Value Type

Value type tells, the type of value which is to be matched/set. For leaf type nodes
this field is not valid. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then this
value is used to specify the value type (U8, U16, U32), which shall be used
to compute the new base offset. This field is not valid for other values of
SBaseType.

Offset

OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where we have to take
the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is
Compute then this value is used to specify the offset with respect to the base
offset,
which shall be used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the new
base offset. If the valuetype is U8 the offset can be odd or even. If the ValueType
is U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be even. This field is not valid for any
other value type.

Mask

Mask, used to select the individual bits to be match in a packet. If ActVal is
SetBase and SBaseTypeis Compute then this value is used to specify the mask,
which shall be used to identify the individual bits of the field of the packet used to
compute the new base offset.This field is valid only if the ValueType is U8, U16,
U32 or U64. This field is also valid if the ActVal is MatchInGenList.

Value

Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not valid. For Linear
node types, this value is used to specify the start of the range. if ActVal is
SetBase and SBaseTypeis Compute then this field is used to specify the value,
which is to be added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If the ActVal is
SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is used to specify the priority which is to be
assigned to the packet. If the ActVal is MatchInGenList then this field is not valid.
If the ActVal is Count then this field is read only and specifies total number of
octet of the packets hitting this node.

ValueEnd

For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the range. If the ActVal is
InRange then this field is used to specify the end of the range. If the ActVal is
count then this field is used to specify the total number of packet hitting this node.

366

IDL series User Guide

For other actions this field is not valid.
Set Base type

SetBaseTyp, is used to specify whether the base off set is to be set to an
absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing base offset value to
calculate new base offset value or the new base offset value is to be computed
using some value in the packet. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.

Shift Count

ShiftCount is the number of times the Value in the packet is to be shifted before
multiplying it with the Mplr. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase. Value
32 is used to set shift count to an invalid value.

Multiplier

Multiplier is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is used to calculate
the new base offset. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.

Description

Description of the profile node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl then this field
is mandatory and it can be used by the applications to receive the packets
coming from control plane because of this node.

5.13.14 Clfr tree profile Commands
5.13.14.1 Get clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree profile [tname ] [pid ]
5.13.14.2 Create clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree profile tname pid pname 
[isroot ]
5.13.14.3 Delete clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree profile tname  pid 

IP DSLAM

367

5.13.14.4 Modify clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr tree profile tname pid  [isroot true|false]
Parameter:
Name

Description

tname 

Name of the classifier tree
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Default value: ----pid 

Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: ----pname 

Name of the profile which is to be added
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Get

--

Optional

Default value: ----isroot 

This specifies whether this profile is exported as a root profile or not. Only
root profiles of the nodes can be specified as an entry point on an interface.
Type:

Create

Get

-- Optional

Delete --

Optional

Modify --

Optional

--

Optional

Valid values: true, false
Default value:FALSE

Example:
$ create clfr tree profile tname tree1 pid 4 pname srcip

368

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Tree Name
: tree1
Profile Name : srcip
Is Root
: false
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Profile Id : 4

Output field:
Field

Description

Tree Name

Name of the classifier tree

Profile Id

Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree

Profile Name

Name of the profile which is to be added

Is Root

This specifies whether this profile is exported as a root
profile or not. Only root profiles of the nodes can be
specified as an entry point on an interface.

5.13.15 Filter expr entry Commands
5.13.15.1 Get filter expr entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter expr entry [exprid ]
5.13.15.2 Create filter expr entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter expr entry exprid exprstring 

IP DSLAM

369

5.13.15.3 Delete filter expr entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter expr entry exprid 
Parameter
Name
exprid

Description


Unique identifier for a filter expression.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory
Optional

Valid values: 1 -65535
exprstring

Expression string contains the expression relating the subrules of a



rule using the & (AND), | (OR), ! (NOT) operators, parenthesis (for
precedance) and actions to be executed. Valid actions are drop,
allow, setprio, sendtocontrol, retagprio, copytocontrol, gotonextrule,
forwardexit. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', only drop, allow, gotonextrule and
forwardexit action types are valid. For eg. "(1|2):drop" will be used to
drop all packets which match subrules 1 or 2.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Example:
$ create filter expr entry exprid 1 exprstring “(1|2):drop”
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Expr Id
:1
Exprstring : (1|2):drop
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

370

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Expr Id

Unique identifier for a filter expression.

Exprstring

Expression string contains the expression relating the subrules of a rule using
the & (AND), | (OR), ! (NOT) operators, parenthesis (for precedance) and
actions to be executed. Valid actions are drop, allow, setprio, sendtocontrol,
retagprio, copytocontrol, gotonextrule, forwardexit. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out',
only drop, allow, gotonextrule and forwardexit action types are valid. For eg.
"(1|2):drop" will be used to drop all packets which match subrules 1 or 2.

5.13.16 Filter list genentry Commands
5.13.16.1 Get filter list genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
5.13.16.2 Create filter list genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter list genentry ifname value ] [valtype
U8 | U16 | U32]
5.13.16.3 Delete filter list genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter list genentry ifname  value 
Parameter:
Name

Description

ifname 

Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the
generic filter generic list is created. Valid values for the field are
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and

IP DSLAM

371

PPPOE-191.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get
value 

--

Mandatory

Optional

List Entry Value, for the generic filter generic list. This value
must be consistent with the mentioned valuetype of generic list.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get
valtype U8 | U16 | U32

--

Mandatory

Optional

This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should
match value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is
ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as
InGenList or NotInGenList is attached on same interface.
Currently only 'U32' value is supported.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Default value: U32

Example:
$ create filter list genentry ifname eoa-1 value 0xAC1901AA valtype u32
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName
: eoa-1
Value
: 0xAC1901AA
Value Type : u32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field
Field

Description

IfName

Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the generic filter
generic list is created. Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and
EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or
between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-191.

Value

372

List Entry Value, for the generic filter generic list. This value must be

IDL series User Guide

consistent with the mentioned valuetype of generic list.
Value Type

This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all entries on an
interface should be same. Value type should match value type of subrule field
for which comparsion type is ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing
the subrule is attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is
supported.

5.13.17 Filter namedlist genentry Commands
5.13.17.1 Get filter namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter namedlist genentry [listid ] [value ]
5.13.17.2 Create filter namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter namedlist genentry listid  value value-val>] [valueto
]
5.13.17.3 Delete filter namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter namedlist genentry listid  value 
Parameter:
Name

Description

listid 

This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row indexed on
the same id in the Generic Filter Named List Table.
Type:

IP DSLAM

Create

-- Mandatory

373

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
value 

This value is mandatory for all list types. The interpretation of value
depends upon the type of the list. If the list type is discrete, then this value
is the list entry value. If the list type is range, then this value is the lower
limit of range. The upper limit of range is specified in valueto field.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get
valueto



--

Mandatory

Optional

This value is not required for discrete lists but is mandatory for lists of type
range. For range type lists this value specifies the upper limit of range.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Default value: 0

Example:
$ create filter namedlist genentry listid 2 value 0xAC1901AA valueto 0xAC1901AA
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId : 2
Value
: 0xAC1901AA
ValueTo : 0xAC1901AA
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

ListId

This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row indexed on
the same id in the Generic Filter Named List Table.

Value

This value is mandatory for all list types. The interpretation of value
depends upon the type of the list. If the list type is discrete, then this value
is the list entry value. If the list type is range, then this value is the lower
limit of range. The upper limit of range is specified in valueto field.

ValueTo

This value is not required for discrete lists but is mandatory for lists of type
range. For range type lists this value specifies the upper limit of range.

374

IDL series User Guide

5.13.18 Filter namedlist info Commands
5.13.18.1 Get filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter namedlist info [listid ]
5.13.18.2 Create filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
create filter namedlist info listid  [listtype discrete | range] [valtype
U8 | U16 | U32]
5.13.18.3 Delete filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delete filter namedlist info listid 
5.13.18.4 Modify filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
modify filter namedlist info listid  [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]
Parameter:
Name

Description

listid 

This field stores the list identifier value.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

IP DSLAM

--

Mandatory

Optional

375

Valid values: 1 - 65535

listtype discrete | range

This field identifies the type of list. If the type is discrete, then list
can contain max. of 8 discrete entries. If the type is range,
then list can contain max 4 entries. Lists of type range cannot be
specified with subrules having cmptype as innamedlist or
notinnamedlist. It can only be used for mapping to create genlist
of an interface.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Default value: discrete
valtype U8 | U16 | U32

This field specifies the value type of list. Value type should
match value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is
innamedlist or notinnamedlist. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with comparision type
(srcaddrcmp / gencmp) as 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist' is attached
on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is supported.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: U32

Example:
$ create filter namedlist info listid 2 listtype discrete valtype u32
Output
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId
:2
List Type : discrete
Value Type : u32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

ListId

This field stores the list identifier value.

List Type

This field identifies the type of list. If the type is discrete, then list
can contain max. of 8 discrete entries. If the type is range, then
list can contain max 4 entries. Lists of type range cannot be

376

IDL series User Guide

specified with subrules having cmptype as innamedlist or
notinnamedlist. It can only be used for mapping to create genlist of
an interface.
Value Type

This field specifies the value type of list. Value type should match
value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is
innamedlist or notinnamedlist. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with comparision type
(srcaddrcmp / gencmp) as 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist' is attached on
same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is supported.

5.13.19 Filter namedlist map Commands
5.13.19.1 Get filter namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter namedlist map [ifname ]
5.13.19.2 Create filter namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter namedlist map ifname  listid 
5.13.19.3 Delete filter namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter namedlist map ifname 
Parameter:
Name

Description

ifname 

This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to
which named generic list is attached. Valid values for the field
are between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or

IP DSLAM

377

between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-191.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get
listid 

--

Mandatory

Optional

This field stores the list identifier value. A row indexed by this id
must exist in Generic Filter Named List Table. Value type of the
list should match subrule field for which comparsion type is
ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as
ingenlist or notingenlist is attached on same interface. The list
type can either discrete or range.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 65535

Example:
$ create filter namedlist map ifname eoa-1 listid 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-1
ListId : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

IfName

This specifies the eoa, pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to which named generic list is
attached. Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0
and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-191.

ListId

This field stores the list identifier value. A row indexed by this id must exist in Generic
Filter Named List Table. Value type of the list should match subrule field for which
comparsion type is ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP subrule
or Generic subrule with cmptype as ingenlist or notingenlist is attached on same
interface. The list type can either discrete or range.

378

IDL series User Guide

5.13.20 Filter rule actionmap Commands
5.13.20.1 Get Filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule actionmap [ruleid ] [orderindex ]
5.13.20.2 Create filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter rule actionmap ruleid  orderindex 
action SetPrio | RetagPrio | CopyToControl | ModifyTos | SetBacLevel | PktVlanId
| RetagVlanId | PktServiceVlanId | RetagServiceVlanId | RetagServicePrio | Mirror
[priority ] [actionval ] [actionmask
]
5.13.20.3 Delete filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter rule actionmap ruleid  orderindex 
5.13.20.4 Modify filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter rule actionmap ruleid  orderindex 
[action SetPrio | RetagPrio | CopyToControl | ModifyTos | SetBacLevel | PktVlanId
| RetagVlanId | PktServiceVlanId | RetagServiceVlanId | RetagServicePrio | Mirror]
[priority ] [actionval ] [actionmask
]

IP DSLAM

379

Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule entry for which this mapping is
being created
Type: Create -－ Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

orderindex

This is the order index to allow creation of multiple entries in this



table with a single rule identified by 'ruleid'. Multiple actions of
the rule are applied in the increasing order of this field
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 -255

action SetPrio |
RetagPrio|
CopyToControl

This field specifies the action of the rule
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional

|ModifyTos |
SetBacLevel |PktVlanId
| RetagVlanId
|PktServiceVlanId
|RetagServiceVlanId
|RetagServicePrio |
Mirror
priority 

This field specifies the priority to be set for the matching
packets. It is valid only if 'action' is either 'setprio' or 'retagprio'or
'retagserviceprio'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0

actionval

The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that



require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio, and
retagserviceprio actions. For copytocontrol action this
parameter should contain trap level 0 (trap disabled) or 1 (trap
enabled). Other values are invalid for this action. For modifytos
action this parameter should contain value to be set in TOS

380

IDL series User Guide

field in the packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid
for this action. The application of this value is dependent on the
mask parameter. For setbaclevel action this parameter should
contain valid Buffer Admission Control level value of 0 or 1. For
pktvlanid, retagvlanid, pktservicevlanid and retagservicevlanid
actions this parameter should be filled with VLAN ID value in
the range 1 to 4094. For mirror action this parameter should
be filled with valid mirror context id.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0
actionmask

This field is valid for modifytos action only. Only lower 8-bits are



taken into consideration for modifytos action and other bits are
ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then the
corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff

Example:
$ create filter rule actionmap ruleid 1 orderindex 1 action SetPrio priority 3
actionval 0x00000000 actionmask 0xffffffff
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Action
: SetPrio
ActionValue : 0x00000000
Action Mask : 0xffffffff

Order Index : 1
Priority
:3

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

IP DSLAM

381

Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule entry for which this mapping is
being created

Order Index

This is the order index to allow creation of multiple entries in
this table with a single rule identified by 'ruleid'. Multiple
actions of the rule are applied in the increasing order of this
field

Action
Priority

This field specifies the action of the rule
This field specifies the priority to be set for the matching
packets. It is valid only if 'action' is either 'setprio' or
'retagprio'or 'retagserviceprio'.

ActionValue

The parameter should contain valid value for some actions
that require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio,
and retagserviceprio actions. For copytocontrol action this
parameter should contain trap level 0 (trap disabled) or 1 (trap
enabled). Other values are invalid for this action. For
modifytos action this parameter should contain value to be set
in TOS field in the packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values
are invalid for this action. The application of this value is
dependent on the mask parameter. For setbaclevel action this
parameter should contain valid Buffer Admission Control level
value of 0 or 1. For pktvlanid and pktservicevlanid actions this
parameter should be filled with VLAN ID value in the range 1
to 4094. For mirror action this parameter should be filled
with valid mirror context id.

Action Mask

This field is valid for modifytos action only. Only lower 8-bits
are taken into consideration for modifytos action and other
bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then
the corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field
remains unchanged.

382

IDL series User Guide

5.13.21 Filter rule entry Commands
5.13.21.1 Get Filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule entry [ruleid ]
5.13.21.2 Create filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter rule entry ruleid r [ action drop | allow | setprio |
sendtocontrol | retagprio | copytocontrol | clfrdef | gotonextrule | forwardexit|
exprdef | modifytos | setbaclevel | pktvlanid | retagvlanid | pktservicevlanid |
retagservicevlanid | retagserviceprio | ratelimiter | Mirror ] [ description
 ] [ priority  ] [ status enable | disable ]
[ statsstatus enable | disable ] [ ruleprio low | high ] [ ruledir in | out ]
[ applywhenreq enable | disable ] [ pkttype Mcast | Bcast | Ucast ] [ snooplevel
interface | bridge ] [ exprid  ] [ actionval  ]
[ actionmask  ]
5.13.21.3 Delete filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter rule entry ruleid 
5.13.21.4 Modify filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.

IP DSLAM

383

Command Syntax:
modify filter rule entry ruleid  [ action drop | allow | setprio |
sendtocontrol | retagprio | copytocontrol | clfrdef | gotonextrule | forwardexit |
exprdef | modifytos | setbaclevel | pktvlanid | retagvlanid | pktservicevlanid |
retagservicevlanid | retagserviceprio | ratelimiter | Mirror ] [ description
 ] [ priority  ] [ status enable | disable ]
[ statsstatus enable | disable ] [ ruleprio low | high ] [ applywhenreq enable |
disable ] [ pkttype Mcast | Bcast | Ucast ] [ snooplevel interface | bridge ] [ exprid
 ] [ actionval  ] [ actionmask  ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1-65535

action drop | allow

Action to be applied for the packets matching this filter rule. This field

|setprio | sendtocontrol

can be modified only if 'ruleStatus' has the value 'disable'.

|retagprio | copytocontrol|

'exprdef(10)' action has a special significance that action is defined

clfrdef | gotonextrule

in the expression. In this case the 'ExprId' field must be specified.

|forwardexit | exprdef

For other types of actions, the default relationship between subrules

|modifytos | setbaclevel

is all ANDed. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', 'clfrdef' and 'ratelimiter' action

|pktvlanid | retagvlanid

types are invalid. If the action is 'clfrdef', then the rule can have at

|pktservicevlanid

most one subrule, that too of type 'clfrtree'. The actions setprio,

|retagservicevlanid

retagprio and setserviceprio require priority value to be specified in

|retagserviceprio

ruleSetPrio parameter. The actions sendtocontrol, copytocontrol,

|ratelimiter | Mirror

modifytos, setbaclevel, setvlanid, retagvlanid, setservicevlanid,
retagservicevlanid, ratelimiter and mirror require an additional value
to be specified in ruleActionVal parameter. The actions
sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos also require
ruleActionMask parameter to be specified.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: drop

description

Description of the application that receives packets matching this



rule. This field is valid and mandatory only if RuleAction is
'sendtocontrol' or RuleApplyWhenReq is 'enable'. This field can be
modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable' Type: Create －

384

IDL series User Guide

Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\0"
priority 

Priority to be set for packets matching this rule. This field is valid
only if RuleAction is 'setprio' or 'retagprio'. If the RuleAction is
'setprio' then this value is internal priroity and is used along with
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
queue. If the RuleAction is 'retagprio' then this value is priority which
is to be tagged into the outgoing packet and it is also used along with
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
queue. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value
'disable'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0

status enable | disable

Admin status of the rule
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable

statsstatus enable
|disable

Admin status of rule statistics. Statitics of a rule are collected only
when this field is set to 'enable'. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. NOTE - Statistics may not reflect
correctly the number of egress mcast, bcast and unknown unicast
packets hitting the rule.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable

ruleprio low | high

Tells the priority of the rule. Based on this priority value, the rule is
created in fast or slow memory. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the 'ruleAction'
has value 'clfrdef'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: high

ruledir in | out

Specifies whether the rule will be applied on incoming interfaces
(ingress)or outgoing interfaces(egress).
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: in

IP DSLAM

385

applywhenreq enable

This specifies whether this rule is to be applied only when required.

|disable

Rule description field is mandatory if this field is set to value 'enable'.
This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'. This
field is ignored if the 'ruleAction' has value 'clfrdef'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable

pkttype Mcast | Bcast

This field specifies the types of packets on which this rule is to be

|Ucast

applied. 'Mcast' means this rule is valid for multicast packets, 'Bcast'
means this rule is valid for broadcast packets and 'Ucast' means this
rule is valid for unicast packets. This field is valid only if 'ruleDir' is
'out'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Ucast

snooplevel interface

Snoop level specifies whether packet will be snooped directly from

|bridge

Interface or from Bridge after applying Bridging functionality .If none
of the Rule actions is 'sendtoControl' or 'copytocontrol', then this field
has no significance. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: interface

exprid 

Identifies the expression id from the Generic Filter Expression Table
to be used. This field is used only if 'ruleAction' is 'exprdef'. In
absence of this field, the default relationship between all subrules is
all ANDed.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Default value: 0

Example:
$ create filter rule entry ruleid 1 action setprio description lacp priority 7 status
enable statsstatus disable ruleprio high ruledir in applywhenreq disable pkttype
Ucast snooplevel interface exprid exprid 1 actionval 0x00000000 actionmask
0xffffffff

386

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Rule Action : setprio
Set Priority
:7
Admin status : enable
Stats admin status
: disable
Rule Priority : high
Rule Direction
: in
ApplyWhenReq : disable
Pkt Type
: Ucast
Application Description : lacp
Snoop Level
: interface
Expression Id
: exprid 1
Action Value
: 0x00000000
Action Mask
: 0xffffffff
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule.

Rule Action

Action to be applied for the packets matching this filter rule. This
field can be modified only if 'ruleStatus' has the value 'disable'.
‘exprdef (10)' action has a special significance that action is
defined in the expression. In this case the 'ExprId' field must be
specified. For other types of actions, the default relationship
between subrules is all ANDed. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', 'clfrdef'
and 'ratelimiter' action types are invalid. If the action is 'clfrdef',
then the rule can have at most one subrule, that too of type
'clfrtree'. The actions setprio, retagprio and setserviceprio require
priority value to be specified in ruleSetPrio parameter. The actions
sendtocontrol, copytocontrol, modifytos, setbaclevel, setvlanid,
retagvlanid, setservicevlanid, retagservicevlanid, ratelimiter and
mirror require an additional value to be specified in ruleActionVal
parameter. The actions sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and
modifytos also require ruleActionMask parameter to be specified.

Set Priority

Priority to be set for packets matching this rule. This field is valid
only if RuleAction is 'setprio' or 'retagprio'. If the RuleAction is
'setprio' then this value is internal priroity and is used along with
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output

IP DSLAM

387

queue. If the RuleAction is 'retagprio' then this value is priority
which is to be tagged into the outgoing packet and it is also used
along with egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the
output queue. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'.
Admin status

Admin status of the rule

Stats admin status

Admin status of rule statistics. Statitics of a rule are collected only
when this field is set to 'enable'. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. NOTE - Statistics may not reflect
correctly the number of egress mcast, bcast and unknown unicast
packets hitting the rule.

Rule Priority

Tells the priority of the rule. Based on this priority value, the rule
is created in fast or slow memory. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the
'ruleAction' has value 'clfrdef'

Rule Direction

Specifies whether the rule will be applied on incoming interfaces
(ingress)or outgoing interfaces(egress).

ApplyWhenReq

This specifies whether this rule is to be applied only when
required. Rule description field is mandatory if this field is set to
value 'enable'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the 'ruleAction' has value
'clfrdef'.

Pkt Type

This field specifies the types of packets on which this rule is to be
applied. 'Mcast' means this rule is valid for multicast packets,
'Bcast' means this rule is valid for broadcast packets and 'Ucast'
means this rule is valid for unicast packets. This field is valid only if
'ruleDir' is 'out'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'.

Application

Description of the application that receives packets matching this

Description

rule. This field is valid and mandatory only if RuleAction is
'sendtocontrol' or RuleApplyWhenReq is 'enable'. This field can be
modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'

Snoop Level

Snoop level specifies whether packet will be snooped directly from
Interface or from Bridge after applying Bridging functionality .If
none of the Rule actions is 'sendtoControl' or 'copytocontrol', then
this field has no significance. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'.

Expression Id

Identifies the expression id from the Generic Filter Expression
Table to be used. This field is used only if 'ruleAction' is 'exprdef'.
In absence of this field, the default relationship between all

388

IDL series User Guide

subrules is all ANDed.

Action Value

The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that
require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio, and
retagserviceprio actions. For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol
actions this parameter should contain control flow id (0-3). Other
values are invalid for this action. For modifytos action this
parameter should contain value to be set in TOS field in the packet
in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this action. The
application of this value is dependent on the mask parameter. For
setbaclevel action this parameter should contain valid Buffer
Admission Control level value of 0 or 1. For pktvlanid, retagvlanid,
pktservicevlanid and retagservicevlanid actions this parameter
should be filled with VLAN ID value in the range 1 to 4094.

For

ratelimiter action this parameter should be filled with the valid
user-defined flow type value. For mirror action this parameter
should be filled with valid mirror context id. This parameter is
ignored for other actions. Specifying an invalid value for an action
would result in error when the rule is enabled.
Action Mask

This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos
actions only.

For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this

parameter should contain trap level 0xffffffff (trap disabled) or
0x00000000(trap enabled). Other values are invalid for this action.
For modifytos action, only lower 8-bits are taken into consideration
and other bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1,
then the corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.

5.13.22 Filter rule map Commands
5.13.22.1 Get Filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule map [ifname  | all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe] [stageid ] [ruleid ]

IP DSLAM

389

5.13.22.2 Create filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter rule map ifname | all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe stageid  ruleid  [orderid ]
5.13.22.3 Delete filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter rule map ifname | all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe stageid  ruleid 
5.13.22.4 Modify filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter rule map ifname | all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe stageid  ruleid  [orderid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Ifname

Name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EOA,

| all

PPPoE, IPOE and ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of

|alleoa | alleth |

this field is 'All', it indicates all interfaces, 'AllEoa' indicates all 'eoa'

allpppoe| allcpe |

interfaces, and 'AllEth' indicates all 'ethernet'interfaces. AllPppoe'

allipoe

indicates all 'PPPoE'interfaces, 'AllIpoe' indicates all 'IPOE'
interfaces and 'AllCpe' indicates all eoa , all ipoe and pppoe
interfaces. If a bridge port on aggregated interface is created then
this field can not have ifIndex of any specific ethernet interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: , all , alleoa, alleth, allpppoe, allcpe,| allipoe

390

IDL series User Guide

stageid 

This field specifies the stage on the interface to which the rule in
the mapping belongs
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1

ruleid 

Rule Id of the rule in the mapping
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

orderid 

This field indicates the order of the rule in the attached sequence.
The default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Default value: Same As Ruleid

Example:
$ create filter rule map ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 ruleid 1 orderId 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface : eoa-0
Rule Id : 1

Stage Id : 1
Order Id : 1

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Interface

Name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EOA,
PPPoE, IPOE and ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of
this field is 'All', it indicates all interfaces, 'AllEoa' indicates all 'eoa'
interfaces, and 'AllEth' indicates all 'ethernet'interfaces. AllPppoe'
indicates all 'PPPoE'interfaces, 'AllIpoe' indicates all 'IPOE'

IP DSLAM

391

interfaces and 'AllCpe' indicates all eoa , all ipoe and pppoe
interfaces. If a bridge port on aggregated interface is created then
this field can not have ifIndex of any specific ethernet interface.
Stage Id

This field specifies the stage on the interface to which the rule in
the mapping belongs

Rule Id

Rule Id of the rule in the mapping

Order Id

This field indicates the order of the rule in the attached sequence.
The default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.

5.13.23 Filter rule stats Commands
5.13.23.1 Get Filter rule stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule stats [ruleid ]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1- 65535

Example:
$ get filter rule stats ruleid 1
Output:
Rule Id : 1

Num Hits : 4354

Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule

Num Hits

Number of packets that hit this rule

References:
z
Generic Filter Commands

392

IDL series User Guide

5.13.24 Filter seq entry Commands
5.13.24.1 Get Filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter seq entry [seqid ] [ruleid ]
5.13.24.2 Create filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter seq entry seqid  ruleid  [orderid
]
5.13.24.3 Delete filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter seq entry seqid  ruleid 
5.13.24.4 Modify filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter seq entry seqid  ruleid  [orderid
]
Parameters:
Name

IP DSLAM

Description

393

seqid 

Sequence Id of the sequence
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get – Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535

ruleid 

Rule Id of the rule
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535

orderid 

This field indicates the order of the rule in the sequence. The default value
for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535

Example:
$ create filter seq entry seqid 1 ruleid 1 orderId 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Sequence Id : 1
Order Id
:1

Rule Id : 1

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Sequence Id

Sequence Id of the sequence

Rule Id

Rule Id of the rule

Order Id

This field indicates the order of the rule in the sequence. The
default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.

References:
z
Generic filter related commands

394

IDL series User Guide

5.13.25 Filter seq info Commands
5.13.25.1 Get Filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter seq info [seqid ]
5.13.25.2 Create filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter seq info seqid seqid [ifname  | alleth] [stageid
] [seqdir in | out]
5.13.25.3 Delete filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter seq info seqid 
5.13.25.4 Modify filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter seq info seqid  [ifname | alleth]
[stageid ] [seqdir in | out]
Parameters:
Name

IP DSLAM

Description

395

seqid 

Sequence Id of the sequence
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535

ifname

The name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EoA, PPPoE,



and Ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of this field is 'alleth', it
indicates all 'Ethernet' interfaces. If the bridge port is created over the
aggregated interface, then this field cannot have IfIndex of any specific
Ethernet interface. If the bridge port over the aggregated interface is not
created, then this field cannot have the value 'alleth'. This field should not be
specified during creation of an entry in this table and must be specified during
modify of an entry in this table.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional

stageid 

Identifier of the stage on the interface for which the sequence is being
applied.This field should not be specified during creation of an entry in this
table and must be specified during modify of an entry in this table
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1-2
Default Value:1

seqdir in | out

This field specifies whether the sequence to be applied in ingress direction or
egress direction on the interface.This field should not be specified during
creation of an entry in this table and must be specified during modify of an entry
in this table.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: In

Example:
$ create filter seq info seqid 1 ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 seqdir 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Sequence Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

396

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Sequence Id

Sequence Id of the sequence

References:
z
Generic filter related commands

5.13.26 Filter subrule arp Commands
5.13.26.1 Get Filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule arp [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.26.2 Create filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule arp ruleid subruleid ]
[ opcode request | reply | any ] [ srcmacaddrfrom  ]
[ srcmacaddrto  ] [ dstmacaddrfrom  ]
[ dstmacaddrto  ] [ srcipaddrfrom  ]
[ srcipaddrto  ] [ dstipaddrfrom  ]
[ dstipaddrto  ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange
| exrange ] [ srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange | ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ ipsrcaddrmask  ]
[ ipdstaddrmask  ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]

IP DSLAM

397

5.13.26.3 Delete filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule arp ruleid subruleid 
5.13.26.4 Modify filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule arp ruleid subruleid ]
[ opcode request | reply | any ] [ srcmacaddrfrom  ]
[ srcmacaddrto  ] [ dstmacaddrfrom  ]
[ dstmacaddrto  ] [ srcipaddrfrom  ]
[ srcipaddrto  ] [ dstipaddrfrom  ]
[ dstipaddrto  ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange
| exrange ] [ srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange | ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ ipsrcaddrmask  ]
[ ipdstaddrmask  ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
Parameters:
Name
ruleid

Description


Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid

Unique identifier of a filter subrule.



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4294967295

398

IDL series User Guide

opcode request | reply |

The opcode identifies whether the packet is ARP request or

any

reply. This field specifies the type of packets on which the
subrule is to be applied. If 'any' is specified, both request and
reply packets are filtered.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any
srcmacaddrfrom

Start source Mac address of the range of source Mac



addresses. This field is invalid if srcmacaddrcmp is 'any'. This
field and the srcmacaddrto field specify a range of source Mac
addresses if srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
srcmacaddrto

End source Mac address of the range of source Mac



addresses. This field and the srcmacaddrfrom field specify a
range of source Mac addresses, if srcmacaddrcmp is either
'inrange' or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
dstmacaddrfrom

Start destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac



addresses. This field is invalid if'dstmacaddrcmp'is 'any'.This
field and the dstmacaddrto field specify a range of destination
Mac addresses if dstmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange'
or'exrange'.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
dstmacaddrto

End destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac



addresses. This field and the dstmacaddrfrom field specify a
range of destination Mac addresses, if dstmacaddrcmp is
either'inrange' or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"

IP DSLAM

399

srcipaddrfrom

Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.



This field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'
or'notingenlist'.If srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange',
this field and srcipaddrto field specify a range of source IP
addresses.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0.0.0.0
srcipaddrto

End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.



This field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'.If srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this
field and srcipaddrfrom field specify a range of source IP
addresses.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 255.255.255.255
dstipaddrfrom

Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP



addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'
or 'notingenlist'.If dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange',
this field and dstipaddrto field specify a range of destination IP
addresses.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0.0.0.0
dstipaddrto

End destination IP address of the range of destination IP



addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'
or 'notingenlist'.This field and the previous field specifiy a
range of destination IP addresses, if dstaddrcmp is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 255.255.255.255
srcmacaddrcmp eq |

Source Mac address comparison type.

neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |

Type:

any | inrange | exrange

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any
dstmacaddrcmp eq |

Destination Mac address comparison type.

neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |

Type:

any | inrange | exrange

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any

400

IDL series User Guide

srcipaddrcmp eq | neq |

Source IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if

lt | leq | gt | geq | any |

source IP address present in interface classifier generic

inrange | exrange |

list.'Notingenlist' means check if source IP address not

ingenlist | notingenlist

present in interface classifier generic list. 'Ingenlist' and
'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which
this subrule is being created is 'out'.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any
dstipaddrcmp eq | neq |

Destination IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means

lt | leq | gt | geq | any |

check if destination IP address present in interface classifier

inrange | exrange |

generic list.'Notingenlist' means check if destination IP

ingenlist | notingenlist

address not present in interface classifier generic
list.'Ingenlist' and 'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any
ipsrcaddrmask

The mask value for source IP address. The mask is applied



over the source IP address before checking against a value.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
ipdstaddrmask

The mask value for destination IP address. The mask is



applied over the destination IP address before checking
against a value.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
subruleprio low | high |

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority

asinrule

value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same
as specified in the rule.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: asinrule

IP DSLAM

401

Example:
$ create filter subrule arp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 opcode request srcmacaddrfrom
00:01:02:03:04:05 srcmacaddrto 00:01:02:03:04:10 dstmacaddrfrom
00:02:03:04:05:11 dstmacaddrto 00:02:03:04:05:15 srcipaddrfrom 172.25.1.125
srcipaddrto 172.25.5.125 dstipaddrfrom 172.25.6.125 dstipaddrto 172.25.10.125
srcmacaddrcmp inrange dstmacaddrcmp exrange srcipaddrcmp inrange
dstipaddrcmp exrange ipsrcaddrmask 0xffff0000 ipdstaddrmask 0xffff0000
subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Subrule Id
:2
Opcode
: request
Start Src Mac Addr : 00:01:02:03:04:05 End Src Mac Addr : 00:01:02:03:04:10
Start Dest Mac Addr : 00:02:03:04:05:11 End Dest Mac Addr : 00:02:03:04:05:15
Start Src Ip Addr
: 172.25.1.125
End Src Ip Addr
: 172.25.5.125
Start Dest Ip Addr : 172.25.6.125
End Dest Ip Addr : 172.25.10.125
Src Mac Addr Cmp
: inrange
Dest Mac Addr Cmp
: exrange
Src Ip Addr Cmp
: inrange
Dest Ip Addr Cmp
Ip Src Addr Mask
Ip Dest Addr Mask
Subrule Prio

: exrange
: 0xffff0000
: 0xffff0000
: high

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Parameters
Name

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule.

Opcode

The opcode identifies whether the packet is ARP request or reply.
This field specifies the type of packets on which the subrule is to
be applied. If 'any' is specified, both request and reply packets are
filtered.

402

IDL series User Guide

Start Src Mac Addr

Start source Mac address of the range of source Mac addresses.
This field is invalid if srcmacaddrcmp is 'any'. This field and the
srcmacaddrto field specify a range of source Mac addresses if
srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.

End Src Mac Addr

End source Mac address of the range of source Mac addresses.
This field and the srcmacaddrfrom field specify a range of source
Mac addresses, if srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange'
or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.

Start Dest Mac Addr

Start destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac
addresses. This field is invalid if'dstmacaddrcmp'is 'any'.This field
and the dstmacaddrto field specify a range of destination Mac
addresses if dstmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.

End Dest Mac Addr

End destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac
addresses. This field and the dstmacaddrfrom field specify a range
of destination Mac addresses, if dstmacaddrcmp is either'inrange'
or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.

Start Src Ip Addr

Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This
field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or'notingenlist'.If
srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field and
srcipaddrto field specify a range of source IP addresses.

End Src Ip Addr

End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This
field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or 'notingenlist'.If
srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field and
srcipaddrfrom field specify a range of source IP addresses.

Start Dest Ip Addr

Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'.If dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field
and dstipaddrto field specify a range of destination IP addresses.

End Dest Ip Addr

End destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'.This field and the previous field specifiy a range of
destination IP addresses, if dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.

IP DSLAM

Src Mac Addr Cmp

Source Mac address comparison type.

Dest Mac Addr Cmp

Destination Mac address comparison type.

403

Src Ip Addr Cmp

Source IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if
source IP address present in interface classifier generic
list.'Notingenlist' means check if source IP address not present in
interface classifier generic list. 'Ingenlist' and 'Notingenlist' are
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being
created is 'out'.

Dest Ip Addr Cmp

Destination IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if
destination IP address present in interface classifier generic
list.'Notingenlist' means check if destination IP address not
present in interface classifier generic list.'Ingenlist' and
'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which this
subrule is being created is 'out'.

Ip Src Addr Mask

The mask value for source IP address. The mask is applied over
the source IP address before checking against a value.

Ip Dest Addr Mask

The mask value for destination IP address. The mask is applied
over the destination IP address before checking against a value.

Subrule Prio

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.

5.13.27 Filter subrule clfrtree Commands
5.13.27.1 Get Filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule clfrtree [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.27.2 Create filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule clfrtree ruleid  subruleid 
tname  entrypid 

404

IDL series User Guide

5.13.27.3 Delete filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule clfrtree ruleid  subruleid 
5.13.27.4 Modify filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule clfrtree ruleid  subruleid 
[tname ] [entrypid ]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify --Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1- 65535

Subruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295

tname 

Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule of this rule.
This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A classifier tree can be used
only in one subrule. The Maximum length of Name should be 32.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional

entrypid 

Profile Id of the tree, which shall be treated as an entry point for it.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff

IP DSLAM

405

Example:
$ create filter subrule clfrtree ruleid 1 subruleid 2 tname igmp entrypid 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Tree Name
: igmp
Entry Profile Id : 2

Subrule Id : 2

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule.

Tree Name

Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule
of this rule. This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A
classifier tree can be used only in one subrule. The Maximum
length of Name should be 32.

Entry Profile Id

Profile Id of the tree, which shall be treated as an entry point
for it.

References:
z
see generic filter related commands

406

IDL series User Guide

5.13.28 Filter subrule ether Commands
5.13.28.1 Get Filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule ether [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.28.2 Create filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule ether ruleid  subruleid [ srcmacaddrfrom  ] [ srcmacaddrto
 ] [ dstmacaddrfrom  ] [ dstmacaddrto
 ] [ ethertypefrom  ] [ ethertypeto
 ] [ vlanidfrom  ] [ vlanidto  ]
[ priotagfrom  ] [ priotagto  ] [ dsapfrom
 ] [ dsapto  ] [ ssapfrom  ] [ ssapto
 ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ ethertypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
[ vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ priotagcmp
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dsapcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ ssapcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
[ servicevlanidfrom  ] [ servicevlanidto
 ] [ servicepriotagfrom  ]
[ servicepriotagto  ] [ servicevlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ servicepriotagcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |
geq | any | inrange | exrange ]

IP DSLAM

407

5.13.28.3 Delete filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule ether ruleid  subruleid 
5.13.28.4 Modify filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule ether ruleid  subruleid [ srcmacaddrfrom  ] [ srcmacaddrto
 ] [ dstmacaddrfrom  ] [ dstmacaddrto
 ] [ ethertypefrom  ] [ ethertypeto
 ] [ vlanidfrom  ] [ vlanidto  ]
[ priotagfrom  ] [ priotagto  ] [ dsapfrom
 ] [ dsapto  ] [ ssapfrom  ] [ ssapto
 ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ ethertypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
[ vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ priotagcmp
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dsapcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ ssapcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
[ servicevlanidfrom  ] [ servicevlanidto
 ] [ servicepriotagfrom  ]
[ servicepriotagto  ] [ servicevlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ servicepriotagcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |
geq | any | inrange | exrange ]

408

IDL series User Guide

Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

subruleid

Unique identifier of a filter subrule



Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295

srcmacaddrfrom

Start source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses. This



field is invalid if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcmacaddrto'
specify a range of source MAC addresses if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\0"

srcmacaddrto

End source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses. This



field and 'srcmacaddrfrom' specify a range of source MAC addresses, if
'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is
invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"

dstmacaddrfrom

Start destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC addresses.



This field is invalid if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field
specify a range of destination MAC addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\0"

dstmacaddrto

End destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC addresses.



This field and the previous field specify a range of destination MAC
addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise
this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional

IP DSLAM

409

Modify － Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
ethertypefrom

Start ether type of the range of ether types. This field is invalid if



'ethertypecmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of ether
types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange' Type: Create －
Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0

ethertypeto

End ether type of the range of ether types. This field and the previous field



specify a range of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xFFFF

vlanidfrom

Start VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the direction of the rule



for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid if
'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the vlanidto field specify a range of
VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or'exrange'(9).In VLAN
stacking mode this parameter maps to customer VLAN ID. Type: Create
－ Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 1

vlanidto 

End VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the direction of the rule for
which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the vlanidfrom
field specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or
'exrange'(9). Otherwise, this field is invalid. In VLAN stacking mode this
parameter maps to customer VLAN ID.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 4094

priotagfrom

Start priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction of the



rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid if
'priotagcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the priotagto field specify a range of
priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In VLAN
stacking mode this parameter maps to priority in the customer VLAN tag.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0

410

IDL series User Guide

priotagto

End priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction of the



rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the
priotagfrom field specify a range of priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this field is invalid. In VLAN stacking
mode this parameter maps to priority in the customer VLAN tag.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 7

dsapfrom

Start DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if 'dsapcmp' is



'any'. This object and the next object specify a range of DSAPs, if
'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0x00

dsapto 

End DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if 'dsapcmp' is
'any'. This object and the previous object specify a range of DSAPs, if
'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xff

ssapfrom

Start SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if 'ssapcmp' is



'any'. This object and the next object specify a range of SSAPs, if
'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0x00

ssapto 

End SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if 'ssapcmp' is
'any'. This object and the previous object specify a range of SSAPs, if
'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xff

srcmacaddrcmp eq |

Source mac address comparison type

neq |lt | leq | gt | geq |

Type: Create － Optional

any| inrange | exrange

Modify － Optional
Default value: any

dstmacaddrcmp eq |

Destination mac address comparison type

neq |lt | leq | gt | geq |

Type: Create － Optional

any| inrange | exrange

IP DSLAM

Modify － Optional

411

Default value: any
ethertypecmp eq | neq |

Ether type comparison type

lt| leq | gt | geq | any

Type: Create － Optional

|inrange | exrange

Modify － Optional
Default value: any

vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt

VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'priotagcmp' is not

|leq | gt | geq | any

equal to 'any'

|inrange | exrange

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any

priotagcmp eq | neq | lt

Priority tag comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'vlanidcmp' is not

|leq | gt | geq | any

equal to 'any'"

|inrange | exrange

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any

ssapcmp eq | neq | lt |

SSAP comparison type.

leq| gt | geq | any |

Type: Create － Optional

inrange| exrange

Modify － Optional
Default value: any

subruleprio low | high

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the

|asinrule

subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: asinrule

servicevlanidfrom

Start service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the



direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
is invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the servicevlanidto field
specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if 'servicevlanidcmp' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native mode configuring this parameter will
result in error. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 1

servicevlanidto

End service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the



direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
and the servicevlanidfrom field specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if
'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).Otherwise, this field
is invalid In native mode configuring this parameter will result in error.
Type: Create － Optional

412

IDL series User Guide

Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 4094
servicepriotagfrom

Start service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction



of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid
if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is 'any'(7). This field and the etherPriorityTagTo
field specify a range of priority tags, if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native mode configuring this parameter will
result in error. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0

servicepriotagto

End service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction



of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the
etherhPriorityTagFrom field specify a range of service priority tags, if
'etherhServicePrioTagCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).
Otherwise this field is invalid. In native mode configuring this parameter will
result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 7

servicevlanidcmp eq |

Service VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be ‘any (7)', if

neq| lt | leq | gt | geq |

etherhPrioTagCmpType is not equal to ‘any (7)'In native mode configuring

any| inrange | exrange

this parameter will result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any

servicepriotagcmp eq |

Service Priority tag comparison type.This field must be ‘any (7)', if

neq| lt | leq | gt | geq |

vlanidcmp is not equal to ‘any (7)'.In native mode configuring this

any| inrange | exrange

parameter will result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any

Example:
$ create filter subrule ether ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcmacaddrfrom 00:01:02:03:04:05
srcmacaddrto 00:01:02:03:04:10 dstmacaddrfrom 00:02:03:04:05:11
dstmacaddrto 00:02:03:04:05:15 ethertypefrom 0x0800 ethertypeto 0x0810
vlanidfrom 2 vlanidto 5 priotagfrom 2 priotagto 5 dsapfrom 0xf0 dsapto 0xff
ssapfrom 0xf0 ssapto 0xff srcmacaddrcmp inrange dstmacaddrcmp exrange

IP DSLAM

413

ethertypecmp inrange vlanidcmp exrange priotagcmp inrange dsapcmp inrange
ssapcmp inrange subruleprio high servicevlanidfrom 2 servicevlanidto 5
servicepriotagfrom 2 servicepriotagto 5 servicevlanidcmp exrange
servicepriotagcmp inrange
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Subrule Id
:2
Start source mac address
: 00:01:02:03:04:05
End source mac address
: 00:01:02:03:04:10
Start destination MAC address
: 00:02:03:04:05:11
End destination MAC address
: 00:02:03:04:05:15
Start ethernet type
: 0x0800
End ethernet type : 0x0810
Start VLAN Id
:2
End VLAN Id
:5
Start priority tag
:2
End priority tag : 5
Start DSAP
: 0xf0
End DSAP
: 0xff
Start SSAP
: 0xf0
End SSAP
: 0xff
Source MAC addrees comparison
: inrange
Desination MAC addr comparison : exrange
Ether type comparison
: inrange
Vlan Id comparison
: exrange
Priority tag comparison
: inrange
DSAP comparison
: inrange
SSAP comparison
: inrange
Subrule Priority
: high
Start service VLAN Id
:2
End service VLAN Id
:5
Start service priority tag
:2
End service priority tag
:5
service Vlan Id comparison
: exrange
Service Priority tag comparison : inrange
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

414

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule

Start source mac

Start source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses.

address

This field is invalid if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'srcmacaddrto' specify a range of source MAC addresses if
'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End source mac

End source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses.

address

This field and 'srcmacaddrfrom' specify a range of source MAC
addresses, if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid

Start destination MAC

Start destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC

address

addresses. This field is invalid if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This
field and the next field specify a range of destination MAC
addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End destination MAC

End destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC

address

addresses. This field and the previous field specify a range of
destination MAC addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange'
or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid

Start ethernet type

Start ether type of the range of ether types. This field is invalid if
'ethertypecmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range
of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End ethernet type

End ether type of the range of ether types. This field and the
previous field specify a range of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid

Start VLAN Id

Start VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the direction of
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is
invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the vlanidto field
specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8)
or'exrange'(9).In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to
customer VLAN ID.

End VLAN Id

End VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the direction of
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
and the vlanidfrom field specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp'
is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise, this field is invalid.
In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to customer VLAN
ID.

Start priority tag

IP DSLAM

Start priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction

415

of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
is invalid if 'priotagcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the priotagto field
specify a range of priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8)
or 'exrange'(9).In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to
priority in the customer VLAN tag.
End priority tag

End priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
and the priotagfrom field specify a range of priority tags, if
'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this
field is invalid. In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to
priority in the customer VLAN tag.

Start DSAP

Start DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if
'dsapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the next object specify a range
of DSAPs, if 'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End DSAP

End DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if
'dsapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the previous object specify a
range of DSAPs, if 'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid.

Start SSAP

Start SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if
'ssapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the next object specify a range
of SSAPs, if 'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End SSAP

End SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if
'ssapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the previous object specify a
range of SSAPs, if 'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid

Source MAC addrees

Source mac address comparison type

comparison
Desination MAC addr

Destination mac address comparison type

comparison
Ether type comparison

Ether type comparison type

Vlan Id comparison

VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'priotagcmp'
is not equal to 'any'

Priority tag comparison

Priority tag comparison type. This field must be 'any', if
'vlanidcmp' is not equal to 'any'"

DSAP comparison

DSAP comparison type.

SSAP comparison

SSAP comparison type.

Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.

416

IDL series User Guide

Start service VLAN Id

Start service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs. Invalid, if
the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is
'out'. This field is invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the
servicevlanidto field specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if
'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native
mode configuring this parameter will result in error.

End service VLAN Id

End service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs.Invalid, if
the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is
'out'. This field and the servicevlanidfrom field specify a range of
service VLAN Ids, if 'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or
'exrange'(9).Otherwise, this field is invalid In native mode
configuring this parameter will result in error.

Start service priority

Start service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the

tag

direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
This field is invalid if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is 'any'(7). This field
and the etherPriorityTagTo field specify a range of priority tags, if
'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In
native mode configuring this parameter will result in error.

End service priority tag

End service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
This field and the etherhPriorityTagFrom field specify a range of
service priority tags, if 'etherhServicePrioTagCmpType' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this field is invalid. In native
mode configuring this parameter will result in error.

service Vlan Id

Service VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any(7)', if

comparison

etherhPrioTagCmpType is not equal to 'any(7)'In native mode
configuring this parameter will result in error.

Service Priority tag

Service Priority tag comparison type.This field must be 'any(7)', if

comparison

vlanidcmp is not equal to 'any(7)'.In native mode configuring this
parameter will result in error.

References:
z
Generic filter commands

IP DSLAM

417

5.13.29 Filter subrule generic Commands
5.13.29.1 Get Filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule generic [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.29.2 Create filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule generic ruleid  subruleid 
[ offsethdr  | ip | tcp | udp | icmp | igmp | l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe ]
[ offset  ] [ mask  ] [ valuefrom  ] [ valueto
 ] [ gencmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist | innamedlist | notinnamedlist ] [ subruleprio low | high |
asinrule ] [ namedlistid  ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
5.13.29.3 Delete filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule generic ruleid subruleid 
5.13.29.4 Modify filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule generic ruleid  subruleid 
[ offsethdr  | ip | tcp | udp | icmp | igmp | l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe ]
[ offset  ] [ mask  ] [ valuefrom  ] [ valueto
 ] [ gencmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist | innamedlist | notinnamedlist ] [ subruleprio low | high |
asinrule ] [ namedlistid  ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]

418

IDL series User Guide

Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

subruleid


Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
offsethdr ethernet | ip |

Type of offset header from where 'offset' to be measured. The value

tcp | udp | icmp | igmp |

'ethernet' is invalid if the rule for which this subrule is being created is of

l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe

direction 'out'.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: ethernet
offset 

Offset value to be added to 'offsethdr' to get the field value
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 64
Default value: 0
mask 

Mask to be applied to the contents of a packet at 'offset'
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
valuefrom

Start generic value of the range of generic values. This field is invalid if



'gencmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist','innamedlist',or'notinnamedlist'.This field and next field
specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0

IP DSLAM

419

valueto 

End generic value of the range of generic values. This field and the
previous field specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0xffffffff
gencmp eq | neq | lt |

Generic value comparision type.

leq | gt | geq | any |

Type:

inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist |

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any

innamedlist |
notinnamedlist
subruleprio low | high |

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the

asinrule

subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: asinrule
namedlistid

This specifies the list identifier value of the named list which will be used



to do the lookup .In case 'gencmp' is 'innamedlist' or 'notinnamedlist', this
field is manadatory else it is extra.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
Default value: 1
transporthdr ethernet |

This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which

pppoe

corresponding IP is being transported. If value of this field is 'ethernet',
then IP is being carried in ethernet header and if it is 'pppoe' then
corresponding IP is being carried in PPP header.This field is valid only
when value of 'offsethdr' is any one of ip, tcp, udp, icmp or
igmp.Otherwise this field is extra
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: ethernet

Example:
$ create filter subrule generic ruleid 1 subruleid 2 offsethdr tcp offset 20 mask 0xFF
valuefrom 0x20 valueto 0x40 gencmp inrange subruleprio high namedlistid transporthdr Ethernet

420

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Offset header
: tcp
Generic header comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority
: high
End value
: 0x40
Transport Header
: ethernet
NamedList Id
:Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Subrule Id : 2
Offset
: 20
Mask
: 0xFF
Start value : 0x20

Output field:
Field
Rule Id

Description
Unique identifier of a filter rule for which this sub rule is being
created.

Subrule Id
Offset header

Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type of offset header from where 'offset' to be measured. The
value 'ethernet' is invalid if the rule for which this subrule is
being created is of direction 'out'.

Offset

Offset value to be added to 'offsethdr' to get the field value

Generic header

Generic value comparision type.

comparison
Mask

Mask to be applied to the contents of a packet at 'offset'

Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same
as specified in the rule.

Start value

Start generic value of the range of generic values. This field is
invalid if 'gencmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist','innamedlist',or'notinnamedlist'.This field and next
field specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'

End value

End generic value of the range of generic values. This field
and the previous field specifiy a range of generic values,if
'gencmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is
invalid

Transport Header

IP DSLAM

This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in

421

which corresponding IP is being transported. If value of this
field is 'ethernet', then IP is being carried in ethernet header
and if it is 'pppoe' then corresponding IP is being carried in
PPP header.This field is valid only when value of 'offsethdr' is
any one of ip, tcp, udp, icmp or igmp.Otherwise this field is
extra
NamedList Id

This specifies the list identifier value of the named list which
will be used to do the lookup .In case 'gencmp' is 'innamedlist'
or 'notinnamedlist', this field is manadatory else it is extra.

References:
z
Generic filter commands

5.13.30 Filter subrule ICMP Commands
5.13.30.1 Get Filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule icmp [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.30.2 Create filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule icmp ruleid subruleid 
[ icmptype ] [ icmpcode  ] [ icmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ icmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
5.13.30.3 Delete filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule icmp ruleid  subruleid 

422

IDL series User Guide

5.13.30.4 Modify filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule icmp ruleid subruleid 
[ icmptype ] [ icmpcode  ] [ icmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ icmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Modify -Get

--

Mandatory
Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid

Unique identifier of a filter subrule



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
icmptype

ICMP type



Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
icmpcode

ICMP code



Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Default value: 0
icmptypecmp eq | neq |

ICMP type comparison type

any

Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any

IP DSLAM

423

icmpcodecmp eq | neq

ICMP code comparison type

| any

Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Default value: any
subruleprio low | high |

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on

asinrule

this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule
priority will be same as specified in the
rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule

transporthdr ethernet |

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in

pppoe

which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the ethernet
header. If it is ‘pppoe’, then the corresponding IP is being carried
in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ethernet

Example:
$ create filter subrule icmp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 icmptype 0 icmpcode 0
icmptypecmp neq icmpcodecmp neq subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Icmp type
:0
ICMP type comparison : neq
Subrule Priority
: high
Transport Header
: Ethernet

Subrule Id
:2
Icmp code
:0
ICMP code comparison : neq

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

424

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule

Icmp type

ICMP type

Icmp code

ICMP code

ICMP type comparison

ICMP type comparison type

ICMP code comparison

ICMP code comparison type

Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule
priority will be same as specified in the
rule.

Transport Header

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the ethernet
header. If it is ‘pppoe’, then the corresponding IP is being carried
in the PPP header.

References:
z
Generic Filter commands

5.13.31 Filter subrule IGMP Commands
5.13.31.1 Get Filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule igmp [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.31.2 Create filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to create.

IP DSLAM

425

Command Syntax:
create filter subrule igmp ruleid subruleid 
[ igmptype  ] [ igmpcode  ] [ groupaddrfrom
 ] [ groupaddrto  ] [ igmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ igmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ igmpgroupaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq
| gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
5.13.31.3 Delete filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule igmp ruleid subruleid 
5.13.31.4 Modify filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule igmp ruleid subruleid 
[ igmptype  ] [ igmpcode  ] [ groupaddrfrom
 ] [ groupaddrto  ] [ igmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ igmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ igmpgroupaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq
| gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535

426

IDL series User Guide

subruleid

Unique identifier of a filter subrule



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

Mandatory
--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
igmptype

IGMP type



Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
igmpcode

This fields specifies the Max Response Code (time) fields of



IGMP packet. This field is invalid if igmphCodeCmpType is any.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
groupaddrfrom

Start group address of the range of igmp group addresses.This



field is invalid if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'groupaddrto' specify a range of IGMP group addresses, if
'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
groupaddrto

End group address of the range of igmp group addresses. This



field and 'groupaddrfrom' specify a range of IGMP group
addresses, if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 4294967295
igmptypecmp eq | neq

IGMP type comparison type

| any

Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any
igmpcodecmp eq | neq

IGMP code comparison type

| any

Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
igmpgroupaddrcmp

IGMP group address comparison type

eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |

Type:

geq | any | inrange |
exrange

IP DSLAM

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: any

427

subruleprio low | high |

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on

asinrule

this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule
priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule

transporthdr ethernet |

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in

pppoe

which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is Ethernet(0x1), then the IP is being carried in the
ethernet header. If it is pppoe(0x2), then the corresponding IP is
being carried in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ethernet

Example:
$ create filter subrule igmp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 igmptype 0 igmpcode 0 groupaddr
from 224.0.2.3 groupaddrto 224.10.20.30 igmptypecmp eq igmpcodecmp eq
igmpgroupaddrcmp inrange subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Subrule Id
:2
Igmp type
:0
IGMP type comparison : neq
Igmp code
:0
IGMP code comparison : neq
Start group address
: 224.0.2.3
End group address
:
224.10.20.30
IGMP group address comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority
: high
Transport Header
: Ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created

428

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule

Igmp type

IGMP type

IDL series User Guide

IGMP type comparison

IGMP type comparison type

Igmp code

This field specifies the Max Response Code (time) fields of
IGMP packet. This field is invalid if igmphCodeCmpType is
any.

IGMP code comparison

IGMP code comparison type

Start group address

Start group address of the range of igmp group addresses.This
field is invalid if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'groupaddrto' specify a range of IGMP group addresses, if
'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End group address

End group address of the range of igmp group addresses. This
field and 'groupaddrfrom' specifiy a range of IGMP group
addresses, if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

IGMP group address

IGMP group address comparison type

comparison
Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.

Transport Header

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is Ethernet(0x1), then the IP is being carried in the
ethernet header. If it is pppoe(0x2), then the corresponding IP is
being carried in the PPP header.

References:
z
Generic Filter commands

5.13.32 Filter subrule IP Commands
5.13.32.1 Get Filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule ip [ruleid ] [subruleid ]

IP DSLAM

429

5.13.32.2 Create filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule ip ruleid  subruleid 
[ srcipaddrfrom  ] [ srcipaddrto  ]
[ dstipaddrfrom  ] [ dstipaddrto  ]
[ prototypefrom  ] [ prototypeto  ]
[ srcaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange | ingenlist |
notingenlist ] [ dstaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange
| ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange ] [ ipsrcaddrmask  ] [ ipdstaddrmask
 ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ] [ transporthdr
ethernet | pppoe ] [ tosfrom  ] [ tosto  ] [ tosmask
 ] [ toscmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
5.13.32.3 Delete filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule ip ruleid  subruleid 
5.13.32.4 Modify filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule ip ruleid  subruleid 
[ srcipaddrfrom  ] [ srcipaddrto  ]
[ dstipaddrfrom  ] [ dstipaddrto  ]
[ prototypefrom  ] [ prototypeto  ]
[ srcaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange | ingenlist |
notingenlist ] [ dstaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange
| ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange ] [ ipsrcaddrmask  ] [ ipdstaddrmask
 ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ] [ transporthdr

430

IDL series User Guide

ethernet | pppoe ] [ tosfrom  ] [ tosto  ] [ tosmask
 ] [ toscmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

subruleid


Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295

srcipaddrfrom


Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.
This field is invalid if 'srcaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'. This field and 'srcipaddrto' specify a range of source
IP addresses if 'srcaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0

srcipaddrto


End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.
This field and 'srcipaddrfrom' specify a range of source IP
addresses, if 'srcaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 255.255.255.255

dstipaddrfrom


Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if 'dstaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'. This field and 'dstipaddrto' specify a range of
destination IP addresses, if 'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0

IP DSLAM

431

dstipaddrto

End destination IP address of the range of destination IP



addresses. This field and 'dstipaddrfrom' specifiy a range of
destination IP addresses, if 'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 255.255.255.255

prototypefrom


Start IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types. This field
is invalid if 'prototypecmp' is 'any'.This field and 'prototypeto'
specify a range of IP protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0

prototypeto

End IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types.This field



and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of IP protocol types, if
'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field
is invalid.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 27

srcaddrcmp eq | neq |

Source IP addresss comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if

lt |leq | gt | geq | any

source ip address present in interface classifier generic list.

|inrange | exrange

'notingenlist' means check if source ip address not present in

|ingenlist |

interface classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are

notingenlist

invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being
created is 'out'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any

dstaddrcmp eq | neq |

Destination IP address comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check

lt |leq | gt | geq | any

if destination ip address present in interface classifier generic list.

|inrange | exrange

'notingenlist' means check if destination ip address not present in

|ingenlist |

interface classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are

notingenlist

invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being
created is 'out'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any

prototypecmp eq | neq
| lt| leq | gt | geq | any

432

IP Protocol type comparison type.
Type: Create － Optional

IDL series User Guide

|inrange | exrange

Modify － Optional
Default value: any

ipsrcaddrmask

The mask value for source ip address. The mask is applied over



the source ip address before checking against a value.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff

ipdstaddrmask

The mask value for destination ip address. The mask is applied



over the destination ip address before checking against a value.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff

subruleprio low | high

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority

|asinrule

value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as asinrule, subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: asinrule

transporthdr ethernet |

This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which

pppoe

IP is being transported. If value of this field is ethernet (1), then IP
is being carried in ethernet header and if it is pppoe (2) then then
IP is being carried in PPP header.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: ethernet

tosfrom 

Start TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if
'TosCmpType' is 'any'(7).This field and TosTo field specify a
range of TOS values, if 'TosCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or
'exrange'(9). Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xff
Default value: 0

tosto 

End TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if
'toscmp' is 'any'.This field and 'tosfrom' field specify a range of
TOS values, if 'toscmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional

IP DSLAM

433

Valid values: 0 - 0xff
Default value: 0xff
tosmask

The mask value for TOS field. The mask is applied over the TOS



field value before checking against configured values in 'tosfrom'
and 'tosto'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0x01 - 0xff
Default value: 0xff

toscmp eq | neq | lt |

TOS comparision type.

leq| gt | geq | any |

Type: Create － Optional

inrange| exrange

Modify － Optional
Default value: any

Example:
$ create filter subrule ip ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcipaddrfrom 172.25.1.125
srcipaddrto 172.25.5.125 dstipaddrfrom 172.25.6.125 dstipaddrto 172.25.10.125
prototypefrom 1 prototypeto 6 srcaddrcmp inrange dstaddrcmp inrange
prototypecmp inrange ipsrcaddrmask 0xffffffff ipdstaddrmask 0xffffffff subruleprio
high transportHdr ethernet tosfrom 0x01 tosto 0x06 tosmask 0xff toscmp inrange
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Start src ip addr : 172.25.1.125
Start dest ip addr : 172.25.6.125
Start IP prot type : 1
Start TOS value
: 0x01
Src ip addr comp
: inrange
IP prot type comp : inrange
IP Src Addr Mask : 0xffffffff
Subrule Priority
: high
Transport Header : ethernet
TOS Mask
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

434

Subrule Id
:2
End src ip addr
: 172.25.5.125
End dest ip addr : 172.25.10.125
End IP prot type : 6
End TOS value
: 0x06
Dest ip addr comp : inrange
TOS comp type
: inrange
IP Dest Addr Mask : 0xffffffff

: 0xff

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field
Rule Id
Subrule Id
End src ip addr

Description
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This field and
'srcipaddrfrom' specify a range of source IP addresses, if 'srcaddrcmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.

Start dest ip addr

Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP addresses. This
field is invalid if 'dstaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist'. This field
and 'dstipaddrto' specify a range of destination IP addresses, if
'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.

End dest ip addr

End destination IP address of the range of destination IP addresses. This
field and 'dstipaddrfrom' specifiy a range of destination IP addresses, if
'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid

Start IP prot type

Start IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types. This field is invalid
if 'prototypecmp' is 'any'.This field and 'prototypeto' specify a range of IP
protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.

End IP prot type

End IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types.This field and
'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of IP protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.

Start TOS value

Start TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if
'TosCmpType' is 'any'(7).This field and TosTo field specify a range of TOS
values, if 'TosCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).

End TOS value

End TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if 'toscmp' is
'any'.This field and 'tosfrom' field specify a range of TOS values, if 'toscmp'
is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.

Src ip addr comp

Source IP addresss comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if source ip
address present in interface classifier generic list. 'notingenlist' means
check if source ip address not present in interface classifier generic list.
'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which
this subrule is being created is 'out'

Dest ip addr comp

Destination IP address comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if
destination ip address present in interface classifier generic list.
'notingenlist' means check if destination ip address not present in interface
classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are invalid if the direction
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.

IP prot type comp

IP Protocol type comparison type.

TOS comp type

TOS comparision type.

IP Src Addr Mask

The mask value for source ip address. The mask is applied over the source
ip address before checking against a value.

IP DSLAM

435

IP Dest Addr Mask

The mask value for destination ip address. The mask is applied over the
destination ip address before checking against a value.

Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
asinrule, subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.

Transport Header

This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which IP is
being transported. If value of this field is ethernet (1), then IP is being
carried in ethernet header and if it is pppoe (2) then then IP is being carried
in PPP header.

TOS Mask

The mask value for TOS field. The mask is applied over the TOS field value
before checking against configured values in 'tosfrom' and 'tosto'.

References:
z
Generic filter commands

5.13.33 Filter subrule PPP Commands
5.13.33.1 Get Filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule ppp [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.33.2 Create filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule ppp ruleid  subruleid 
[prototypefrom ] [prototypeto ]
[prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange] [subruleprio
low | high | asinrule]
5.13.33.3 Delete filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to delete.

436

IDL series User Guide

Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule ppp ruleid subruleid 
5.13.33.4 Modify filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule ppp ruleid  subruleid 
[prototypefrom ] [prototypeto ]
[prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange] [subruleprio
low | high | asinrule]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid

Unique identifier of a filter subrule



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
prototypefrom

Start of range of PPP protocol types. Invalid if 'prototypecmp'



is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of
protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'. Otherwise only this field is valid
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Default value: 0

IP DSLAM

437

prototypeto

End PPP protocol type of the range of PPP protocol types.



This field and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of ppp
protocol types if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Default value: 65535
prototypecmp eq | neq

Protocol comparison type

| lt | leq | gt | geq | any |

Type:

inrange | exrange

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Default value: any
subruleprio low | high |

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this

asinrule

priority value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory.
In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will
be same as specified in the rule.
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Default value: asinrule

Example:
$ create filter subrule ppp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 prototypefrom 0x1 prototypeto 0x5
prototypecmp inrange subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Start ProtoType
: 0x1
Protocol comparison : inrange

Subrule Id
:2
End ProtoType
: 0x5
Subrule Priority : high

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created

438

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule

Start ProtoType

Start of range of PPP protocol types. Invalid if 'prototypecmp' is

IDL series User Guide

'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of protocol
types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise only this field is valid
End ProtoType

End PPP protocol type of the range of PPP protocol types.
This field and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of ppp protocol
types if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

Protocol comparison

Protocol comparison type

Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.

References:
z
see generic filter related commands

5.13.34 Filter subrule TCP Commands
5.13.34.1 Get Filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule tcp [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.34.2 Create filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule tcp ruleid  subruleid 
[ srcportfrom  ] [ srcportto  ] [ dstportfrom
 ] [ dstportto  ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe ]

IP DSLAM

439

5.13.34.3 Delete filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule tcp ruleid  subruleid 
5.13.34.4 Modify filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule tcp ruleid  subruleid 
[ srcportfrom  ] [ srcportto  ] [ dstportfrom
 ] [ dstportto  ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1-65535

subruleid 

Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295

srcportfrom

Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is invalid



if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'.This field and 'srcportto' specify a range of tcp
source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0

440

IDL series User Guide

srcportto 

'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of TCP source port numbers if 'srcportcmp'
is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535

dstportfrom

Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is



invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of
tcp destination port numbers if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create --Optional
Modify --Optional
Default value: 0

dstportto 

'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp destination port numbers if
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535

srcportcmp eq | neq | lt |

Source port comparison type

leq | gt | geq | any |

Type: Create -- Optional

inrange | exrange

Modify -- Optional
Default value: any

dstportcmp eq | neq | lt |

Destination port comparison type

leq | gt | geq | any |

Type: Create -- Optional

inrange | exrange

Modify -- Optional
Default value: any

subruleprio low | high |

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the

asinrule

subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule

transporthdr ethernet |

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which the

pppoe

corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is 'Ethernet',
then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is 'PPPoE', then
the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Ethernet

IP DSLAM

441

Example:
$create filter subrule tcp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcportfrom 21 srcportto 23
dstportfrom 21 dstportto 23 srcportcmp inrange dstportcmp inrange subruleprio
high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Subrule Id
:2
Start source port
: 21
End source port
: 23
Start destination port : 21
End destination port
: 23
Source port comparison : inrange Destination port comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority
: high
Transport Header
: Ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule

Start source port

Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcportto' specifiy a range of
tcp source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End source port

End port number of the range of source port numbers. This field and
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

Start destination port

Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of
tcp destination port numbers if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End destination port

End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field and
'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp destination port numbers if
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid

Source port
Source port comparison type
comparison
Destination port

Destination port comparison type

comparison
Subrule Priority

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as

442

IDL series User Guide

'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Transport Header

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which the
corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is
'Ethernet', then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is
'PPPoE', then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.

References:
z
Generic Filter Commands

5.13.35 Filter subrule UDP Commands
5.13.35.1 Get Filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule udp [ruleid ] [subruleid ]
5.13.35.2 Create filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule udp ruleid  subruleid 
[srcportfrom ] [srcportto ] [ dstportfrom
 ] [ dstportto  ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe ]
5.13.35.3 Delete filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule udp ruleid  subruleid 

IP DSLAM

443

5.13.35.4 Modify filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule udp ruleid  subruleid 
[ srcportfrom  ] [ srcportto  ] [ dstportfrom
 ] [ dstportto  ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt
| geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ruleid 

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete --Mandatory Modify
Mandatory Get --Optional
Valid values: 1-65535

subruleid

Unique identifier of a filter subrule



Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Modify-- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295

srcportfrom

Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is



invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcportto' specifiy a range
of udp source port numbers, if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0

srcportto

End port number of the range of source port numbers.This field and



'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of udp source port numbers, if
'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535

444

dstportfrom

Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is



invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'.This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of

IDL series User Guide

udp destination port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
dstportto

End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field



and 'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of udp destination port numbers, if
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535

srcportcmp eq | neq |

Source port comparison type

lt | leq | gt | geq | any |

Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional

inrange | exrange

Default value: any
dstportcmp eq | neq |

Destination port comparison type

lt | leq | gt | geq | any |

Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional

inrange | exrange

Default value: any
subruleprio low | high

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value,

|asinrule

the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is
specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the
rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule

transporthdr ethernet

This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which

| pppoe

the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is
Ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is
PPPoE, then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Ethernet

Example:
$ create filter subrule udp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcportfrom 21 srcportto 23
dstportfrom 21 dstportto 23 srcportcmp inrange dstportcmp inrange subruleprio
high

IP DSLAM

445

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id
:1
Subrule Id
:2
Start source port
: 21
End source port
: 23
Start destination port : 21
End destination port
: 23
Source port comparison : inrange
Destination port comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority
: high
Transport Header
: ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Rule Id

Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is
being created

Subrule Id

Unique identifier of a filter subrule

Start source port

Start port number of the range of source port numbers.
This field is invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'srcportto' specifiy a range of udp source port numbers,
if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'

End source port

End port number of the range of source port numbers.
This field and 'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of udp
source port numbers, if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'

Start destination port

Start port number of the range of destination port
numbers. This field is invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'.This
field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of udp destination
port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'

End destination port

End port number of the range of destination port
numbers. This field and 'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of
udp destination port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid

Source port
Source port comparison type
comparison
Destination port

Destination port comparison type

comparison
Subrule Priority

446

This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this

IDL series User Guide

priority value, the subrule is created in fast or slow
memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule',
subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Transport Header

This specifies the type of the transport header in the
packet in which the corresponding IP is being
transported. If the value of this field is Ethernet, then the
IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is PPPoE,
then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP
header.

References:
z
Generic Filter Commands

5.14 IGMP Commands
5.14.1 Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands
5.14.1.1 Get igmpsnoop cfg info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop cfg info
5.14.1.2 Modify igmpsnoop cfg info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify igmpsnoop cfg info [ queryinterval  ] [ anxioustimer
 ] [ v1hosttimer  ] [ lastmembqryinterval
 ] [ robustness  ] [ status Enable |
Disable ] [ reportsup Enable | Disable ] [ qryrespinterval  ]
[ proxyreportstatus Enable | Disable ] [ versionmask v1 | v2 | v3 ]
[ startupqryinterval  ] [ startupqrycount
 ] [ lastmemberqrycount  ]
[ unsolicrprtinterval  ]

IP DSLAM

447

Parameters:
Name

Description

queryinterval

This parameter is used to calculate the entry age out timer, when



no reports or queries are received on the entry. When the value of
this parameter multiplied by 10, it should be greater than the
Query Interval configured at the router. The time for which an
entry created at Igmpsnoop module exists, if no messages are
received for it is approximately (((QueryInterval*10)*Robustness)
+ Query Response Time received in Last Query)
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xff
anxioustimer

This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds) before



which the IgmpSnoop module will forward all IGMP membership
reports received. It is started once, whenever the first
membership report is received for a group, to ensure that reports
are forwarded for a sufficiently long time, to take care of any lost
reports. The unit is seconds.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 65535
v1hosttimer

This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds), for



which the IgmpSnooping module can assume that there are
Version 1 group members present, for the group for which this
timer is running. The unit of this parameter is seconds.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 260
lastmembqryinterval

This parameter specifies the Last Member Query Interval that is



sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages.

The

value of this parameter may be tuned to modify the leave latency
of the network.

A reduced value results in reduced time to detect

the loss of the last member of a group. The unit of this parameter
is one-tenth of second.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 – 255
robustness

This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a



subnet. The IgmpSnooping module is robust to [RobustnessVar]
packet losses.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 2 - 255

448

IDL series User Guide

status Enable | Disable

This parameter specifies whether Igmp Snooping needs to be
enabled in the system.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

reportsup Enable |

Report Suppression is enabled or not.

Disable

Type:

qryrespinterval

This parameter is used to derive Max Response Code to be filled



in General query that will be initiated from Columbia
Type:

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xff
proxyreportstatus

This parameter controls whether proxy reporting will be supported

Enable | Disable

at the global level.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

versionmask v1 | v2 |

This parameter controls which versions of IGMP are currently

v3

supported at Columbia. Depending on the version mask, IGMP
messages of unsupported version, will be dropped
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

startupqryinterval

This parameter specifies the interval between General Queries



Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xff
startupqrycount

This parameter specifies the number of General Queries sent on



receiving Port Up topology change trigger, separated by the
StartupQryInterval
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xff
lastmemberqrycount

This parameter specifies the number of Group-specific or



are no listener for this Group or Group-Source pair.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xff
unsolicrprtinterval

This parameter specifies the interval between unsolicited



times.This field is applicable only when proxy reporting is
enabled.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0xff

Example:
$ get igmpsnoop cfg info

IP DSLAM

449

Output:
Query Interval
: 12
StartUp Query Interval
: 10
Anxious Timer
: 125
Last Member Query Interval : 125
Igmp Snoop Status
: Enable
Version Mask
: v3
Report Suppression Status : Enable
StartUp QryCount
:2

Query Response Interval : 10
UnSolicRprtInterval
: 10
V1 Host Timer
: 130
Robustness Variable
:2

Proxy Report Status
: Enable
Last Member QryCount
: 100

Output field:
Field

Description

Query Interval

This parameter is used to calculate the entry age out timer, when
no reports or queries are received on the entry. When the value
of this parameter multiplied by 10, it should be greater than the
Query Interval configured at the router. The time for which an
entry created at Igmpsnoop module exists, if no messages are
received for it is approximately
(((QueryInterval*10)*Robustness) + Query Response Time
received in Last Query)

Query Response

This parameter is used to derive Max Response Code to be filled

Interval

in General query that will be initiated from Columbia

StartUp Query Interval

This parameter specifies the interval between General Queries
sent on receiving Port Up topology change trigger.

UnSolicRprtInterval

This parameter specifies the interval between unsolicited
membership reports of a group sent for robustness no of
times.This field is applicable only when proxy reporting is
enabled.

Anxious Timer

This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds) before
which the IgmpSnoop module will forward all IGMP membership
reports received. It is started once, whenever the first
membership report is received for a group, to ensure that reports
are forwarded for a sufficiently long time, to take care of any lost
reports. The unit is seconds.

V1 Host Timer

This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds), for
which the IgmpSnooping module can assume that there are
Version 1 group members present, for the group for which this
timer is running. The unit of this parameter is seconds.

450

Last Member Query

This parameter specifies the Last Member Query Interval that is

Interval

the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries

IDL series User Guide

sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages.

The

value of this parameter may be tuned to modify the leave latency
of the network.

A reduced value results in reduced time to

detect the loss of the last member of a group. The unit of this
parameter is one-tenth of second.
Robustness Variable

This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a
subnet. The IgmpSnooping module is robust to [RobustnessVar]
packet losses.

Igmp Snoop Status

This parameter specifies whether Igmp Snooping needs to be
enabled in the system.

Version Mask

This parameter controls which versions of IGMP are currently
supported at Columbia. Depending on the version mask, IGMP
messages of unsupported version, will be dropped

Report Suppression

Report Suppression is enabled or not.

Status
Proxy Report Status

This parameter controls whether proxy reporting will be
supported at the global level.

StartUp QryCount

This parameter specifies the number of General Queries sent on
receiving Port Up topology change trigger, separated by the
StartupQryInterval

Last Member QryCount

This parameter specifies the number of Group-specific or
Group-and-Source-specific Queries sent before assuming there
are no listener for this Group or Group-Source pair.

5.14.2 Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands
5.14.2.1 Get igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop mvlan config [grpipaddr ] [srcipaddr
] [vlanid  | none]

IP DSLAM

451

5.14.2.2 Create igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr  srcipaddr srcipaddr
vlanid  | none [mcastvlanstag  | none]
[mcastvlanctag  | invlan | none] [portlist  |
none]
5.14.2.3 Delete igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete igmpsnoop mvlan config [grpipaddr ] [srcipaddr
] [vlanid  | none]
5.14.2.4 Modify igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr  srcipaddr
 vlanid  | none [mcastvlanstag  |
none] [mcastvlanctag  | invlan | none] [portlist 
| none]
Parameters:
Name

Description

grpipaddr

This parameter specifies the Destination Group IP address



for a multicast stream. The source address and destination
group address together define a multicast stream. In case of
value 0, this parameter is ignored while determining
Multicast Vlan
Type:

Create

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

452

-- Mandatory

--

Optional

IDL series User Guide

srcipaddr

This parameter specifies the source IP address of the



Multicast Server. The source address and destination group
address together define a multicast stream. In case of value
0, this parameter is ignored while determining Multicast
Vlan.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

vlanid  |

This parameter specifies the Dot1q tag of an IGMP packet

none

received. This will be PVID in case an untagged IGMP
packet was received. In case of value 0, this parameter is
ignored while determining Multicast Vlan.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095
Additional Values: 0
mcastvlanstag

This parameter specifies the Multicast SVlanId to be used

 |

in case of stacked mode. In the native mode, this parameter

none

is not applicable.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095
Additional Values: 0
mcastvlanctag

This parameter specifies the Multicast CVlanId to be used.

 |

Two special values of this parameter are supported in

invlan | none

stacked mode: One value (4097) to signify that repot/leave
shall be forwarded to querier with the C tag with which it was
received from the subscriber port and the S tag specified in
multicast Vlan's definition One value (0) to signify that
report/leave shall be forwarded to querier with S tag
specified in multicast Vlan's definition and no C tag. Other
Value shall signify that, report/leave shall be forwarded to
querier with S and C tag specified in multicast Vlan's
definition.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 -4095
Additional Values: 0, 4097

IP DSLAM

453

portlist  |

This parameter specifies the list of ports on which a given

none

combination of (Group Address, Source Address, VlanId)
maps to a specified multicast vlan (STag, CTag)
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0

Example:
$ create igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr 224.0.0.7 srcipaddr 12.23.34.45 vlanid
6 mcastvlanstag 5 mcastvlanctag 5 portlist 5 6 10
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Grp IPAddress : 224.0.0.7
Src IPAddres
: 12.23.34.45
VLAN Index
:6
McastVlan STag : 5
McastVlan CTag : 5
PortList
: 5 6 10
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Grp IPAddress

This parameter specifies the Destination Group IP address for a
multicast stream. The source address and destination group
address together define a multicast stream. In case of value 0,
this parameter is ignored while determining Multicast Vlan

Src IPAddres

This parameter specifies the source IP address of the Multicast
Server. The source address and destination group address
together define a multicast stream. In case of value 0, this
parameter is ignored while determining Multicast Vlan.

VLAN Index

This parameter specifies the Dot1q tag of an IGMP packet
received. This will be PVID in case an untagged IGMP packet
was received. In case of value 0, this parameter is ignored while
determining Multicast Vlan.

McastVlan STag

This parameter specifies the Multicast SVlanId to be used in
case of stacked mode. In the native mode, this parameter is not

454

IDL series User Guide

applicable.
McastVlan CTag

This parameter specifies the Multicast CVlanId to be used. Two
special values of this parameter are supported in stacked mode:
One value (4097) to signify that repot/leave shall be forwarded to
querier with the C tag with which it was received from the
subscriber port and the S tag specified in multicast Vlan's
definition One value (0) to signify that report/leave shall be
forwarded to querier with S tag specified in multicast Vlan's
definition and no C tag. Other Value shall signify that,
report/leave shall be forwarded to querier with S and C tag
specified in multicast Vlan's definition.

PortList

This parameter specifies the list of ports on which a given
combination of (Group Address, Source Address, VlanId) maps
to a specified multicast vlan (STag, CTag)

5.14.3 Igmpsnoop port info Commands
5.14.3.1 Get igmpsnoop port info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop port info [portid ]
5.14.3.2 Modify igmpsnoop port info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify igmpsnoop port info portid portid [ status Enable | Disable ]
[ leavemode Normal | Fast | FastNormal ] [ pktpriority  | none ]
[ maxgrpallowed  ] [ querierstatus Enable | Disable ]
[ mcastvlanstatus Enable | Disable ] [ nomatchaction Drop |
Transparentlyforward | Learn ]

IP DSLAM

455

Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

This parameter specifies a bridge port for which IGMP Snooping
needs to be enabled or disabled.
Type:

Modify

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 194
status Enable | Disable

This parameter specifies whether IGMP Snooping is to be
enabled on the port.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

leavemode Normal | Fast

This parameter specifies the Igmp Snooping Leave message

| FastNormal

processing mode for the port. If the mode is set to 'Normal', the
Leave message is forwarded to the Querier. Then, based on the
Query received from Querier, the Leave processing is triggered.
If the mode is set to 'Fast', the port is immediately deleted from
that multicast group on Leave message reception and then the
Leave message is forwarded. The mode should be set to 'Fast'
for a port only if there is one host behind the port. This is
because if there are multiple hosts behind the port then it will
lead to traffic disruption for other hosts who might still be
listening to that multicast group. If the mode is set to
'FastNormal', the Leave message is forwarded and the Leave
processing is triggered immediately without waiting for any
trigger from the Querier. The 'FastNormal' mode, thus, saves the
delay (equal to the time taken for Leave message to reach router
and Querier processing time for it and the time taken for Query
to reach IGMP Snoop module) in Leave processing.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: op module) in Leave processing.
pktpriority

This parameter specifies the Egress Priority to be set in case the

 | none

Ethernet frames carrying IGMP packets sent over this port need
to be tagged by the control plane. In case the frame came
tagged, priority that came in the tagged frame will not be
changed. The configured priority will also be used for choice of
traffic class/Queue on outgoing interface whether the frame is
tagged . In case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC,
this will also be used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to
be sent. There is an additional support of invalid value for egress
priority in IGMP port info to indicate that the priority is not to be
forced on egress frame for this port.

456

IDL series User Guide

Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 7
maxgrpallowed

This parameter controls the no. of simultaneous channels that



can be received by this port
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 256
querierstatus Enable |

This parameter controls whether a port can become querier

Disable

Type:

mcastvlanstatus Enable |

This parameter controls the status of Multicast Vlan option on a

Disable

port
Type:

Modify

Modify

--

--

Optional

Optional

nomatchaction Drop |

This parameter specifies the action to be taken when multicast

Transparentlyforward |

vlan can not be determined for a port where multicast vlan option

Learn

is enabled Possible action values will be :Drop, Transparently
forward, and Learn based on ingress vlan
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Example:
$ get igmpsnoop port info portid 6
Output:
Port Index
:6
Port Igmp Snoop Status
: Enable
Leave Mode
: Normal
IGMP PacketsPrio:2MaxGroupAllowed:2'
Querier Status
: Enable
McastVlan Status : Enable
No McastVlan Match Action : Learn
Output field:
Field

Description

Port Index

This parameter specifies a bridge port for which IGMP Snooping
needs to be enabled or disabled.

Port Igmp Snoop

This parameter specifies whether IGMP Snooping is to be enabled

Status

on the port.

Leave Mode

This parameter specifies the Igmp Snooping Leave message
processing mode for the port. If the mode is set to 'Normal', the
Leave message is forwarded to the Querier. Then, based on the
Query received from Querier, the Leave processing is triggered. If
the mode is set to 'Fast', the port is immediately deleted from that
multicast group on Leave message reception and then the Leave
message is forwarded. The mode should be set to 'Fast' for a port

IP DSLAM

457

only if there is one host behind the port. This is because if there
are multiple hosts behind the port then it will lead to traffic
disruption for other hosts who might still be listening to that
multicast group. If the mode is set to 'FastNormal', the Leave
message is forwarded and the Leave processing is triggered
immediately without waiting for any trigger from the Querier. The
'FastNormal' mode, thus, saves the delay (equal to the time taken
for Leave message to reach router and Querier processing time
for it and the time taken for Query to reach IGMP Snoop module)
in Leave processing.
IGMP PacketsPrio'

This parameter specifies the Egress Priority to be set in case the
Ethernet frames carrying IGMP packets sent over this port need to
be tagged by the control plane. In case the frame came tagged,
priority that came in the tagged frame will not be changed. The
configured priority will also be used for choice of traffic
class/Queue on outgoing interface whether the frame is tagged . In
case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also
be used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to be sent.
There is an additional support of invalid value for egress priority in
IGMP port info to indicate that the priority is not to be forced on
egress frame for this port.

MaxGroupAllowed

This parameter controls the no. of simultaneous channels that can
be received by this port

Querier Status

This parameter controls whether a port can become querier

McastVlan Status

This parameter controls the status of Multicast Vlan option on a
port

No McastVlan Match

This parameter specifies the action to be taken when multicast

Action

vlan can not be determined for a port where multicast vlan option
is enabled Possible action values will be :Drop, Transparently
forward, and Learn based on ingress vlan

Caution:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the
PPPoE interface.

458

IDL series User Guide

5.14.4 Igmpsnoop port stats Commands
5.14.4.1 Get igmpsnoop port stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop port stats [vlanid ] [mcastaddr ]
[portid ]
5.14.4.2 Reset igmpsnoop port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset igmpsnoop port stats [vlanid vlanid] mcastaddr  portid

Parameters:
Name

Description
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and
can be passed as zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices
supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan
can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value of
vlanid must be passed. For the case when the attribute
"McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value

vlanid 

"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for
VLAN with vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in
case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked
Vlan Mode.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1-4095

IP DSLAM

459

Mcastaddr

A multicast MAC Address, learned through Igmp Snooping,



within the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex), to uniquely identify the entry,
for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. The range of
accepted values is 00:30:4F:00:00:00 to 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF
Type: Reset － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 00:30:4F:00:00:00 - 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF

portid 

A Bridge Port belonging to the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex) and Group
(igmpsnoopMcastAddress), for which the IgmpSnooping
statistics are desired.
Type: Reset --Optional
Get –Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386

Example:
$ get igmpsnoop port stats vlanid 6 mcastaddr 00:30:4f:0a:00:01 portid 6
Output:
VLAN Index
:6
Mcast Group Address : 00:30:4f:0a:00:01
Port Index
:6
Query Received
: 100
Report Received : 200
Filter Mode
: Include
Include SrcList
: 10.12.14.16 12.10.45.76
Exclude SrcList
: 10.12.34.56 34.54.76.87
Output field
Field

Description

VLAN Index

This parameter specifies the VlanId to uniquely identify the VlanId of the
entry, for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. In devices
supporting "Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for a
multicast MAC address is shared across vlans. Therefore, VlanId is an
optional parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for a
multicast MAC address. Hence VlanId is a mandatory parameter in all
the commands other than the get command. For no Vlan case, VlanId is
not required.

Mcast Group Address

This parameter specifies a multicast MAC address, learnt through Igmp
Snooping, within the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex), to uniquely identify the
entry, for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. The range of

460

IDL series User Guide

accepted values is 00:30:4F:00:00:00 to 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF.
Port Index

This parameter specifies a bridge port belonging to the Vlan
(igmpVlanIndex) and Group (igmpsnoopMcastAddress), for which the
IgmpSnooping statistics are desired.

Query Received

This parameter specifies thenumber of Igmp queries received on the
port belonging to a particular multicast group and Vlan.

Report Received

This parameter specifies thenumber of Membership reports received on
the port belonging to a particular multicast group and Vlan.

Filter Mode

This parameter specifies the current filter mode on a port for a given
group.

Include SrcList

This parameter specifies the Include Source list, which is the list of
sources to be included in case of Include filter mode and the list of
conflicting sources in case of exclude mode of the port for a given group

Exclude SrcList

This parameter specifies the Exclude Source list, which is the list of
sources to be excluded in case of exclude filter mode of the port for a
given group

Caution:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the
PPPoE interface.

5.14.5 Igmpsnoop querier info Commands
5.14.5.1 Get igmpsnoop querier info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop querier info [vlanid ] [portid ]
5.14.5.2 Create igmpsnoop querier info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create igmpsnoop querier info vlanid  portid 

IP DSLAM

461

5.14.5.3 Delete igmpsnoop querier info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete igmpsnoop querier info vlanid  portid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

vlanid 

The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed as
zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan
for multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for a
multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter
and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case when the
attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for VLAN
with vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1-4095

portid 

A Bridge Port, belonging to the Vlan (dot1qVlanIndex), on which the
Querier exists.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535

Example:
$ create igmpsnoop querier info vlanid 6 portid 6

462

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VLAN Index
:6
Querier Port Status : Mgmt
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Port Index : 6

Output field:
Field

Description

VLAN Index

VlanId to uniquely identify the vlanid of the entry
for which the IgmpSnooping Querier is
configured/ learned. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the
information for a Querier port is shared across
vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own
information for a Querier port. Hence vlanid is a
mandatory parameter in all the commands other
than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not
required. This Feature is not supported for VLAN
with vlanid as 4097.

Port Index

A Bridge Port, belonging to the Vlan
(dot1qVlanIndex), on which the Querier exists.

Querier Port Status

Specifies whether Querier Port has been learned
dynamically or configured by the user.

Caution:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the
PPPoE interface.

IP DSLAM

463

5.15 Interface Commands
5.15.1 Interface Commands
5.15.1.1 Get interface stats
Description:
Use this command to view statistics for one interface or all the interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get interface stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
Index of the interface having one to one mapping with
IfTable. Only Ethernet, EOA, Aggregator, HDLC,
PPPOE, IPOE, ABOND, ATM, ATM VC Aggregation
and ATM VC interface index are supported for reset

Ifname
operation.

Type : Optional
Valid values: aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1,atm-*, eoa-*, dsl-*,
dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*, ehdlc-*, pppoe-*, pppr-*, vdsl-*,
ipoe-*, abond-* , vcaggr-*

Example:
$ get interface stats ifname eth-0
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created

464

Interface
: eth-0
Type
: ETHERNET
Bandwidth
: 100000000
00:BB:CC:DD:EE:F1
Last Change(sec)
: 219
Admin Status
: Up
In Octets
: 396312

Description
Mtu
Phy Adddr

In Discards
In Errors
In Ucast Pkts

Out Discards
Out Errors
Out Ucast Pkts

:0
:0
: 2291

: eth-0
: 1500
:

Unknown Prot Pkts : 0
Operational Status : Up
Out Octets
: 168929
:0
:0
: 2518

IDL series User Guide

In Mcast Pkts
: 428
Out Mcast Pkts
:0
In Bcast Pkts
: 1456
Out Bcast Pkts
:0
LinkUpDnTrapEnable : Enable
Promiscous Mode
: True
Connector Present : True
CounterDiscontTime : 0
HC In Octets
: 0x000060c18
HC OutOctets
: 0x0000293e1
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Interface

Index of the interface having one to one mapping with IfTable. Only Ethernet,
EOA , Aggregator, HDLC, PPPOE, IPOE, ABOND, ATM , ATM VC
Aggregation and ATM VC interface index are supported for reset operation.

Description

This is general information about the interface

Type

The type of interface, distinguished according the physical/link/network
protocol, immediately below the IP layer. It may be: ATM, ETHERNET, AAL5,
EOA, DSL, FAST, INTERLEAVED, AGGR. EHDLC, PPP, LOOPBACK,
IPOA, PPPR, PPPOE, SHDSL, ABOND, IPOE, VCAGGR, VDSL, USB. .

Mtu

The size (in bytes) of the largest packet, which can be sent/received on this
interface in octets.

Bandwidth

The current bandwidth of the interface, in bps.

Phy Addr

Interface's address, at its protocol sublayer.

Admin Status

This is the desired state of the interface. It may be: Up, Down.

Operational Status

The current operational state of the interface. If ifAdminStatus is disable (2),
then ifOperStatus should be disable (2). If ifAdminStatus is changed to enable
(1), then ifOperStatus should change to enable (1), if the interface is ready to
transmit and receive network traffic. Interface will have the OperStatus value
as dormant (5) if the 'configstatus' of the entry is 'config' and the interface is
waiting for a packet to be sensed to get activated.

Last Change

Value of System UpTime (in seconds) at the time the interface entered its
current operational state.

Unknown Prot Pkts

The number of packets received via the interface, which were discarded
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

In Octets

The total number of octets received on the interface, including the framing
characters. For Ethernet interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC in
octets. Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*.

Out Octets

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing
characters. For Ethernet interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC Out
octets. Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*.

In Discards

The number of inbound packets, which were discarded, though no errors
were detected.

IP DSLAM

465

Out Discards

The number of outbound packets chosen to be discarded even though there
were no errors.

In Errors

The number of inbound packets, which were not delivered to upper layers
because of errors.

Out Errors

The number of outbound packets chosen to be discarded because there were
errors.

In Ucast Pkts

The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.

Out Ucast Pkts

The total number of packets requested to be sent to unicast addresses, by
upper layer protocols.

HC In Octets

The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters. This object is a 64-bit version of ifInOctets. Discontinuities in the
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,
and at other times, as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Valid for eth-*.

HC OutOctets

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing
characters. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutOctets. Discontinuities in
the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management
system, and at other times, as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime. Valid for eth-*.

In Mcast Pkts

The number of multicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.

Out Mcast Pkts

The total number of packets requested to be sent to multicast addresses, by
upper layer protocols.

In Bcast Pkts

The number of broadcast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.

Out Bcast Pkts

The total number of packets requested to be sent to broadcast addresses, by
upper layer protocols.

LinkUpDnTrapEnable

Indicates whether linkUp/ linkDown traps should be generated for this
interface.

Promiscous Mode

This object has a value of false if this interface only accepts packets/frames
that are addressed to this station. This object has a value of true when the
station accepts all packets/frames transmitted on the media. The value true is
legal only for Ethernet interfaces. The value of PromiscuousMode does not
affect the reception of broadcast and multicast packets/frames by the
interface.

Connector Present

This indicates whether the interface sublayer has a physical connector or not.
This is true only for physical Ethernet interfaces.

CounterDiscontTime

The value of sysUpTime on the most recent occasion, at which any one or
more of this interface's counters suffered a discontinuity.

466

IDL series User Guide

5.15.1.2 Reset interface stats
Description:
Use this command to reset the statistics of Ethernet, EoA, ATM, AAL5, DSL, DSLF,
DSLI, Aggr and EHDLC interfaces.
Command Syntax:
reset interface stats ifname
5.15.1.3 Get interface config
Description:
Use this command to view Interface Configuration.
Command Syntax:
get interface config ifname 
5.15.1.4 Modify interface config
Description:
Use this command to modify interface configuration.
Command Syntax:
modify interface config ifname  [trap enable|disable]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Ifname

Interface name, for which configuration is to be modified or viewed.



Type: Get

-Optional Modify - Mandatory

Valid values: eth-*,atm-*,aal5-*, eoa-*, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*,
ehdlc-*.
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for
this interface.
trap enable|disable
Type: Modify –

Optional

Valid values : enable or disable

Example:
$ get interface Config

IP DSLAM

467

Output:
Verbose Mode On
IfName LinkUp/DnTrap
--------------------aal5-0 Enable
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

IfName

Interface name, for which configuration is to be viewed.
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps shall be

LinkUp/DnTrap
generated for this interface.

Caution:
z
Reset of ATM VC interface stats also result in atm vc stat reset for the
interface and reset of Ethernet interface stats also result in dot3stats reset for the
ethernet interface.
References
z
ATM Interface commands
z
Ethernet commands
z
EoA commands
z
DSL commands

468

IDL series User Guide

5.16 IP Commands
5.16.1 IP Net to Media Table Commands
5.16.1.1 Get arp
Description:
Use this command to display either the full ARP table or a single entry.
Command Syntax:
get arp [rid ] [ip ]
5.16.1.2 Create arp
Description:
Use this command to create a static entry in the ARP Table.
Command Syntax:
create arp [rid ] ip  macaddr 
5.16.1.3 Delete arp
Description:
Use this command to delete an entry from the ARP table.
Command Syntax:
delete arp [rid ] ip 
Parameters:
Name

Description

rid 

RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route
related information for that flow. The RID defines a flow
based on the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,
IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines
separate routes in context of itself. . If VlanId  and
RID  have been created and the routing database is
configured for IRD, than routes in RID  shall define
flow for packets coming on VLAN Id . The other
mode for the database is SRD (Shared Routing

IP DSLAM

469

Database) where there is a single RID in the system and
all flows map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly
created and no more than one RID can be created in the
system in this mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall
map to this RID for routing.
Type: Create － Optional
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
IP address corresponding to the media-dependent

ip 

physical address.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255
macaddr 

The media-dependent physical address
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0:0:0:0:0:1 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:fe

Example:
$ create arp rid 1 ip 192.168.161.11 macaddr 00:11:22:33:44:55
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
RID
:1
Ifname
:Type
: static
Mac Address : 00:11:22:33:44:55
Ip Address. : 192.168.161.11
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

RID

RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related
information for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on the
VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types, IRD( Independent
Routing Database) where there are more than one RIDs in

470

IDL series User Guide

the system and each RID defines separate routes in context
of itself. . If VlanId  and RID  have been created and
the routing database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID
 shall define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id .
The other mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and all
flows map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created
and no more than one RID can be created in the system in
this mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall map to this RID
for routing.
Ifname

This specifies the physical interface for the media. It
indicates the interface over which the IP address for which
the IP Net to media mapping has been created can be
reached.

Ip Address.

IP address corresponding to the media-dependent physical
address.

Type

This defines the type of mapping in use. The value Invalid
has the effect that this entry is not used. It may be: Static,
Dynamic, Other

Mac Address

The media-dependent physical address

Cautions:
z The specified interface should pre-exist. Please refer to the create ethernetintf
command.

z
z
z
z

References:
delete arp command
get arp command
create ethernet intf command
ip route related commands

5.16.2 IP Route Commands
5.16.2.1 Get ip route
Description:Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ip route [rid ] ip  mask 

IP DSLAM

471

5.16.2.2 Create up route
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ip route [rid ] ip  mask mask 
gwyip  [ifname  | anywan] [proxyarpstatus
enable | disable]
5.16.2.3 Delete ip route
Description:
Use this command to create a routing table entry.
Command Syntax:
delete ip route [rid ] ip  mask mask 
Parameters:
Name
rid 

Description
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the system.
Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related information
for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The
database can be of 2 types, IRD (Independent Routing
Database) where there are more than one RIDs in the system
and each RID defines separate routes in context of itself. If
VlanId  and RID  have been created and the routing
database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID  shall
define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id . The other
mode for the database is SRD ( Shared Routing Database)
where there is a single RID in the system and all flows map to
this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than
one RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for
all created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.
Type: Create － Optional
Delete － Optional
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

ip

472



Destination IP address of this route.

IDL series User Guide

Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.0
mask

Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination
address before being compared to the value in the ipRouteDest
field. Only absolute routes can be added in the downstream
direction for the IPOE interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*).
The mask for all such routes has to be 255.255.255.255. The
creation of default route in upstream (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as
GS_CFG_ANY_WAN) can have the mask as 0.0.0.0 only.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.0

gwyip

The IP address of the next hop of this route. Only absolute



routes can be added in the downstream direction for the IPOE
interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The next hop in such
cases has to be same as the destination IP address
(gsvIpRouteDest) specified.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.0

ifname

The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface

 |

through which the next hop of this route should be reached. If

anywan

IpRouteRid is not 0, than u32IpRouteIfIndex shall be
mandatory to be specified in the "create ip route" command.
The ifname value can be either ANYWAN (0xffffffff) or ifindex of
any of the ipoe interface (ipoe-*).
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional

proxyarpstatus enable

This specifies if the Proxy ARP has to be done for this iproute

|disable

table entry.If IpRouteRid value is 0, then ProxyArpStatus will
not be specified while creating/modifying an entry in IpRoute
Table.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable

IP DSLAM

473

Example:
$ create ip route rid 0 ip 192.168.161.12 mask 255.255.0.0 gwyip 172.26.6.100
ifname eth-0 routetype DIR ProxyArpStatus disable configstatus Auto
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rid
:0
Net Mask
: 255.255.0.0
Ifname
: eth-0
Route Orig
: LCL
ProxyArpStatus : disable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Destination : 192.168.161.12
Gateway
: 172.26.6.100
Route Type : DIR
Age
:0

Output Fields:
FIELD
Rid

Description
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This database
contains information about the routes in the system. Each RID
identifies a flow and defines route related information for that flow.
The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The database can be
of 2 types, IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines separate
routes in context of itself. If VlanId  and RID  have been
created and the routing database is configured for IRD, than routes
in RID  shall define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id .
The other mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and all flows
map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more
than one RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for
all created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.

Destination

Destination IP address of this route.

Net Mask

Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination
address before being compared to the value in the ipRouteDest
field. Only absolute routes can be added in the downstream
direction for the IPOE interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The
mask for all such routes has to be 255.255.255.255. The creation of
default route in upstreamcan has the mask as 0.0.0.0 only.

Gateway

474

The IP address of the next hop of this route. Only absolute routes

IDL series User Guide

can be added in the downstream direction for the IPOE interfaces
(gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The next hop in such cases has to be
same as the destination IP address (gsvIpRouteDest) specified.
Ifname

The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface through
which the next hop of this route should be reached. If IpRouteRid is
not GS_CFG_MGMT_RID, than u32IpRouteIfIndex shall be
mandatory to be specified in the "create ip route" command. The
ifname value can be either ANYWAN or ifindex of any of the ipoe
interface (ipoe-*).

Route Type

The type of route. It may be: dir (for Direct) or ind (for Indirect).

Route Orig

The routing mechanism, through which this route was learned. It
may be: NET (for Network Management), LCL (for Local), RIP,
ICMP,DYI (Dynamic through Interface creation).

Age

The number of seconds since this route was last updated or
otherwise determined to be correct.

ProxyArpStatus

This specifies if the Proxy ARP has to be done for this iproute
table entry.If IpRouteRid value is 0, then ProxyArpStatus will not be
specified while creating/modifying an entry in IpRoute Table.

References:
z get ip route command
z delete ip route command
z arp related commands.

5.16.3 Ipoa intf Commands
5.16.3.1 Get ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ipoa intf [ifname ]
5.16.3.2 Create ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to create.

IP DSLAM

475

Command Syntax:
create ipoa intf ifname  lowif  [configstatus
Normal | Config] [enable|disable]
5.16.3.3 Delete ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ipoa intf ifname 
5.16.3.4 Modify ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ipoa intf ifname  [enable|disable]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The Ipoa Interface



Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 -575

lowif 

This specifies the name of the lower AAL5 interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0 - 574

configstatus Normal

This mode describes the configuration status for this

|Config

interface. If the "config" bit is set then this interface
shall be created but will have a dormant status. Only
after the receipt of an Ipoa packet from CPE side
this interface shall become active. The "In-Use" and
"Not-In-Use" bits are read only bits. The
"Not-In-Use" indicates that the entry is dormant and
"In-Use" indicates that the entry is activated.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: NormalEntry

476

IDL series User Guide

enable|disable

Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable or disable

Example:
$ create ipoa intf ifname Ipoa-0 lowif aal5-0 configstatus Normal enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname
: Ipoa-0
Config Status : Normal
Oper Status
: Up
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Low IfName

: aal5-0

Admin Status : Enable

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The Ipoa Interface

Low IfName

This specifies the name of the lower AAL5
interface.

Config Status

This mode describes the configuration status for
this interface. If the "config" bit is set then this
interface shall be created but will have a dormant
status. Only after the receipt of an Ipoa packet
from CPE side this interface shall become active.
The "In-Use" and "Not-In-Use" bits are read only
bits. The "Not-In-Use" indicates that the entry is
dormant and "In-Use" indicates that the entry is
activated.

IP DSLAM

Admin Status

Administrative status of the interface.

Oper Status

Operational status of the interface.

477

5.16.4 Ipoe intf Commands
5.16.4.1 Get ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ipoe intf [ifname ]
5.16.4.2 Create ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ipoe intf ifname  lowif  macaddrprof
 [ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3] [inactivitytmrintrvl
] [routingstatus enable | disable] [enable | disable]
5.16.4.3 Delete ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ipoe intf ifname 
5.16.4.4 Modify ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ipoe intf ifname  lowif  macaddrprof
 [ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3] [inactivitytmrintrvl
] [routingstatus enable | disable] [enable | disable]

478

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The IPOE Tunneling Interface.



Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0-575

lowif 

This specifies the lower interface index.It contains the ifindex
of the IPoA interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0 － 575

macaddrprof

Profile Id corresponding to the MAC address assigned to this

macaddrprof

IPOE interface. This Profile is created using the
MacAddrProfileTable.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8

ethpkttype Type2 |

This specifies the type of the Packet.

802_3

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Type2

inactivitytmrintrvl

This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which

inactivitytmrintrvl

interfaces shall be marked inactive, if there is no data activity
on this interface during this interval. This is used only when
the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set for
gsvIpoeConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer is
not running. In autosensing scenario, an inactive interface is
a candidate to deletion, if another protocol is sensed on Atm
Vc Interface on which this interface is created
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0- 0xffffffff
Default value: 0

routingstatus enable

This specifies if the IP Routing Lookup has to be done for this

|disable

interface. By default, for the downstream traffic destined for
IPOE interface, IP lookup is done based on the downstream
route configured for the IPOE interface.If iproutingstatus is
disabled, layer 2 lookup shall be used instead, for forwarding
the downstream traffic for this IPOE interface.

IP DSLAM

479

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value:enable
enable|disable

Administrative Status of the interface.
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable or disable

Example:
$ create ipoe intf ifname Ipoe-0 lowif Ipoa-0 macaddrprof 1 ethpkttype Type2
inactivitytmrintrvl 10 routingstatus disable cfgmode Auto enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname
: Ipoe-0
Mac Addr Prof
:1
InActivity Tmr Interval : 10
RoutingStatus
: disable
Oper Status
: Up
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Low If Name : Ipoa-0
Eth Pkt Type : Type2

Admin Status : Enable

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The IPOE Tunneling Interface.

Low If Name

This specifies the lower interface index.It contains the
ifindex of the IPoA interface.

Mac Addr Prof

Profile Id corresponding to the MAC address assigned to
this IPOE interface. This Profile is created using the
MacAddrProfileTable.

Eth Pkt Type

This specifies the type of the Packet.

InActivity Tmr Interval

This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which
interfaces shall be marked inactive, if there is no data
activity on this interface during this interval. This is used
only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set for
gsvIpoeConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer
is not running. In autosensing scenario, an inactive
interface is a candidate to deletion, if another protocol is
sensed on Atm Vc Interface on which this interface is
created

480

IDL series User Guide

RoutingStatus

This specifies if the IP Routing Lookup has to be done for
this interface. By default, for the downstream traffic
destined for IPOE interface, IP lookup is done based on
the downstream route configured for the IPOE interface.If
iproutingstatus is disabled, layer 2 lookup shall be used
instead, for forwarding the downstream traffic for this IPOE
interface.

Admin Status

Administrative status of the interface.

Oper Status

Operational status of the interface.

5.16.5 Rid static Commands
5.16.5.1 Create rid static
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rid static rid 
5.16.5.2 Delete rid static
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete rid static rid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

rid 

RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route
related information for that flow. The RID defines a flow
based on the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,
IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines
separate routes in context of itself. If VlanId  and RID
 have been created and the routing database is
configured for IRD, than routes in RID  shall define

IP DSLAM

481

flow for packets coming on VLAN Id . The other
mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and
all flows map to this RID.
This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than
one RID can be created in the system in this mode.
Flows for all created VLANs shall map to this RID for
routing. A value of RID as 0 has a special meaning. RID
value 0 refers to management RID and all entries
created in context of RID value 0 shall be for routes
related to the management/control. In Stacked Vlan
Mode the Vlan Corresponding to RID is Virtual Vlan while
in Native Vlan mode this is normal Vlan(C-VLAN).
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095

Example:
$ create rid static rid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
RID : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

RID

RID refers to the Routing Information Database.
This database contains information about the
routes in the system. Each RID identifies a flow
and defines route related information for that
flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN
Id. The database can be of 2 types, IRD
(Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID

482

IDL series User Guide

defines separate routes in context of itself. . If
VlanId  and RID  have been created and
the routing database is configured for IRD, than
routes in RID  shall define flow for packets
coming on VLAN Id . The other mode for the
database is SRD( Shared Routing Database)
where there is a single RID in the system and all
flows map to this RID.
This RID has to be explicitly created and no more
than one RID can be created in the system in this
mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall map to
this RID for routing. A value of RID as 0 has a
special meaning. RID value 0 refers to
management RID and all entries created in
context of RID value 0 shall be for routes related
to the management/control. In Stacked Vlan
Mode the Vlan Corresponding to RID is Virtual
Vlan while in Native Vlan mode this is normal
Vlan(C-VLAN).

IP DSLAM

483

5.17 MacProfile Commands
5.17.1 Macprofile globle Commands
5.17.1.1 Get macprofile global
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get macprofile global [profileid ]
5.17.1.2 Create macprofile global
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create macprofile global profileid macaddr 
5.17.1.3 Delete macprofile global
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get macprofile global profileid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 8
macaddr 

MAC Address for the profile.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Example:
$ create macprofile global profileid 3 macaddr 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE

484

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id MAC Address
----------------------------------------------------------3
00:30:4F:61:C1:BE
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Profile Id

Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.

MAC Address

MAC Address for the profile.

5.17.2 Resvdmac profile info Commands
5.17.2.1 Get resvdmac profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get resvdmac profile info [profileid ]
5.17.2.2 Create resvdmac profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create resvdmac profile info profileid 
5.17.2.3 Delete resvdmac profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.

IP DSLAM

485

Command Syntax:
delete resvdmac profile info profileid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 8

Example:
$ create resvdmac profile info profileid 4
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile ID : 4
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Profile Id

Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.

5.17.3 Resvdmac profile param Commands
5.17.3.1 Get resvdmac profile param
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get resvdmac profile param [profileid ] [mcastaddr
]

486

IDL series User Guide

5.17.3.2 Create resvdmac profile param
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create resvdmac profile param profileid mcastaddr
action Drop | TransformedBcast | Participate
5.17.3.3 Delete resvdmac profile param
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get resvdmac profile param profileid  mcastaddr

Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 8
mcastaddr

This is Reserved Multicast address. This multicast address can



only be 00:30:4F:00:00:xx, where 'xx' lies between 00-0f and 20-2f.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

action Drop |

This is the action corresponding to reserved multicast address.

TransformedBcast |

'Drop' action leads to dropping of corresponding frames.

Participate

'TransformedBcast' leads to sending of the frames broadcasted
over all the ports as if for a broadcast frame (bridging restrictions,
filtering, transformations shall apply). 'Participate' action leads to
frame coming to Control Plane and it shall be given to the registered
protocol module.
Type:

IP DSLAM

Create

-- Mandatory

487

Example:
$ create resvdmac profile param Profileid 4 mcastaddr 00:30:4f:00:00:00 action
Drop
Output
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile ID : 4
Action
: Drop

Multicast address : 00:30:4f:00:00:00

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Profile Id

Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.

Multicast address

This is Reserved Multicast address. This
multicast address can only be 00:30:4F:00:00:xx,
where 'xx' lies between 00-0f and 20-2f.

Action

This is the action corresponding to reserved
multicast address. 'Drop' action leads to dropping
of corresponding frames. 'TransformedBcast'
leads to sending of the frames broadcasted over
all the ports as if for a broadcast frame (bridging
restrictions, filtering, transformations shall apply).
'Participate' action leads to frame coming to
Control Plane and it shall be given to the
registered protocol module.

488

IDL series User Guide

5.18 Management Traffic Commands
5.18.1 Ctlpkt group info Commands
5.18.1.1 Get ctlpkt group info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ctlpkt group info [groupid ] [ctlflowid ]
5.18.1.2 Create ctlpkt group info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ctlpkt group info groupid ctlflowid
instanceid ]
5.18.1.3 Delete ctlpkt group info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ctlpkt group info groupid ctlflowid 
Parameters:
Name
groupid

Description


The control packet group identifier
Type:

Create

--

Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 50
ctlflowid 

The Control packet flow id.
Type:

Create

--

Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0x4

IP DSLAM

489

instanceid

The Control packet instance Id.



Type:

Create

--

Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 26

Example:
$ create ctlpkt group info groupid 1 ctlflowid 1 instanceid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Group Id
:1
Control Flow Id : 1

Instance Id : 1

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Group Id

The control packet group identifier

Control Flow Id

The Control packet flow id.

Instance Id

The Control packet instance Id.

References:
z
See Control Packet Instance Group related commands

5.18.2 Ctlpkt instance info Commands
5.18.2.1 Get ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ctlpkt instance info [instanceid ]
5.18.2.2 Create ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to create.

490

IDL series User Guide

Command Syntax:
create ctlpkt instance info instanceid profileid 
classid 
5.18.2.3 Delete ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ctlpkt instance info instanceid 
5.18.2.4 Modify ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ctlpkt instance info instanceid profileid 
classid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

instanceid

The control packets instance id.



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 26
profileid 

This field identifies the control packet profile whose
instance is being created.
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 8
classid 

This field specifies the classid of the Instance. Class id
shall be treated as the service priority of this instance.
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 0x4

IP DSLAM

491

Example:
$ create ctlpkt instance info instanceid 1 profileid 1 classid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Instance Id : 1
Profile Id : 1

Class Id : 1

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Instance Id

The control packets instance id.

Profile Id

This field identifies the control packet profile
whose instance is being created.

Class Id

This field specifies the classid of the Instance.
Class id shall be treated as the service priority of
this instance.

References:
z
see control packet profile instance related commands

5.18.3 Ctlpkt profile info Commands
5.18.3.1 Get ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ctlpkt profile info [profileid ]
5.18.3.2 Create ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.

492

IDL series User Guide

Command Syntax:
create ctlpkt profile info profileid maxctlpkts 
thrshld1 
5.18.3.3 Delete ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ctlpkt profile info [profileid ]
5.18.3.4 Modify ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ctlpkt profile info profileid  [maxctlpkts ]
[thrshld1 ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

The control packet's profile id.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 8
maxctlpkts

This specifies the maximum control packets that can be



pending for an instance of this profile.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 63
thrshld1 

This specifies the number of outstanding control packets for
each instance, when control plane is congested.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 -63

IP DSLAM

493

Example:
$ create ctlpkt profile info profileid 1 maxctlpkts 32 thrshld1 32
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1
Max Ctl Pkts : 32

Threshold1 : 32

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Profile Id

The control packet's profile id.

Max Ctl Pkts

This specifies the maximum control packets that
can be pending for an instance of this profile.

Threshold1

This specifies the number of outstanding control
packets for each instance, when control plane is
congested.

References:
z
See control packet profiles related commands.

494

IDL series User Guide

5.19 PPPoE Tunneling Commands
5.19.1 PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands
5.19.1.1 Get pppoe global acprofile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global acprofile [profileid ]
5.19.1.2 Create pppoe global acprofile
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppoe global acprofile profileid  acname 
5.19.1.3 Delete pppoe global acprofile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppoe global acprofile profileid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid profileid

Profile Id of the AC Name configured.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8

acname acname

AC Name for the Session, based on which, the
AC is selected.
Type: Create － Mandatory

Example:
$ create pppoe global acprofile profileid 2 acname ABCServer

IP DSLAM

495

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id AC Name
-----------------------------------------------------------2
ABCServer
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Profile Id

Profile Id of the AC Name configured.

AC Name

AC Name for the Session, based on which, the
AC is selected.

References:
z
PPPoE global ACprofile related commands.

5.19.2 PPPoE Global Config Commands
5.19.2.1 Get pppoe global config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global config
5.19.2.2 Create pppoe global config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pppoe global config [ padimaxnumretries  ]
[padrmaxnumretries  ] [ paditxintrvl  ]
[ padrtxintrvl ] [ wandntmrintrvl  ]
[ inactivitytmrintrvl  ] [ discmaxnumretries
 ]

496

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

padimaxnumretries

Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client sends a



PADI for establishing a PPPoE Session.
Type: Modify －Optional
Valid values: 1 -10

padrmaxnumretries

Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client sends a



Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -10

paditxintrvl 

PPPoE Client.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -60

padrtxintrvl

The time, n seconds, between PADR retries from the



PPPoE Client.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -60

wandntmrintrvl

The time, n seconds, for timeout of the WAN Down



Timer. The timer is started when the WAN goes down,
and if the timer times out, the session is teared down.
A value of zero for this timer means it is not running.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff

inactivitytmrintrvl

The time, n seconds, for timeout of the Inactivity Timer.



The session can remain inactive for atmost these n
seconds after which it is teared down. A value of zero
means the timer is not running.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff

discmaxnumretries

The maximum number of times the PPPoE client does



a discovery stage for establishing a PPPoE session. A
trap is given to GAG on reaching this number.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -5

Example:
$ get pppoe global Config

IP DSLAM

497

Output:
Max Total Sessions
: 10
PADR Max Num Retries
: 10
PADR Tx Interval
:5
InActivity Tmr Interval : 20

PADI Max Num Retries : 10
PADI Tx Interval
:5
WAN Dn Tmr Interval : 10
DISC Max Num Retries : 3

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Max Total Sessions

Maximum number of PPPoE sessions supported.

PADI Max Num

Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client

Retries

sends a PADI for establishing a PPPoE Session.

PADR Max Num

Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client

Retries

sends a PADR for establishing a PPPoE Session.

PADI Tx Interval

The time, n seconds, between PADI retries from
the PPPoE Client.

PADR Tx Interval

The time, n seconds, between PADR retries from
the PPPoE Client.

WAN Dn Tmr Interval

The time, n seconds, for timeout of the WAN Down
Timer. The timer is started when the WAN goes
down, and if the timer times out, the session is
teared down. A value of zero for this timer means it
is not running.

InActivity Tmr Interval

The time, n seconds, for timeout of the Inactivity
Timer. The session can remain inactive for atmost
these n seconds after which it is teared down. A
value of zero means the timer is not running.

DISC Max Num

The maximum number of times the PPPoE client

Retries

does a discovery stage for establishing a PPPoE
session. A trap is given to GAG on reaching this
number.

References:
z
PPPoE global config related commands.

498

IDL series User Guide

5.19.3 PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands
5.19.3.1 Get pppoe global serviceprofile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global serviceprofile [profileid ]
5.19.3.2 Create pppoe global serviceprofile
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppoe global serviceprofile profileid  servicename

5.19.3.3 Delete pppoe global serviceprofile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppoe global serviceprofile profileid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Profile Id of the Service Name configured.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 -4

servicename

Service Name for the Session, based on which,



the AC is selected.
Type: Create － Mandatory

Example:
$ create pppoe global serviceprofile profileid 1 servicename any

IP DSLAM

499

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id Service Name
-----------------------------------------------------------1
any
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Profile Id

Profile Id of the Service Name configured.

Service Name

Service Name for the Session, based on which,
the AC is selected.

References:
z
PPPoE global serviceprofile related commands.

5.19.4 PPPoE Global Stats Commands
5.19.4.1 Get pppoe global stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global stats
Parameters:
none
Example:
$ get pppoe global stats
Output:
Active Sessions
Peak Active Sessions
Num of PADI Timeouts
Num of PADR Timeouts
Num of PADT Rx

500

: 10
: 12
:3
:2
:3

Total Sessions
Num of PADI Tx

: 12
: 20

Num of PADR Tx
: 15
Num of PADT Tx
:2
Num of PADT Rejected : 1

IDL series User Guide

Num of PADO Rx
:2
Num of PADS Rx
: 12
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx : 2

Num of PADO Rejected : 1
Num of PADS Rejected : 0

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Active Sessions

The number of active pppoe sessions in the
system.

Total Sessions

The total number of PPPoE sessions.

Peak Active Sessions

Peak number of active PPPoE sessions.

Num of PADI Tx

The number of PPPoE PADI transmitted.

Num of PADI Timeouts

The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a
response to a PADI.

Num of PADR Tx

The number of PPPoE PADR transmitted.

Num of PADR Timeouts

The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a
response to a PADR.

Num of PADT Tx

The number of PPPoE PADT transmitted.

Num of PADT Rx

The number of PPPoE PADT received.

Num of PADT Rejected

The number of PPPoE PADT discarded.

Num of PADO Rx

The number of PPPoE PADO received.

Num of PADO Rejected

The number of PPPoE PADO discarded.

Num of PADS Rx

The number of PPPoE PADS received.

Num of PADS Rejected

The number of PPPoE PADS discarded.

Num of Malformed Pkts

The number of PPPoE malformed packets

Rx

received.

References:
z
PPPoE global stats related commands.

5.19.5 Pppoe intf Commands
5.19.5.1 Get pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe intf [ifname ]

IP DSLAM

501

5.19.5.2 Create pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppoe intf ifname  lowif [ wanbridgeport
t ] [sessionid  ] [ acmacaddr
 ] macaddrprof  [ servicenameprof
 | any | anyconfigured ] [ acnameprof  |
any | anyconfigured ] [ ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3 ] [ nature dynamic | static ]
[ enable | disable ]
5.19.5.3 Delete pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppoe intf ifname 
5.19.5.4 Modify pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pppoe intf ifname  lowif [ wanbridgeport
t ] [sessionid  ] [ acmacaddr
 ] macaddrprof  [ servicenameprof
 | any | anyconfigured ] [ acnameprof  |
any | anyconfigured ] [ ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3 ] [ nature dynamic | static ]
[ enable | disable ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

lowif 

This specifies the lower interface index. It contains the ifindex of the
PPP relay interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0 - 254

502

wanbridgeport

WAN side bridge port. A value of zero means any WAN side port is



acceptable. Currently, only value zero is supported.

IDL series User Guide

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0x0
sessionid

Session Id for the session given only in case a static session is being



created.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffff
Default value: 0x0

acmacaddr

MAC address of the remote AC given only in case a static session is



being created.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00

macaddrprof

Profile Id for self MAC addresses. The profile for the same is created



using the PPPoEMacAddrProfileTable.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional

servicenameprof

Profile Id related to Service Name for the Session based on which the



AC is selected.The Profile for the same is created using the

| any |anyconfigured

PPPoESessionProfileTable. A value of "any" means no specific
service is needed to select an AC. A value of "anyconfigured"means
any configured service name profile can be used for selecting an AC.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: , 0-0xffffffff
Default value: 0
Profile Id related to AC Name for the Session based on which the AC

acnameprof

| anyconfigured

|any

is selected. The Profile for the same is created using the
PPPoEAcProfileTable. A value of "any" means no specific AC is
needed for establishing a session on the WAN side. A value of
"anyconfigured"means any configured AC name profile can be used
for selecting an AC.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0-0xffffffff
Default value: 0

ethpkttype Type2 |

This specifies the type of the packet.

802_3

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional

IP DSLAM

503

Default value: Type2
nature dynamic | static

Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in nature. The session is
assumed to be in established state when the interface is static in
nature.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: dynamic

enable | disable

Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable

Example:
$ create pppoe intf ifname pppoe-0 lowif ppp-0 wanbridgeport 1 sessionid 10
acmacaddr 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE macaddrprof 1 servicenameprof 2 acnameprof 4
ethpkttype Type2 nature dynamic 0x1 enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname
: pppoe-0
Low If Name
: ppp-0
WAN Bridge Port
:1
Session Id
: 10
AC Mac Addr
: 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE Mac Addr Prof : 1
Service Name Profile : 2
AC Name Prof
:4
Eth Pkt Type
: Type2
Nature
: dynamic
Oper Status
: Up
Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The PPPoE Interface.

Low If Name

This specifies the lower interface index. It contains the
ifindex of the PPP relay interface.

WAN Bridge Port

WAN side bridge port. A value of zero means any WAN
side port is acceptable. Currently, only value zero is
supported.

504

IDL series User Guide

Session Id

Session Id for the session given only in case a static
session is being created.

AC Mac Addr

MAC address of the remote AC given only in case a static
session is being created.

Mac Addr Prof

Profile Id for self MAC addresses. The profile for the same
is created using the PPPoEMacAddrProfileTable.

Service Name Profile

Profile Id related to Service Name for the Session based on
which the AC is selected.The Profile for the same is
created using the PPPoESessionProfileTable. A value of
"any" means no specific service is needed to select an AC.
A value of "anyconfigured"means any configured service
name profile can be used for selecting an AC.

AC Name Prof

Profile Id related to AC Name for the Session based on
which the AC is selected. The Profile for the same is
created using the PPPoEAcProfileTable. A value of "any"
means no specific AC is needed for establishing a session
on the WAN side. A value of "anyconfigured"means any
configured AC name profile can be used for selecting an
AC.

Eth Pkt Type

This specifies the type of the packet.

Nature

Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in nature. The
session is assumed to be in established state when the
interface is static in nature.

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up
or down.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or
Down.

References:
z
PPPoE session config related commands.

IP DSLAM

505

5.19.6 PPPoE Session Stats Commands
5.19.6.1 Get pppoe session stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe session stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

The PPPoE interface.
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 254

Example:
$ get pppoe session stats ifname pppoe-0
Output:
Ifname
: pppoe-0
Session Id
: 10
Peer Mac Addr
: 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE
Num of PADI Tx
: 4 Num of PADI Timeouts :
2
Num of PADR Tx
:1
Num of PADR Timeouts :
0
Num of PADT Tx
:1
Num of PADT Rx
:
1
Num of PADT Rejected
: 1 Num of PADO Rx
:
Num of PADO Rejected
: 0 Num of Multi PADO Rx :
Num of PADS Rx
: 1 Num of PADS Rejected :
0
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx
: 5 Num of Generic Err Rx :
Version
: 1 Type
:
1
Connect Time
: Mon Apr 18 14:00:59 2004
Duration (s)
: 100
AC Cookie :
A1659E40766EDBD7214E18095A5E500C
Host Unique
: 0000003E
State
: sessionStage
Service Name
: dvt
AC Name
: REDBACK

506

2
1
1

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The PPPoE interface.

Session Id

Session Id.

Peer Mac Addr

MAC address of the remote AC.

Num of PADI Tx

The number of PPPoE PADI transmitted.

Num of PADI Timeouts

The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a response to
a PADI.

Num of PADR Tx

The number of PPPoE PADR transmitted.

Num of PADR Timeouts

The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a response to
a PADR.

Num of PADT Tx

The number of PPPoE PADT transmitted.

Num of PADT Rx

The number of PPPoE PADT received.

Num of PADT Rejected

The number of PPPoE PADT discarded.

Num of PADO Rx

The number of PPPoE PADO received.

Num of PADO Rejected

The number of PPPoE PADO discarded.

Num of Multi PADO Rx

Number of times more than 1 PPPoE PADO was
received.

Num of PADS Rx

The number of PPPoE PADS received.

Num of PADS Rejected

The number of PPPoE PADS discarded.

Num of Generic Err Rx

Number of generic errors received.

Version

Version as given in the PPPoE rfc-2516.

Type

Type as given in the PPPoE rfc-2516.

Connect Time

Time when the session was established.

Duration (s)

Number of seconds since the session was established.

AC Cookie

Binary sequence representing the AC cookie given in
negotiations.

Host Unique

Binary sequence representing the host unique tag value.

State

State that session is in.

Service Name

Service name with which the session came up.

AC Name

AC name with which the session came up.

Num of Malformed Pkts Rx

The number of PPPoE malformed packets received.

References:
z
PPPoE session stats related commands.

IP DSLAM

507

5.19.7 PPPPR Interface Commands
5.19.7.1 Get pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppr intf [ifname ]
5.19.7.2 Create pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppr intf ifname lowif  [ maxpdu
 ] [ ppprackto ] [ lowiftoggletimerto
 ] [ nature dynamic | static ] [configstatus Normal |
Config ] [ pktpriority  ] [enable | disable]
5.19.7.3 Delete pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppr intf ifname 
5.19.7.4 Modify pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pppr intf ifname  [ppprackto ]
lowiftoggletimerto ] [nature dynamic | static] [pktpriority
] [enable | disable]

508

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname

The PPPR interface.



Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 254

lowif 

This specifies the name of the lower AAL5
interface.
Type: Create －Mandatory
Valid values: 0 - 574

maxpdu 

This specifies the maximum PDU size on a PPPR
interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 1492
Default value: 1492

ppprackto

Time in seconds to wait for LCP terminate Ack,



after sending a terminate request.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -10
Default value: 5

lowiftoggletimerto

Time in seconds to wait for lowif to come up



without tearing down the pppr session.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 – 10
Default value: 5

nature dynamic |

Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in

static

nature.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Dynamic

configstatus Normal

This mode describes the configuration status for

|Config

the interface. If the "config" bit is set, this interface
shall be created, but will have a dormant status.
Only after the receipt of an pppoa packet from the
CPE side, this interface shall become active.
Type: Create － Optional

IP DSLAM

509

Modify － Optional
Default value: Normal
enable | disable

Administrative status of the interface
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable or disable
Default Value: enable

pktpriority

Priority to be set in tagged

PPPOE frames or



PPP packets sent over this port

from Control

Plane .This priority shall also be used for choice of
traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface whether
the frame is tagged or not.In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to
be sent.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 – 7
Default value: 0

Example:
$ create pppr intf ifname pppr-0 lowif aal5-0 maxPdu 1484 ppprAckTO 10
lowifToggleTimerTO 10 nature dynamic configstatus Normal
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname
: pppr-0
Max PDU Size
: 1484
Lowif Toggle TimeOut : 10
Nature
: dynamic
Operational Status
: up
PPPOA PacketsPrio:2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

510

Low IfName
: aal5-0
Ter Ack TimeOut : 10
Config Status
Admin Status

: Normal
: up

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

The PPPR interface.

Low IfName

This specifies the name of the lower AAL5
interface.

Max PDU Size

This specifies the maximum PDU size on a PPPR
interface.

Ter Ack TimeOut

Time in seconds to wait for LCP terminate Ack,
after sending a terminate request.

Lowif Toggle TimeOut

Time in seconds to wait for lowif to come up
without tearing down the pppr session.

Nature

Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in
nature.

Config Status

This mode describes the configuration status for
the interface. If the "config" bit is set, this interface
shall be created, but will have a dormant status.
Only after the receipt of an pppoa packet from the
CPE side, this interface shall become active. The
"In-Use" and "Not-In-Use" bits are read-only bits.
The "Not-In-Use" bit indicates that the entry is
dormant and "In-Use" bit indicates that the entry is
activated.

Operational Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It may be
either Up or Down.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either
Up or Down.

PPPOA PacketsPrio

Priority to be set in tagged PPPOE frames or PPP
packets sent over this port from Control
Plane .This priority shall also be used for choice of
traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface whether
the frame is tagged or not.In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to
be sent.

IP DSLAM

511

5.20 IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands
5.20.1 Dra global stats Commands
5.20.1.1 Get dra global stats
Description:
Use this command to get t.
Command Syntax:
get dra global stats
5.20.1.2 Reset dra global stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset dra global stats
Parameter:
None
Example:
$ get dra global stats
Output:
DRA Disc Count
: 40
DRA Decline Count : 30
DRA Offer Count
: 10
DRA Nack Count
: 50

512

DRA Req Count
: 40
DRA Inform Count : 20
DRA Ack Count
: 10

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

DRA Disc Count

Number of DHCP discovery packets received

DRA Req Count

Number of DHCP request packets received

DRA Decline Count

Number of DHCP decline packets received

DRA Inform Count

Number of DHCP inform packets received

DRA Offer Count

Number of DHCP offer packets received

DRA Ack Count

Number of DHCP Ack packets received

DRA Nack Count

Number of DHCP Nack packets received

References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands

5.20.2 Dra instance entry Commands
5.20.2.1 Get dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dra instance entry [portid ] [vlan ]
5.20.2.2 Create dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create dra instance entry portid  vlan  profileid
 [ status disable | client | server ] [ op82 disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboption aci | Portid | None ] [ acival  ]
[ raival  ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None ] [ op82fromclientact drop | forward ] [ learning disable | enable ] [ portno
 ] [ draaddop82tounicast disable | enable ]

IP DSLAM

513

5.20.2.3 Delete dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to Delete.
Command Syntax:
delete dra instance entry portid  vlan 
5.20.2.4 Modify dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify dra instance entry portid  vlan  [ profileid
 ] [ status disable | client | server ] [ op82 disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboption aci | Portid | None | None ] [ acival
 ] [ raival  ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None | None ] [ op82fromclientact drop | forward ] [ learning disable | enable ]
[ portno  ] [ draaddop82tounicast disable | enable ]
Parameters
Name

Description

portid 

Bridge Port Identifier
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 194
vlan 

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095

514

IDL series User Guide

profileid 

DRA profile identifier. This shall be used for this DRA instance
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
status disable | client |

This field is used to configure the status of DHCP relay agent

server

per instance. It can be disabled or configured as client port or
server port. If it is configured as client port then it adds option
82 and /or do learning as per configuration. If it is configured as
server port then it removes option 82 and does learning if we
dont get portid from agent circuit id.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: disable
op82 disable | AddAlways |

This specifies the action to be performed on Option 82 on

AddIfNotExists

receiving DHCP discovery packets for this instance. If disabled
DRA will not add Option82 tag to the DHCP packets. If
AddAlways is set then Option 82 is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then Option 82 is added only if the
received DHCP packet does not contain Option 82.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: AddAlways
configsuboption aci |

This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are

Portid | None | None

configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this bitmask
will overwrite the automatically derived values of agent circuit Id
and/or port id by the values configured in this MO.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: None
acival 

This is use to configure agent circuit id for this instance. If ACI
bit is set in gsvDRAConfigSubOptionthen this parameter will
overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
raival 

This is use to configure remote agent id for this instance. This
parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the associated
access loop logical port on the Columbia.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"

IP DSLAM

515

syncratefields

This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop

ActualDataRateupstrm |

characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop

ActualDataRatednstrm |

characteristic suboption.

MinDataRateupstrm |

Type:

MinDataRatednstrm |

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

AttainableDataRateupstrm |
AttainableDataRatednstrm |
MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm |
MinLpDataRateupstrm |
MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm |
ActualDelayupstrm |
MaxDelaydnstrm |
ActualDelaydnstrm | None |
None
op82fromclientact drop |

This specifies the action to be taken on receiving DHCP

forward

message from the client with option 82. If DHCP message
contains option82 and we want the packet to be dropped then
drop should be set and if we want the packet to be forwarded
then forward should be set.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: drop
learning disable | enable

This field specifies whether DHCP learning is to be done on this
port or not. If enabled DRA will learn the IP Addresses assigned
towards this port using upstream/downstream packets received
on this port.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: enable
portno 

This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered
only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0

516

IDL series User Guide

draaddop82tounicast

This field specifies whether Option 82 is to be added to DHCP

disable | enable

Unicast packets or not. If enabled Option 82 will be added to
DHCP Unicast Packets and when disabled, it will not be added.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: enable

Example:
$ create dra instance entry portid 1 vlan 5 profileid 1 status client op82 AddAlways
configsuboption aci acival "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33" (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi = 100,
vci = 33)" raival "conexant noida" syncratefields ActualDelaydnstrm
op82fromclientact drop learning enable portno 10 draaddop82tounicast enable
Auto
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id
:1
VLAN
:5
Profile Id
:1
DRA status : client
Option82
: AddAlways
Config Sub-Option
: aci
Agent Circuit Id
: "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33" (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi =
100, vci = 33)"
Remote Agent Id
: "conexant noida"
SyncRateInfoField
: ActualDelaydnstrm
DRA Act For Op82 From Client : drop
DRA learning
: enable
Port No
: 10
VCI
L2 type
DRA Add Op82 To Unicast

: 33
: Eth
: enable

VPI
: 100
Encap Type : Llcmux

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:

IP DSLAM

Field

Description

Port Id

Bridge Port Identifier

VLAN

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN

Profile Id

DRA profile identifier. This shall be used for this DRA instance

517

DRA status

This field is used to configure the status of DHCP relay agent
per instance. It can be disabled or configured as client port or
server port. If it is configured as client port then it adds option
82 and /or do learning as per configuration. If it is configured as
server port then it removes option 82 and does learning if we
dont get portid from agent circuit id.

Option82

This specifies the action to be performed on Option 82 on
receiving DHCP discovery packets for this instance. If disabled
DRA will not add Option82 tag to the DHCP packets. If
AddAlways is set then Option 82 is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then Option 82 is added only if the
received DHCP packet does not contain Option 82.

Config Sub-Option

This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this bitmask
will overwrite the automatically derived values of agent circuit
Id and/or port id by the values configured in this MO.

Agent Circuit Id

This is use to configure agent circuit id for this instance. If ACI
bit is set in gsvDRAConfigSubOptionthen this parameter will
overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id

Remote Agent Id

This is use to configure remote agent id for this instance. This
parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the associated
access loop logical port on the Columbia.

SyncRateInfoField

This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop
characteristic suboption.

DRA Act For Op82

This specifies the action to be taken on receiving DHCP

From Client

message from the client with option 82. If DHCP message
contains option82 and we want the packet to be dropped then
drop should be set and if we want the packet to be forwarded
then forward should be set.

DRA learning

This field specifies whether DHCP learning is to be done on
this port or not. If enabled DRA will learn the IP Addresses
assigned towards this port using upstream/downstream
packets received on this port.

Port No

This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered
only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask

VCI

VCI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge port for
this instance is created

VPI

518

VPI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge port for

IDL series User Guide

this instance is created
L2 type

This Parameter represents the L2 type used

Encap Type

This Parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the aal5 VC
corresponding the bridge port for which this instance is created

DRA Add Op82 To

This field specifies whether Option 82 is to be added to DHCP

Unicast

Unicast packets or not. If enabled Option 82 will be added to
DHCP Unicast Packets and when disabled, it will not be added.

References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands

5.20.3 Dra stats entry Commands
5.20.3.1 Get dra stats entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dra stats entry [portid ] [vlan ]
5.20.3.2 Reset dra stats entry
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
get dra stats entry [portid ] [vlan ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Bridge port identifier
Type:

Reset

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 194
vlan 

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN
Type:

Reset

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095

IP DSLAM

519

Example:
$ get dra stats entry portid 1 vlan 1
Output:
Port Id
:1
Dhcp Pkt Received : 40
Dhcp Pkt Discarded : 40

VLAN
:1
Dhcp Pkt Sent : 90

Output field:
Field

Description

Port Id

Bridge port identifier

VLAN

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN

Dhcp Pkt Received

Number of DHCP packets received for this instance

Dhcp Pkt Sent

Number of DHCP packets sent for this instance

Dhcp Pkt Discarded

Number of DHCP packets discarded for this instance

References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands

5.20.4 Dra global config Commands
5.20.4.1 Get dra global config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dra global config
5.20.4.2 Modify dra global config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify dra global config [status Enable | Disable]

520

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

status Enable | Disable

Global status of DRA
Type: Modify

-- Optional

Example:
$ get dra global Config
Output:
DRA global Status
-----------------------------------------------------------Enable
Output field:
Field

Description

DRA global Status

Global status of DRA

References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands

5.20.5 la profile entry Commands
5.20.5.1 Get ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ia profile entry [profileid ]
5.20.5.2 Create ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ia profile entry profileid  [ anitype auto | config ] [ anival
 ] [ aciprefixstr  ] [ acifieldlist AniVal | Chassis |
Rack | Frame | Slot | SubSlot | L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci | VlanTag | None ]
[ suboption Aci | Rai | EncapType | AccessLoopChar | None ] [ chassisval

IP DSLAM

521

chassisval ] [ rackval  ] [ frameval  ] [ slotval
 ] [ subslotval  ]
5.20.5.3 Delete ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ia profile entry [profileid ]
5.20.5.4 Modify ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ia profile entry profileid  [ anitype auto | config ] [ anival
 ] [ aciprefixstr  ] [ acifieldlist AniVal | Chassis |
Rack | Frame | Slot | SubSlot | L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci | VlanTag | None | None ]
[ suboption Aci | Rai | EncapType | AccessLoopChar | None | None ] [ chassisval
 ] [ rackval  ] [ frameval  ] [ slotval
 ] [ subslotval  ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid

Intermediate Agent Profile Identifier. This can be applied on



multiple PIA or DRA instances.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
anitype auto | config

This field specifies whether the Access node Identifier should be
automatically derived or is configured by the user. If its value is
auto, the ANI is derived from MAC address of access node.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: auto

522

IDL series User Guide

anival 

This is used to configure access node identifier. This field will be
used only when value of gsvIaAniType is config.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
aciprefixstr

This is used to configure user defined string to be concatenated as



a part of flexible syntax in Agent Circuit Id. It is a string of
characters with spaces and special characters.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
acifieldlist AniVal |

This field represents list of parameters which will take part in auto

Chassis | Rack | Frame

generation of Agent Circuit Id.

| Slot | SubSlot |

Type:

Create

L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

| VlanTag | None |
None
suboption Aci | Rai |

This field represents bitmask for suboptions to be added to VSA

EncapType |

tag in case of PIA and Option82 tag in case of DRA. The options

AccessLoopChar |

which can be added include Agent Circuit Id, Agent Remote Id,

None | None

EncapType and AccessLoopCharacterstics. Agent Circuit id
identifies the circuit, Agent Remote id specifies the subscriber
information, EncapType and AccessLoopChar identify with the
encapsulation type and access loop characterstics respectively.
Type:

Create

Modify --

--

Optional

Optional

chassisval

Chasis number of access node



Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: \0
rackval 

Rack no of access node
Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: \0
frameval

Frame number of access node.



Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: \0

IP DSLAM

523

slotval 

Slot number of access node
Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: \0
subslotval

Sub-slot number of access node.



Type:

Create

--

Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: \0

Example:
$ create ia profile entry profileid 1 anitype auto anival 00aabbccddff aciprefixstr
"Conexant Noida" acifieldlist port vpi vci suboption Aci chassisval 1 rackval 1
frameval 1 slotval 3 subslotval 1Output
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id
:1
ANI value
: 00aabbccddff
Aci Prefix Str : "Conexant Noida"
ACI Field List : port vpi vci
Sub Option
: Aci
Chassis
:1
Frame
:1
Sub Slot
:1

ANI Type : auto

Rack
Slot

:1
:3

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Id

Intermediate Agent Profile Identifier. This can be
applied on multiple PIA or DRA instances.

ANI Type

This field specifies whether the Access node
Identifier should be automatically derived or is
configured by the user. If its value is auto, the ANI is
derived from MAC address of access node.

ANI value

This is used to configure access node identifier. This
field will be used only when value of gsvIaAniType is

524

IDL series User Guide

config.
Aci Prefix Str

This is used to configure user defined string to be
concatenated as a part of flexible syntax in Agent
Circuit Id. It is a string of characters with spaces and
special characters.

ACI Field List

This field represents list of parameters which will
take part in auto generation of Agent Circuit Id.

Sub Option

This field represents bitmask for suboptions to be
added to VSA tag in case of PIA and Option82 tag in
case of DRA. The options which can be added
include Agent Circuit Id, Agent Remote Id,
EncapType and AccessLoopCharacterstics. Agent
Circuit id identifies the circuit, Agent Remote id
specifies the subscriber information, EncapType and
AccessLoopChar identify with the encapsulation
type and access loop characterstics respectively.

Chassis

Chasis number of access node

Rack

Rack no of access node

Frame

Frame number of access node.

Slot

Slot number of access node

Sub Slot

Sub-slot number of access node.

References:
Intermediate Agent commands

5.20.6 Pia instance entry Commands
5.20.6.1 Get pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pia instance entry [portid ] [vlan ]
5.20.6.2 Create pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to create.

IP DSLAM

525

Command Syntax:
create pia instance entry portid  vlan  profileid
 [ status enable | disable ] [ vsatag disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboptionbitmask aci | PortId | None ] [ acival
 ] [ raival  ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None ] [ iwftagfromclientact drop | forward ] [ insertiwfsubop enable | disable ]
[ portno  ]
5.20.6.3 Delete pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pia instance entry portid  vlan 
5.20.6.4 Modify pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pia instance entry portid  vlan  [ profileid
 ] [ status enable | disable ] [ vsatag disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboptionbitmask aci | PortId | None | None ] [ acival
 ] [ raival  ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None | None ] [ iwftagfromclientact drop | forward ] [ insertiwfsubop enable |
disable ] [ portno  ]

526

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Bridge Port Identifier
Type:

Create

Get

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 194
vlan 

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual
VLAN
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095
profileid

PIA profile identifier. This shall be used for this PIA



Instance
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
status enable | disable

Used to enable or disable PPPOE intermmediate agent for
this instance
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: disable
vsatag disable |

This specifies the action to be performed on VSA Tag on

AddAlways |

receiving PPPoE discovery packets for this instance. If

AddIfNotExists

disabled PIA will not add VSA tag to the PPPoE packets. If
AddAlways is set then VSA tag is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then VSA tag is added only if the
received packet does not contain the VSA tag.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: AddAlways
configsuboptionbitm

This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are

ask aci | PortId | None |

configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this

None

bitmask will overwrite the automatically derived values of
agent circuit Id and/or port id by the values configured in
this MO.
Type:

IP DSLAM

Create

-- Optional

527

Modify --

Optional

Default value: None
acival 

This is use to configure Agent Circuit Id for this instance. If
ACI bit is set in gsvPiaConfigSubOptionBitmask then this
parameter will overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
raival 

This is used to configure Remote Agent Id for this instance.
This parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the
associated access loop logical port on Columbia.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"
syncratefields

This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop

ActualDataRateupstrm

characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop

|

characteristic suboption.

ActualDataRatednstrm

Type:

| MinDataRateupstrm |

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateups
trm |
AttainableDataRatedns
trm |
MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm |
MinLpDataRateupstrm
|
MinLpDataRatednstrm
| MaxDelayupstrm |
ActualDelayupstrm |
MaxDelaydnstrm |
ActualDelaydnstrm |
None | None
iwftagfromclientact

This field specifies the Action to be taken on receiving

drop | forward

PPPoE discovery msg with IWF suboption from client. It
can be configured as either drop or forward. Default action
is to drop the packet silently.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: drop

528

IDL series User Guide

insertiwfsubop enable

This is used to indicate whether to add IWF suboption to

| disable

Columbia originated PPPoE discovery packets received for
this instance. This field is valid only for PPPOAE interface.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
portno 

This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered
only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: \0

Example:
$ create pia instance entry portid 1 vlan 1 profileid 1 status enable vsatag
AddAlways configsuboptionbitmask aci acival "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33î (slot = 3,
port = 10, vpi = 100, vci = 33)" raival "conexant noida" syncratefields
ActualDelaydnstrm iwftagfromclientact drop insertiwfsubop enable portno 10
Auto Output
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created

Port Id
Profile Id
PIAVsaOption

:1
:1

VLAN

:1

PIA status : enable
: AddAlways

Config Sub Options Bitmask : aci
Agent Circuit Id
Remote Agent Id

: "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33î (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi = 100, vci = 33)"
: "conexant noida"

SyncRateInfoField Bitmask : ActualDelaydnstrm
Act for IWFTag From Client : drop
Insert Iwf Subop

: enable

Port No

: 10

VCI

: 33

L2 type
Encap Type

VPI

: 100

: Eth
: Llcmux

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

IP DSLAM

529

Output field:
Field

Description

Port Id

Bridge Port Identifier

VLAN

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual
VLAN

Profile Id

PIA profile identifier. This shall be used for this PIA
Instance

PIA status

Used to enable or disable PPPOE intermmediate agent
for this instance

PIAVsaOption

This specifies the action to be performed on VSA Tag on
receiving PPPoE discovery packets for this instance. If
disabled PIA will not add VSA tag to the PPPoE packets.
If AddAlways is set then VSA tag is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then VSA tag is added only if the
received packet does not contain the VSA tag.

Config Sub Options

This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are

Bitmask

configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this
bitmask will overwrite the automatically derived values of
agent circuit Id and/or port id by the values configured in
this MO.

Agent Circuit Id

This is use to configure Agent Circuit Id for this instance.
If ACI bit is set in gsvPiaConfigSubOptionBitmask then
this parameter will overwrite the generated Agent Circuit
Id

Remote Agent Id

This is used to configure Remote Agent Id for this
instance. This parameter uniquely identifies the
subscriber on the associated access loop logical port on
Columbia.

SyncRateInfoField

This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop

Bitmask

characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop
characteristic suboption.

Act for IWFTag From

This field specifies the Action to be taken on receiving

Client

PPPoE discovery msg with IWF suboption from client. It
can be configured as either drop or forward. Default
action is to drop the packet silently.

Insert Iwf Subop

This is used to indicate whether to add IWF suboption to
Columbia originated PPPoE discovery packets received
for this instance. This field is valid only for PPPOAE
interface.

Port No

530

This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is

IDL series User Guide

considered only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
VCI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge

VCI

port for this instance is created
VPI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge

VPI

port for this instance is created
L2 type

This Parameter specifies the L2 type used

Encap Type

This Parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the
aal5 VC corresponding the bridge port for which this
instance is created

References:
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands

5.20.7 Pia stats entry Commands
5.20.7.1 Get pia stats entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pia stats entry [portid ] [vlan ]
5.20.7.2 Reset pia stats entry
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset pia stats entry portid  vlan 
Parameters:
Name

Description

portid 

Bridge port Identifier
Type:

Reset
Get

--

-- Mandatory
Optional

Valid values: 1 - 194

IP DSLAM

531

vlan 

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is
virtual VLAN
Type:

Reset
Get

--

-- Mandatory
Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095
Additional Values: 4097

Example:
$ get pia stats entry portid 1 vlan 1
Output:
Port Id
:1
Padi Received : 10
Padr Received : 4354

VLAN
:1
Padi Discarded : 4354
Padr Discarded : 4354

Output field:
Field

Description

Port Id

Bridge port Identifier

VLAN

VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is
virtual VLAN

Padi Received

Number of PADI received for this instance

Padi Discarded

Number of PADI discarded for this instance

Padr Received

Number of PADR received for this instance

Padr Discarded

Number of PADR packets discarded for this
instance

References:
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands

5.20.8 Pia global config Commands
5.20.8.1 Get pia global config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pia global config

532

IDL series User Guide

5.20.8.2 Modify pia global config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pia global config [status Enable | Disable]
Parameters:
Name

Description

status Enable | Disable

Global status of PIA
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Example:
$ get pia global Config
Output:
PIA global Status : Enable
Output field:
Field

Description

PIA global Status

Global status of PIA

References:
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands

IP DSLAM

533

5.21 QoS Commands
5.21.1 IRL Map Commands
5.21.1.1 Get irl map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get irl map [ifname ]
5.21.1.2 Create irl map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create irl map ifname < interface-name > profilename 
5.21.1.3 Delete irl map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete irl map ifname < interface-name >
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname < interface-name

Interface Name whose IRL mapping information is to be

>

configured.
Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*
Type :

Create

Mandatory

Delete Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: ND - ND
profilename

Specifies the name of the IRL profile to be associated with the



interface. String of up to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_')
and any combination of printable characters excluding ';'
Type: Create Mandatory

534

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ create irl map ifname aal5-0 profilename gold
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface Profile Name
-----------------------------------------------------------aal5-0
gold
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Interface

Interface Name whose IRL mapping information
is to be configured. Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*

Profile Name

Specifies the name of the IRL profile to be
associated with the interface. String of up to 64
characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any
combination of printable characters excluding ';'

5.21.2 IRL Profile Commands
5.21.2.1 Get irl profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get irl profile [profilename ]
5.21.2.2 Create irl profile
Description:
Use this command to create.

IP DSLAM

535

Command Syntax:
create irl profile profilename  [ irltype sr2cm | trtcm] [ cir
 ] [ cbs  ] [ pir  ] [ pbs  ] [ conformaction
 ] [ exceedaction drop |coloryellow ] [violateaction drop |
coloryellow ]
5.21.2.3 Delete irl profile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete irl profile profilename 
5.21.2.4 Modify irl profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify irl profile profilename  [ irltype sr2cm | trtcm] [ cir
 ] [ cbs  ] [ pir  ] [ pbs  ] [ conformaction
] [ exceedaction drop |coloryellow ] [violateaction drop |
coloryellow ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profilename

Profile name uniquely identify an IRL profile in the system. String of up



to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any combination of
printable characters excluding ';'.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: ND - ND

irltype sr2cm | trtcm

This field specifies the type of IRL. Two types of IRLs are supported.
Single Rate Two Color Marker (sr2cm) and Two Rate Three Color
Marker (trtcm).
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: trtcm

536

IDL series User Guide

cir 

Committed Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field is valid for
both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles.

The value of this field cannot be

more than PIR.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value:0-16000
cbs 

Committed Burst Size of the IRL in bytes. This field is valid in both
sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles. The value of this field cannot be
more than PBS in case of trTcm.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 96-10000
Default value: 7500

pir 

Peak Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field is valid only for
trtcm type of profile. The value of this field cannot be less than CIR.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 96-16000
Default value: 1000

pbs 

Peak burst size of the IRL in bytes. This field is valid only for trtcm type
of profile. The value of this field cannot be less than CBS.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 96-15000
Default value: 10000

conformaction

Color type to be applied for conforming packets. This field is valid in

colorgreen

both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: colorgreen

exceedaction drop |

Color for exceeding packets. This field is valid only for trtcm type of

coloryellow

profiles
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
efault value: coloryellow

violateaction drop |

Color type to be applied for violating packets. This field is valid in both

coloryellow

sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: drop

IP DSLAM

537

Example:
$ create irl profile profilename gold irltype trtcm cir 1000 cbs 400 pir 2000 pbs
12000 conformaction colorgreen exceedaction coloryellow violateaction drop
Output:
Output field:
Field

Description

Profile name

Profile name uniquely identifies an IRL profile in
the system. String of up to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z',
'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any combination of printable
characters excluding ';'.

Profile Type

This field specifies the type of IRL. Two type of
IRLs are supported. Single Rate Two Color Marker
(sr2cm) and Two Rate Three Color Marker (trtcm).

CIR(kbps)

Committed Information Rate of the IRL in kbps.
This field is valid for both sr2cm and trtcm type of
profiles. The value of this field cannot be more
than PIR.

CBS(bytes)

Committed Burst Size of the IRL in bytes. This field
is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles.
The value of this field cannot be more than PBS in
case of trTcm.

PIR(kbps)

Peak Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field
is valid only for trtcm type of profile. The value of
this field cannot be less than CIR.

PBS(bytes)

Peak burst size of the IRL in bytes. This field is
valid only for trtcm type of profile. The value of
this field cannot be less than CBS.

Conform action

Color type to be applied for conforming packets.
This field is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of
profiles.

Exceed action

Color for exceeding packets. This field is valid only
for trtcm type of profiles.

Violate action

Color type to be applied for violating packets. This
field is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles

References:
z
IRL Commands

538

IDL series User Guide

5.21.3 IRL Stats Commands
5.21.3.1 Get irl stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get irl stats [ifname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
Interface Name whose IRL statistics are
requested.

ifname
Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*.

Type : Get -- Optional
Valid values : ND - ND

Example:
$ get irl stats

ifname aal5-0

Output:
Interface
: aal5-0
Num packets exceeded : 300

Num packets violated : 100
Num packets conformed : 1000

Output field:
Field

Description
Interface Name whose IRL statistics are

Interface
requested.
Num packets violated

Number of packets that violated PIR in case of
trTcm. In case of crTcm it is the number of packets
violating CIR.

Num packets

Number of packets that exceeded CIR. This field is

exceeded

valid only for trtcm type of profiles.

Num packets
Number of packets that conformed to CIR.
conformed

References:
z
IRL Commands

IP DSLAM

539

5.21.4 Bridge rlin stance map Commands
5.21.4.1 Get bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge rlinstance map [portid ]
[flowtype  | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast]

5.21.4.2 Create bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create bridge rlinstance map portid
flowtype | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast |
instanceid 

5.21.4.3 Delete bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: delete bridge rlinstance map portid 
flowtype  | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast

5.21.4.4 Modify bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify bridge rlinstance map portid
flowtype | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast
[instanceid ]
Parameters
Name

Description

portid 

Bridge Port Identifier with which an instance is
associated. If the value of this field is 'All', it
indicates all bridge ports. For a particular flow,
instance map cannot be created both for a specific
port as well as for 'all' the bridge ports.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 194

540

IDL series User Guide

flowtype

This field identifies the flow for which this instance

| bcast |

is applied. Three flow types are reserved for

unregmcast |

broadcast, unregistered multicast and unknown

unknownucast

unicast traffic. The other user defined flows are
identified by filtering rules by associating flow type
with a rule action of type 'ratelimiter'.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 16 - 32
instanceid

This field identifies the Rate limiting instance.



Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 250

Example:
$ create bridge rlinstance map portid 6 flowtype bcast instanceid 1 configstatus
Auto
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id
:6
Flow Type
: bcast
Instance Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Port Id

Bridge Port Identifier with which an instance is associated.
If the value of this field is 'All', it indicates all bridge ports.
For a particular flow, instance map cannot be created both
for a specific port as well as for 'all' the bridge ports.

Flow Type

This field identifies the flow for which this instance is
applied. Three flow types are reserved for broadcast,
unregistered multicast and unknown unicast traffic. The

IP DSLAM

541

other user defined flows are identified by filtering rules by
associating flow type with a rule action of type 'ratelimiter'.
Instance Id

This field identifies the Rate limiting instance.

Cautions:
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE and IPOE interface.

5.21.5 Rl actionprofile info Commands
5.21.5.1 Get rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rl actionprofile info [profileid ] [result conform | exceed |
violate] [action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos |
setbaclevel]
5.21.5.2 Create rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rl actionprofile info profileid  result conform | exceed |
violate action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel
[actionval ] [actionmask ] [description
]
5.21.5.3 Delete rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get rl actionprofile info profileid result conform | exceed | violate
action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel

542

IDL series User Guide

5.21.5.4 Modify rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify rl actionprofile info profileid  result conform | exceed |
violate action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel
[actionval ] [actionmask ] [description
]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid

Rate limiter's action profile identifier, which uniquely identifies



the action profile.
Type:

Create

Get

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 32
result conform |

The result type for which action is configured to be taken.

exceed | violate

Multiple actions can be configured for a result type.There shall
be multiple entries with same profile identifier and a result type if
multiple actions are configured for the result type. If there is no
entry configured for a result type, the action is assumed to be
'allow' for that result.
Type:

Create

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

action drop | allow |

Action to be taken on the packet.

sendtocontrol |

Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

copytocontrol |

Delete --

Mandatory

modifytos | setbaclevel

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

IP DSLAM

-- Mandatory

--

Optional

543

actionval

The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that



require an additional input.For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol
actions this parameter should contain control flow id (0 - 3).
Other values are invalid for this action. For modifytos action this
parameter should contain value to be set in tos field in the
packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this
action. The application of this value is dependent on the mask
field. For setbaclevel action this parameter should contain Buffer
Admission Control level 0 or 1. Other values are invalid for this
action. This parameter is ignored for other actions.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0
actionmask

This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos



actions only.For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this
parameter should contain trap disabled (0xffffffff) or trap enabled
(0x00000000). Other values are invalid for this action.Only lower
8-bits are taken into consideration for modifytos action and other
bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then the
corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
description

Description of the application that receives packets matching



this RL. This field is mandatory if Action is 'sendtocontrol' or
'copytocontrol'.The description string should not begin with
underscore '_' as it is reserved for special usage e.g.
_PPPOE_CONTROL.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\0"

Example:
$ create rl actionprofile info profileid 1 result conform action copytocontrol actionval
0x00000000 actionmask 0xffffffff description lacp

544

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Action Profile Id : 1
Action Result
: conform
Profile Action
: copytocontrolActionVal
: 0x00000000
Action Mask
: 0xffffffff Application Description : lacp
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Action Profile Id

Rate limiter's action profile identifier, which
uniquely identifies the action profile.

Action Result

The result type for which action is configured to be
taken. Multiple actions can be configured for a
result type.There shall be multiple entries with
same profile identifier and a result type if multiple
actions are configured for the result type. If there is
no entry configured for a result type, the action is
assumed to be 'allow' for that result.

Profile Action

Action to be taken on the packet.

ActionVal

The parameter should contain valid value for some
actions that require an additional input.For
sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this
parameter should contain control flow id (0 - 3).
Other values are invalid for this action. For
modifytos action this parameter should contain
value to be set in tos field in the packet in the
range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this
action. The application of this value is dependent
on the mask field. For setbaclevel action this
parameter should contain Buffer Admission
Control level 0 or 1. Other values are invalid for
this action. This parameter is ignored for other
actions.

Action Mask

This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol
and modifytos actions only.For sendtocontrol and
copytocontrol actions this parameter should

IP DSLAM

545

contain trap disabled (0xffffffff) or trap enabled
(0x00000000). Other values are invalid for this
action.Only lower 8-bits are taken into
consideration for modifytos action and other bits
are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1,
then the corresponding bit in the TOS field is
overwritten with the corresponding bit in action
value. In the mask if a bit location contains 0, then
the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
Application

Description of the application that receives packets

Description

matching this RL. This field is mandatory if Action
is 'sendtocontrol' or 'copytocontrol'.The description
string should not begin with underscore '_' as it is
reserved for special usage e.g.
_PPPOE_CONTROL.

5.21.6 Rl instance info Commands
5.21.6.1 Get rl instance info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rl instance info [instanceid ]
5.21.6.2 Create rl instance info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rl instance info instanceid  profileid 
actionprofileid 
5.21.6.3 Delete rl instance info
Description:
Use this command to delete.

546

IDL series User Guide

Command Syntax:
delete rl instance info instanceid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

instanceid

Rate limiter instance identifier, which uniquely



identifies a rate limiter instance.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 250
profileid

This field identifies the rate limiter instance's



configuration profile. The rate limiter's algorithm
and associated parameters are based on the
configuration profile.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 16
actionprofileid

This field identifies the rate limiter instance's action



profile. The rate limiter's actions on a packet
depending on the result are based on the action
profile.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 32

Example:
$ create rl instance info instanceid 3 profileid 2 actionprofileid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Instance Id : 3
Profile Id : 2

Action Profile Id : 1

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

IP DSLAM

547

Output field:
Field

Description

Instance Id

Rate limiter instance identifier, which uniquely identifies
a rate limiter instance.

Profile Id

This field identifies the rate limiter instance's
configuration profile. The rate limiter's algorithm and
associated parameters are based on the configuration
profile.

Action Profile Id

This field identifies the rate limiter instance's action
profile. The rate limiter's actions on a packet depending
on the result are based on the action profile.

5.21.7 Rl profile info Commands
5.21.7.1 Get rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rl profile info [profileid ]
5.21.7.2 Create rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to create
Command Syntax:
create rl profile info profileid  [ rate  ] [ mbs  ]
[ level packet | byte ] [ type sr2cm | trtcm ] [ peakrate  ] [ pbs
 ]
5.21.7.3 Delete rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get rl profile info profileid 

548

IDL series User Guide

5.21.7.4 Modify rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify rl profile info profileid  [ rate  ] [ mbs  ]
[ level packet | byte ] [ type sr2cm | trtcm ] [ peakrate  ] [ pbs
 ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid

Rate limiter's configuration profile identifier,



whichuniquely identifies the configuration profile. The
configuration profile contains all parameters required
for rate limiting algorithm to operate.
Type:

Create

Get

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 16
rate 

This field defines the committed information rate. If
'level' is 'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second. If
'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is bits per second.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 100000000
Default value: 100000000
mbs 

This field defines the committed burst size. If 'level' is
'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If 'level' is
'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: 4 - 65535
Default value: 65535

IP DSLAM

549

level packet | byte

Level of the rate limiter identifies whether the algorithm
executes in terms of number of packets or number of
bytes.If the 'level' is 'packet'(1), rate is configured in
terms of packets per second and burst size is
configured in terms of number of packets.If the 'level' is
'byte'(2), rate is configured in terms of bits per second
and burst size is configured in terms of number of
bytes.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: packet
type sr2cm | trtcm

Type identifies the algorithm for rate limiting.The sr2cm
(single rate two color marker) is a single-rate algorithm.
It takes rate and burst size as input parameters.The
trtcm (two rate three color marker) is a dual-rate
algorithm. It takes two sets of rate and burstsize as
inputs, one each for peak and committed information.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: sr2cm
peakrate

This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This field

peakrate-val>

defines the peak information rate. If 'level' is 'packet'(1),
the unit is packets per second. If level is byte, the unit is
bits per second.
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 100000000
Default value: 100000000
pbs 

This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This field
defines the peak burst size. If 'level' is 'packet'(1), the
unit is number of packets. If 'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is
number of bytes.
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Valid values: 4 - 65535
Default value: 65535

Example:
$ create rl profile info profileid 1 rate 24 mbs 24 level packet type trtcm peakrate 30
pbs 30

550

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1
Level
: packet
Rate
: 24
Peak Rate : 30
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Type
: trtcm
Max Burst Size
: 24
Peak Max Burst Size : 30

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Id

Rate limiter's configuration profile identifier,
whichuniquely identifies the configuration profile.
The configuration profile contains all parameters
required for rate limiting algorithm to operate.

Level

Level of the rate limiter identifies whether the
algorithm executes in terms of number of packets
or number of bytes.If the 'level' is 'packet'(1), rate is
configured in terms of packets per second and
burst size is configured in terms of number of
packets.If the 'level' is 'byte'(2), rate is configured
in terms of bits per second and burst size is
configured in terms of number of bytes.

Type

Type identifies the algorithm for rate limiting.The
sr2cm (single rate two color marker) is a
single-rate algorithm. It takes rate and burst size
as input parameters.The trtcm (two rate three color
marker) is a dual-rate algorithm. It takes two sets
of rate and burstsize as inputs, one each for peak
and committed information.

Rate

This field defines the committed information rate. If
'level' is 'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second.
If 'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is bits per second.

Max Burst Size

This field defines the committed burst size. If 'level'
is 'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If
'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.

Peak Rate

This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This
field defines the peak information rate. If 'level' is
'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second. If level

IP DSLAM

551

is byte, the unit is bits per second.
Peak Max Burst Size

This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This
field defines the peak burst size. If 'level' is
'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If 'level'
is 'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.

5.21.8 Scheduling profile class Commands
5.21.8.1 Get sched profile class
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sched profile class [name ] [classid ]
5.21.8.2 Modify sched profile class
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify sched profile class name  classid  [param1
] [param2 ] [param3 ] [param4
] [param5 ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
Name of the scheduling profile.

name 

Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

Scheduling profile class identifier
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
classid 
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1－ 8
This specifies the first parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
param1 

the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the weight of the class
queue on the scale of 1-100. Value 100 means

552

IDL series User Guide

Strict Priority in PP scheduling profile.This weight
will be normalized with the sum of all classId
weights. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the excess bandwidth
sharing weight of the class on the scale of 1-100.
If for a class, both Minimum bandwidth and the
Excess sharing weight are configured as zero,
then the queue shall never be scheduled. Default
value of this parameter is calculated as (classid *
10). The default value listed is only an indicative
value.
Type: Modify － Optional

param2 

This specifies the second parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the Minimum bandwidth in
Kbps. Value zero means no minimum bandwidth
guarantee for the class.
Type: Modify － Optional

param3 

This specifies the third parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the Maximum bandwidth
limit in Kbps for the class. Value zero means no
maximum bandwidth limit for the class.
Type: Modify － Optional

param4 

This specifies the fourth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
Type: Modify -- Optional

param5 

This specifies the fifth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
Type: Modify － Optional

IP DSLAM

553

Example:
$ get sched profile class name gold classid 1
Output:
Profile Name
: gold
Class Id
:1
Profile Class Param1 : 20
Profile Class Param3 : 25
Profile Class Param5 : 25

Profile Class Param2 : 25
Profile Class Param4 : 0

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Name

Name of the scheduling profile

Class Id

Scheduling profile class identifier
This specifies the first parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the weight of the class
queue on the scale of 1-100. Value 100 means
Strict Priority in PP scheduling profile.This weight
will be normalized with the sum of all classId
weights. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this

Profile Class Param1
parameter specifies the excess bandwidth
sharing weight of the class on the scale of 1-100.
If for a class, both Minimum bandwidth and the
Excess sharing weight are configured as zero,
then the queue shall never be scheduled. Default
value of this parameter is calculated as (classid *
10). The default value listed is only an indicative
value.
This specifies the second parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
Profile Class Param2

ignored.
For Custom scheduling algorithm, this parameter
specifies the Minimum bandwidth in Kbps. Value
zero means no minimum bandwidth guarantee
for the class.

Profile Class Param3

This specifies the third parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of

554

IDL series User Guide

the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored.
For Custom scheduling algorithm, this parameter
specifies the Maximum bandwidth limit in Kbps
for the class. Value zero means no maximum
bandwidth limit for the class.
This specifies the fourth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
Profile Class Param4
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
This specifies the fifth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
Profile Class Param5
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.

References:
z
Scheduling profile related commands

5.21.9 Scheduling profile info Commands
5.21.9.1 Get sched profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sched profile info [name ]
5.21.9.2 Create sched profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create sched profile info name  [algo pp | custom] iftype eth| atm

IP DSLAM

555

5.21.9.3 Delete sched profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete sched profile info name 
Parameters:
Name

Description
Name of the scheduling profile
Type: Create － Mandatory

name 

Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

Scheduling algorithm of the profile. Currently only
Proabalistic Priority is supported over ethernet and custom is
supported over ATM. In Proabalistic Priority algorithm, the
traffic class parameter determines the probablity with which
its corresponding queue is served when it is polled by the
algo pp | custom

server. In Custom algorithm, user shall have flexibility to
assign minimum rate, maximum rate, and excess bandwidth
sharing weight for classes and the scheduling shall be done
based on these parameters among classes.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: pp

The type of the interface Ethernet/ATM port for which the
iftype eth | atm

scheduling profile is applicable.
Type: Create － Mandatory

Example:
$ create sched profile info name gold algo pp iftype atm
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name
Scheduling Algorithm
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

556

: gold
: pp

Interface Type : eth

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Name

Name of the scheduling profile
Scheduling algorithm of the profile. Currently only
Proabalistic Priority is supported over ethernet and
custom is supported over ATM. In Proabalistic
Priority algorithm, the traffic class parameter
determines the probablity with which its

Scheduling
corresponding queue is served when it is polled by
Algorithm
the server. In Custom algorithm, user shall have
flexibility to assign minimum rate, maximum rate,
and excess bandwidth sharing weight for classes
and the scheduling shall be done based on these
parameters among classes.
The type of the interface Ethernet/ATM port for
Interface Type
which the scheduling profile is applicable.

Caution:
z
For a scheduling profile that has iftype as atm, upto 8 classes can be
configured, while for a scheduling profile that has iftype as eth, 8 classes can be
configured.
References:
z
Scheduling profile related commands.

5.21.10 Trfclass profile class Commands
5.21.10.1 Get trfclass profile class
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass profile class [profileid ] [classid ]

IP DSLAM

557

5.21.10.2 Modify trfclass profile class
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:modify trfclass profile class profileid classid
 [size ] [thrshld1 ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Traffic class profile identifier.
Type:

Modify

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 10
classid 

Traffic class profile class identifier.
Type:

Modify

-- Mandatory

Get
size 

--

Optional

This parameter specifies the size of the Traffic
class.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

thrshld1

This parameter specifies the low threshold of the



queue, as a percentage of the queue size. When
the queue is full beyond this threshold, only
conforming frames are passed and
non-conforming frames are dropped. Conformance
of frames is determined as per IRL configured on
input the ATM port.
Type:

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 100

Example:
$ get trfclass profile class profileid 1 classid 1
Output:
Profile Identifier
:1
Traffic Class Param Size : 32

558

Class Id
:1
Traffic Class Param Thresh : 50

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Identifier

Traffic class profile identifier.

Class Id

Traffic class profile class identifier.

Traffic Class Param Size

This parameter specifies the size of the Traffic class.

Traffic Class Param Thresh

This parameter specifies the low threshold of the queue, as a
percentage of the queue size. When the queue is full beyond
this threshold, only conforming frames are passed and
non-conforming frames are dropped. Conformance of frames is
determined as per IRL configured on input the ATM port.

References:
z
See traffic class profile related commands.

5.21.11 Trfclass profile info Commands
5.21.11.1 Get trfclass profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass profile info [profileid ]
5.21.11.2 Create trfclass profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
create trfclass profile info profileid  iftype eth | atm
5.21.11.3 Delete trfclass profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass profile info profileid 

IP DSLAM

559

Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Traffic class profile identifier.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 10
iftype eth | atm

Interface type.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Example:
$ create trfclass profile info profileid 3 iftype eth
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile identifier : 3

Interface Type : eth

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Profile identifier

Traffic class profile identifier.

Interface Type

Interface type.

5.21.12 Trfclass stats Commands
5.21.12.1 Get trfclass stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass stats [ifname ] [classid ]

560

IDL series User Guide

5.21.12.2 Reset trfclass stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
reset trfclass stats [ifname ] [classid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

Interface name
Type:

Reset
Get

classid 

-- Mandatory

--

Optional

Traffic class identifier
Type:

Reset

-- Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Example:
$ get trfclass stats ifname 149 classid 1
Output:
Interface Name : 149
NumDiscardPkts : 10

Class Id : 1

Output field:

IP DSLAM

Field

Description

Interface Name

Interface name

Class Id

Traffic class identifier

NumDiscardPkts

Number of packets discarded

561

5.22 RMON Commands
5.22.1 RMON Statistics Group Commands
5.22.1.1 Create srmon probe
Description:
Use this command to create RMON probe.
Command Syntax:
create srmon probe rindex  ifname  owner

5.22.1.2 Delete srmon probe
Description:
Use this command to delete the RMON probe.
Command Syntax:
delete srmon probe rindex 
5.22.1.3 Get srmon probe
Description:
Use this command to get RMON probe information and statistics.
Command Syntax:
get srmon probe [rindex ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

rindex 

Unique identifier of the probe.
Type: Create – Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Get - Optional
Valid values : 0 －20

Ifname

This specifies the Interface name.



Type: Create – Mandatory
Valid values : eoa-0 - *, eth-0-*

owner 

The entity that configured this probe, and is
therefore using the resources assigned to it.

562

IDL series User Guide

Type : Create – Mandatory
Valid values: Strings of up to 64 ASCII
characters.

Example:
$ get srmon probe rindex 1
Output :
Verbose Mode On
RMON Probe Index
:1
If-Name
: eth-0
Total Octets
: 800
Total Broadcast Packets : 138
Total 64 Octets
: 100
Total 128-255 Octets
: 200
Total 512-1023 Octets : 50

Stats Owner
: Conexant
Total Packets
: 200
Total Multicast Packets : 200
Total 65-127 Octets
: 200
Total 256-511 Octets
: 300
Total 1024-1518 Octets : 100

Output field:
Field

Description

RMON Probe Index

Unique identifier of RMON probe.

If-Name

This specifies the Interface name. It can be :
eoa-0 - *, eth-*

Stats Owner

The entity that configured this entry and is
therefore using the resources assigned to it.

Total Octets

The total number of octets of data (including
those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Total Packets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.

Total Broadcast

The total number of good packets received, that

Packets

were directed to the broadcast address.

Total Multicast Packets

The total number of good packets received, that
were directed to a multicast address.

Total 64 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received, that were 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Total 65-127 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received, that were between 65 and
127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing

IP DSLAM

563

bits but including FCS octets).
Total 128-255 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 128 and
255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).

Total 256-511 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 256 and
511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).

Total 512-1023 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 512 and
1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).

Total 1024-1518 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 1024 and
1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).

Caution:
z
This command is not supported on an EoA interface for which ConfigStatus is
set to Config.

5.22.2 RMON Task Info Commands
5.22.2.1 Get rmon task
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rmon task [rname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Rname< taskname>

This parameter specifies the name of a particular
task.
Valid values: Any task name present in the
system.

564

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ get rmon task taskname tsk1
Output:
Name
: TSK1
Status
Sched Count
:1
Priority
Preempt
: Yes
Time Slice
Stack Base
: 0x520cc18
Stack Size
CleanStackSize : 14080
LastSchedTime : Thu Jan 01 00:00:08 1970-

: EVENT SUSPEND
: 10
:0
: 2048

Output field:
Field

Description

Name

This parameter specifies the name of the task.

Status

This parameters specifies the status of the task. The task
can in ready state, terminated state, suspended state or
finished state.

Sched Count

This parameter specifies the Schedule count of the task i.e.
number of times the task has been scheduled.

Priority

This parameter tells the priority of the task.

Preempt

This parameter tells whether the task preemption is allowed
or not. If the value is yes then task can be preempted .If the
value is No , then task can not be preempted.

Time Slice

This parameters tell the time slice of the task. If this value is
zero, it means that time slicing is disabled for this task.

Stack Base

This parameter specifies the base address (starting
address) of the stack associated with this task. The stack of
the task would span from the address as given by Stack
Base till the address as given by (Stack Base + Stack Size).
Note that the stack grows from the address as given by
(Stack Base + Stack Size) towards Stack Base.

Stack Size

This parameters tells the total number of bytes in the task's
stack.

CleanStackSize

This Parameter tells the free stack size i.e. the number of
bytes that have never been accessed in the stack of task.
Basically this gives an idea of the stack watermark.

LastSchedTime

This parameter tells the system time at which the task was
lastly scheduled.

IP DSLAM

565

5.22.3 RMON Memory Pool Info Commands
5.22.3.1 Get rmon mpool
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rmon mpool [rname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

rname mpool

This parameter specifies the name of a particular memory pool.
Valid values : Any memory pool

name present in the system.

A user can also give first few characeters of a memory pool
name. In that case all the memory pools whose name start with
those characters shall be displayed.

Example 1:
For variable size memory pool
$ get rmon mpool DCLFR113
Output:
Name
: DCLFR113
Size
: 5392
Min
: 16
Free
: 5360
Tasks Waiting
:0
Suspend Type
: FIFO
StartAddr
: 0x147b7d28
FirstTaskName
:FirstAllocator
: CLFR
LastAllocator
: CLFR
LastDellocater
: CLFR
LastFailUser
:LastFailDellocater : WaterMark
: 84
TotalMemAlloc
: 52
TotalMemFree
: 52
MemAllocFailCount : 0
MemFreeFailCount
:0
MPoolType
: DYNAMIC
Threshold
: 5392
Threhold Count
:0
LastMemAllocTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:01:08 1970
LastMemFreeTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:02:18 1970
LastMemAllocFailTime: LastMemFreeFailTime : ThresholdHitTime
:-

566

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Name

Name of the memory pool. For fixed size pool,
the name starts with 'D'.

Size

Size of memory pool i.e.number of bytes

in the

pool.
Min

Minimum number of bytes for each allocation
from this pool.

Free

Number of free bytes in the pool i.e. Number of
bytes that are available in the pool for allocation
and has not been yet allocated.

Task Waiting

Number of tasks waiting on this pool.

Suspend Type

The task suspended type. Task suspend type on
a memory pool can be either FIFO (First In First
Out) or Priority.

Start Addr

The Starting Address of the memory pool.

FirstTaskName

Name of the first suspended task on this memory
pool.

FirstAllocator

Name of the module which has firstly allocated
memory from the pool.

LastAllocator

Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most
recently) allocted memory from the pool.

LastDellocater

Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most
recently)deallocated memory to the pool.

LastFailAllocator

Name of the module which has lastly failed to
allocate the memory from the pool.

LastFailDeallocator

Name of the module which has lastly failed to
deallocate the memory to the pool.

WaterMark

WaterMark of the memorypool i.e. the maximum
amount of memory that has been allocated from
the memory pool at some point in time.

TotalMemAlloc

Total amount of memory allocated from the
memory pool (since its creation ). This field is a
running counter and it only increments. When the
memory is freed this field is not decremented
rather the TotalMemFree field is incremented.

TotalMemFree

Total amount of memory that has been
deallocted from the memory pool (since its
creation). This is also a running counter.

MemAllocFailCount

IP DSLAM

The number of times memory allocation from this

567

pool has been failed.
MemFreeFailCount

The number of times the memory deallocation to
the pool has been failed.

MPoolType

Type of the pool. If the value is DYNAMIC , the
memory pool is of variable size . If it is
PARTITION, it is fixed type memory pool.

Threshold

Threshold Value set for the memory pool, in
number of bytes.

ThresholdCOunt

Number of times the threshold value has been hit
for this memory pool.

LastMemAllocTime

The system time when memory was lastly
allocated from the pool.

LastMemFreeTime

The system time when memory was lastly freed
into the pool.

LastMemAllocFailTime

The system time when the last memory
allocation from the pool has failed.

LastMemFreeFailTime

The system time when the last memory
deallocation has failed.

ThresholdHitTime

The system time when threshold of the pool has
hit most recently.

Example 2:
For fixed size memory pool
$ get rmon mpool FTSK142
Output:
Name
: FTSK142
Size
: 280
Partion Size
: 20
Allocated
:1
Free
:9
Tasks Waiting
:0
Suspend Type
: FIFO
StartAddr
: 0x5307e40
FirstTaskName
:FirstAllocator
: TSK1
LastAllocator
: TSK1
LastDellocater
: TSK1
LastFailUser
:LastFailDellocater : WaterMark
: 84
TotalMemAlloc
:3
TotalMemFree
:2
MemAllocFailCount : 0
MemFreeFailCount
:0
MPoolType
: PARTTION
Threshold
: 280
Threhold Count
:0
LastMemAllocTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:02:34 1970
LastMemFreeTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:02:49 1970

568

IDL series User Guide

LastMemAllocFailTime: LastMemFreeFailTime : ThresholdHitTime
:Output field:
Field

Description

Name

Name of the memory pool. For fixed size pool,
the name starts with 'F'.

Size

Size of memory pool i.e.number of bytes

in the

pool.
Partition Size

Partition size specifies

the size of each partition

in bytes.
Allocated

Number of partitions allocated.

Free

Number of free partitions

in the pool i.e.

Number of partitions that are available in the pool
for allocation and has not been yet allocated.
Task Waiting

Number of tasks waiting on this pool.

Suspend Type

The task suspended type. Task suspend type on
a memory pool can be either FIFO (First In First
Out) or Priority.

StartAddr

The Starting Address of the memory pool.

FirstTaskName

Name of the first suspended task on this memory
pool.

FirstAllocator

Name of the module which has firstly allocated
partition from the pool.

LastAllocator

Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most
recently) allocted partition from the pool.

LastDellocater

Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most
recently) freed the partition to the pool.

LastFailUser

Name of the module which has lastly failed to
allocate the partition from the pool.

LastFailDellocater

Name of the module which has lastly failed to
free the partition in to the pool.

WaterMark

WaterMark of the memorypool i.e. the maximum
amount of memory that has been allocated from
the memory pool at some point in time. This
figure (displayed in bytes) includes the memory
allocated as well as the overhead that nucleus
keeps while allocating partitions.

TotalmemAlloc

IP DSLAM

Total number of partitions allocated from the

569

memory pool (since its creation ). This is a
running counter, it always increments never
decrements.
TotalMemFree

Total number of partitions that has been freed
into the memory pool (since its creation). This is
a running counter, it always increments never
decrements.

MemAllocFailCount

The number of times partition allocation from this
pool has failed.

MemFreeFailCount

The number of times the partition deallocation to
the pool has failed.

MPoolType

Type of the pool. If the value is DYNAMIC , the
memory pool is of variable size . If it is
PARTITION, it is fixed type memory pool.

Threshold

Threshold Value set for the memory pool, in
number of bytes.

Threshold Count

Number of times the threshold value has been hit
for this memory pool.

LastMemAllocTime

The last system time when a partition has been
allocated from the pool.

LastMemFreeTime

The last system time when a partition has been
freed into the pool.

LastMemAllocFailTime

The last system time when the partition
allocation from the pool has failed.

LastMemFreeFailTime

The last system time when the partition
deallocation has failed.

ThresholdHitTime

The last system time when threshold of the pool
has hit.

5.22.3.2 Get rmon mpool threshold
Description:
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the memory pool. This
command will display 20 entries (maximum) .Events are logged for the memory
pool for the following 3 cases:
z
Mem Pool Allocation Fail.
z
Mem Pool Deallocation Fail.
z
Threshold Hit.

570

IDL series User Guide

Command Syntax:
get rmon mpool threshold
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon mpool threshold
Output:
Task Name : TSK1
Mpool Name : FTSK143
Pool Type : PARTITION
ThresholdHitTimeStamp :Thu Jan 01 00:20:53 1970
Event Type :
Allocation Fail
Output field:
Field

Description

Task Name

Name of the module which tries to allocate or
deallocate from memory pool during a critical
event.

MPool Name

The name of memory pool.

Pool Type

Type of memory pool. DYNAMIC for variable
size of memory pool and PARTITION for fixed
size memory pool.

ThresholdHitTimeStamp

The system time at which event logging is done.

Event Type

Cause of event logging.
Its value can be:
Allocation Fail - If allocation from pool has
failed.
Deallocation Fail - If deallocation from pool has
failed.
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of pool has
been hit while allocation.

IP DSLAM

571

5.22.3.3 Reset rmon mpool
Description:
Use this command to reset some parameters of memory pool. This command will
reset the following parameters of memory pool.
z
Set MemAllocFailCount value to zero.
z
Set MemFreeFailCount value to zero.
z
Set watermark value to the value of the currently allocated memory from that
pool.
z
Set ThresholdCount value to the zero.
Command Syntax:
reset rmon mpool
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ reset rmon mpool
Output Field:
None

5.22.4 RMON Queue Info Commands
5.22.4.1 Get rmon queue
Description:
Use this command to get the information about a particular queue or about all the
queues present in the system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon queue [rname ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

rname 

This parameter specifies the name of a particular
queue.
Valid values: Any queue name present in the
system.

572

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ get rmon queue rname tsk173
Output:
Name
: TSK173
Start Addr
: 0x520c700
Size
: 10
Available Size : 9
Pending Msgs
:1
Msg Type
: FIXED
Msg Size
:1
Suspend Type
: PRIORITY
Tasks Waiting
:0
FirstTaskName
:TotalMsgIn
:3
TotalMsgOut
:2
DropCount
:0
WaterMark
:3
LastMsgInFailPtr: 0x0
LastSender
: TSK2
LastRecvr
: TSK1
LastSenderFail : LastRecvFail
:ThreshHold
: 10
ThresholdHitCount: 0
LastMsgOutTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:04:17 1970
LastMsgInTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:03:50 1970
LastMsgOutFailTime : LastMsgInFailTime : ThresholdHitTime
:Output field:
Field

Description

Name

Name of the Queue.

Start Addr

The Starting Address of the queue.

Size

Size of the queue i.e the total number of unsigned
words (4 bytes) in the queue.

Available Size

Available size of the queue i.e. number of unsigned
words (4 bytes) free in the queue.

Pending Msgs

Number of messages present in the queue.

Msg Type

Type of the messages in the queue. If it is FIXED,
then all the messages in the queue are of a fixed size.
If it is VARIABLE , then the messages present in the
queue can be of varying size.

Msg Size

Size of the message in number of unsigned words (4
bytes). If the msg type is fixed, then it tells the exact
size of each message , else if the msg type is variable
then it tells the maximum message size.

Suspend Type

The task suspended type. Task suspend type on the
queue can be either FIFO (First In First Out) or

IP DSLAM

573

Priority.
Tasks Waiting

Number of tasks waiting on this queue.

FirstTaskName

Name of the first suspended task on this queue.

TotalMsgIn

Total number of messages enqueued i.e. the number
of messages send to this queue (since its creation ).
This is a running counter and never decrements.

TotalMsgOut

Total number of messages dequed i.e. the number of
messages received from this queue(since creation).
This is a running counter and never decrements.

DropCount

Number of messages dropped i.e. total number of
times message send to this queue failed. This is a
running counter and never decrements.

WaterMark

WaterMark of the queue i.e the maximum number of
unsigned words (4 bytes) that has been present in this
queue at some point in time.

LastMsgInFailPtr

Address of the message buffer that failed to enqueue
in the queue lastly.

LastSender

Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most
recently) send the message to the queue.

LastRecvr

Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most
recently)recieved the message from the queue.

LastSenderFail

Name of the module which has lastly failed to send
the message to the queue.

LastRecvFail

Name of the module which has lastly failed to receive
the message from the queue.

Threshold

Threshold Value set for the queue, in number of
unsigned words (4 bytes).

ThresholdHitCount

Number of times threshold has been hit for the queue.

LastMsgOutTime

The system time when the message

was lastly

received from the queue.
LastMsgInTime

The system time when the message

was lastly send

to the queue.
LastMsgOutFailTime

The system time when the message receiving from
the queue has lastly failed.

LastMsgInFailTime

The system time when the message send to the
queue has lastly failed.

ThresholdHitTime

The system time when threshold of the queue has
lastly hit.

574

IDL series User Guide

5.22.4.2 Get rmon queue threshold
Description:
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the queue. This command
will display 20 entries (maximum) . Events are logged for the queue for the
following 3 cases:
z
Message Receiving From Queue Fail.
z
Message Send To Queue Fail.
z
Threshold Hit.
Command Syntax:
get rmon queue threshold
Parameters
None
Example
$ get rmon queue threshold
Output
Queue Name
: TSK173
Task
ThreshHitTime : Thu Jan 01 00:00:14 1970
Event Type
: Msg Recv From Q Fail

Name: TSK1

Output field:
Field

Description

Queue Name

Name of the queue.

Task Name

Name of the module which has tried to send or
receive the message from the queue when the
event has happened.

ThresholdHitTime

The system time at which event logging is done.

Event Type

Cause of event logging.
Its value can be:
Msg Send To Q Fail - If failure occurred while
sending message to queue.
Msg Recv From Q Fail - If failure occurred while
receiving a message from the queue.
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of queue has
been hit while sending the message to queue.

IP DSLAM

575

5.22.4.3 Reset rmon queue
Description:
Use this command to reset some parameters of queue. This command will reset
the following parameters of queue.
z
Set DropCount value to zero.
z
Set watermark value to the value of the currently used size of queue .
z
Set ThresholdCount value to the zero.
Command Syntax:
Reset rmon queue
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ reset rmon queue
Output Field:
None

5.22.5 RMON Net buffers Info Commands
5.22.5.1 Get rmon netbuf
Description:
Use this command to get the information about all the net buffers present in the
system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon netbuf
Parameters
None
Example:
$ get rmon netbuf

576

IDL series User Guide

Output
TotalNetBuf
: 116
TotalUsed
:8
TotalFree
:7
WaterMark
:3
Threshold
: 116
ThresholdHitCount: 0
AllocFailCount : 0
FreeFailCount
:0
LastUserTask
: PKEV
LastFreeTask
: PKEV
LastUserFailTask :
LastFreeFailTask :
ThresholdHitTask :
LastUsedTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:04:45 1970
LastFreeTime
: Thu Jan 01 00:05:01 1970
LastUseFailTime : ThresholdHitTime : Output field:
Field

Description

TotalNetBuf

Total number of net buffers present in the system.

TotalUsed

Total number of net buffers allocated by the system since the system has
come up. This is a running counter and never decrements.

TotalFree

Total number of net buffers freed by the system since the system has come
up. This is a running counter and never decrements.

WaterMark

WaterMark of the net buffer i.e. maximum number of net buffers used by the
system at some point in time.

Threshold

Threshold value set for net buffer in the system in terms of number of net
buffers.

ThresholdHitCount

Number of times threshold has been hit for the net buffer.

AllocFailCount

Number of times net buffer allocation has failed.

FreeFailCount

Number of times net buffer freeing has failed.

LastUserTask

Name of the task which has lastly allocated (used)the net buffer.

LastFreeTask

Name of the task which has lastly deallocated (freed) the net buffer.

LastUserFailTask

Name of the task which has lastly failed to allocate (used) the net buffer.

LastFreeFailTask

Name of the task which has lastly failed to deallocate (freed) the net buffer.

ThresholdHitTask

Name of the task which has lastly allocated (used) the net buffer, causing
threshold hit.

LastUsedTime

The last system time when net buffer was lastly used.

LastFreeTime

The last system time when net buffer was lastly freed.

LastUseFailTime

The last system time when the net buffer allocation has lastly failed.

ThresholdHitTime

The last system time when the threshold has hit while allocating the net
buffer.

IP DSLAM

577

5.22.5.2 Get rmon netbuf threshold
Description:
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the netbuffer. This
command will display 20 entries(maximum). Events are logged for netbuffer in the
following 3 cases:
z
Allcation of net buffer failed.
z
Threshold Hit.
Command Syntax:
get rmon netbuf threshold
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon netbuf threshold
Output:
Task Name : TSK1
ThresholdHitTimeStamp : Thu Jan 01 00:00:39 1970
Event Type :
Allocation Fail
Output field:
Field

Description

Task Name

The name of Task which tries to allocate the
netbuffer during a critical event.

ThresholdHitTimeStamp

The system time when event logging is done.

Event Type

Cause of event logging.
Its value can be:
Allocation Fail - If allocation of net buffer has
failed.
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of net buffer
has been hit while allocation.

578

IDL series User Guide

5.22.5.3 Reset rmon netbuf
Description:
Use this command to reset some parameters of netbuf. This command will reset
the following parameters of netbuf.
z
Set ThresholdCount value to zero.
z
Set AllocFailCount value to zero
z
Set WaterMark to the number of net buffers currently used by system.
z
Set FreeFailCount value to the zero.
Command Syntax:
reset rmon netbuf
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ reset rmon netbuf
Output Field:
None
5.22.6 RMON Semaphore Info Commands
5.22.6.1 Get rmon semaphore
Description:
Use this command to get the information about all the semaphores present in the
system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon semaphore
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon semaphore

IP DSLAM

579

Output:
Name
Count
Suspend Type
Task
-------------------------------------------------------------SACL4
1
FIFO

Tasks Waiting

0

First

-

Output field:
Field

Description

Name

This specifies the name of the semaphore.

Count

This specifies the current instance count of the
semaphore.

Suspend Type

This specifies the task suspended type on this
semaphore. It can be either FIFO type or priority type.

Task Waiting

This specifies the number of tasks waiting on this
semaphore.

First Task

This specifies the name of the first task suspended on
the semaphore.

5.22.7 RMON Event Group Info Commands
5.22.7.1 Get rmon eventgrp
Description:
Use this command to get the information about all the event groups present in the
system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon eventgrp
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon eventgrp

580

IDL series User Guide

Output:
Name
Event Flags
Task
------------------------------------------------------------EDSLM11
0
DSLM

Tasks Waiting

First

1

Output field:
Field

Description

Name

This specifies the name of the event flag group.

Count

This specifies the current event flags.

Suspend Type

This specifies the task suspended type on this
semaphore. It can be either FIFO type or priority
type.

Task Waiting

This specifies the number of tasks waiting on
the event flag group.

First Task

This specifies the name of the first task
suspended on the event flag group.

IP DSLAM

581

5.23 SNMP Commands
5.23.1 SNMP Comm Commands
5.23.1.1 Get snmp comm
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp comm [community ]
5.23.1.2 Create snmp comm
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create snmp comm community  [access ro | rw]
5.23.1.3 Delete snmp comm
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete snmp comm community 
Parameter:
Name

Description
This specifies the Community name.

community

Type:

Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory



Get － Optional
This specifies the access permissions given to
man-agers with this community name. ro implies
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write
access ro | rw
per-missions.
Type:

Create － Optional

Default value: ro

582

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ create snmp comm community public
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Access community
-----------------------------------------------------------ro
public
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

community

This specifies the Community name.
This specifies the access permissions given to
man-agers with this community name.ro implies

Access
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write
per-missions.

References:
z
SNMP commands

5.23.2 SNMP Host Commands
5.23.2.1 Get snmp host
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp host
5.23.2.2 Create snmp host
Description:
Use this command to create.

IP DSLAM

583

Command Syntax:
create snmp host ip  community 
5.23.2.3 Delete snmp host
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete snmp host ip  community 
Parameter:
Name

Description
This specifies the IP address of the manager that
has access permissions.

ip 

Type:

Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional

This specifies the Community name. This must
be a valid community in the snmp community
community

table.



Type:

Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional

Example:
$ create snmp host ip 172.25.34.34 community public
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Host Address
Community
-------------------------------------------------------------172.25.34.34
public
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

584

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description
This specifies the IP address of the manager that

Ip Address
has access permissions.
This specifies the Community name. This must
Community

be a valid community in the snmp community
table.

References:
z
SNMP commands

5.23.3 SNMP Stats Commands
5.23.3.1 Snmp stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp stats
5.23.3.2 Modify snmp stats
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify snmp stats [authentraps enable | disable]
Parameter:
Name

Description
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is
permitted to generate authentication-failure
traps. The value of this object overrides any

authentraps enable

configuration information; as such, it provides a

|disable

means whereby all authentication-failure traps
may be disabled.
Type: Modify － Optional
Default value: disable

IP DSLAM

585

Example:
$ get snmp stats
Output:
InPkts
: 100
InBadVersions
:0
InBadCommunityUses : 0
InTooBigs
:0
InBadValues
:0
InGenErrs
:0
InTotalSetVars
:0
InGetNexts
:0
InGetResponses
:0
OutTooBigs
:0
OutBadValues
:0
OutGetRequests
:0
OutSetRequests
:0
OutTraps
:0
SilentDrops
:0

OutPkts
: 100
InBadCommunityNames : 0
InASNParseErrs
:0
InNoSuchNames
:0
InReadOnlys
:0
InTotalReqVars
: 200
InGetRequests
: 100
InSetRequests
:0
InTraps
:0
OutNoSuchNames
:0
OutGenErrs
:0
OutGetNexts
:0
OutGetResponses
: 100
AuthenTraps
: disable
ProxyDrops
:0

Output field:
Field

Description
The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport

InPkts
service.
The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP
OutPkts
protocol entity to the transport service.
The total number of SNMP Messages which were delivered to the SNMP
InBadVersions
protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity
InBadCommunityNames
which used a SNMP com-munity name not known to say entity.
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity
InBadCommunityUses

which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP
community named in the Message.
The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol

InASNParseErrs
entity when decoding received SNMP Messages.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
InTooBigs
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'tooBig'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
InNoSuchNames
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'noSuchName'.
InBadValues

586

The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol

IDL series User Guide

entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'badValue'.
The total number valid SNMP PDUs which were de-livered to the SNMP
protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `readOnly'. It
InReadOnlys

should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU which
contains the value 'readOnly' in the error-status field, as this object is provided
as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol

InGenErrs
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'genErr'.
The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the
InTotalReqVars

SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and
Get-Next PDUs.
The total number of MIB objects which have been altered successfully by the

InTotalSetVars
SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request PDUs.
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been accepted and
InGetRequests
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been accepted and
InGetNexts
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been accepted and
InSetRequests
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been accepted
InGetResponses
and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been accepted and
InTraps
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
OutTooBigs
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'tooBig'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
OutNoSuchNames
entity and for which the value of the error-status is 'noSuchName'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
OutBadValues
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'badValue'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
OutGenErrs
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'genErr'.
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been generated by
OutGetRequests
the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been generated by the
OutGetNexts
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been generated by
OutSetRequests
the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been generated by
OutGetResponses
the SNMP protocol entity.

IP DSLAM

587

The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been generated by the
OutTraps
SNMP protocol entity.
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to generate
authentication-failure traps. The value of this object overrides any configuration
AuthenTraps
infor-mation; as such, it provides a means whereby all au-thentication-failure
traps may be disabled.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRe-quest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs
delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped be-cause the size of a
SilentDrops
reply containing an alternate Re-sponse-PDU with an empty variable-bindings
field, was greater than, either a local constraint, or the maximum message size
associated with the origi-nator of the request.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNex-tRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs
ProxyDrops

delivered to the SNMP entity, which were silently dropped, be-cause the
transmission of the (possibly translated) message to a proxy target failed in a
manner (other than a time-out) such that no Response-PDU could be returned.

References:
z
SNMP commands.

5.23.4 SNMP Traphost Commands
5.23.4.1 Get snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp traphost [ip ] [port ]
5.23.4.2 Create snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create snmp traphost ip  community  [port
] [version v1 | v2c]

588

IDL series User Guide

5.23.4.3 Delete snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete snmp traphost ip < ip-address > [port ]
5.23.4.4 Modify snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify snmp traphost ip  [port ] [version v1 | v2c] [severity critical |
major | minor | info]
Parameter:
Name

Description

ip

This specifies the IP address of the manager where trap is to be sent.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be sent.
Type:

Create －Optional
Get － Optional

port 

Modify － Optional
Delete － Optional
This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the Manager.
Type:
version v1 | v2c

Create－Optional
Get － Optional
Modify － Optional

Default value: v2c
This specifies the Trap severity which is used for trap classification.The
given trap severity will be used for filtering of traps on per manager basis
severity critical | major
i.e. manager will receive traps on the basis of configured severity
| minor | info

Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional

IP DSLAM

589

Example:
$ create snmp traphost ip 172.25.34.34 port 162 community public version v2c
severity minor
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ip Address : 172.25.34.34
Community : public
Port
: 162
Version : v2c
Severity : minor
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Ip Address

This specifies the IP address of the manager
where trap is to be sent.

Port

This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be
sent.

Community

This specifies the Community name used in the
trap.

Version

This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the
Manager

Severity

This specifies the Trap severity which is used for
trap classification.The given trap severity will be
used for filtering of traps on per manager basis
i.e. manager will receive traps on the basis of
configured severity

590

IDL series User Guide

5.24 SNTP Commands
5.24.1 SNTP Cfg Commands
5.24.1.1 Get sntp cfg
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sntp cfg
5.24.1.2 Modify sntp cfg
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify sntp cfg [enable | disable]
Parameter:
Name

Description
This specifies whether the SNTP service is
enabled or disabled. True means that SNTP is

enable|disable

enabled and False means that SNTP is disabled.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable

Example:
$ modify sntp cfg enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On/Off
Status : Enable
Output field:
Name

Description
This specifies whether the SNTP service is

Status

enabled or disabled. True means that SNTP is
enabled and False means that SNTP is disab

IP DSLAM

591

5.24.2 SNTP servaddr Commands
5.24.2.1 Get sntp servaddr
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sntp servaddr
5.24.2.2 Create sntp servaddr
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create sntp servaddr 
Example:
$ create sntp servaddr 172.23.3.45
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Server Addr : 172.23.3.45
Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created

Status : Standby

Output field:
Field

Description
This specifies the IP Address of the SNTP

Server Addr
Server.
Server is in Use. OR Server is in standby mode
Status
i.e. not in use.

592

IDL series User Guide

5.24.3 SNTP Stats Commands
5.24.3.1 Get sntp stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sntp stats
5.24.3.2 Reset sntp stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset sntp stats
Example:
$ get sntp stats
Output:
Verbose Mode On/Off
Requests count
:0
Response count
:0
Invalid Response count : 0
Lost Response count : 0
Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970
Output field:
Field

Description
This specifies the number of requests sent to SNTP

Requests count
Server.
Responses count

This specifies the Number of responses received from SNTP Server.

Invalid Responses

This specifies the Number of invalid responses received from SNTP

count

Server.
This specifies the number of responses which do not come within

Lost Responses count
time limit.
Last Time Stamp
This specifies time at which the local clock was last set or corrected.
[MM/DD/
The display format shall be mm/dd/ yyyy:hr:min:sec.
YYYY::HH:MM:SS]

IP DSLAM

593

5.25 System Commands
5.25.1 Cbuftrace cfg Commands
5.25.1.1 Get cbuftrace cfg
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get cbuftrace cfg [module ]
5.25.1.2 Reset cbuftrace cfg
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset cbuftrace cfg module 
Parameters:
Name

Description

module 

This specifies the module, for which c-buftrace configuration is to be modified
Type:

Reset
Get

--

-- Mandatory
Optional

Example:
$ get cbuftrace cfg module GAG
Output:
module : GAG
flow : 3

level : 0xff

Output field:

594

Field

Description

module

This specifies the module, for which c-buftrace configuration is to be modified

flow

This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter for c-buftrace flow.

level

This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter for c-buftrace level.

IDL series User Guide

5.25.2 System Configuration Save and Restore Commands
5.25.2.1 Commit
Description:
Use this command to commit the active configuration to the flash. This command is
not supported
Command Syntax:
commit [nbsize]
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ commit
Output:
Set Done
Caution:
This command will take some time to execute.
References:
reboot command
Download command.
5.25.2.2 Reboot
Description:
Use this command to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration.
Command Syntax:
reboot [control ] [dataplane ] [config
]

IP DSLAM

595

Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies whether the control plane binaries are to be
fetched from the network or the binaries already present in

control
NVRAM are to be used.

Type : Optional
Default value: Binary present in NVRAM.
This specifies whether the data plane binaries are to be
fetched from the network or the binaries already present in
dataplane
NVRAM are to be used.

Type: Optional
Default value: Binaries present in NVRAM.
This specifies the boot configuration – the
 source, from which to boot up.
The boot configuration is set to last automatically, whenever
a commit command is given. The boot configuration being an
optional parameter, if it is not specified, it retains the previous
value. So giving reboot after a commit will result in a reboot
from the committed configuration.
Default: Use Default factory configuration while booting up.
Backup: Use the Backup configuration to boot the system.
Last: Use last committed configuration to boot the system.
config 

• the user (login name and password as root) is created.
• an Ethernet interface with IP address 192.168.1.1 mask
255.255.0.0 is created.
Clean: The system comes up with nothing configured.
Network: The system fetches the default configuration file
from the remote host and system comes up with this default
configuration, fd.cfg.
Type : Optional
Default value: If a reboot is being given for the first time,
then the default value is default. Otherwise, the default value
is the same as what was given the last time.

596

IDL series User Guide

Mode:
Super-User.
Example:
$ reboot
Output:
None
Output Fields:
None
References:
Commit command.
5.25.3 System Control Table Commands
5.25.3.1 Create user
Description:
Use this command to create a user account. A maximum two accounts can exist.
Command Syntax:
create user name  passwd  [root|user]
5.25.3.2 Delete user
Description:
Use this command to delete a user login.
Command Syntax:
delete user name 
5.25.3.3 Get user
Description:
Use this command to display information of all the users. Password information
isnot displayed.
Command Syntax:
get user

IP DSLAM

597

Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the User Name to be created.
Type: Mandatory

Name 

Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and
any combination of printable
characters excluding “;”
This specifies the password required by this user to
login to the unit.

passwd 

Type : Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and
any combination of printable characters excluding “;”.
This indicates the privilege level of the user.

Root|user

Type : Optional
Default value: user

Example:
$ create user name user1 passwd temp1 user
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Privilege
UserName
---------------------user
user1
Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

UserName

This shows the new user login, which has been cre-ated.
This represents the privilege level associated with the user

Privilege
name shown. It may be: user, root

References:
Delete user command.
get user command
passwd related commands.

598

IDL series User Guide

5.25.3.4 Passwd
Description:
Use this command to change the password associated with a user login. An
ordinary user may change the password for another user if he knows the old
password. However, the root does not need to know a user’s existing password
before changing it. The passwords are not echoed on to the screen.
Command Syntax:
passwd [name]
Parameters:
Name

Description
The id of the user whose password is to be
changed. If not specified then the current user is
as-sumed.
Type: Mandatory, if user is logged in through

name
serial port and user authentication is disabled
through se-rial port. Otherwise, Optional.
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters (All
print-able characters except ‘;‘)

Mode:
Super-User, User.
Example:
Normal Usage
$passwd
Old Password:
New Password:
Confirm New Password:
Set Done.
Super User (for ordinary user)
$passwd User1
Enter New Password:
Confirm New Password:
Set Done.

IP DSLAM

599

Output::
None
Caution:
None.
References:
user command

5.25.4 System crash info Commands
5.25.4.1 Get system crash info
Description:
T This command is used to display a list of crashes that were encountered by the
system. This command is not supported on the Flashless system.
Command Syntax:
get system crash info [numentries ] [showview [general |
ctrlandstatusregs | stackregs | stackinfo | altwinregs | stdwinregs |
stdwinregsdetailed | coprocessorregs] +]
Parameters:
Name

Description

Numentries

This specifies the last  number of crashes



encountered in the system.
Type: Optional
Valid values: 1 to 128
Default : 1

showview general |

The optional showview parameter shall help the user to view

ctrlandstatusregs |

selective details of the crash dump. The information on any one

stackregs | stackinfo |

or combination of crash dump sections can be retrieved by

altwinregs | stdwinregs

ORing the following parameters:

| stdwinregsdetailed |

•general

coprocessorregs]+

•ctrlandstatusregs
•stackregs
•stackinfo
•altwinregs
•stdwinregs
•stdwinregsdetailed

600

IDL series User Guide

•coprocessorregs
Note: You cannot use the stdwinregs and stdwinregsdetailed
parameters simultaneously.

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get system crash info numentries 1 showview general ctrlandstatusregs
stackregs stackinfo altwinregs stdwinregs coprocessorregs
Output:
General crash info
Crash Id

:1

Crash IU

:0

Time of Crash

: Thu Jan 01 00:00:43 1970

DP Version

: DP_B02_10_15_09_ip1000a

CP Version

: COL2.10.3.0.060317

Crash Cause

: CP crashed after DP Init

SystemUpTime

Days

Hours

Mins

Secs

-------------------------------------------------------0

0

0

43

User Crash Info :
Control And Status Registers
PSR Reg

: 0x940060c7

Single Fault PC

: 0x4d3cdb8

Double Fault PC

: 0x0

Y Reg MSW

Wim Reg

: 0x1

Single Fault nPC

: 0x4d3cdbc

Double Fault nPC

: 0x0

: 0x0

Y Reg LSW

: 0x12345678

Single Fault Trap Num : 0x7

Double Fault Trap Num : 0xffffffff

Fault Status Reg

Double Fault Reg

: 0x14

IER

: 0x2000

: 0xcf70

Trap Base Reg

: 0x4f7a070

Alternate Window # 0x1f
Reg#:Local

:

In

|Reg#:Local

:

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

|1

: 0x0

: 0x0

2

: 0x0

: 0x0

|3

: 0x0

: 0x0

4

: 0x0

: 0x0

|5

: 0x0

: 0x0

6

: 0x0

: 0x0

|7

: 0x0

: 0x0

|Reg#:Local

:

In

|

In

|

Alternate Window # 0x1e
Reg#:Local

IP DSLAM

:

In

601

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

|1

: 0x0

: 0x0

2

: 0x0

: 0x0

|3

: 0x0

: 0x0

4

: 0x0

: 0x0

|5

: 0x0

: 0x0

6

: 0x0

: 0x0

|7

: 0x0

: 0x0

|Reg#:Local

:

Alternate Window # 0x1d
Reg#:Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

|1

: 0x0

: 0x0

2

: 0x0

: 0x0

|3

: 0x0

: 0x0

4

: 0x0

: 0x0

|5

: 0x0

: 0x0

6

: 0x0

: 0x0

|7

: 0x0

: 0x0

|Reg#:Local

:

In

|

In

|

....
....
....
Alternate Window # 0x18
Reg#:Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

|1

: 0x0

: 0x0

2

: 0x0

: 0x0

|3

: 0x0

: 0x0

4

: 0x0

: 0x0

|5

: 0x0

: 0x0

6

: 0x0

: 0x0

|7

: 0x0

: 0x0

Current Standard Window Dump # 0x8
Registers :

Global

:

Out

:

Local

:

In

New Func Called
0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x1

1

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x52a7164

: 0x0

2

: 0x7

: 0x0

: 0x5c67400

: 0x2800005

3

: 0x18

: 0x5

: 0x5c67400

: 0x2

4

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0x0

5

: 0x144805cc

: 0x1

6

: 0x5c67400

: 0x52bdbb0

7

: 0x0

: 0x4f6e040

: 0xffff
: 0x59ec
: 0x0

: 0x30800005

: 0x52bdce0
: 0x0
: 0x52bdc18
: 0x4ce765c

Standard Window Dump # 0x9

602

IDL series User Guide

Registers :

Global

:

Out

:

Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x30800005

: 0x1

: 0x0

1

: 0x0

: 0x0

2

: 0x7

: 0x2800005

: 0x2

: 0x4fcbf38

3

: 0x18

: 0x2

: 0x5c67400

: 0xf

4

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0x52bdce0

: 0x0

: 0x567

5

: 0x144805cc

: 0x0

: 0x5c67000

: 0x51eb851f

6

: 0x5c67400

: 0x52bdc18

: 0x0

: 0x52bdc98

7

: 0x0

: 0x4ce765c

: 0x52bde30

: 0xf

: 0x0

: 0x4ce591c

Standard Window Dump # 0xa
Registers :

Global

:

Out

:

Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x5b70ed0

: 0x542a810

1

: 0x0

: 0xf

: 0x52bde18

: 0x0

2

: 0x7

: 0x4fcbf38

: 0x20000000

: 0x5abc6f8

3

: 0x18

: 0xf

: 0x0

: 0x542a810

4

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0x567

: 0x4f6cbb8

: 0x5c36448

5

: 0x144805cc

: 0x51eb851f

: 0xffffffff

6

: 0x5c67400

: 0x52bdc98

: 0x0

7

: 0x0

: 0x4ce591c

: 0x5b69300
: 0x52bdd18

: 0x52bdcd9

: 0x4ce52f0

....
....
....
Wim Window # 0x0
Registers :

Global

:

Out

:

Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0

1

: 0x0

: 0xb

: 0x0

: 0x0

2

: 0x7

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0

3

: 0x18

: 0x5c67400

4

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0xffffffff

5

: 0x144805cc

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0

6

: 0x5c67400

: 0x52bdff8

: 0x0

: 0x5c67410

7

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x4f62f7c

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0
: 0x0

Standard Window Dump # 0x1

IP DSLAM

603

Registers :

Global

:

Out

:

Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x57e2688

1

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x52bd8e5

2

: 0x7

: 0x0

: 0x1

: 0xf7

3

: 0x18

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0xe7

4

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x54758a4

5

: 0x144805cc

: 0x0

: 0x0

6

: 0x5c67400

: 0x5c67410

: 0x8000

7

: 0x0

: 0x4f62f7c

: 0x0

: 0x40
: 0x5c67410

: 0x52a69a8

: 0x4d501fc

Standard Window Dump # 0x2
Registers :

Global

:

Out

:

Local

:

In

0

: 0x0

: 0x57e2688

: 0x944060c2

1

: 0x0

: 0x0

: 0x4d4bbec

2

: 0x7

: 0xf7

: 0x4d4bbf0

3

: 0x18

: 0xe7

: 0x2000708

: 0x0

4

: 0x4f6cca8

: 0x54758a4

: 0x0

: 0x0

5

: 0x144805cc

: 0x40

: 0x5c67000

: 0x0

6

: 0x5c67400

: 0x5c67410

: 0x0

: 0x5c67410

7

: 0x0

: 0x4d501fc

: 0x1

: 0xedd
: 0x0
: 0x0

: 0x4a58968

Coprocessor Register Dump
CCSR Register

: 0x2f7f72a7

CCPR Register

: 0xfe5bf8b7

CCIR Register

: 0xffffffff

CCOBR Register

: 0xfffffffe

CCCRC Register

CCIBR Register

: 0x7fffffff
: 0xffffffff

CCOR Register

: 0xdfffffff

Call Stack at the time of Crash :
StackDepth :

CallAddress :

Return Address:

Frame Ptr

:

StackPtr

8

: 0x4f6e040

: 0x4ce765c

:0x52bdc18

:

0x52bdbb0

7

: 0x4ce765c

: 0x4ce591c

:0x52bdc98

:

0x52bdc18

6

: 0x4ce591c

: 0x4ce52f0

:0x52bdd18

:

0x52bdc98

5

: 0x4ce52f0

: 0x4ce3140

:0x52bdd90

:

0x52bdd18

4

: 0x4ce3140

: 0x4ce333c

:0x52bde30

:

0x52bdd90

3

: 0x4ce333c

: 0x4ce44dc

:0x52bdec8

:

0x52bde30

2

: 0x4ce44dc

: 0x4f62830

:0x52bdf90

:

0x52bdec8

Stack dump at the time of Crash:
0x052bb528: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

604

IDL series User Guide

0x052bb538: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb548: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb558: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb568: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 27 00 00 00 00
0x052bb578: 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 04 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 00
0x052bb588: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 05 a4 d9 50 00 00 00 00
0x052bb598: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 34 05 a5 14 68
0x052bb5a8: 01 23 45 67 00 00 21 44 00 00 00 00 05 a4 d9 50
0x052bb5b8: 05 2b b5 f0 05 bf c4 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 02
0x052bb5c8: 05 2b bb d8 04 a4 0a 40 00 00 00 17 ff ff ff ff
0x052bb5d8: 05 2b b5 f0 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 15 05 a4 d9 7c
0x052bb5e8: 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 00 0d 0a 00 40 04 b8 24 78
0x052bb5f8: 00 00 00 00 05 a5 14 50 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb608: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb618: 00 00 00 21 00 00 21 47 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb628: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 a5 14 68 00 00 00 00
0x052bb638: 05 a5 f2 3c 05 2b b0 08 00 00 00 1d 00 00 00 17
0x052bb648: cc cc cc cd 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01
0x052bb658: 00 01 38 00 05 a4 d9 50 ff ff ff bc 00 00 3a d4
0x052bb668: 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 05 26 47 f0
0x052bb678: 00 00 00 00 05 2b b7 28 05 2b bd 88 05 a5 14 50
0x052bb688: 05 2b bd 88 05 2b b7 28 05 a5 14 68 04 a4 43 8c
0x052bb698: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 a6 13 2c
0x052bb6a8: 00 00 00 77 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Task for which stack over flow occur
_______________________________________
NO Stack Overflow

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Crash Id

The crash number.

Crash IU

The internal processor number.

Time of Crash

This specifies the time of the crash.

DP Version

Version of Crashed DP

CP Version

Version of Crashed CP

Crash Cause

This specifies the crash cause. Following are the possible
causes:
- Ctrl Transfer To CP Failed

IP DSLAM

605

- Crash in CP self processing
- DP Init Failure
- CP crashed after DP Init
- DP crashed after DP Init
- DP internal Failure
- System in Loop
- Crash in DP Processing
SystemUpTime

This specifies the system up time in:
Days : Hours : Minutes : Seconds

PSR Reg

This specifies the value of the processor state register at the
time of the crash.

Wim Reg

The window invalid mask register.

PC

This specifies the value of the program counter at the time of
the crash.

nPC

This specifies the value of the next program counter at the
time of the crash.

Y Reg MSW

This specifies the value of MSW of the Y Register at the time
of the crash.

Y Reg LSW

This specifies the value of LSW of the Y Register at the time of
the crash.

Trap Num

This specifies the number of traps that caused the crash.

Trap Base Reg

This specifies the value of the Trap Base register at the time of
the crash.

Fault Status Reg

This specifies the value of the Fault Status Register at the time
of the crash.

Double Fault Reg

This specifies the value of the Double Fault Register at the
time of the crash.

IER

This specifies the value of the Implementation Extension
Register at the time of the crash.

Alternate Window - Reg#

For crashes involving Alternate Windows, this capture

Local

specifies all local register for Alternate Windows # 24 to 31
(0x1f to 0x18).

Alternate Window - Reg#

For crashes involving Alternate Windows, this capture

In

specifies all input register for Alternate Windows # 24 to
31(0x1f to 0x18).

Standard Window Dump

The Sparclet Global register.

- Registers - Global
Standard Window Dump

The output registers of the specified Sparclet Window.

- Registers - Out
Standard Window Dump

606

The local registers of the specified Sparclet Window.

IDL series User Guide

- Registers - Local
Standard Window Dump

The input registers of the specified Sparclet Window.

- Registers - In
CCSR Register

The CCP Status register.

CCCRC Register

The CCP CRC register.

CCPR Register

The CCP Polynomial register.

CCIR Register

The CCP InReg register.

CCIBR Register

The CCP InBuf register.

CCOBR Register

The CCP OutBuf register.

CCOR Register

The CCP OutReg register.

Stack at the time of the

The callee function address.

Crash

- StackDepth -

CallAddress
Stack at the time of the
Crash

The return address back to the caller function.

- StackDepth -

Return Address
Stack at the time of the
Crash

The frame pointer at the time of the call.

- StackDepth -

Frame Ptr
Stack at the time of the
Crash

The stack pointer at the time of the call.

- StackDepth -

StackPtr
Stack dump at the time of

The stack dump at the time of crash. The total size of the

Crash

dump would be the minimum between the hash define 400 and
the total number of bytes actually in the stack.

Tasks for which Stack

In case the crash is due to stack overflow, the task for which

Overflow Occurred

stack overflow has occurred will be displayed here. Otherwise,
it would specify that stack overflow hasn't occurred - meaning
that the crash is due to some other reason.

Note:
The Current Standard Window dump displays the current dump corresponding to
Global, Out, Local, and In.

IP DSLAM

607

5.25.4.2 Get system crash configinfo
Description:
This command gets system crash configuration parameters..
Command Syntax:
get system crash configinfo
5.25.4.3 Modify system crash configinfo
Description:
This command modifies system crash configuration parameters
Command Syntax:
modify system crash configinfo [action reboot | debug]
Parameters:
Name

Description:

Action reboot|debug

This parameter defines the state of the system after
a DP IU crashes. If the action is set to reboot, the
system shall reboot after DP IU crash. If it is set to
debug, the system shall not reboot and a CLI prompt
shall be given to the user for further debugging.
Type

:Modify - Optional

Valid values : reboot - debug

Example:
$ modify system crash configinfo action reboot
Output:
Crash Config Info

: reboot

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Crash Config Info

This parameter defines the state of the system after a DP
IU crashes. If the action is set to reboot, the system shall
reboot after DP IU crash. If it is set to debug, the system
shall not reboot and a CLI prompt shall be given to the
user for further debugging.

608

IDL series User Guide

5.25.5 System info Commands
5.25.5.1 Get system info
Description:
This command to get system parameters.
Command Syntax:
get system info
5.25.5.2 Modify system info
Description:
Use this command to modify the system parameters.
Command Syntax:
modify system info [contact ] [name ] [location
] [vendor ] [logthresh ]
[systime ] [dst ] [timezone ]
Parameters:
Name

Description:

contact 

This contains the textual identification of the contact person
for this modem, together with information on how to contact
this person
Type: Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters

name 

This specifies the name of the modem
Type: Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters

Location 

This specifies the physical location of this modem Type:
Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters

vendor

This contains the vendor-specific information



Type: Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters

logthresh

This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or lower



than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest and represents
critical traps. Changing the parameter’s value in a flashless
system shall have no effect as there is no NVRAM support
present to log traps. Type: Optional

IP DSLAM

609

Valid values: 1-4

Systime 

This specifies the current system time.
Type: Optional
Valid values: System Time String in format. The total string
length must be 20 characters. Single digits should be
prepended with a `0', e.g. `1' should be given as `01' mon dd
hh:mm:ss year e.g. "Feb 01 21:20:10 2001"

dst 

This specifies if the Daylight Savings Time has been
enabled or not.
Type: Optional
Valid values: on|off

timezone 

Time zone
Type: Optional
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values withinì ì,
followed by their descriptions.
"IDLW" - International Date Line West
"NT" - Nome
"HST" - Hawaii Standard
ìCAT" - Central Alaska
"AHST"- Alaska-Hawaii Standard
"YST" - Yukon Standard
"PST"- US Pacific Standard
"MST"- US Mountain Standard
"CST"- US Central Standard
"EST"- US Eastern Standard
"AST"- Atlantic Standard
"NFST"- Newfoundland Standard
"NFT"- Newfoundland
"BRST"-Brazil Standard
"AT"- Azores
ìWAT" - West Africa
"GMT" - Greenwich Mean
"UTC" - Universal (Coordinated)
"WET" - Western European
"CET" - Central European
"FWT" - French Winter
"MET" - Middle European
"MEWT" - Middle European Winter
"SWT" - Swedish Winter
"EET" - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1

610

IDL series User Guide

"IST" - Israeli Standard
"BT" - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2
"IT" - Iran
"ZP4" - "Russia Zone 3"
"ZP5" - "Russia Zone 4"
"INST" - "Indian Standard"
"ZP6" - "Russia Zone 5"
"NST" - "North Sumatra"
"WAST" - West Australian Standard
"SSMT" - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6
"JT" - Java
"CCT" - China Coast, Russia Zone 7
"ROK" - Korean Standard
"KST" - Korean Standard
"JST" - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8
"CAST" - Central Australian Standard
"EAST" - Eastern Australian Standard
"GST" - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9
"IDLE" - International Date Line East
"NZST" - New Zealand Standard
"NZT" - New Zealand
Example: ìIDLWî , that stands for International Date
Line West

Example:
$ get system info
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Description
: Columbia
Name
: conexant.com
Location
: Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A
Contact
: Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A
Vendor
: Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A
LogThreshold
:0
Object-id
: 1.3.6.1.4.1.200
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 5:2:0
HwVersion
: c023b6d3

IP DSLAM

611

CPSwVersion
DPSwVersion
System Time
Time Zone
DST
Services

: COL2.6.3.0.040707
:
: Thu Jan 01 05:02:00 1970
: GMT
: off
: physical datalink internet end-to-end applications

Output Fields:
Field

Description

Description

This is a textual description of the entity.

Name

This specifies the name of the system.

Location

This specifies the physical location of this node.

Contact

This shows the textual identification of the contact person
for this managed node, together with the information on
how to contact this person.

Vendor

This shows the vendor-specific information.

LogThreshold

This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or
lower than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest and
represents critical traps.

Object-id

This shows the vendor's authoritative identification of the
network management subsystem contained in the entity.

Up Time

This specifies the time in seconds since the system is up.

HwVersion

This specifies the hardware and firmware version of the
system.

CPSwVersion

This specifies the software version of the CP.

DPSwVersion

This specifies the software version of the DP.

System Time

This shows the current system time.

Time Zone

This specifies the time zone that has been set on the
modem.

DST

This specifies whether Daylight Saving Time has been
enabled or not.

Services

This specifies the functionality provided by this node.
These may be: physical, datalink, internet, end-to-end, or
applications.

References:
Get/modify nbsize
Get system stats

612

IDL series User Guide

5.25.5.3 Get rmon idletime
Description:
Use this command to display a list of idle time records.
Command Syntax:
get rmon idletime [numentries ]
Parameters:
Name

Description:

Numentries

This specifies last numentries



to be displayed

idle time records

Type: Optional
Valid values : 1 to 6
Default : 10

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get rmon idletime numentries 1
Output:
$get rmon idletime

numentries 1

Start Time
End Time
Total
Idle
Util %
Time
Time
--------------------------------------------------------------------------Thu Jan 1 12:34:51 1970 Thu Jan 1 12:35:00 1970 10s 7s
30
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Start Time

This specifies the starting time of the period for
which the idle time was recorded

End Time

This specifies the end time of the period for
which the idle time was recorded

Total Time

This specifies the total time (in seconds) elapsed
in this period.

Idle Time

IP DSLAM

This specifies the time (in seconds) for which the

613

system was idle during this period.
Util %

This specifies the Utilization (in percentage) of
the system during this period

5.25.6 System manuf info Commands
5.25.6.1 Get system manuf info
Description:
This command is used to display manufacturing text information in the system.
Command Syntax:
get system manuf info
Example:
$ get system manuf info
Output:
CpeUtopiaMode
NetUtopiaMode
CpeUtopiaMaster
MaxEthMacPhy
CpeUtopiaFreq
Eth Speed

: Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit
: Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit
: True
NetUtopiaMaster
:2
ColumbiaIdSel
: 40 MHz
: 100 Mbps

S.No | SelfMacAddr
| EthPortIdSel |
--------------------------------------------------1
| 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF | 16
|
2
| 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FE | 17
|
Dsl manuf Text Info
--------------------Num of LBRams
Num of Ports
Chip Type
Serial Number
Vendor Id
Version Number
Chip No
Base Addr
-------------------------------

614

: False
: 18

EthType
Data
Data

:2
Num of Chips
: 24
Interface Type
: G24
: 
: FFBSGSPN
: Z3219

Mgmt
Mgmt

:2
: Host Bus

LBRam

IDL series User Guide

1
2

0x84a00000
0x84a00c00

0
1

Logical To Physical Port Mapping
-------------------------------[ 0-7 ]
0
1
2
3
[ 8 - 15 ]
8
9
10
11
[ 16 - 23 ]
16
17
18
19
[ 24 - 31 ]
24
25
26
27
[ 32 - 39 ]
32
33
34
35
[ 40 - 47 ]
40
41
42
43

4
12
20
28
36
44

5
13
21
29
37
45

6
14
22
30
38
46

7
15
23
31
39
47

UART manuf Text Info
--------------------Num of UARTs
HSSL Port Id
Data Bits
Parity
Application Type
$

:1
:1
:8
: Even
: Console

Baud Rate
Stop Bit
UART Mode

: 9600
:2
: Polling

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

CpeUtopiaMode

Mode of operation of CPE side Utopia interface

NetUtopiaMode

Mode of operation of NET side Utopia interface

CpeUtopiaMaster

This specifies whether CPE side Utopia interface is master
This specifies whether NET side Utopia interface is

NetUtopiaMaster
master
This specifies the maximum number of MACs that can be
MaxEthMacPhy
configured
Specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which is connected
ColumbiaIdSel
to IDSEL pin of the Columbia
CpeUtopiaFreq

CPE Frequency for Utopia Interface
This specifies the speed of operation. Supported speeds

Eth Speed
are – 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps. It is a bitmask.
SelfMacAddr

This specifies the self MAC address
This specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which

EthPortIdSel
is connected to IDSEL pin of the Ethernet device

IP DSLAM

615

This specifies the Defines the ethernet types – data
EthType
, mgmt, or both. It is a bitmask.
Num of LBRams

This specifies the number of LBRams in the system.

Num of Chips

This specifies the number of Chips in the system.

Num of Ports

This specifies the number of Ports per Chip in the system.
This specifies the InterfaceType. Following are the values it

Interface Type
can take – Host Bus, PCI, Utopia
This specifies the Type of Chip – G24, G16, and octane.

Chip Type

This specifies the vendor specific string that identifies the
Serial Number
vendor equipment.
This specifies the binary vendor identification field.

Vendor Id

This specifies the vendor specific version number
Version Number
sent by this ATU as part of the initialization message
Base Addr

This specifies the base address of the chip.

LBRam

This specifies the LBRam associated with the chip

Logical

To

Physical
This specifies the Logical To Physical Port Mapping.

Port Mapping
No of UARTs

This specifies the number of UARTs configured.

HSSL Port Id

This specifies the HSSL port to be used for UART.

Baud Rate

This specifies the Baud Rate of the port

Data Bits

This specifies the number of data bits to be used

Stop Bit

This specifies the stop bits used on HSSL – 1, 2, 1.5

Parity

This specifies the parity used on HSSL – even, odd, none

UART Mode

This specifies the UART Mode – polling, interrupt based

Application Type

This specifies the application name using this UART.

5.25.7 System reboot info Commands
5.25.7.1 Get system reboot info
Description:
This command is used for displaying a list of reboot failures that were encountered
when the system was trying to come up.
Command Syntax:
get system reboot info [numentries]

616

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description:

numentries

This specifies the last  number of



reboot failures recorded in the system.
Type: Optional
Valid values : 1 to 100
Default : 1

Example:
$ get system reboot info numentries 1
Output :
Verbose Mode On
CP Bin Version
: 1.6
DP Bin Version
: 1.8
Time of Reboot
: Thu Jan 2 12:34:56 1970
Reboot Failure Cause : DP Init Failure
Reboot Type
: Secondary CFG
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description
The control Plane Version with which the system

Control Plane Version
could not come up.
The data Plane Version with which the system
Data Plane Version
could not come up.
Time of Reboot

Time at which the reboot failure occured.
This tells the type of reboot with which the
system is trying to come up. The various possible

Type of Reboot
values are :Last, Back Up, Default, Minimum, Clean.
This tells the various causes of failure that
system encountered while rebooting. It can be :Sdram CP Decompress failed
Nvram CP Decompress failed
Sdram DP Decompress failed
Failure Cause

Nvram DP Decompress failed
DP Init Failure
Nvm CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch
Nvm CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch ＃

IP DSLAM

617

Sdram CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch
Sdram CP All DP CI Mismatch
Nvm CP All DP CI Mismatch
Applying Last cfg failed
Applying BackUp cfg failed
Applying Min cfg failed
Applying Nvm FD failed
Applying Sdram FD failed
Nvm CP Last CFG CI Mismatch
Nvm CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Last CFG CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch
NVRAM CP had invalid sign
SDRAM CP had invalid sign
Control Plane wrongly linked
CP mem req exceeds limit
Applying Clean cfg Failed

5.25.8 Nbize Commands
5.25.8.1 Get nbsize
Description:
Use this command to view System Sizing parameters available on next boot.
Command Syntax:
get nbsize
5.25.8.2 Modify nbsize
Description:
Use this command to modify System Sizing parameters available on next boot.
Command Syntax:
modify nbsize [ maxatmport  ] [ maxvcperport
 ] [ maxvc  ] [ maxatmoam  ]
[ maxrmon  ] [ maxnumethprioqs  ]
[ maxnumeoaprioqs  ] [ maxmulticast
 ] [ maxmac  ] [ maxhashbuck
 ] [ maxnumvlan  ] [ maxvlanidval
 ] [ maxnumacentry  ] [ devcap IVL |

618

IDL series User Guide

SVL | none ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted | Residential ]
[ maxhpriotreenodes  ] [ maxlpriotreenodes
 ] [ maxclfrtrees  ] [ maxclfrprofiles
 ] [ maxinrules  ] [ maxoutrules
 ] [ maxinhpriosubrules  ]
[ maxinlpriosubrules  ] [ maxouthpriosubrules
 ] [ maxoutlpriosubrules  ]
[ mcastcap ivmcapable | svmcapable | none ] [ ridcap irdcapable | srdcapable ]
[ maxnumac  ] [ maxnumsrcmac  ]
[ vlanmode nativemode | stackedmode ] [ svlanprotocolid
 ] [ tvlanprotocolid  ] [ tvlanid
 ] [ abondglbctrlvpi  ] [ abondglbctrlvci
 ] [ abondglbsidfmt EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

maxatmport

Maximum number of ATM ports that can be configured



Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -144

maxvcperport

Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port. Type:



Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8

maxvc 

Maximum number of VCs possible in the system. Type:
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - (144 * 8)

maxatmoam

Maximum number of OAM activities that can be active at a



time.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 10

maxrmon 

Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied
simultaneously in the system
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 20

maxnumethprioqs

This specifies the max number of priority queues that can



be configured on a bridge port created over an ethernet
interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8

maxnumeoaprioqs


IP DSLAM

This specifies the max number of priority queues that can
be configured on a bridge port created on EOA interface

619

Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
maxmulticast

Maximum number of multicast groups that can be



configured in the system
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4

maxmac 

Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by
the system. This should be a multiple of 32
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4000

maxhashbuck

Maximum number of hash buckets for the Forwarding table.



This value should be a power of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8192

maxnumvlan

Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on the



Bridge either statically or dynamically
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 512

maxvlanidval

Maximum value of VLAN ID that this Bridge can support



Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095

maxnumacentry

Maximum number of Static UCast Entries that can be



configured on the Bridge
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 512

devcap IVL | SVL | none

Device Capabilities of Q-Bridge MIB. In case of Stacked
Vlan Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans. Type: Modify －
Optional

bridgingmode Restricted

This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge. Value

|Unrestricted |

residential species that packets coming from CPE side

Residential

would be forwarded to the net side port without a lookup. In
case of restricted bridging, the packets would undergo a
lookup and if the destination is another CPE port, the packet
would be dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed.
Unrestricted bridging is forwarding based on lookup in all
cases.
Type: Modify － Optional

maxhpriotreenodes

Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high access



priority that can be created.
Type: Modify － Optional

620

IDL series User Guide

Valid values: 1 -32
maxlpriotreenodes

Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low access



priority that can be created.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -256

maxclfrtrees

Maximum number of classifier trees that can be created.



Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 63

maxclfrprofiles

Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be created.



Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 61

maxinrules

Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that can be



created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is
ignored.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -275

maxoutrules

Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that can be



created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is
ignored.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -25

maxinhpriosubrules

Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of high



access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
Valid values: 1 -75

maxinlpriosubrules

Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of low



access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
Valid values: 1 -425

maxouthpriosubrules

Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of high



access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
Valid values: 1 -25

maxoutlpriosubrules

Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of low



access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional

IP DSLAM

621

Valid values: 1 -175
mcastcap ivmcapable

It denotes the Multicast Device Capability. If the device

|svmcapable | none

capability is ivlcapable then svmcapable is not a valid value.
If the device capability is neither ivlcapable nor svmcapable
then the only valid value for this field is none. If the device
capability is ivlcapable or svlcapable then this field can't
have value none. ivmcapable and svmcapable can't be set
together.In case of Stacked Vlan Mode this shall apply to
Virtual Vlans.
Type: Modify － Optional

ridcap irdcapable

RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This

|srdcapable

database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related
information for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on
the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,
IRD( Independent Routing Database) where there are more
than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines separate
routes in context of itself. If VlanId  and RID  have
been created and the routing database is configured for
IRD, than routes in RID  shall define flow for packets
coming on VLAN Id . The other mode for the database
is SRD( Shared Routing Database) where there is a single
RID in the system and all flows map to this RID. This RID
has to be explicitly created and no more than 1 RID can be
created in the system in this mode. Flows for all created
VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.
Type: Modify － Optional

maxnumac

It denotes the maximum number of Access Concentrators



supported.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8

maxnumsrcmac

It denotes the maximum number of Source MAC addresses



that can be used across the different PPPOE and IPOE
interfaces.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8

vlanmode nativemode

Vlan Mode Type: Modify Optional

|stackedmode

622

svlanprotocolid

This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked



Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is

IDL series User Guide

recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0x8100 - 0xFFFF
tvlanprotocolid

This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked



Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan (0x8100). This
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0x8100 － 0xFFFF

tvlanid 

This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

abondglbctrlvpi

This VPI value will be used for the control channel which will



be created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding
protocol. This is a system wide parameter and applies to all
the abond group interfaces which can be created in the
system. Change in this value will be applied at next boot
only.
Type: Modify － Optional

abondglbctrlvci

This VCI value will be used for the control channel which will



be created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding
protocol. This is a system wide parameter and applies to all
the abond group interfaces which can be created in the
system. Change in this value will be applied at next boot
only.
Type: Modify － Optional

abondglbsidfmt

This SID Format value will be used for all the Abond Group

EightBitSid |

Interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in

TwelveBitSid

this value will be applied at next boot only.
Type: Modify － Optional

Example:
$ get nbsize

IP DSLAM

623

Output:
Max ATM Ports
: 48
Max VC per Port
:8
Max VCs
: 384
Max OAM activities
: 10
Max RMON probes
: 20
Bridging Mode
:
Residential
Max Multicast groups
: 256
Max MAC addresses
: 4000
Max Hash buckets
: 8192
Max Vlans
: 512
Max VlanId Value
: 4095
Max num Static Mac Entries : 512
Dev Capabilities
: IVL
Max Num EOA Prio Qs
:3
Max Num Eth Prio Qs
:8
Max High Prio Tree Nodes : 100
Max Low Prio Tree Nodes
: 200
Max Clfr Trees
: 63
Max Clfr Profiles
: 63
Max In Rules
: 250
Max Out Rules
: 50
Max In HighPrio SubRules : 100
Max In LowPrio SubRules
: 300
Max Out HighPrio SubRules : 50
Max Out LowPrio SubRules
: 150
Mcast Capabilities
: ivmcapable
Max Access Concentrators : 2
Max Src MAC Addresses
:4
Vlan Mode
:1
S Vlan Protocol Id
: 0x9100
T Vlan Protocol Id
: 0x9200
T Vlan Id
:1
AbondGlbCtrlVpi
:0
AbondGlbCtrlVci
: 20
AbondGlbSidFmt
Ridcap

: TwelveBitSID
: srdcapable

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Max ATM Ports

Maximum number of ATM ports that can be configured

Max VC per Port

Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port.

Max VCs

Maximum number of VCs possible in the system.

Max OAM activities

Maximum number of OAM activities that can be active at a time.

Max RMON probes

Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied
simultaneously in the system

Bridging Mode

This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge. Value
residential species that packets coming from CPE side would be
forwarded to the net side port without a lookup. In case of
restricted bridging, the packets would undergo a lookup and if
the destination is another CPE port, the packet would be
dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed. Unrestricted
bridging is forwarding based on lookup in all cases.

624

IDL series User Guide

Max Multicast groups

Maximum number of multicast groups that can be configured in
the system

Max MAC addresses

Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the
system. This should be a multiple of 32

Max Hash buckets

Maximum number of hash buckets for the Forwarding table.
This value should be a power of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)

Max Vlans

Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on the
Bridge either statically or dynamically

Max VlanId Value

Maximum value of VLAN ID that this Bridge can support

Max num Static Mac

Maximum number of Static UCast Entries that can be

Entries

configured on the Bridge

Dev Capabilities

Device Capabilities of Q-Bridge MIB. In case of Stacked Vlan
Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans.

Max Num EOA Prio Qs

This specifies the max number of priority queues that can be
configured on a bridge port created on EOA interface

Max Num Eth Prio Qs

This specifies the max number of priority queues that can be
configured on a bridge port created over an ethernet interface.

Max High Prio Tree

Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high access priority

Nodes

that can be created.

Max Low Prio Tree

Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low access priority

Nodes

that can be created.

Max Clfr Trees

Maximum number of classifier trees that can be created.

Max Clfr Profiles

Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be created.

3Max In Rules

Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that can be
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is ignored.

Max Out Rules

Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that can be
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is ignored.

Max In HighPrio

Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of high

SubRules

access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored.

Max In LowPrio

Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of low

SubRules

access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored.

Max Out HighPrio

Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of high

SubRules

access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored.

Max Out LowPrio

Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of low access

SubRules

priority that can be created.This parameter is deprecated and
the value is ignored.

Mcast Capabilities

IP DSLAM

It denotes the Multicast Device Capability. If the device

625

capability is ivlcapable then svmcapable is not a valid value. If
the device capability is neither ivlcapable nor svmcapable then
the only valid value for this field is none. If the device capability
is ivlcapable or svlcapable then this field can't have value none.
ivmcapable and svmcapable can't be set together.In case of
Stacked Vlan Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans.
Max Access

It denotes the maximum number of Access Concentrators

Concentrators

supported.

Max Src MAC

It denotes the maximum number of Source MAC addresses that

Addresses

can be used across the different PPPOE and IPOE interfaces.

Vlan Mode

Vlan Mode

S Vlan Protocol Id

This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.

T Vlan Protocol Id

This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.

T Vlan Id

This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.

AbondGlbCtrlVpi

This VPI value will be used for the control channel which will be
created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding protocol. This
is a system wide parameter and applies to all the abond group
interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this
value will be applied at next boot only.

AbondGlbCtrlVci

This VCI value will be used for the control channel which will be
created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding protocol. This
is a system wide parameter and applies to all the abond group
interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this
value will be applied at next boot only.

AbondGlbSidFmt

This SID Format value will be used for all the Abond Group
Interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this
value will be applied at next boot only.

Ridcap

626

RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This database

IDL series User Guide

contains information about the routes in the system. Each RID
identifies a flow and defines route related information for that
flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The
database can be of 2 types, IRD( Independent Routing
Database) where there are more than one RIDs in the system
and each RID defines separate routes in context of itself. If
VlanId  and RID  have been created and the routing
database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID  shall
define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id . The other
mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing Database)
where there is a single RID in the system and all flows map to
this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than
1 RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for all
created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.

5.25.9 System Stats Commands
5.25.9.1 Get system stats
Description:
Use this command to view System Statistics.
Command Syntax:
get system stats
5.25.9.2 Reset system stats
Description:
Use this command to reset System Statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset system stats
Example:
$ get system stats
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
CPE Ucast Addr Count
NET Ucast Addr Count

IP DSLAM

: 10
: 20

DnLink Ucast Addr Count : 80
CPE Learn Entry Discards : 90

627

DnLink Learn Entry Discards : 30
Dyn Addr Conflicts Static
: 40
Ucast Lookup Fail Count
: 50
Tx Ctl Pkts Count
: 60
Ctl Pkts Discards Count
: 70
PPPOE Session Look Up Failures: 5

NET Learn Entry Discards : 100
Moved Dyn Addrs Count
: 110
Mcast Lookup Fail Count : 120
Rx Ctl Pkts Count
: 130

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

CPE

Ucast

Addr

Number of unicast addresses, which were learned from the
CPE ports.

Count
DnLink

Ucast

Addr

Number of unicast addresse,s which were learned from the
Downlink port.

Count

Number of addresses which, were not learned from the
Learn Entry Discards
CPE ports, due to lack of space in the forwarding table.
Number of addresses which, were not learned from the
DnLink Learn Entry
Downlink port, due to lack of space in the for-warding
Discards
table.
Dyn

Addr

Conflicts

Number of times a learned address conflicted with a static
address.

Static
Moved

Dyn

Addrs

to another.

Count
Ucast

Number of times a learned address moved from one port

Lookup

Fail
Number of times Unicast address lookup failed.

Count
Mcast

Lookup

Fail
Number of times Multicast address lookup failed.

Count
Tx Ctl Pkts Count

Number of packets sent to the Control module.

Rx Ctl Pkts Count

Number of packets received from Control module.

Ctl

Pkts

Discards
Number Control module packets discarded.

Count
NumNetUcastAddrCo

Number of unicast addresses which were learned from the

unt

Net ports.

NumNetLearnEntryDi

Number of addresses, which were not learned from the

scards

Net ports, due to lack of space in the forwarding table.

References:
get/modify system info
get/modify nbsize

628

IDL series User Guide

5.25.10 System Traps Commands
5.25.10.1 Reset traps
Description:
Use this command to delete all trap logs.
Command Syntax:
reset traps
Mode :
super-user
Example:
$ reset traps
Output:
Set Done
Output Fields:
None
References:
get traps command.
5.25.11 System Traps Log Table Commands
5.25.11.1 Get traps
Description:
Use this command to get the listing of all Trap Log Table entries (tTraps) or the last
few tentries (Traps). This command is not supported on a flashless system.
Command Syntax:
get traps [num-of-traps]

IP DSLAM

629

Parameters:
Name

Description

Num-of-traps

This specifies the maximum number of (entries)
traps to be displayed from trap log table; if not
specified then all entries are displayed.
Type: Optional
Valid values : 0 to 4294967295

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get traps
Output
Thu Jan 01 00:00:13 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ATM VC Up :Interface Name–
aal5-0
Thu Jan 01 00:00:13 1970 : STATUS ALARM : System Up
Output Fields
FIELD

Description

Trap time

This specifies the time at which the trap was logged.

Trap severity

This specifies the severity level of the trap. It can be –
CRITICAL ALARM
MAJOR ALARM
WARNING
STATUS ALARM

Trap name

This specifies the name of the trap. It can be –
System Init Failed - This trap is originated at the time of system initialization
failures. The failure could be due to an internal error or due to a
wrong/corrupted configuration file. Trap parameters are Module and Cause.
System Up - This trap is originated after the unit boots up successfully.
ADSL ATUC Up - This trap indicates that the DSL port is in data mode.
ADSL ATUC Down - This trap indicates that the DSL port is no longer in data
mode.
ATM Interface Up - This trap indicates that the ATM port is operationally up.
Trap parameter is Interface No.
ATM Interface Down - This trap indicates that the ATM port is operationally
down. Trap parameter is Interface No.
ETHER Interface Up - This trap indicates that the Ethernet port is

630

IDL series User Guide

operationally up. Trap parameter is Interface No.
ETHER Interface Down - This trap indicates that the Ethernet port is
operationally down. Trap parameter is Interface No.
ATM VC Up - This trap indicates that the ATM VC is operationally up. Trap
parameter is Interface Name.
ATM VC Down - This trap indicates that the ATM VC is operationally down.
Trap parameter is Interface Name.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Frame 15-Minute Threshold

hit - This trap indicates

that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Signal 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Link 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Link has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Power 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Power has reached.
ADSL ATUC Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Errored Seconds has reached.
EoA Interface Up

– This trap indicates that the EOA interface is

operationally up. Trap parameter is Interface name
EOA Interface Down - This trap indicates that the EOA Interface is
operationally down. Trap parameter is Interface Name.
ADSL Loss of Frame Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Framing
15-minute interval threshold has reached.

ADSL Loss of Signal Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Signal
15-minute interval threshold has reached
ADSL Loss of Power Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Power
15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL

Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Errored

Second 15-minute interval threshold has reached
ADSL ADUC Tx Rate changed - This trap indicates that the ATUCs transmit
rate has changed (RADSL mode only).
ADSL Loss of Link Threshold hit- This trap indicates that Loss of Link
15-minute interval threshold has reached
ADSL ATUC Init failed - This trap indicates that ATUC initialization failed. See
adslAtucCurrStatus for potential reasons
ADSL Failed Fast Retrains Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Failed
Fast Retrains 15-minute threshold has reached
ADSL ATUC Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This
trap indicates that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored
Seconds has reached.

IP DSLAM

631

ADSL ATUC Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Unavailable Seconds has
reached.
ADSL Unavailable Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
unavailable seconds-line 15-minute threshold has reached
ADSL Severely Errored

Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that

severely errored seconds-line 15-minute threshold has reached.
Aggregator Interface Up - This trap indicates that the aggregator interface is
operationally up.
Aggregator Interface Down - This trap indicates that the aggregator interface
is operationally down.
The OP state of ADSL line  has changed from  to - This trap indicates the change in the operational
status of the port.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame Threshold hit - This
trap indicates that Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame 15-Minute Threshold hit

- This trap indicates

that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal 15-Minute Threshold hit

- This trap indicates

that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Power has reached
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Errored Seconds has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of
Signal 15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power Threshold hit - This rap indicates that Loss of
Power 15-minute interval threshold has
reached.
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold has
reached.
ADSL ATUR Rate Changed -This trap indicates that the ATUR rate has
changed (RADSL mode only).
Port binding status changed - This trap indicates that the port on which the
mac address has been learned has changed.
Port binding status changed - This trap indicates that the port on which the
tracked MAC address is being received has changed.
Port binding status learnt - This trap indicates that the particular mac
address has been received for the first time. This trap will also be received if
the tracked MAC address is received from an existing port and the port from

632

IDL series User Guide

which it was earlier received has been deleted by now.
Failed To Get IP Address

- This trap indicates that DHCP client could not

get an ip address from DHCP server.
Chip Lockup Detected

- This trap indicates that a chip lockup has occurred.

Chip Recovery from Lockup OK

- This trap indicates that Chip Recovery

from Lockup has occurred.
Chip Recovery from Lockup Failed

- This trap indicates that Chip

Recovery from Lockup has Failed.
Chip Preinit CheckSum Failed - This trap indicates that Preinit Checksum
for Chip has Failed
Xcvr Lockup Detected - This trap indicates that a transceiver lockup has
occurred.

Xcvr Recovery from Lockup OK - This trap indicates that a transceiver
Recovery from Lockup has occurred.
Xcvr Recovery from Lockup Failed - This trap indicates that a transceiver
Recovery from Lockup has Failed
EHDLC Interface Up - This trap indicates that HDLC Interface over EOC is
operationally up. Trap Parameter is Interface Index.
EHDLC Interface Down - This trap indicates that HDLC Interface over EOC is
operationally down. Trap Parameter is Interface Index.
Control packet Q congestion start - This trap indicates that Congestion
has occurred on data plane to Control plane Packet Queue for the Interface.
Control packet Q congestion stop

- This trap indicates that Congestion has

stopped on data plane to Control plane Packet Queue for the Interface.
Statistics Reset

- This trap indicates that Interface Stats has been reset .

ADSL ATUC Loss of Frame 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Signal 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Link 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that 1-Day
interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Link has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Power 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Power has reached.
ADSL ATUC Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Errored Seconds has reached.
ADSL ATUC Severely Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored Seconds
has reached.
ADSL ATUC Unavailable Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Unavailable Seconds has reached.

IP DSLAM

633

ADSL ATUR Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 15-Minute interval threshold for ATUR Severely Errored Seconds
has reached.

ADSL ATUR Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 15-Minute interval threshold for ATUR Unavailable Seconds has
reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Power has reached
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Errored Seconds has reached.
ADSL ATUR Severely Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Severely Errored Seconds
has reached.
ADSL ATUR Unavailable Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Unavailable Seconds has
reached.
PPPOE Interface Up - This trap indicates that the PPPoE interface is
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.

PPPOE Interface Down - This trap indicates that the PPPoE interface is
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.

PPPOE

Max Tries in Discovery Stage have exceeded for a PPPoE - This

trap indicates that the maximum tries for initiation of discovery stage for the
PPPoE session establishment has exceeded for the PPPoE interface. The
Trap parameter is the interface name.

PPPR Interface Up - This trap indicates that the PPPR interface is
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.

PPPR Interface Down - This trap indicates that the PPPR interface is
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.
Lock on GAG acquired: This trap specifies that an agent has acquired an
exclusive lock on GAG. Requests from other agents will not be serviced by
GAG.

634

IDL series User Guide

Lock on GAG released: This trap specifies that an agent has released lock on
GAG. Requests from other agents will now be serviced by GAG.
Bridge port status transitioned to dormant : This trap specifies that bridge
port status has changed to dormant.
ATM interface out of deficit : This trap specifies that ATM interface is out of
deficit.
ATM VC AAL5 EncapType Changed : This trap specifies that encapsulation
type of ATM VC AAL5 has changed.
AutoSensing Config Change Based Stack Tear DownFailed, RETRY:
Change of Power Management State of ADSL Line: This trap specifies that
power management state of ADSL line has changed.Chip Local Bus Access
Failed: This trap specifies that power management state of ADSL line has
changed.
IPOA Interface Up: This trap indicates that theIPOA interface is operationally
up. The trapparameter is the interface name.I
POA Interface Down: This trap indicates that the IPOA interface is
operationally down. The trapparameter is the interface name.
IPOE Interface Up: This trap indicates that thePPPR interface is operationally
up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
IPOE Interface Down: This trap indicates that the IPOE interface is
operationally down. The trapparameter is the interface name.
ABOND Interface Up: This trap indicates that the ABOND interface is
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
ABOND Interface Down: This trap indicates that the ABOND interface is
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
VCAGGR Interface Up: This trap indicates that the VCAGGR interface is
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
VCAGGR Interface Down: This trap indicates that the VCAGGR interface is
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.
SHDSL Loop Attenuation crossing: This trap indicates that the SHDSL loop
attenuation is crossing.
SHDSL SNR crossing: This trap indicates that the SHDSL loop attenuation is
crossing.
SHDSL Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit : This trap indicates that
15-Minute interval threshold for SHDSL Errored Seconds has reached.

SHDSL Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit : This trap
indicates that 15- minute interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored
Seconds has reached.
SHDSL CRC Anomalies 15-Minute Threshold hit: This notification indicates
that the CRC anomalies threshold (as set in SHDL End point alarm conf profile

IP DSLAM

635

table) has been reached/exceeded for the SHDSL segment endpoint.
Reached/exceeded is determined by comparing the endpoint's CRC
anomalies in the current 15-minute interval (as set in SHDSL End Point Curr
Table) with the specified threshold.
SHDSL Loss of Sync Word Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit: This
notification indicates that the Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) seconds threshold
(as set in SHDL End point alarm conf profile table) has been
reached/exceeded for the SHDSL segment endpoint. Reached/exceeded is
determined by comparing the endpoint's LOSW seconds in the current
15-minute interval (as set in SHDSL End Point Curr Table) with the specified
threshold.
SHDSL Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit: This trap indicates
that 15-minuteinterval threshold for SHDSL Unavailable Secondshas reached.
SHDSL Invalid number of Repeaters detected: This trap indicates the
number of Invalid repeaters

detected.

SHDSL Loopback Failure detected:This trap indicates that loop back failure
has been detected.
SHDSL Power Backoff Setting changed: This trap specifies that Operational
state of VDSL line has changed.
SHDSL STU-C Init Fail: This notification indicates that STUC failure during
initialization due to peer STU not able to support requested configuration
SHDSL Local Power Loss: This trap specifies that local power loss of SHDSL
Change of OP state of SHDSL line: This trap specifies change of Operational
state of VDSL line.
SHDSL Framer OH and Defects Trap: This notification indicates a change in
values of overhead/defect data transmitted from the remote unit. LOSD,
SEGA, PS, and SEGD values are reported.
SHDSL STU-C Up: This trap indicates that the SHDSL STU-C is operationally
up. The trap parameter is the interface name.
SHDSL STU-C Down: This trap indicates that the SHDSL STU-C is
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.
SHDSL Remote ATM Cell Status Response: This trap indicates that remote
ATM Cell status response has been received.
SHDSL UTC received in response of STU-R Config Request: This
notification indicates the remote unit was unable to comply (UTC) with an
STU-R Configuration Request -Management (EOC Message Id 18).
SHDSL UTC received in response of Remote EOC request: This
notification provides a generic unable to comply(UTC) indication. If the remote
unit is unable to comply with a remote EOC request, this trap indicates the
noncompliance of the remote unit.
SHDSL Generic Failure Trap: This notification reports any failure that has

636

IDL series User Guide

occurred while processing any command issued by the customer.
Trap parameters

This specifies additional parameters describing the trap. Different traps have
different combinations of trap parameters. There are also some traps with no
additional parameters. The parameters can be Module - 
Cause - 
Interface - 

IP - 
Port - 
VPI - 
VCI - 
Current - 
Threshold - 
Previous - 

References:
z
reset traps command
z
logthresh parameter in modify system and get system commands.

5.25.12 System Version Commands
5.25.12.1 Get system version
Description:
This command is used to get the information of the versions with which the system
has come up.
Command Syntax:
get system version
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get system version

IP DSLAM

637

Output:
Verbose Mode On
Control Plane Binary
Data Plane Binary

: COL 2.6.0.0.040217
: DP_B02_06_19

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Control Plane Binary

This tells about the version of the control plane
binary with which the system has come up.

Data Plane Binary

This tells about the version of the data plane binary
with which the system has come up.

5.25.13 Trace Log Configuration Commands
5.25.13.1 Get trace cfg
Description:
Use this command to display the trace configuration for a specific module, or for all
modules.
Command Syntax:
get trace cfg [module ]
5.25.13.2 Modify trace cfg
Description:
Use this command to modify the trace and log configuration for a specific module
Command Syntax:
modify trace cfg module  [flow ] [level ]
[syslog|net|stdout] [dest ] [port ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

module

This specifies the module, for which trace/log configuration

|all

is to be modified.
Type

: Modify – Mandatory
Get – Optional

Valid values: GCOS,OAM, CIN, GAG, CDB, CLI, ATM,
EOA, TBG, DSLME, NVM, FFC, DNCD, DATAME, GARP,

638

IDL series User Guide

GVRP, LACP
flow

This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask,

which sets the filter

for trace flow.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 0x0 to 0xffffffff
level 

This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask,

which sets the filter

for trace level.
Type

: Optional

Valid values: 0x0 to 0xffffffff
syslog|net|stdout

This specifies the type of logging to be done. Incase net or
syslog is specified then dest and port must be specified.
Type: Optional

dest

This specifies the IP address for host for logging for trace
type syslog and net. It is invalid incase of trace type stdout
Type: Mandatory when type is modified to net or syslog;
else it is invalid
Valid values: Any valid class A/B/C IP address

port 

Port number on which, host is listening for trace info to be
logged incase of trace type syslog and net. It is invalid
incase of trace type stdout
Type: Mandatory when type is modified to net or syslog;
else it is invalid
Valid values: 0-4294967295

Mode:
Super-User
Example:
$ modify trace cfg module GAG flow 0x1 level 0x1
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Module

Flow

Level

Type

Destn

Port

-----------------------------------------------------------------------GAG

0x0

0x0

Flow

Level

Stdout

0.0.0.0

0

Set Done
Module

Type

Destn

Port

-----------------------------------------------------------------------GAG

IP DSLAM

0x1

0x1

Stdout

0.0.0.0

0

639

Verbose Mode Off
Set Done

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Module

This specifies the module for trace/log config whose
information is being displayed: It can be : GCOS,OAM,
CIN, GAG, CDB, CLI, ATM, EOA, TBG, DSLME, NVM,
FFC, DNCD, DATAME, GARP, GVRP, LACP

Flow

This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the
filter for trace flow.

Level

This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the
filter for trace level.

Type

This specifies the type of logging to be done. It may be:
Syslog, Net, Stdout

Destn

This specifies the IP address for host for logging for
trace type syslog and net. It is invalid incase of trace
type stdout

Port

Port number on which host is listening for trace info to be
logged incase of trace type syslog and net. It is invalid
incase of trace type stdout

References:
z
get trace cfg command
z
get trace stats command.

5.25.14 Trace Log Statistics Commands
5.25.14.1 Get trace stats
Description:
Use this command to display trace statistics.
Command Syntax:
get trace stats
Parameters:
None

640

IDL series User Guide

Mode:
Super-User, User.
Example:
$ get trace stats
Output:
Verbose Mode On/Off
Bytes Logged: 2744
Msgs Logged : 19

Bytes Discarded : 40595
Msgs Discarded : 1045

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Bytes Logged

This specifies the number of bytes logged by the
tracing/logging module.

Bytes Discarded

This specifies the number of bytes discarded by
the tracing/ logging module due to filtering.

Msgs Logged

This specifies the number of message logged by
the tracing/ logging module.

Msgs Discarded

This specifies the number of messages discarded
by the tracing/logging module due to filtering.

References:
z
get trace cfg command
z
Modify trace cfg command.

IP DSLAM

641

5.26 VC Aggregation Commands
5.26.1 Atm vcaggr intf Commands
5.26.1.1 Get atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get atm vcaggr intf [ifname ]
5.26.1.2 Create atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create atm vcaggr intf ifname  mapid 
defaultdnstrmvc  [enable | disable]
5.26.1.3 Delete atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete atm vcaggr intf ifname
5.26.1.4 Modify atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify atm vcaggr intf ifname  [defaultdnstrmvc
] [enable | disable]

642

IDL series User Guide

Parameters:
Name

Description

ifname 

Name of the VC aggregation interface
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 142

mapid 

It contains the Id of VcAggrMap in VcAggrMap table. The
VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs being aggregated and the
priority assignment information. Once the aggregation interface is
created with the specified MapId, no more entries canbe created in
the VcAggrMap table for that MapId, however the priority
assignment can be modified any time
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 144

defaultdnstrmvc

Default VC for the VC Aggregation interface. All the downstream



priorities that are left unassigned in the VcAggrMap table with the
associated MapId, will be mapped to the default VC. Default VC
should be one of the VCs associated with MapId in the VcAggrMap
table.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 574

enable | disable

Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable

Example:
$ create atm vcaggr intf ifname VcAggr-0 mapid 1 defaultdnstrmvc aal5-0 enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname
: VcAggr-0 VC MapId
default downstream VC : aal5-0

IP DSLAM

:1

643

Oper Status

: Up

Admin Status : Down

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Ifname

Name of the VC aggregation interface

VC MapId

It contains the Id of VcAggrMap in VcAggrMap
table. The VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs
being aggregated and the priority assignment
information. Once the aggregation interface is
created with the specified MapId, no more entries
canbe created in the VcAggrMap table for that
MapId, however the priority assignment can be
modified any time

default downstream

Default VC for the VC Aggregation interface. All

VC

the downstream priorities that are left unassigned
in the VcAggrMap table with the associated MapId,
will be mapped to the default VC. Default VC
should be one of the VCs associated with MapId in
the VcAggrMap table.

Oper Status

The actual/current state of the interface. It can be
either up or down.

Admin Status

The desired state of the interface. It may be either
Up or Down.

5.26.2 Atm vcaggr map Commands
5.26.2.1 Get atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get atm vcaggr map [mapid ] [vc ]

644

IDL series User Guide

5.26.2.2 Create atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create atm vcaggr map mapid  vc  [dnstrmpriolist
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} +|none] [upstrmdefprio  |none]
[upstrmregenprio  |none]
5.26.2.3 Delete atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete atm vcaggr map mapid vc 
5.26.2.4 Modify atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify atm vcaggr map mapid  vc  [dnstrmpriolist
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} +|none] [upstrmdefprio  |none]
[upstrmregenprio  |none]
Parameters:
Name

Description

mapid 

It contains the Id of VcAggregation Map. The
VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs being
aggregated and the associated priorities in
downstream and upstream directions. Once the
VC aggregation interface is created with the a
MapId, no more entries can be created in the
VcAggrMap table for that MapId
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 24

IP DSLAM

645

vc 

Name of the VC to be part of aggregation.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete --

Mandatory

Modify --

Mandatory

Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 101 -206
dnstrmpriolist 0 | 1 | 2 |

This field specifies the downstream priorities with

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none

which the specified VC interface shall be
associated under a VC Aggregation interface.
This field is used for demultiplexing downstream
traffic. A VC can be mapped to multiple priorities.
But not two VCs can be mapped to same priority.
Value None has special significance. It specifies
that this VC is part of VC Aggregation interface
but no priority is mapped to it.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 8
upstrmdefprio

Priority parameter to be used for tagging the



untagged upstream traffic coming on a VC.
Regeneration of priority at bridge level will be
done on the basis of this priority.If value None is
specified, then bridge port's defprio will be used
for tagging the untagged packets
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Valid values: 0 -8
Default value: 8
upstrmregenprio

Priority parameter to be used for retagging the



tagged upstream traffic coming on a
VC.Regeneration of priority at bridge level will be
done on the basis of this priority.If value None is
specified, then bridge port's priority regeneration
map will be used.
Type:

Create

Modify --

-- Optional

Optional

Valid values: 0 - 8
Default value: 8

646

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ create atm vcaggr map mapid 1 vc aal5-0 dnstrmpriolist 1 3 7 upstrmdefprio 2
upstrmregenprio 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VC map Id
:1
Up Stream Default Priority : 2
Downstream priority Map
:137

VC Intf
Up Stream Regen Priority : 2

: aal5-0

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field

Description

VC map Id

It contains the Id of VcAggregation Map. The VcAggrMap contains
the list of VCs being aggregated and the associated priorities in
downstream and upstream directions. Once the VC aggregation
interface is created with the a MapId, no more entries can be
created in the VcAggrMap table for that MapId

VC Intf

Name of the VC to be part of aggregation.

Up Stream Default

Priority parameter to be used for tagging the untagged upstream

Priority

traffic coming on a VC. Regeneration of priority at bridge level will
be done on the basis of this priority.If value None is specified, then
bridge port's defprio will be used for tagging the untagged packets

Up Stream Regen

Priority parameter to be used for retagging the tagged upstream

Priority

traffic coming on a VC.Regeneration of priority at bridge level will
be done on the basis of this priority.If value None is specified, then
bridge port's priority regeneration map will be used.

Downstream priority

This field specifies the downstream priorities with which the

Map

specified VC interface shall be associated under a VC
Aggregation interface. This field is used for demultiplexing
downstream traffic. A VC can be mapped to multiple priorities. But
not two VCs can be mapped to same priority. Value None has
special significance. It specifies that this VC is part of VC
Aggregation interface but no priority is mapped to it.

IP DSLAM

647

5.27 VLAN Commands
5.27.1 GVRP Info Commands
5.27.1.1 Get gvrp info
Description:
Use this command to get GVRP information.
Command Syntax:
get gvrp info
5.27.1.2 Modify gvrp info
Description:
Use this command to modify GVRP information.
Command Syntax:
modify gvrp info gvrpstatus enable | disable
Parameter:
Name

Description

gvrpstatus enable | disable

The administrative status requested by management for GVRP
Type: Optional

Example:
$ modify gvrp info gvrpstatus enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On:
VLAN Version Number : 1
GVRP Status
: enable

Current VLANS : 1000

Set Done
VLAN Version Number : 1
GVRP Status
: enable

Current VLANS : 1000

Verbose Mode Off:
Set Done

648

IDL series User Guide

Output Fields:
Field

Description

VLAN Version

Version Number of IEEE802.1Q, that device

Number

supports.

Current VLANS

The current number of IEEE 802.1Q VLANs that
are configured on this device.
The administrative status requested by

GVRP Status

management for GVRP.

References:
gvrp port info commands
gvrp port stats commands

5.27.2 GVRP Port Info Commands
5.27.2.1 Get gvrp port info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get gvrp port info [portid ]
5.27.2.2 Modify gvrp port info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify gvrp port info portid  [ portvlanid  ]
[ acceptframetypes all | tagged ] [ ingressfiltering true|false ] [ gvrpstatus
enable | disable ] [ restrictedvlanreg true|false ][pktpriority  ]
[psvlanid  | none] [ppstatus enable | disable] [ctosprofileid
 | none]
Parameter:
Name
portid 

Description
The bridge port id.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional

IP DSLAM

649

Valid values: 1 - 578
portvlanid


The VLAN Identifier.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095

acceptframetypes all
|tagged

When this is Tagged, the device will discard untagged
frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When
All, untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this
port.
Type: Modify － Optional

ingressfiltering False
|True

When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames
for VLANs, which do not include this Port in its Member set.
When false, the port will accept all incoming frames.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: False, True

gvrpstatus enable

The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value 'enable',

|disable

indicates that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as
'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP INFO' command is also enabled for this
device. When this is 'disable', even if 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP
INFO' command is 'enable' for the device, GVRP will be
'disable' on this port. In such a case, any GVRP packets
received will be silently discarded and no GVRP registrations
will be propagated from other ports. This object affects all
GVRP Applicant and Registrar state machines on this port.
This configuration shall not be effective for a bridge port
created over PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional

restrictedvlanreg
False |True

The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this port. If the
value of this control is true(1), then creation of a new
dynamic VLAN entry is permitted only if there is a Static
VLAN Registration Entry for the VLAN concerned, in which,
the Registrar Administrative Control value for this port is,
Normal Registration. Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: False, True

pktpriority

For the GVRP PDUs generated by the Control Plane, this



priority shall be used for choice of traffic class/ Queue on
outgoing interface. In case the bridge port is over an
Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the VC,
on which the packet is to be sent.
Type: Modify － Optional

650

IDL series User Guide

Valid values: 0 - 7
psvlanid

Port service Vlan Index, the Service VLAN ID assigned to

 | none

frames received on this port. This is applicable only to
Non-Provider ports. The value zero here means that this field
is not applicable. psvlanid and ctosprofileid both can be
non-zero. But they both can not be zero. In case of bridge
port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value must be
non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other
bridge ports† psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid
and ctosprofileid have non-zero value for such ports, the
ctosprofileid shall be applied and psvlanid shall be ignored
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095

ppstatus enable |

This specifies if the port is a provider port or a Non-Provider

disable

port as per Vlan stacking model. This field is applicable only
in Vlan stacking scenario. The modification of this parameter
is allowed only when the bridge port is disabled. If the value
of this field is enable i.e the port is a provider port, then
Priority of the incoming C-Vlan tag is kept preserved
irrespective of gsvSVlanCvlanQosPreserveMode of the
Svlan to which the packet belongs to.
Type: Modify － Optional

ctosprofileid

This specifies the CtoS profileId for the Vlan Map profile

 |

associated† with this interface. Value zero for this means no

none

CtoS profile associated with this port.† psvlanid and
ctosprofileid both can be non-zero. But they both can not be
zero. In case of bridge port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces
psvlanid value must be non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for
such a port. For other bridge ports† psvlanid value can be
zero. If both psvlanid and ctosprofileid have non-zero value
for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall be applied and psvlanid
shall be ignored.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -4

Example:
$ get gvrp port info portid 10

IP DSLAM

651

Output:
Verbose Mode On:
VLAN Version Number : 1
GVRP Status
: enable

Current VLANS : 1000

Set Done
VLAN Version Number : 1
GVRP Status
: enable

Current VLANS : 1000

Verbose Mode Off:
Set Done
Output Fields:
Field

Description

Port Id

The bridge port id.

Port VLAN Index

The VLAN Identifier.

Accept Frame Types

When this is Tagged, the device will discard untagged frames or
Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When All, untagged
frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port will be
accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.

Ingress Filtering

When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames for VLANs,
which do not include this Port in its Member set. When false, the port
will accept all incoming frames.

Gvrp Status

The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value 'enable', indicates
that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP
INFO' command is also enabled for this device. When this is 'disable',
even if 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP INFO' command is 'enable' for the
device, GVRP will be 'disable' on this port. In such a case, any GVRP
packets received will be silently discarded and no GVRP registrations
will be propagated from other ports. This object affects all GVRP
Applicant and Registrar state machines on this port. This configuration
shall not be effective for a bridge port created over PPPOE/IPOE
interface.

Failed Registrations

The total number of failed GVRP registrations, for any reason, on this
port.

Last Pdu Origin

The Source MAC Address of the last GVRP message received on
this port.

Restricted Vlan
Registration

652

The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this port. If the value of
this control is true(1), then creation of a new dynamic VLAN entry is

IDL series User Guide

permitted only if there is a Static VLAN Registration Entry for the
VLAN concerned, in which, the Registrar Administrative Control value
for this port is, Normal Registration.
GVRP PacketsPrio'

For the GVRP PDUs generated by the Control Plane, this priority shall
be used for choice of traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface. In
case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to be sent.

PS VLAN Index

Port service Vlan Index, the Service VLAN ID assigned to frames
received on this port. This is applicable only to Non-Provider ports.
The value zero here means that this field is not applicable. psvlanid
and ctosprofileid both can be non-zero. But they both can not be zero.
In case of bridge port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value
must be non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other
bridge ports† psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid and
ctosprofileid have non-zero value for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall
be applied and psvlanid shall be ignored

Port Provider Status

This specifies if the port is a provider port or a Non-Provider port as
per Vlan stacking model. This field is applicable only in Vlan stacking
scenario. The modification of this parameter is allowed only when the
bridge port is disabled. If the value of this field is
GS_STATE_ENABLE i.e the port is a provider port, then Priority of the
incoming C-Vlan tag is kept preserved irrespective of
gsvSVlanCvlanQosPreserveMode of the Svlan to which the packet
belongs to.

CtoS Profile Id

This specifies the CtoS profileId for the Vlan Map profile associated†
with this interface. Value zero for this means no CtoS profile
associated with this port.† psvlanid and ctosprofileid both can be
non-zero. But they both can not be zero. In case of bridge port on
PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value must be non-zero,
ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other bridge ports†
psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid and ctosprofileid have
non-zero value for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall be applied and
psvlanid shall be ignored.

References:
gvrp commands

IP DSLAM

653

5.27.3 GVRP Port Stats Commands
5.27.3.1 Get gvrp port stats
Description:
Use this command to get GVRP port statistics.
Command Syntax:
get gvrp port stats [portid ]
5.27.3.2 Reset gvrp port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset GVRP port statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset gvrp port stats portid 
Parameter:
Name

Description

portid 

The bridge port id.
Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: 1-578

Example:
$ get gvrp port stats
Output:
ortId
:6
Recv Join Empty : 100
Recv Join In
: 200
Recv Empty
: 200
Recv Leave
: 300
Recv Leave All : 300
Leave Empty Rx : 300

Send Join Empty : 100
Send Join In
: 200
Send Empty
: 200
Send Leave
: 300
Send Leave All : 300
Leave Empty Tx : 300

Output Fields:
Field

Description

PortId

Index of the Bridge Port.

Recv Join Empty

Counter for the number of Join Empty Messages
received.

654

IDL series User Guide

Send Join Empty

Counter for the number of Join Empty Messages
sent.

Recv Join In

Counter for the number of Join In Messages
received.

Send Join In

Counter for the number of Join In Messages sent.

Recv Empty

Counter for the number of Empty Messages
received.

Send Empty

Counter for the number of Empty Messages sent.

Recv Leave

Counter for the number of Leave Messages
received.

Send Leave

Counter for the number of Leave Messages sent.

Recv Leave All

Counter for the number of Leave All Messages
received.
Counter for the number of Leave All Messages

Send Leave All
sent.
Leave Empty Rx

Counter for the number of Leave Empty Rx
received.

Leave Empty Tx

Counter for the number of Leave Empty Tx sent.

References:
gvrp commands

5.27.4 Vlan curr info Commands
5.27.4.1 Get vlan curr info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get vlan curr info [vlanid ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
The VLAN Identifier.

vlanid 

Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095

IP DSLAM

655

Example:
$ get vlan curr info vlanid 45
Output:
VLAN Index
VLAN Status
Egress Ports
Untagged Ports
Bridging Mode
Flood support Status
Broadcast support Status
Reserved Mac Profile Id

: 45
:1
: 24
: 24
: Residential
: enable
: enable
:1

Output field:
Field

Description

VLAN Index

The VLAN identifier

VLAN Status

This value indicates the status of the VLAN Port
corresponding to this entry. Other (1) - the entry is
for the default VLAN created for the system.
Permanent (2) - this entry, corresponding to an
entry in dot1qVlanStaticTable, is currently in use
and will remain so after the next reset of the
device. The port lists for this entry include ports
from the equivalent dot1qVlanStaticTable entry
and ports learnt dynamically. Dynamic (3) - this
entry is currently in use and will remain so until
removed by GVRP. There is no static entry for
this VLAN and it will be removed when the last port
leaves the VLAN.

Egress Ports

The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
this VLAN, as either tagged or untagged frames.

Untagged Ports

The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
this VLAN as untagged frames. In Stacked Vlan
mode this applies tagging/untagging for C-VLAN.

Bridging Mode

This specifies the state of full bridging for the Vlan.
There can be 3 values associated with this based
on global fullBridgingStatus. These values can
be restricted bridging, unrestricted full bridging and
residential bridging. The user can specify the
bridging mode for the vlan in the
Dot1qVlanStaticTable table as one of these

656

IDL series User Guide

values; otherwise the vlan inherits the globally set
bridging mode. Unrestricted bridging is not
applicable for bridge ports created over pppoe
interface even though the vlan may be
unrestricted.For a Vlan with bridging mode as
CrossConnect there is no learning and lookup and
there are at most two member ports for it. In band
Management traffic cannot run for such a vlan.
VLAN here means the 802.1q vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of
Stacked Vlan Mode.
Flood support Status

This tells if the flooding shall be done for unknown
unicast packets for this vlan or not. The unknown
unicast packets shall be flooded to all ports for a
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) is
enabled or throttle and the value per vlan is also
enabled else dropped. This field is not applicable if
dot1qGsVlanFullBridgingStatus is CrossConnect

Broadcast support

This tells if the broadcast shall be done for this vlan

Status

or not. The broadcast packets shall be
broadcasted on all ports for a vlan if global value
(present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan
are both enabled else dropped. This field is not
applicable if dot1qGsVlanFullBridgingStatus is
CrossConnect.

Reserved Mac Profile

The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to

Id

determine the behavior for Reserved Mac destined
frames. Reserved Mac addresses are the multicast
addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q
and IEEE 802.1ad.

5.27.5 VLAN mapprofile info Commands
5.27.5.1 Get vlan mapprofile info
Description:
Use this command to get.

IP DSLAM

657

Command Syntax:
get vlan mapprofile info [profileid ]
5.27.5.2 Create vlan mapprofile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create vlan mapprofile info profileid profiletype CtoS
5.27.5.3 Delete vlan mapprofile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete vlan mapprofile info profileid 
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Vlan Map profile identifier
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -Get

--

Mandatory

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
profiletype CToS

Profile type
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Example:
$ create vlan mapprofile info profileid 3 profiletype CtoS
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 3

Profile Type : CtoS

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

658

IDL series User Guide

Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Id

Vlan Map profile identifier

Profile Type

Profile type

References:
VLAN commands

5.27.6 Vlan mapprofile param Commands
5.27.6.1 Get vlan mapprofile param
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get vlan mapprofile param [profileid ] [vlan1 ]
5.27.6.2 Create vlan mapprofile param
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create vlan mapprofile param profileid  vlan1 vlan2

5.27.6.3 Delete vlan mapprofile param
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete vlan mapprofile param profileid vlan1 
Parameters:
Name

Description

profileid 

Vlan Map profile identifier.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

IP DSLAM

--

Optional

659

Valid values: 1 - 4
vlan1 

This is the first Vlan for the Map entry. In case of CtoS
type of profile this is C-VLAN. There can only be single
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given profile.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Get

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4095
vlan2



This is the second Vlan for the Map entry. In case of
CtoS type of profile this is S-VLAN.
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special Virtual Vlan
Id used for keeping configuration of the traffic for those
VLANs that are unknown in the system. The valid range
for this field also includes
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range
1-GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID. There can only be single
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given profile.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Valid values: 1 - 4095

Example:
$ create vlan mapprofile param profileid 1 vlan1 1 vlan2 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1
Vlan 2
:2

Vlan 1 : 1

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field

Description

Profile Id

Vlan Map profile identifier.

Vlan 1

This is the first Vlan for the Map entry. In case of CtoS
type of profile this is C-VLAN. There can only be single
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given
profile.

660

IDL series User Guide

Vlan 2

This is the second Vlan for the Map entry. In case of
CtoS type of profile this is S-VLAN.
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special Virtual Vlan
Id used for keeping configuration of the traffic for those
VLANs that are unknown in the system. The valid range
for this field also includes
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range
1-4097. There can only be single entry for this
parameter corresponding to a given profile.

References:
VLAN commands

5.27.7 VLAN Static Commands
5.27.7.1 Get vlan static
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get vlan static [vlanname ] [vlanid ]
5.27.7.2 Create vlan static
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create vlan static vlanname vlanid  [ egressports
 ] [ forbidegressports  ]
[ untaggedports  ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted |
Residential | CrossConnect ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport
enable | disable ] [ resvmacprofileid  ] [ igmpsnoopaction
Drop | TransparentlyForward | Learn ] [ igmpsnoopproxyreporting Enable |
Disable ] [ igmpsnoopingressprio  | none ]
[ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpfailedhandling Drop | TransparentForward
| FloodTrustedPorts ] [ drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable ] [ bngmac
 ] [ drastatus Enable | Disable ] [ piastatus Enable | Disable ]
[ findoneportfailact drop | floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward ]

IP DSLAM

661

5.27.7.3 Modify vlan static
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify vlan static vlanname vlanid  [ egressports
 ] [ forbidegressports  ]
[ untaggedports  ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted
| Residential | CrossConnect ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport
enable | disable ] [ resvmacprofileid  ] [ igmpsnoopaction
Drop | TransparentlyForward | Learn ] [ igmpsnoopproxyreporting Enable |
Disable ] [ igmpsnoopingressprio  | none ]
[ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpfailedhandling Drop | TransparentForward
| FloodTrustedPorts ] [ drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable ] [ bngmac
 ] [ drastatus Enable | Disable ] [ piastatus Enable | Disable ]
[ findoneportfailact drop | floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward ]
5.27.7.4 Delete vlan static
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete vlan static vlanname  | vlanid 
Parameters:
Name
vlanname 

An administratively assigned string, which may be used to identify
the VLAN. This is mandatory in the case of create cmnd. In case of
get/modify/delete - either vlan name or vlan id can be given.
Type:

Create

-- Mandatory

Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -Get
vlanid 

for this VLAN by management
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: 0
forbidegressports

The set of ports which are prohibited by management from being



included in the egress list for this VLAN.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: 0
untaggedports

The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for this



VLAN, as untagged.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: 0
bridgingmode Restricted |

This specifies the state of full bridging for the VLAN. There can be

Unrestricted | Residential |

three values associated with this, based on global

CrossConnect

fullBridgingStatus. These values can be restricted bridging,
unrestricted full bridging and residential bridging. If the user does
not specify the bridging mode at the time of VLAN creation, the
VLAN inherits the globally set bridging mode. The user can modify
bridging mode for a created VLAN. If the dynamic entry for the
VLAN to be created already exists, the user can only specify
globally set bridging mode for this VLAN. The bridging modes are
defined as Restricted Full Bridging, Unrestricted full bridging and
Resedential bridging. The default residential VLAN, like any other
residential VLAN allows only one net side bridge port as its
member. This port shall be added automatically to the default
VLAN if it is the only net side bridge port being added to the VLAN.
Subsequently, the user can add another net side port to the
egressportslist and untaggedportslist only after removing the
previously added net side bridge port. Unrestricted bridging is not
applicable for bridge ports created over the PPPoE interface even
though the VLAN may be unrestricted.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Valid values: usly added net side bridge port. Unrestricted
bridging is not applicable for bridge ports created over the PPPoE
interface even though the VLAN may be unrestricted.

IP DSLAM

663

Default value: Resedential bridging
floodsupport enable | disable

This specifies if the flooding has to be done for unknown unicast
packets for this vlan or not.The default value for this shall be taken
from enable when vlan is created. The unknown unicast packets
shall be flooded on all ports for a vlan if global value (present
inDot1dTpInfo) is enabled or throttle, and the value pervlan is also
enabled else dropped.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: enable
bcastsupport enable | disable

This specifies if the broadcast has to be done for this vlan or not.
The default value for this shall be taken from enable when vlan is
created. The broadcast packets shall be flooded on all ports for a
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan
are both enabled else dropped.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value:enable
resvmacprofileid

The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to determine the



behavior for Reserved Mac destined frames. Reserved Mac
addresses are the multicast addresses defined as reserved in
IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE 802.1ad. The existence of the specified
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry is a must for VLAN static entry
creation to succeed. Further, even if the specified
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry exists, but the corresponding
entry in "ResvdCtlPktProfile Param Table" is missing the packets
will be dropped.

VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of

Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify

--

Optional

Valid values: 1 - 4
Default value: 1
igmpsnoopaction Drop |

This parameter specifies that if an action is "Learn" then

TransparentlyForward | Learn

igmpsnoop will be supported for this Vlan and an entry will be
learnt. Here action will be applied in conjunction with global
igmpsnoopStatus and port level igmpsnoopStatus flags, that is
IGMP functionality will be executed for a frame if IGMP is enabled
globally and on the port it has been received and for the vlan/virtual
vlan on which it has come.If action is "drop" then igmpsnoop
functionality is not supported for this vlan and IGMP frames shall

664

IDL series User Guide

be dropped. If action is "transparently forward", then IGMP frames
received for this Vlan shall be forwarded transparently and learning
will not be done
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify

--

Optional

Default value: Learn
igmpsnoopproxyreporting

This parameter provides a configuration option to choose between

Enable | Disable

transparent snooping or Proxy reporting behavior per Vlan.
Depending on the type of mode, IGMP module will perform either
transparent snooping or proxy reporting for the IGMP messages,
received on a Vlan. Here the Vlan which is being referred is the
one on which learning will happen. It will be multicast vlan, if
"Multicast Vlan option" is enabled.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: Disable
igmpsnoopingressprio

This parameter specifies the ingress priority to be forced on the

igmpsnoopingressprio | none

incoming frame. If the ingress priority field has valid value, then
that value will be used for traffic class determination and packet
priority. If valid egress priority is configured for a port, then egress
priority shall override the ingress priority. In addition, there is
support of invalid value for ingress priority to indicate that the
priority is not to be forced on ingress frame for this port.Here the
Vlan which is being referred is the one on which learning shall
happen. It will be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option" is
enabled.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 -7
Additional Values: 8
Default value: 8
darpstatus Enable | Disable

This specifies whether ARP packets received on this VLAN are to
be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge
port mapping learnt using DRA. This attribute is effective in
conjunction with the attribute 'gsvDot1dPortDirectedARP' of
'Dot1dBasePortExtTable' MO. ARP packets are to be directed as
mentioned above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the
two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded as per the
normal bridging flow.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

IP DSLAM

Optional

665

Default value: enable
darpfailedhandling Drop |

This specifies the action to be taken on an ARP packet received on

TransparentForward |

this VLAN for which it is not possible to determine a single port

FloodTrustedPorts

using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge port mapping learnt using
DRA. If the value is drop, the ARP packet will be dropped.

If the

value is Transparent Forwarding, the ARP packet will be forwarded
as per the normal bridging.

If the value is FloodTrustedPorts, the

ARP packet will be forwarded as per the normal bridging, but only
on ports that are trusted.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: FloodTrustedPorts
drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable

This Parameter is used to configure whether DHCP broadcast
packet received for this vlan will be converted to unicast packet or
not.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: Disable
bngmac 

This is used to configure BNG Mac address of this VLAN. If VLAN
is configured to convert DHCP broadcast packets to Unicast
packets,then this MAC address is used as destination MAC
address.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
drastatus Enable | Disable

This Parameter specifies the status of DRA whether it is enabled
for this Vlan or not. If enabled DRA will Act as per the port
configuration on which DHCP packet is received. If disabled DRA
will not perform any action on the DHCP packets received over this
vlan.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: Enable
piastatus Enable | Disable

This Parameter specifies the status of PIA whether it is enabled for
this Vlan or not. If enabled PIA will Act as per the port configuration
on which PPPoE packet is received. If disabled PIA will not
perform any action on the PPPoE packets received over this vlan.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: Enable

666

IDL series User Guide

findoneportfailact drop |

This field specifies the action to be taken when DRA fails to

floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward

determine the destined port for downstream DHCP packets. If this
field is set to drop then the packets are dropped. If it is specified as
floodtrusted then packets are forwarded to trusted ports only. If it is
set as TransparentlyForward then the packets are forwarded to all
the ports as per normal bridging functionality.
Type:

Create

-- Optional

Modify --

Optional

Default value: TransparentlyForward

Example :
$ create vlan static vlanname gsvlan vlanid 1 egressports 1 2 20 forbidegressports
34 5 untaggedports 2 bridgingmode Residential bcastsupport enable floodsupport
enable resvmacprofileid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VLAN Name
: gsvlan
VLAN Index
:1
Egress ports
: 1 2 20
Forbidden Egress Ports
: 34 5
Untagged Ports
:2
Bridging Mode
: Residential
Flood support Status
: enable
Broadcast support Status
: enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id
: GS_CFG_DEF_RSVD_MAC_PROFILE_ID
Igmp Snoop Action
: Learn
Igmpsnoop ProxyReporting Status : Normal
Igmpsnoop ingress Priority
:4
Directed ARP status
: enable
DARPFailedHandling
DRA Bcast To Ucast
BNG MAC address
DRA Status
PIA Status

: enable
: Enable
: 00:01:03:04:05:11
: Enable
: Enable
Find One Port Fail Act : Drop

Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

IP DSLAM

667

Output field:
Field

Description

VLAN Name

An administratively assigned string, which may be used
to identify the VLAN. This is mandatory in the case of
create cmnd. In case of get/modify/delete - either vlan
name or vlan id can be given.

VLAN Index

The VLAN Identifier. GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is
a special Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those
VLANs that are neither created nor learned in the
system. The valid range for this field also includes
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range
1-4095.

Egress ports

The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the
egress list for this VLAN by management

Forbidden Egress Ports

The set of ports which are prohibited by management
from being included in the egress list for this VLAN.

Untagged Ports

The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets
for this VLAN, as untagged.

Bridging Mode

This specifies the state of full bridging for the VLAN.
There can be three values associated with this, based on
global fullBridgingStatus. These values can be restricted
bridging, unrestricted full bridging and residential
bridging. If the user does not specify the bridging mode
at the time of VLAN creation, the VLAN inherits the
globally set bridging mode. The user can modify bridging
mode for a created VLAN. If the dynamic entry for the
VLAN to be created already exists, the user can only
specify globally set bridging mode for this VLAN. The
bridging modes are defined as Restricted Full Bridging,
Unrestricted full bridging and Resedential bridging. The
default residential VLAN, like any other residential VLAN
allows only one net side bridge port as its member. This
port shall be added automatically to the default VLAN if it
is the only net side bridge port being added to the VLAN.
Subsequently, the user can add another net side port to
the egressportslist and untaggedportslist only after
removing the previously added net side bridge port.
Unrestricted bridging is not applicable for bridge ports
created over the PPPoE interface even though the VLAN
may be unrestricted.

668

IDL series User Guide

Flood support Status

This specifies if the flooding has to be done for
unknown unicast packets for this vlan or not.The default
value for this shall be taken from enable when vlan is
created. The unknown unicast packets shall be flooded
on all ports for a vlan if global value (present
inDot1dTpInfo)is enabled or throttle, and the value
pervlan is also enabled else dropped.

Broadcast support Status

This specifies if the broadcast has to be done for this
vlan or not. The default value for this shall be taken from
enable when vlan is created. The broadcast packets
shall be flooded on all ports for a vlan if global value
(present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan are both
enabled else dropped.

Reserved Mac Profile Id

The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to
determine the behavior for Reserved Mac destined
frames. Reserved Mac addresses are the multicast
addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q and
IEEE 802.1ad. The existence of the specified
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry is a must for VLAN
static entry creation to succeed. Further, even if the
specified "ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry exists, but the
corresponding entry in "ResvdCtlPktProfile Param
Table" is missing the packets will be dropped.

VLAN

here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan
mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Igmp Snoop Action

This parameter specifies that if an action is "Learn" then
igmpsnoop will be supported for this Vlan and an entry
will be learnt. Here action will be applied in conjunction
with global igmpsnoopStatus and port level
igmpsnoopStatus flags, that is IGMP functionality will be
executed for a frame if IGMP is enabled globally and on
the port it has been received and for the vlan/virtual vlan
on which it has come.If action is "drop" then igmpsnoop
functionality is not supported for this vlan and IGMP
frames shall be dropped. If action is "transparently
forward", then IGMP frames received for this Vlan shall
be forwarded transparently and learning will not be done

Igmpsnoop ProxyReporting Status

This parameter provides a configuration option to
choose between transparent snooping or Proxy
reporting behavior per Vlan. Depending on the type of
mode, IGMP module will perform either transparent

IP DSLAM

669

snooping or proxy reporting for the IGMP messages,
received on a Vlan. Here the Vlan which is being
referred is the one on which learning will happen. It will
be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option" is enabled.
Igmpsnoop ingress Priority

This parameter specifies the ingress priority to be forced
on the incoming frame. If the ingress priority field has
valid value, then that value will be used for traffic class
determination and packet priority. If valid egress priority
is configured for a port, then egress priority shall override
the ingress priority. In addition, there is support of invalid
value for ingress priority to indicate that the priority is not
to be forced on ingress frame for this port.Here the Vlan
which is being referred is the one on which learning shall
happen. It will be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option"
is enabled.

Directed ARP status

This specifies whether ARP packets received on this
VLAN are to be directed to a single port using (VLANId,
IP address) to bridge port mapping learnt using DRA.
This attribute is effective in conjunction with the attribute
'gsvDot1dPortDirectedARP' of 'Dot1dBasePortExtTable'
MO. ARP packets are to be directed as mentioned
above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the
two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded as
per the normal bridging flow.

DARPFailedHandling

This specifies the action to be taken on an ARP packet
received on this VLAN for which it is not possible to
determine a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to
bridge port mapping learnt using DRA. If the value is
drop, the ARP packet will be dropped. If the value is
Transparent Forwarding, the ARP packet will be
forwarded as per the normal bridging. If the value is
FloodTrustedPorts, the ARP packet will be forwarded as
per the normal bridging, but only on ports that are
trusted.

DRA Bcast To Ucast

This Parameter is used to configure whether DHCP
broadcast packet received for this vlan will be converted
to unicast packet or not.

BNG MAC address

This is used to configure BNG Mac address of this
VLAN. If VLAN is configured to convert DHCP broadcast
packets to Unicast packets,then this MAC address is
used as destination MAC address.

670

IDL series User Guide

DRA Status

This Parameter specifies the status of DRA whether it is
enabled for this Vlan or not. If enabled DRA will Act as
per the port configuration on which DHCP packet is
received. If disabled DRA will not perform any action on
the DHCP packets received over this vlan.

PIA Status

This Parameter specifies the status of PIA whether it is
enabled for this Vlan or not. If enabled PIA will Act as per
the port configuration on which PPPoE packet is
received. If disabled PIA will not perform any action on
the PPPoE packets received over this vlan.

Find One Port Fail Act

This field specifies the action to be taken when DRA fails
to determine the destined port for downstream DHCP
packets. If this field is set to drop then the packets are
dropped. If it is specified as floodtrusted then packets
are forwarded to trusted ports only. If it is set as
TransparentlyForward then the packets are forwarded to
all the ports as per normal bridging functionality.

References:
VLAN commands

IP DSLAM

671

5.28 Miscelleneous Commands
5.28.1 File Commands
5.28.1.1 Apply
Description:
Use this command to apply a configuration file stored on the system
Command Syntax:
Apply fname  [version ] [besteffort true|false]
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the name of the configuration file (the
extension of the file shall be .cfg) to be applied. The
file shall contain valid CLI commands. The user shall
specify the filename for files present in the system as

fname 

directories. The directories are /nvram/cfg/
factorydef/, /nvram/user/, /sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.
Type: mandatory
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: (‘A’-’Z’,
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘,’_’)
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be
applied.
Type: Optional

version 
Default Value: Incase of multiple version files the
active copy gets applied. Not valid for single version
file.
If the besteffort flag is false, command execution (as
specified in "file-name"file) stops immediately after a
command returns an error. If the besteffort flag is
true, command execution (as specified in
besteffort true|false
"file-name"file) continues even if a command returns
an error.
Type : Optional
Default value : false

Mode:
Super-User

672

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ apply fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg version 2
Output:
The output of the command is dependent on the list of CLI commands in
commands.cfg file.
Example 1:
The file commands.cfg has the following commands:
Verbose on
create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0
Entry Created
If-Name
MaxVccs
MaxVpiBits
OAMSrc
Oper Status

: atm-0
LowIfName
: dsl-0
:2
MaxConfVccs
:4
:3
MaxVciBits
: 10
: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
: Up
Admin Status : Up

Example 2:
The file commands.cfg has the following commands:
create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0
The output would be:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
None
References:
Upgrade command
Remove command
List command
Download command

IP DSLAM

673

5.28.1.2 Download
Description:
Use this command to download a binary, configuration or user specific file from the
remote host.
Command Syntax:
download src  dest  ip  [mode
tftp|ftp] [savemode comapact]
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or user specific file to be
downloaded from a remote host.
The filename contains the complete path on the host. The filename extension

src 

can be .cfg or .bin or any other user specified extension. A cfg file can contain
only valid CLI commands. A .bin file must bea valid image file.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ‘;’, ‘‘, ‘?’)
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or user specific file on the
system. The user shall specify the filename for files present in the system, as
directories.
The directories are /nvram/bin/control/ - This directory contains control plane
zipped image. There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the
image file shall be as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool.
The files are stored in NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/dataplane/ - This directory contains data plane zipped image.
There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the image file shall be
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
NVRAM.

dest 
/nvram/bin/decompressor/ - This directory contains decompressor image.
There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the image file shall be
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/dslphy/ - This directory contains DSL physical layer image. Only
one version of image is possible. The name of the image file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
NVRAM.
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/ - This directory contains factory default configuration
files. There can be multiple versions of files. The name of the file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in

674

IDL series User Guide

NVRAM.
/nvram/user/ - This directory contains user specific files. There can be multiple
versions of files. The files are stored in NVRAM.
/sdram/cfg/ - This directory contains user specific Configuration files with .cfg
extension. The files are stored in SDRAM
/sdram/user/ - This directory contains user specific files. The files are stored in
SDRAM.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all Characters except ‘;’, ‘‘, ‘?’)
This specifies the IP address of the remote host from which the file is to be
downloaded.
ip 
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Any valid IP address.
This specifies the protocol to be used for downloading the file. Currently only
TFTP is supported.
mode tftp | ftp
Type: Optional
Default Value : TFTP
savemode compact

It allows saving of files in the compact mode. This option is applicable for
downloading user files only.
Note: This option is enabled only when
GS_CFG_USER_COMPACT_FILE_SYSTEM is TRUE.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: compact

Example:
$ download src myconfig.cfg dest /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg ip 198.168.1.1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Downloading The Code File. . .
Download Completed
Verbose Mode Off
Downloading The Code File. . .
Download Completed
Output Fields:
None

IP DSLAM

675

Caution:
Ensure that the TFTP server is running on the remote host. After downloading the
image in safe mode, the system should be rebooted and no other nvram
operations should be tried on the system.
References:
upgrade command
remove command
list command
apply command

5.28.1.3 List
Description:
This command is used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit
Command Syntax:
list fname [/nvram | /sdram]
Parameters:
Name

Description

fname [/nvram | /sdram]

This specifies whether the files of NVRAM or SDRAM
are to be listed.
/nvram – This lists all directories and files stored in
NVRAM.
/sdram - This lists all directories and files stored in
SDRAM.
Type: Optional.
Default Value: All the files present in the NVRAM or
SDRAM will be displayed.

Mode:
Super-User.
Example :
$ list fname /nvram

676

IDL series User Guide

Output :
Verbose Mode On
Flash size

: 4194304

Flash Block size

: 131072

Free Blocks in Flash : 3
/nvram/bin/control/
Name
Version

: CP.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 1424656

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 11
/nvram/bin/dataplane/
Name
Version

: DP.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 293092

Time

: Thu Jan 01 00:01:54 1970

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 3
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
Name
Version

: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0000000C.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 91632

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
Name
Version

: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0004200C.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 159408

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 2
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
Name
Version

: FD.cfg
:1

Size(bytes) : 45

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/cfg/manuf/
Name

IP DSLAM

: Manuf.txt

677

Version

:1

Size(bytes) : 5768

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/system/
Name
Version

: CFG1
:1

Time

:

Permission

: SYS

Size(bytes) : 262056
State

: active

Used Blocks : 2
Name
Version

: CFG2
:1

Time

:

Permission

: SYS

Size(bytes) : 262056
State

: active

Used Blocks : 2
Name
Version

: LOGS
:1

Time

:

Permission

: SYS

Size(bytes) : 130988
State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/user
Name
Version

: user.txt
:1

Size(bytes) : 5768

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
Verbose Mode Off
Flash size

: 4194304

Flash Block size

: 131072

Free Blocks in Flash : 4
/nvram/bin/control/
Name
Version

: CP.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 1424656

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 11

678

IDL series User Guide

/nvram/bin/dataplane/
Name
Version

: DP.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 293092

Time

: Thu Jan 01 00:01:54 1970

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 3
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
Name
Version

: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0000000C.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 91632

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
Name
Version

: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0004200C.bin.gz
:1

Size(bytes) : 159408

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 2
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
Name
Version

: FD.cfg
:1

Size(bytes) : 45

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/cfg/manuf/
Name
Version

: Manuf.txt
:1

Size(bytes) : 5768

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/system/
Name
Version

: CFG1
:1

Time

:

Permission

: SYS

Size(bytes) : 262056
State

: active

Used Blocks : 2
Name
Version

IP DSLAM

: CFG2
:1

Size(bytes) : 262056

679

Time

:

Permission

: SYS

State

: active

Used Blocks : 2
Name
Version

: LOGS
:1

Time

:

Permission

: SYS

Size(bytes) : 130988
State

: active

Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/user
Name
Version

: user.txt
:1

Size(bytes) : 5768

Time

: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004

Permission

: RW

State

: active

Used Blocks : 1

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Flash Size

Total flash size in bytes. This field is relevant for NVRAM files

Flash Block Size

Flash Block Size in bytes.This field is relevant for NVRAM files.

Free Blocks in Flash

Number of free blocks in flash. This field is relevant for NVRAM
files.

Name

The name of the file present in the directory. Name starting with ì/î
indicates directory name.

Version

This specifies the version of the file.

Time

Time at which the file got created. This is displayed in Day Mon DD
HH:MM:SS YEAR format.

Size

The size of the file in bytes.

Permissions

Permission of the file. It can be read only, read write or protected.

State

The state of the file. It can be active, inactive, tried, latest.

Used Blocks

Number of blocks used in the flash by the file.

References:
upgrade command
remove command
apply command
download command

680

IDL series User Guide

5.28.1.4 Permission
Description:
Use this command to change the permission of the files stored on flash.
Command Syntax:
permission fname  type ro|rw|pr [version ]
Parameters:
Name

Description

fname fname

Name of the file whose permission is to be changed.
Type: mandatory
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: ('A''Z','a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-','_')

version version

This specifies the version of the file that need to be
applied.
Type: Optional for single version file.
Mandatory for multiple version file.

type ro|rw|pr

This specifies that to what type, ro (read-only), rw
(read-write), or pr (protected), permission of the file is to
be changed.
Type: mandatory
Valid Values : ro | rw | pr

Mode:
Super-User
Example:
$ permission fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg version 1 type ro
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Set Done
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done
Output Fields:
None

IP DSLAM

681

References:
upgrade command
remove command
list command
download command

5.28.1.5 Ping
Description:
Use to send one or more ICMP messages to another host for a reply.
Command Syntax:
ping {ip-address | domain-name} [-t | -n ] [-i ] [-w
] [-s ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.
Type

: Mandatory

ip-address |
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255) or
domain-name
Domain Name - String of Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’-‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’,
’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)
This indicates continuous ping to host, until the user interrupts.
-t
Type: Optional
This specifies the number of pings to send to host.
Type

: Optional

Valid values

: 1-65535

-n 
Default Value: 4
This specifies the time interval between successive ping requests
Type

: Optional

Valid values

: 0-65535

-w 
Default Value : 2
This specifies the time-to-live, to be filled in the ping request
Type

: Optional

Valid values

: 0 – 255

-I 
Default Value : 64
This specifies the size of payload for ping. Type
-s 

Valid values

: Optional

: 4-1500

Default Value : 64

682

IDL series User Guide

Example:
$ ping 192.168.1.13
Output:
$ ping 192.168.1.13
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=0 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=1 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=2 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=3 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
-------------------- Ping Statistics -------------------4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0 percent packet loss
Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

64 bytes of...

This denotes the number of bytes in the ping packet and the source IP Address.

Seq

This denotes the ping attempt counter value.

Ttl

This is the Time to live for the packet.
This denotes the Round trip Time for the packet. A value less than 10ms is shown as

Rtt
0.

5.28.1.6 Remove
Description:
Use this command to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit
Command Syntax:
remove fname  [version ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the file name, which needs to be removed. The user shall
specify the filename for files present in the system, as directories. The
directories are /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/control/,

fname 

/nvram/bin/dataplane/, /nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,
/nvram/user/,/sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters ('A'-'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-', '_')

IP DSLAM

683

This specifies the version of the file that need to be removed.
version 

Type:

Optional for single version file. Mandatory for multiple version

file. Default Value:

Example:
$ remove fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg
Output:
Verbose Mode On
File removed
Verbose Mode Off
File removed
Output Fields:
None
References:
apply command
list command
download command

5.28.1.7 Upgrade
Description:
Use this command to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the system.
Command Syntax:
upgrade fname  version 
Parameters:
Name

Description

fname 

This specifies the file name, which needs to be upgraded.

The specified

file becomes Active and the present active file is made inactive.The user
shall specify the filename for files present in Columbia, as directories. The
directories are /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/dataplane/,
/nvram/bin/decompressor,

/nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,

/nvram/ user/,
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)

684

IDL series User Guide

This specifies the version of the file that needs to be
upgraded
version 
Type : Mandatory
Valid values:

Decimal number

Mode:
Super-User
Example:
$ upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/commands.cfg version 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
File upgraded
Verbose Mode Off
File upgraded
Output Fields:
None
References:
apply command
list command
download command

5.28.1.8 Upload
Description:
Use this command to upload the primary/secondary configuration file saved in
flash on the Columbia system to the remote host.
Command Syntax:
Upload src  dest  ip  [mode tftp | ftp]

IP DSLAM

685

Parameters:
Name

Description

src 

This specifies the name of the configuration file on the system. The files that can be
uploaded are: /nvram/system/primcfg - The primary configuration file created on the
system after commit operation has been performed once.
/nvram/system/seccfg - The secondary configuration file created on the system after
commit operation has been performed twice.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ';', ' ', '?')

dest 

This specifies the name of the configuration file to be uploaded to a remote host. The
filename contains the complete path on the host. The filename extension can be .cfg
or .bin or any other user specified extension. Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ';', ' ', '?')

ip 

This specifies the IP address of the remote host to which the file is to be uploaded.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Any valid IP address

mode tftp | ftp

This specifies the protocol to be used for uploading the file. Currently, only TFTP is
supported.
Type: Optional
Valid values: TFTP

Example:
$ upload src /nvram/system/primcfg dest myconfig.cfg ip 198.168.1.1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Uploading The Code File. . .
Upload Completed
Verbose Mode Off
Uploading The Code File. . .
Upload Completed
Output Fields:
None
Caution:
Ensure that the TFTP server is running on the remote host.
References:
Commit command

686

IDL series User Guide

5.28.2 Other Commands
Description:
Use this command to create an alias for any CLI command. You can later call this
command by using the alias-string along with any additional parameters, which
you need to specify. It will display a list of all the aliases currently defined if no
parameter is given.
Command Syntax:
alias [alias-string = aliased-command]
Parameters:
Name

Description
The string, which you will use to refer to the aliased command,
henceforth. It should not match any CLI keyword.

alias-string
Type: Optional
Valid values: string of up to 14 characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)
This is the total CLI command length (512 characters).
Type: Mandatory
aliased-command
Valid values: Any string (all printable characters except ‘;’) as long as
the total CLI Command length is not exceeded.

Mode:
Super-User, User
Output:
With Parameters
$alias abc = modify nbsize
Set Done
$abc maxatmport 48
Set Done
Without Parameters
$alias
Alias
Command
--------------------------abc
modify nbsize

IP DSLAM

687

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

Alias

This is the new abbreviated command, which you may use
in place of the string specified in Command.
The command string which has been aliased.

Command

References:
Unalias command

5.28.2.1 Unalias
Description:
Use this command to delete an alias. Either a particular alias or all aliases can be
removed using this command.
Command Syntax:
unalias [all | ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
Using this option all the aliases defined in the system will be removed.

all

Type: Optional
Valid values: String ìALL.î
Name of the alias defined for a command.

Name

Type: Optional.
Valid values: Any valid alias defined in the system.

Mode:
Super-User, User
Example :
Unalias abc
Output:
Entry Deleted
Output Fields:
None

688

IDL series User Guide

5.28.2.2 Help
Description:
Use this command for a listing of all the user inputs permissible at the point. In
case Help is asked for, as a parameter of any incomplete command, then it
displays a list of all the pending/Extra parameters input by the user. In all other
cases, the next set of permissible keywords required in order to shortlist a
command, is displayed. The Incomplete Command keyed in by the user is made
available again, after help is dispalyed.
Command Syntax:
help |? or ?
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$help
Command
Description
----------------alias
To Alias a command
commit
Commit the active config to the flash
create
Create a new entry of specified type
delete
Delete the specified entry
.
.
$delete ?
Command
Description
----------------arp
IP Net To Media Table
atm
ATM Commands
bridge
Bridge Commands
dhcp
DHCP Commands
.
.
$delete atm ?
Command
Description
----------------port
ATM port commands
vc intf
ATM VC Interface commands

IP DSLAM

689

Output Fields:
None
Caution:
Currently help is not available between a parameter name and its value.
5.28.2.3 Logout
Description:
Use this command to exit from the CLI shell.
Command Syntax:
logout | quit | exit
5.28.2.4 Prompt
Description:
Use this command to set the new CLI prompt.
Command Syntax:
prompt 
Parameters:
Name

Description
The new prompt string.

prompt 

Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 19 characters ( All characters except ‘;’, ‘ ‘, ‘?’)

Mode :
Super-User, User
Example :
$ prompt $$$
Output:
Set Done
$$$
Output Fields:
None

690

IDL series User Guide

Caution:
None. The modified prompt is not saved across a reboot.
5.28.2.5 Traceroute
Description:
This command is used to trace the route to the specified destination.
Command Syntax:
traceroute {ip  | dname } {ping | udp} [-m
] [-w ] [-p ] [-q ]
Parameters:
Name

Description
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.
Type: Mandatory

ip-address | dname
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255) or

Domain Name (String of Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)
Traceroute probe message type
Ping | udp
Type: Mandatory
Maximum number of hops to search for ip-address Type: Optional
-m 

Valid Values: 0-255
Default Value : 30
This specifies the timeout in seconds
Type: Optional

-w 
Valid values : 0-65535
Default Value : 5
Destination UDP port to be used, only when Probe is Udp
Type: Optional.
-p 
Valid Values: 0-65535
Default Value : 32768
Number of probes to be sent for each TTL value Type: Optional
-q 

Valid Values: 0-255
Default Value : 3

Example:
$ traceroute 192.168.1.13 ping

IP DSLAM

691

Output:
Tracing route to [192.168.1.13]
Over a maximum of 30 hops
1
0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms
Trace complete.

0.000000 ms

192.168.1.13

Output Fields:
FIELD

Description

1

This denotes the hop counter value.
These are the Round trip timings of the 3 probe packets sent. A * denotes that

2-4
this probe was missed.
This is the ip address of the intermediate/destination node.

5

References:
ping command.
5.28.2.6 Verbose
Description:
Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before and after the
execution of a command (create, delete, modify,get). However if this mode is
turned off, then display only shows the final result of execution of command, i.e.
whether it was successful or failure.
Command Syntax:
Verbose [on | off]
Parameters:
Name

Description
Used for switching on the verbose mode.

On

Type: Optional
Valid values: On.
Used for switching off the verbose mode.

Off

Type: Optional.
Valid values: Off

Mode:
Super-User

692

IDL series User Guide

Appendix A --- FD.cfg in detail
verbose off

create user name admin passwd admin root

create dsl system

create ethernet intf ifname eth-1 ip 192.168.100.111 mask 255.255.255.0
create bridge port intf portid 385 ifname eth-1 status enable

create ethernet intf ifname eth-3 ip 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0

modify bridge mode enable

create atm port ifname atm-1 lowif dsl-1
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-1 lowif aal5-1
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-1 portid 1 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-2 lowif dsl-2
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-2 lowif atm-2 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-2 lowif aal5-2
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-2 portid 2 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-3 lowif dsl-3
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-3 lowif atm-3 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-3 lowif aal5-3
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-3 portid 3 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-4 lowif dsl-4
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-4 lowif atm-4 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-4 lowif aal5-4
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-4 portid 4 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-5 lowif dsl-5
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-5 lowif atm-5 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-5 lowif aal5-5
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-5 portid 5 learning enable status enable

IP DSLAM

693

create atm port ifname atm-6 lowif dsl-6
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-6 lowif atm-6 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-6 lowif aal5-6
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-6 portid 6 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-7 lowif dsl-7
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-7 lowif atm-7 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-7 lowif aal5-7
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-7 portid 7 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-8 lowif dsl-8
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-8 lowif atm-8 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-8 lowif aal5-8
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-8 portid 8 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-9 lowif dsl-9
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-9 lowif atm-9 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-9 lowif aal5-9
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-9 portid 9 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-10 lowif dsl-10
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-10 lowif atm-10 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-10 lowif aal5-10
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-10 portid 10 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-11 lowif dsl-11
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-11 lowif atm-11 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-11 lowif aal5-11
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-11 portid 11 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-12 lowif dsl-12
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-12 lowif atm-12 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-12 lowif aal5-12
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-12 portid 12 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-13 lowif dsl-13
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-13 lowif atm-13 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-13 lowif aal5-13
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-13 portid 13 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-14 lowif dsl-14

694

IDL series User Guide

create atm vc intf ifname aal5-14 lowif atm-14 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-14 lowif aal5-14
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-14 portid 14 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-15 lowif dsl-15
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-15 lowif atm-15 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-15 lowif aal5-15
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-15 portid 15 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-16 lowif dsl-16
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-16 lowif atm-16 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-16 lowif aal5-16
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-16 portid 16 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-17 lowif dsl-17
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-17 lowif atm-17 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-17 lowif aal5-17
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-17 portid 17 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-18 lowif dsl-18
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-18 lowif atm-18 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-18 lowif aal5-18
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-18 portid 18 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-19 lowif dsl-19
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-19 lowif atm-19 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-19 lowif aal5-19
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-19 portid 19 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-20 lowif dsl-20
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-20 lowif atm-20 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-20 lowif aal5-20
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-20 portid 20 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-21 lowif dsl-21
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-21 lowif atm-21 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-21 lowif aal5-21
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-21 portid 21 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-22 lowif dsl-22
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-22 lowif atm-22 vpi 8 vci 81

IP DSLAM

695

create eoa intf ifname eoa-22 lowif aal5-22
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-22 portid 22 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-23 lowif dsl-23
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-23 lowif atm-23 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-23 lowif aal5-23
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-23 portid 23 learning enable status enable

create atm port ifname atm-24 lowif dsl-24
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-24 lowif atm-24 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-24 lowif aal5-24
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-24 portid 24 learning enable status enable

create filter rule entry ruleid 1 action sendtocontrol description IGMP
create filter subrule ip ruleid 1 subruleid 1 prototypefrom 2 prototypecmp eq
modify filter rule entry ruleid 1 status enable

create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eth-1 stageid 1

create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-1 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-2 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-3 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-4 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-5 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-6 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-7 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-8 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-9 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-10 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-11 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-12 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-13 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-14 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-15 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-16 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-17 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-18 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-19 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-20 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-21 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-22 stageid 1

696

IDL series User Guide

create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-23 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-24 stageid 1

modify igmpsnoop port info portid 385 status enable

modify igmpsnoop port info portid 1 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 2 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 3 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 4 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 5 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 6 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 7 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 8 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 9 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 10 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 11 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 12 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 13 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 14 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 15 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 16 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 17 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 18 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 19 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 20 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 21 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 22 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 23 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 24 status enable

verbose on

end

IP DSLAM

697

Appendix B --- Supported mibs
PropMib (Conexant)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z

698

GSV-ABOND-MIB.mib
GSV-ACL-MIB.mib
GSV-ACT-STDBY-MIB.mib
GSV-ADMIN-MIB.mib
GSV-AGGR-MIB.mib
GSV-ATM-MIB.mib
GSV-BRIDGE-MIB.mib
GSV-CLFR-MIB.mib
GSV-CTLPKT-MIB.mib
GSV-EHDLC-MIB.mib
GSV-ENTERPRISE-INFO-MIB.mib
GSV-ETHER-MIB.mib
GSV-GENFLTR-MIB.mib
GSV-IA-MIB.mib
GSV-IGMP-MIB.mib
GSV-IPOA-IPOE-MIB.mib
GSV-IRL-MIB.mib
GSV-LACP-MIB.mib
GSV-PPPoE-MIB.mib
GSV-PPPR-MIB.mib
GSV-RDNCY-AGG-MIB.mib
GSV-RL-MIB.mib
GSV-SCHD-PRFL-MIB.mib
GSV-SNTP-MIB.mib
GSV-SYS-MIB.mib
GSV-TC-MIB.mib
GSV-TRAP-MIB.mib
GSV-TRFCLASS-MIB.mib
GSV-TRFCLASS-STATS-MIB.mib
GSV-VC-AGGR-MIB.mib
GSV-VMAC-MIB.mib

IDL series User Guide

StdMib (Standard)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z

IP DSLAM

ADSL-DMT-LINE-MIB.mib
ADSL-TC-MIB
ATM-TC-MIB
draft-ietf-atommib-atm2-17
draft-ietf-bridge-bridgemib-smiv2-02
draft-ietf-bridge-ext-v2-00
draft-ietf-bridge-ext-v2-01
EtherLike-MIB
HCNUM-TC
HC-PerfHist-TC-MIB
IANAifType-MIB.mib
IEEE8023-LAG-MIB
IF-MIB
IP-MIB
PerfHist-TC-MIB
Q-BRIDGE-MIB
RFC1213-MIB
rfc2515
rfc2662
rfc2665
rfc3440
RMON2-MIB.mib
RMON-MIB
SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
SNMPv2-MIB
SNMPv2-SMI
SNMPv2-TC
TOKEN-RING-RMON-MIB.mib
VDSL-LINE-EXT-MCM-MIB
VDSL-LINE-MIB.txt

699

Appendix C --- IEEE 802.1x protocol over IP DSLAM
Understanding How 802.1X Authentication Works
IEEE 802.1X is a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that
restricts unauthorized devices from connecting to a local area network (LAN) through
publicly accessible ports. 802.1X authenticates each user device that is connected to a
switch port before making available any services that are offered by the switch or the LAN.
Until the device is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible
Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the device is
connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.

802.1X controls network access by creating two distinct virtual access points at each port
(See Above Figure). One access point is an uncontrolled port; the other is a controlled port.
All traffic through the single port is available to both access points. Only EAPOL traffic is
allowed to pass through the uncontrolled port, which is always open. The controlled port is
open only when the device that is connected to the port has been authorized by 802.1X.
After this authorization takes place, the controlled port opens, allowing normal traffic to
pass.

700

IDL series User Guide

Device Roles
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles. (See
below figure).

z

Supplicant—Requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the
switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant software.

z

Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the host. The authentication server
validates the identity of the host and notifies the DSLAM whether or not the host is authorized to
access the LAN and DSLAM services. Because the DSLAM acts as the proxy, the authentication
service is transparent to the host. In this release, the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only
supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.
RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged
between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.

z

DSLAM (Authenticator)—Controls the physical access to the network that is based on the
authentication status of the host. The DSLAM acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the host and
the authentication server, requesting identity information from the host, verifying information with the
authentication server, and relaying a response to the host. The DSLAM interacts with the RADIUS
client. The RADIUS client encapsulates and decapsulates the EAP frames and interacts with the
authentication server.

z

When the DSLAM receives Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frames and
relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP
frame is reencapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined
during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame
format. When the DSLAM receives the frames from the authentication server, the server's frame
header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the
host.

IP DSLAM

701

Authenticcation Initiation and Message Exchange
The host initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the
DSLAM to request the host's identity.
When the host supplies its identity, the DSLAM acts as the intermediary, pass EAP frames
between the host and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the
authentication succeeds, the DSLAM port becomes authorized.
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method that is being
used. The below fiugre shows a message exchange that is initiated by the host using the
One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.

702

IDL series User Guide

802.1X CLI commands
Specifying RADIUS Servers
To specify one or more RADIUS servers, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task
Step 1

Command

Specify the IP address of up to three RADIUS

create radius server

servers. Specify the primary server using the

ip_addr [acct-port

primary keyword. Optionally, specify the destination port_number] [primary]
UDP port to use on the server.
Step 2

Verify the RADIUS server configuration.

get radius

Specifying the RADIUS Key
Use the RADIUS key to encrypt and authenticate all communication between the
RADIUS client and server. You must configure the same key on the client and the
RADIUS server.
The length of the key is limited to 65 characters. It can include any printable ASCII
characters except tabs.
To specify the RADIUS key, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task
Step 1

Specify the RADIUS key that is used to encrypt

Command
create radius key key

packets that are sent to the RADIUS server.
Step 2

Verify the RADIUS configuration.

get radius

Configuring 802.1X Authentication
The following sections describe how to configure 802.1X authentication on the switch.

IP DSLAM

703

Enabling 802.1X globally
You must enable 802.1X authentication for the entire system.
To globally enable 802.1X authentication, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task

Command

Globally enable 802.1X.

create dot1x system-auth-control enable

Disabling 802.1X globally
When you enable 802.1X authentication for the entire system, you can disable it
globally.
To globally disable 802.1X authentication, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task

Command

Globally disable 802.1X.

Create dot1x system-auth-control disable

Enabling and Initializing 802.1X Authentication Individual Ports
After you enable 802.1X authentication globally, you can enable and initialize
802.1X authentication from the console only for individual ports.
To enable and initialize 802.1X authentication for access to the switch, perform this
task in privileged mode:
Task
Step 1

Enable 802.1X control on a specific port.

Command
create port dot1x mod/port
port-control auto

704

Step 2

Initialize 802.1X on the same port.

Create port dot1x mod/port initialize

Step 3

Verify the 802.1X configuration.

get port dot1x mod/port

IDL series User Guide

Enabling Multiple Hosts
You can enable a specific port to allow multiple users. When a port is enabled for
multiple users, and a host that is connected to that port is authorized successfully,
any host (with any MAC address) is allowed to send and receive traffic on that port.
If you connect multiple hosts to that port through a hub, you can reduce the
security level on that port.
To enable access for multiple users on a specific port, perform this task in
privileged mode:
Task
Enable multiple hosts on a specific port.

Command
create port dot1x mod/port multiple-host enable

Disabling Multiple Hosts
You must disable access for multiple users on any port where it is enabled.
To disable access for multiple users on a specific port, perform this task in
privileged mode:
Task
Disable multiple hosts on a specific port.

Command
create port dot1x mod/port multiple-host disable

802.1X Protocol over IP DSLAM
In 802.1x application, the IP DSLAM acts as the pure Ethernet packets transport
system. The 802.1x packets pass through the IP DSLAM without further operation
(see below figure)

IP DSLAM

705

Appendix D --- What’s IP DSLAM
DSLAM and IP DSLAM in PPPoE application sample.

As above Figure displays, in traditional ATM-based ADSL network, the user application
information is encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in pre-defined VC (Virtual
Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link. (In this example,
the user information (PPPoE encapsulated) is encapsulated by ATU-R using RFC-1483
Bridge-mode encapsulation format.).
All the ATM cells belong to the specified VC is concentrated by the DSLAM, and switched in
the ATM network clouds, to the defined destination (ISPs or Offices), at there the ATM cells
and PPPoE frames is resolved by the Broadband Access Server, and the user application
information is serviced.

706

IDL series User Guide

In addition to traditional ATM-based ADSL network. As above Figure displays, the user
application information is still encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in pre-defined VC
(Virtual Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link.
In the IP DSLAM, all the ATM cells belong to the specified VC are decapsulated back to the
original PPPoE encapsulated Ethernet packet (if VLAN-mode of the specified ADSL port is
disabled), or mapped to the pre-defined Ethernet-VLAN packets (if VLAN-mode of the
specified ADSL port is enabled). IP DSLAM concentrates all Ethernet-with/without
VLAN-tag packets from 24/48 ports’ ADSL and uplinks to ISP’s Ethernet-All-The-Way
network. The PPPoE frames will be resolved at Broadband Access Server (BAS), and the
user application information was serviced.
The IP DSLAM supports ADSL CPE Bridge-mode. For future FW upgrade, the IP DSLAM
can act as BRAS to process user application information directly.
IP DSLAM provides Ethernet-with/without VLAN tag to ATM-PVC mapping feature for the
ISP to isolate user’s data with security and to provide lots of service enhancement
capabilities. IP DSLAM supports 8 ATM PVC links for each CPE.

IP DSLAM

707
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Keywords                        : EM
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0.7 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2007:07:26 10:54:11+08:00
Create Date                     : 2007:05:17 21:23:29+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:07:26 10:54:11+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : EM-IDLv1
Creator                         : JaMEs YanG
Document ID                     : uuid:172bd8e0-6187-4429-83bc-545886d64a5b
Instance ID                     : uuid:24ea4be6-2e18-4c74-80f4-ef7913157dfa
Company                         : PLANET
Page Count                      : 707
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Author                          : JaMEs YanG
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu